Category Archives: Interior

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Windows 10 comes with a special feature called Battery Saver. It is intended to save your PC’s battery by limiting background app activity and putting your device hardware in power saving mode. It is possible to enable Battery Saver automatically when on battery or turn it on manually. Here is how.

To enable Battery Saver in Windows 10, do the following.

  1. When your device is running on battery, you should see the Battery icon in the notification area of the taskbar. Click it to see the following flyout:How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  2. Click on the Battery saver button to toggle enable this feature.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Alternatively, you can press Win + A to open the Action Center and use the appropriate Quick Action button as shown below.

Finally, you can configure Battery Saver using Settings. There, you can enable the feature manually and set options to enable it automatically when required.

Enable Battery Saver in Windows 10 using Settings

  1. Open the Settings app. How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  2. Go to System -> Battery.
  3. On the right, you will see a number of options related to Battery Saver. To enable the Battery Saver right now, turn on the switch Battery saver status until next charge. This will enable the battery saver feature immediately.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  4. To enable the automatic Battery Saver feature, tick the check box Turn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below: and use the slider to set the desired battery percentage. Once the battery level falls below the specified percentage, the Battery Saver feature will be enabled automatically.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Tip: To manage the Battery Saver options quickly, you can create a special shortcut to open the Battery page in Settings directly. Here is how it can be done.

Create Battery Saver Shortcut in Windows 10

Right click the empty space on your Desktop. Select New – Shortcut in the context menu (see the screenshot).

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

In the shortcut target box, type or copy-paste the following:

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

The command above is a special ms-settings command, which can be used to open the desired Settings page directly. Refer to the following articles for details:

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Use “Battery Saver” as your shortcut’s name. Actually, you can use any name you like.

Right-click the shortcut you created and change its icon. An appropriate icon is present in the file %SystemRoot%\System32\taskbarcpl.dll.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Now, you can move this shortcut to any convenient location, pin it to taskbar or to Start, add to All apps or add to Quick Launch (see how to enable Quick Launch). You can also assign a global hotkey to your shortcut.

Winaero greatly relies on your support. You can help the site keep bringing you interesting and useful content and software by using these options:

If you like this article, please share it using the buttons below. It won’t take a lot from you, but it will help us grow. Thanks for your support!

Author: Sergey Tkachenko

Sergey Tkachenko is a software developer from Russia who started Winaero back in 2011. On this blog, Sergey is writing about everything connected to Microsoft, Windows and popular software. Follow him on Telegram, Twitter, and YouTube. View all posts by Sergey Tkachenko

To improve battery backup time and preserve battery life, you can turn on the battery saver mode in Windows 10. Here’s how to do it.

For Windows 10 laptop users, there is a simple and accessible setting called Battery Saver that limits the overall battery usage to improve its backup time. Some call the Battery Saver as Power Saver mode. So, don’t get confused if someone uses both these words interchangeably.

When the power saver mode is turned on, Windows reduces the screen brightness, limits background activity, and disables all notifications.

By default, Windows 10 automatically enables the battery saver mode when your battery is at or below 20% percent. That way, you will get a bit more time before the laptop shuts down completely due to low battery. If you want to, you can manually enable it whenever you want to extend the battery life. For example, if your laptop has 8 hours of battery backup, the battery saver mode can extend it to around 10 hours provided that you are not doing any heavy work on the laptop.

In today’s article, let me show you the steps to turn on battery saver in a Windows 10 laptop.

Table of contents:

How to turn on battery saver mode

Time needed: 1 minute.

You can turn on the battery saver mode from the Windows 10 Settings app. The option is located in the Battery tab on the System page. Here’s how you can find and turn it on.

  1. Open the Windows 10 Settings app

That is all. With that, you’ve successfully enabled the battery saver mode in Windows 10.

Turn on battery saver automatically

You can turn on the battery saver automatically when the battery reaches a certain percentage.

  • Never: Battery saver never turns on automatically.
  • 10%: Turns on automatically when the battery is at or below 10%.
  • 20%: Turns on automatically when the battery is at or below 20%.
  • 30%: Turns on automatically when the battery is at or below 30%.
  • 40%: Turns on automatically when the battery is at or below 40%.
  • 50%: Turns on automatically when the battery is at or below 50%.
  • Always: Battery saver is always turned on regardless of how much charge is left in the battery.

The default setting is 20%. When the laptop battery reaches 20% or less, the battery saver turns on automatically. How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” modeautomatic battery saver

Disable battery saver mode

  1. Open Windows 10 settings.
  2. Go to the “System → Battery” page.
  3. Turn off the “Battery saver” option on the right page.
  4. Close the Settings app.

With the above steps, you’ve successfully disabled the Windows 10 battery saver mode.

Battery Saver option is grayed out

On some occasions, the battery saver option can appear grayed out. A grayed out battery option means the laptop is running on AC power. i.e, the laptop is connected to a wall plug. When connected to the wall plug with active power, the battery saver option is disabled as the laptop is no longer running on the battery. How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” modebattery saver option grayed out

To fix grayed out battery saver option, unplug the laptop from wall power. As soon as you do that, the battery saver option will appear normally. How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” modeunplug laptop from AC power

What is battery saver mode

The battery saver mode in Windows 10 is designed to improve the battery backup time and extend the time you can use your laptop. For example, when traveling or on long journeys, you might not have quick access to charge the laptop. In those cases, you can turn on the battery saver to extend the battery life.

Some laptop manufacturers offer their own software like Lenovo battery saver mode but they work pretty similarly to the built-in tool. So don’t worry about using a third-party program to extend battery backup time.

When the battery saver is turned on, Windows 10 will limit the background processes, disable all notifications, and lowers the screen brightness (optional). In addition to that, Windows 10 also limits the overall power usage by your laptop CPU and GPU. As such, depending on your CPU and GPU, the laptop can be a bit slower than when connected to AC power.

Wrapping up: Turn on battery saver mode

As you can see, Windows 10 makes it quite easy to turn off and turn on the battery saver mode. Though there is a performance penalty to turning on the battery saver mode, it is worth it if you want to extend the battery backup time as long as possible.

As of now, there is no way for you to fine-tune the battery saver settings. For example, you cannot control how much CPU and GPU power to limit. Hopefully, Microsoft will add those options in the future Windows 10 versions.

That is all. I hope that helps. If you are stuck or need some help, comment below and I will try to help as much as possible.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Windows 10 inclut un mode «Battery Saver» conçu pour prolonger la durée de vie de la batterie de votre ordinateur portable ou tablette. Windows activera automatiquement Battery Saver lorsque la batterie de votre PC est faible, mais vous pouvez contrôler cela et choisir exactement ce que fait Battery Saver

Qu’est-ce que le mode Battery Saver fait?

CONNEXION: Comment gérer Windows Nouvel “Power Throttling” des 10 pour économiser la vie de la batterie

L’économiseur de batterie est similaire au mode Low Power sur un iPhone, ou Battery Saver sur Android. Lorsqu’il est activé (ou lorsque vous l’activez), il apporte quelques modifications aux paramètres de Windows afin d’allonger la durée de vie de la batterie de votre ordinateur portable.

D’abord, il réduit automatiquement la luminosité de votre écran. Il s’agit d’un gros réglage qui peut économiser la batterie sur chaque périphérique, car le rétroéclairage consomme beaucoup d’énergie.

L’économiseur de batterie limite de manière agressive les applications d’arrière-plan que vous n’utilisez pas activement, même s’il s’agit d’applications de bureau. Cette fonctionnalité a été ajoutée avec la mise à jour des créateurs d’automne. Les applications universelles du Windows Store ne peuvent pas non plus fonctionner en arrière-plan et recevoir des notifications push lorsque ce mode est activé.

Par défaut, le mode Economiseur de batterie s’active automatiquement lorsque votre ordinateur portable ou tablette atteint 20%. Branchez votre PC pour recharger et Windows désactivera le mode Économie de batterie

Comment l’activer

Vous pouvez activer le mode Économie de batterie lorsque vous le souhaitez. Par exemple, vous voudrez peut-être l’allumer manuellement au début d’une longue journée si vous savez que vous serez loin d’une prise pendant un certain temps.

Pour ce faire, cliquez ou appuyez sur l’icône de la batterie dans la notification zone sur votre barre des tâches. Faites glisser le curseur vers la position la plus à gauche pour activer le mode “Battery Saver”.

Cette option est à un clic de l’icône de la batterie, tout comme le plan d’alimentation “Power Saver” sur Windows 7 et Windows 8. Microsoft Vous utilisez plutôt ceci au lieu de jouer avec ces plans d’alimentation anciens et déroutants.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Vous trouverez également une vignette de configuration rapide “Economiseur de batterie” dans le Centre d’Action de Windows 10. Faites glisser votre doigt depuis la droite ou cliquez sur l’icône Centre des tâches dans la barre d’état système pour y accéder

Cliquez sur le lien “Développer” situé au-dessus des vignettes en bas du panneau Action Center si vous ne voyez pas la vignette Économiseur de batterie. Vous pouvez réorganiser ces cases pour rendre l’option plus facilement accessible, si vous le souhaitez.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Comment configurer Battery Saver

Vous pouvez configurer ce que fait l’économiseur de batterie et quand il est activé. Pour ce faire, allez dans Paramètres> Système> Batterie. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur l’icône de la batterie dans la zone de notification et cliquer sur le lien “Paramètres de la batterie” dans le menu contextuel.

Sous “Economiseur de batterie”, vous pouvez choisir si Windows active automatiquement le mode Economiseur de batterie. Cela fait. Par défaut, Windows active automatiquement le mode d’économie de batterie avec 20% de batterie restante. Vous pouvez changer cela-par exemple, vous pouvez avoir Windows automatiquement activer l’économiseur de batterie à 90% de la batterie si vous avez de la batterie sur votre ordinateur portable.

Vous pouvez également désactiver l’option “Plus faible luminosité de l’écran en batterie” C’est très utile sur tous les appareils, donc vous devriez probablement laisser celui activé.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Vous pouvez cliquer sur le lien “Utilisation de la batterie par application” en haut de l’écran Batterie pour voir quelles applications utilisent le plus de batterie et contrôler avec quelle agressivité Les fenêtres les étrangle en mode Economiseur de batterie.

Quelle est l’utilité du mode Economiseur de batterie,

CONNEXION: Comment augmenter la durée de vie de la batterie de votre ordinateur portable Windows

la vie. Bien sûr, si vous avez l’habitude de baisser manuellement la luminosité de votre écran – quelque chose d’autre que vous pouvez faire avec un clic rapide ou appuyez sur l’icône de la batterie – vous ne trouverez peut-être pas cette fonctionnalité si nécessaire. Cela dépendra de la luminosité de votre écran et de l’intensité du rétro-éclairage.

Cette fonctionnalité réduit désormais la puissance utilisée par les applications de bureau en arrière-plan ainsi que par les applications universelles, ce qui la rend plus utile sur tous les ordinateurs. Même si vous n’utilisez que des applications de bureau traditionnelles, il vaut la peine de l’activer lorsque vous voulez réduire la durée de vie de la batterie de votre ordinateur.

Si vous avez des problèmes de batterie, suivez notre guide. que le mode Économie de batterie le fera. Pourtant, c’est une bonne inclusion, et beaucoup plus facile à utiliser que les anciens “plans d’alimentation” de Windows 7 et 8.

Comme beaucoup de parties de Windows 10, le mode Battery Saver ressemble un peu à un work-in-progress. Il pourrait être plus agressif en diminuant la vitesse de votre processeur et en effectuant d’autres réglages pour prolonger la durée de vie de votre batterie, et Microsoft pourrait ajouter cette fonctionnalité dans le futur.

Malgré tout, le mode Battery Saver est toujours utile. Windows peut activer automatiquement le mode Économie de batterie et le désactiver si nécessaire, ce qui vous évite de devoir effectuer une microgestion fastidieuse, ce qui vous permet de continuer à travailler.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Récupérer le contenu de votre ordinateur après une panne matérielle peut être un cauchemar, surtout si vous n’avez pas de bon système de sauvegarde, mais vous Cela peut rendre le travail beaucoup plus facile en sauvegardant correctement votre profil Firefox. Pour effectuer cette tâche, nous utiliserons FEBE, un add-on Firefox pour sauvegarder vos configurations Firefox.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Avez-vous un iPhone dont vous avez besoin pour réinitialiser ou restaurer? Avez-vous besoin d'effectuer une réinitialisation d'usine et tout effacer ou avez-vous juste besoin de réinitialiser certains paramètres parce que le téléphone est en train d'agir?Ou peut-être avez-vous besoin de restaurer votre iPhone à partir d'une sauvegarde iTunes ou d'iCloud? En out

When Microsoft created Windows 10 it borrowed a few features from the world of smartphones. One of the more obvious ones is Battery Saver. Just as your phone has a low-battery mode, the battery life on Windows 10 laptops and tablets can be extended by turning off things like automatic email and calendar sync, live tile updates, and background processes for some apps. Battery Saver also lowers your display’s screen brightness, though you can undo that setting.

With Battery Saver enabled, you can keep checking Facebook, writing email, or finishing your dissertation for a few more minutes before your PC has to shut down.

Here’s how the feature works in the Windows 10 Anniversary Update.

Where to find it

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Battery Saver in the quick-actions area of the Action Center.

Battery Saver lives in two different spots on your PC. The first is in the quick-actions area at the bottom of the Action Center. Here you can quickly turn Battery Saver on and off at will.

You can also get to the Battery Saver quick-actions tile by clicking on the battery icon on the far right of the taskbar.

Note that you cannot turn on Battery Saver if you’re using your PC’s power cord. That seems obvious, but nonetheless bears mentioning.

The other location for Battery Saver is in the Settings app.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

The battery section of the Settings app.

To take a look go to Start > Settings > System > Battery. When you’re running on battery power you’ll see your battery’s remaining percentage at the top under the heading Overview, as well as the estimated time remaining before your PC has to shut down. This section also has a link labeled Battery usage by app that takes you to another screen that shows a breakdown of that information.

Below that, the Battery Saver subheading houses the actual settings you can tweak for the feature. First, you will see a checkbox—that should be enabled by default—to turn on Battery Saver automatically when your battery falls below 20 percent. If you’d rather turn on Battery Saver manually every time, just uncheck this box.

Next, you’ll see a slider labeled Battery saver status until next charge. This is just another way to turn on Battery Saver. When this slider is activated you’ll enter Battery Saver mode until you plug in your device.

Finally, one last checkbox at the bottom of the Battery Saver area allows you to go into Battery Saver mode without the lower screen brightness.

Battery Saver is a good feature to know about for those times you want to extend your Windows 10 device’s cord-free power for as long as possible.

We all want to use our mobile devices without worrying about the battery life. But, because this is impossible, we need to use the power conservation technologies provided by our operating systems. If you are using a laptop or tablet with Windows 10, and you don’t want to run out of battery unexpectedly, you should read this article and see how to work with the battery saver:

NOTE: The options that are shown in this guide apply to Windows 10 May 2019 Update or newer. If you do not know what Windows 10 version you have, read: How to check the Windows 10 version, OS build, edition, or type.

How to turn off the battery saver in Windows 10

When the battery saver is enabled in Windows 10, the screen’s brightness is set to a low level, and the background activity, and push notifications are disabled to save energy. The battery saver is enabled automatically by Windows 10 when the battery level below 20% or a custom level set by the user.

The best way to turn off the battery saver is to plug your Windows 10 laptop or tablet into a power outlet. As soon as Windows 10 detects that your device is charging, it should stop using the battery saver.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Another way to turn off the battery saver is to click or tap the battery icon in the bottom-right corner of your desktop. The power slider should be found on the left margin. Move the slider to the right, to any other position, and the battery saver is disabled.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

NOTE: To learn more about the power slider, its levels and settings, read: Use the Windows 10 power slider to save battery or increase performance.

A third way to disable the battery saver in Windows 10 is to open Settings. Then, go to System and click or tap Battery in the column on the left. On the right, in the Battery saver section, look for the switch that says: “Battery saver status until next charge.” Set it to Off.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

If you did this, and the battery saver is still turned on, then your battery may be at a critical level, under 20%, and you should charge your Windows 10 laptop, or tablet. However, you can still disable the battery saver, by unchecking the option that says: “Turn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below.”

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

How to turn on the battery saver in Windows 10

When you want to enable the battery saver on your Windows 10 laptop or tablet, click or tap the battery icon in the bottom-right corner of the desktop. Then, move the power slider to the left margin. To learn more about the power slider, its levels and settings, read: Use the Windows 10 power slider to save battery or increase performance.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

When the battery saver mode is turned on, you see that the Power mode is named Battery saver.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Another visual confirmation is that you see a small green leaf over the battery icon from your taskbar, like in the screenshot below.

A second way to enable the battery saver in Windows 10 is to open Settings. Then, go to System and click or tap Battery in the column on the left. On the right, in the Battery saver section, look for “Battery saver status until next charge,” and set the switch to On.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

The battery saver is now enabled in Windows 10, doing its best to lower the energy consumption and increase battery life.

How to configure the battery saver mode in Windows 10

If you want to personalize how the battery saver works, open Settings and go to System.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

In the column on the left, choose Battery, and then look for Battery settings on the right. Besides the switch that turns the battery saver mode On and Off, you have other settings too. For instance, you can choose when the battery saver is turned on automatically. By default, it is set to activate when your battery is at 20% of its charging capacity, but you can change it to whatever level you want, by moving the slider. If you do not want the battery saver to turn on automatically when the battery reaches a particular point, uncheck the box next to “Turn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below,” and it is never going to turn itself on automatically. Secondly, the battery saver also includes an option for dimming the screen brightness so that less energy is being consumed. If you check the “Lower screen brightness while in battery saver” setting, when the battery saver turns on, your display is dimmed automatically.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Now, the battery saver from Windows 10 should be configured according to your needs.

Why did you turn off or turn on the battery saver in Windows 10?

You now know how to use and configure the battery saver, so use it with confidence. Keep in mind that this tool only increases the time until your device runs out of power and, in the end, it is going to shut down, with an empty battery. Before closing this guide, tell us why you decided to turn off or turn on the battery saver. Comment below and let’s discuss.

You can use the Battery Saver to save power on your laptop. This discussion is brought to you by the word parsimonious. It’s a polite word for stingy, which is an excellent adjective to describe how the Windows 10 Battery Saver feature works.

The Battery Saver kicks in automatically when your laptop’s power percentage drops below a certain threshold — typically, 20 percent. You can, however, bolster the battery’s life by activating the Battery Saver at any time. Follow these steps:

Display the Action Center.

Swipe the screen from the right edge or, for non-touchscreen laptops, click the Notifications notification icon, as shown in the margin.

Click or tap the Battery Saver button.

If the button is disabled, the laptop is AC-powered, which means nothing needs saving.

When Battery Saver mode is active, the screen instantly dims. Laptop activity is curtailed, including Internet access. The idea is to power the laptop by using just a trickle of power. So don’t be surprised if some of your favorite laptop features or programs don’t work while Battery Saver is active.

To control the Battery Saver settings, follow these steps:

Open the Settings app.

Press the Win+I keyboard shortcut.

Click the System button.

On the left side of the window, choose Battery Saver.

You can use the toggle on the right side of the screen to activate the Battery Saver, but instead:

Click the Battery Saver Settings link.

Ensure that a check mark is set by the item Turn Battery Saver On Automatically If My Battery Falls Below.

Set the battery percentage.

The value of 20 percent is fine.

Set other options on the screen.

For example, keep the Push Notifications item off if you don’t need the laptop to check the Internet frequently for new email or other updates.

The Add an App item lets you select a program or an app that can ignore the restrictions applied by Battery Saver mode. For example, if you’re desperate to check the weather despite Wi-Fi network restrictions, you can add the Weather app to the list.

About This Article

This article is from the book:

About the book author:

Dan Gookin has been an author, editor, ghostwriter, and a public official. He’s written more than a dozen Dummies books on technology, with a special focus on PCs, the Android operating system, and Microsoft products. And in 1991, he was the author of the very first Dummies book, DOS For Dummies, which started the whole enterprise.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

With Windows 10 there have been many new features available, and today we will talk about one such feature called battery saver. The main role of battery saver is that it extends the battery life on Windows 10 PC and it does so by limiting the background activity and adjusting screen brightness settings. Many third-party applications are claiming to be the best battery saver software, but you don’t need to go for them as Windows 10 inbuilt battery saver is the best.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Even though it limits background apps to run in the background, you could still allow individual apps to run in battery saver mode. By default, the battery saver is enabled and is automatically turned on when the battery level falls below 20%. When battery saver is active, you would see a small green icon on the taskbar’s battery icon. Anyway without wasting any time let’s see How to Enable or Disable Battery Saver In Windows 10 with the help of the below-listed tutorial.

How to Enable or Disable Battery Saver In Windows 10

Make sure to create a restore point just in case something goes wrong.

Method 1: Enable or Disable Battery Saver in Windows 10 using Battery Icon

The simplest way to manually enable or disable battery saver in Windows 10 is using a battery icon on the taskbar. Just click on the battery icon and then click on “Battery saver” button to enable it and if you need to disable battery saver, click on it.

You could also enable or disable battery saver in action center. Press Windows Key + A to open Action Center then click on “Expand” above the settings shortcut icons then click on Battery saver to enable or disable it according to your preferences.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Method 2: Enable or Disable Battery Saver In Windows 10 Settings

1. Press Windows Key + I to open Settings then click on System.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

2. Now from the left-hand menu, click on Battery.

3. Next, under Battery saver make sure to enable or disable the toggle for “Battery saver status until next charge” to enable or disable the battery saver.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Note The Battery saver status until next charge setting will be greyed out if the PC is currently plugged into AC.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

4. If you need battery saver to enable below a certain battery percentage automatically then under Battery saver checkmark “Turn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below:“.

5. Now set the battery percentage using the slider, by default, it is set to 20%. Which means if the battery level falls below 20% battery saver will be automatically enabled.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

6. If you don’t need to automatically enable battery saver to uncheckTurn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below:“.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

7. Reboot your PC to save changes.

Note: Battery saver also includes an option to dim the screen brightness to save more battery, under Battery settings just checkmarkLower screen brightness while in battery saver“.

This How to Enable or Disable Battery Saver in Windows 10, but if this didn’t work for you then move to the next method.

Method 3: Enable or Disable Battery Saver In Power Options

1. Press Windows Key + R then type powercfg.cpl and hit Enter.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

2. Now click on “Change plan settings” next to your currently active power plan.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Note: Make sure you don’t select “High Performance” as it only works when connected to AC power supply.

3. Next, click on “Change advanced power settings” to open Power Options.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

4. Expand Energy saver settings, and then expand Charge level.

5. Change the value of “On battery” to 0 to disable Battery Saver.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

6. If you need to enable it to set its value to 20 (percentage).

7. Reboot your PC to save changes.

Recommended:

That’s it, you successfully learned How to Enable or Disable Battery Saver In Windows 10 but if you still have any queries regarding this tutorial then feel free to ask them in the comment’s section.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Aditya Farrad

Aditya is a self-motivated information technology professional and has been a technology writer for the last 7 years. He covers Internet services, mobile, Windows, software, and How-to guides.

One of the possible reasons why there isn’t a notification when your laptop reaches the critical power percentage is that the settings on the battery is currently disabled, but has been enabled on other power options on your system.

For us to check, kindly follow the steps below:

  1. Press the Windows logo + X button on your keyboard.
  2. Select Control Panel.
  3. Click on Power options.
  4. Choose Power Saver, then click Change Plan settings.
  5. Go to Change advanced power settings.
  6. Under Battery, check if the Low battery notification is currently disabled.
  7. Change the current option to Yes.
  8. Click on Apply, then OK.

Let us know if you have any further questions.

Report abuse

4 people found this reply helpful

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn't help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

Report abuse

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn't help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

There are several reasons which can cause this error in your computer. One of these is a corrupted or missing system file. You may run the System File Checker to identify and troubleshoot this error.

You can also follow the steps through Fix Windows Update errors by using the DISM or System Update Readiness tool to check for any update errors.

Note: Please perform the Clean boot on your PC.

Clean Boot temporarily disables all third party applications as well as all Microsoft non-essential services so only basic drivers will run. This will help us find any third-party software which can be the cause of this issue.

Here are the steps:

From Start , search for msconfig

Select System Configuration from the search results.

On the Services tab of the System Configuration dialog box, tap or click to select the Hide all Microsoft services check box, and then tap or click Disable all .

On the Startup tab of the System Configuration dialog box, tap or click Open Task Manager .

On the Startup tab in Task Manager, for each startup item, select the item and then click Disable .

Close Task Manager.

On the Startup tab of the System Configuration dialog box, tap or click OK , and then restart the computer.

Windows 11 is getting into more PCs and Laptops. Whether you purchased a new Windows 11 laptop or tablet, or just updated your laptop to Windows 11, battery life must be something you always will want to be vigilant about. When you are operating your PC laptop in battery, there are methods to save battery life. The Battery Saver in Windows 11 helps you save a few more hours in battery on your laptop.

Let’s see how to configure and use the Windows 11 Battery Saver option.

Change Power Modes in Windows 11

Like Windows 10 laptops, the Windows 11 also comes with a handful of battery modes for better performance and better battery life. If you have been using Windows 10 on your laptop, you must have noticed the power modes that come up when you click the battery icon on the taskbar. First off, you will not see those power modes in Windows 11. Where do you get these?

Windows 11 still has the battery performance modes but buried in the Settings. Unlike in Windows 10, you cannot simply click on the Battery icon and choose a mode. To change Windows 11 power mode, follow the steps.

Right-click on the battery icon on the Windows 11 taskbar and go to “Power and sleep settings.

  • Best Performance
  • Balanced
  • Best Power Efficiency

Depends on your usage, choose a suitable power mode for you. If your laptop is not plugged into power and you are using it only to browse the internet or read ebooks, then choose Best power efficiency. This will save battery life on your Windows 11 laptop or tablet.

Turn On Battery Saver in Windows 11

Instead of putting the battery saver mode in the Battery tray icon, Microsoft took out all such quick options and clubbed them into the new action center in Windows 11. If you have just started using Windows 11 on your PC, you must have noticed that clicking on WiFi, Sound, and Battery icons from the taskbar icon opens the same menu. That’s where we are going to find the new Battery saver options in Windows 11.

To put your laptop or Windows 11 device in Battery saver mode, click on the WiFi/sound/battery icons on the taskbar to open the Action Center. You can instead press Windows Key + A to open the action center or quick settings menu.

From there, click on the “Battery Saver” option to enable it. The button will turn the theme color when enabled and the battery icon will turn into a “battery with leaf” icon. Click on the Battery Saver icon again to disable low power mode in Windows 11.

If the Battery saver option is greyed out and you cannot click on it, it means that your laptop or tablet is plugged into the charger. You need to unplug the charger to enable low power mode in Windows 11. On the other hand, you will not see such an option at all if you are using a PC and not a laptop or tablet.

Automatically Enable Battery Saver in Windows 11

Like in previous Windows versions, you can enable the battery saver mode automatically at a certain battery level. Say you want your laptop to go into low power mode once the battery dips below 30%. Let’s see how you can do it.

To do this, right-click on the battery icon located on the taskbar at the bottom right corner of your laptop.

Click on Power and sleep settings option.

From the settings window, click and expand the “Battery saver” menu. Just below that, you will an option named “Turn battery saver on automatically at.” Click the dropdown menu with a number against it and choose the battery limit in which you want to enable battery saver mode automatically on Windows 11.

In case you want to keep the laptop in battery saver mode always, choose the option “Always” from the menu. Once you choose the battery limit, you are all set.

Apart from settings the battery limit to automatically turn on battery saver mode, you can also choose whether you want to dim the screen during the power-saving mode. Disabling it will just keep the same brightness when the laptop goes power saver mode. It is better to enable the option since you will know when the battery is low and it will save some marginal power from the battery as well.

Apart from setting that battery into battery saver mode, there are plenty of other ways you can save battery life on your Windows 11 PC. However, the power-saving mode on the PC is the basic thing you can do to make your laptop run a few more hours without tweaking anything.

Disclosure: Mashtips is supported by its audience. As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

Quando o seu dispositivo Windows 11 está ficando sem bateria – ou você deseja aproveitar ao máximo cada minuto de energia – você pode ativar o modo de suspensão. É assim que se faz.

O que é o modo de economia de bateria?

A Economia de bateria é um modo especial de economia de energia do Windows que prolonga a vida útil da bateria diminuindo o brilho da tela, reduzindo as atividades em segundo plano e limitando algumas notificações. É muito semelhante ao modo “Low Power Mode” no iPhone e ao modo “Battery Saver” no Android. O Windows 10 também inclui um modo de economia de energia.

Por padrão, o modo de economia de energia é ativado automaticamente quando a bateria atinge 20% ou menos. No entanto, isso pode ser configurado nas configurações em Sistema> Desempenho e bateria. Ele será desligado automaticamente assim que você conectar seu dispositivo para recarregá-lo. Além disso, você sempre pode usar o modo de economia de bateria manualmente se quiser prolongar a vida útil da bateria.

Como usar e configurar o modo “economia de bateria” do Windows 10

Ative o modo de economia de energia usando as configurações rápidas

A maneira mais rápida de ativar o modo de economia de energia é através do menu “Configurações rápidas”. Para abri-lo, clique no botão oculto Configurações rápidas na bandeja do sistema – é onde você vê os ícones do Wi-Fi, alto-falante e medidores de bateria. Ou você pode pressionar Windows + a no teclado.

Quando as configurações rápidas forem abertas, clique em Economia de bateria.

(Se você não vir Economia de bateria em Configurações rápidas, clique no ícone de lápis na parte inferior do menu, selecione Adicionar e selecione Economia de bateria na lista exibida.)

Após clicar, o Battery Saver será ativado imediatamente. Quando estiver pronto para desativá-lo, abra as Configurações Rápidas novamente e clique no botão “Battery Saver” até que ele não esteja mais destacado.

É assim que funciona o novo menu “Configurações rápidas” no Windows 11

Ative o modo de economia de energia no aplicativo Configurações

Você também pode habilitar (e configurar) o modo de suspensão no aplicativo Configurações do Windows 11. Para fazer isso, primeiro abra as configurações do Windows pressionando Windows + i no teclado. Ou você pode procurar por “Configurações” no menu iniciar e clicar no ícone quando ele aparecer nos resultados.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Quando as configurações forem abertas, clique em “Sistema” na barra lateral e selecione “Energia e bateria”.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Em Configurações de energia e bateria, role para baixo até a seção Bateria. Clique no botão “Ativar agora” ao lado da opção “Economia de bateria”.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

O modo de economia de energia é ativado imediatamente. Para desativá-lo novamente, clique no botão “Desligar agora” ao lado do rótulo “Economia de bateria”.

Enquanto estiver nesta tela, você também pode selecionar a porcentagem na qual o modo de economia de energia será ativado no menu suspenso “Ativar economia de energia automaticamente em”. Este menu também contém uma opção “Sempre” para manter permanentemente o modo de economia de energia e uma opção “Nunca” para desativá-lo completamente.

Você também pode alternar se o modo de economia de bateria escurece a tela com a chave “Diminuir o brilho da tela ao usar a economia de bateria”. Em geral, reduzir o brilho da tela tem um grande impacto na extensão da vida útil da bateria do seu PC. Muita sorte!

6 maneiras de melhorar a vida útil da bateria em laptops com Windows

You may not see all the Windows settings and tools in one place, but there is a trick to see them. The God Mode in Windows 10 lets you see all the settings in one place and access them quickly. But what exactly is the Windows 10 God Mode and how do you enable it?

In this guide, we will show you how to enable and use the God Mode in Windows 10 PC.

What Is God Mode in Windows 10?

Windows 7 users will remember this old trick called God Mode. The God Mode is simply a trick that allows you to easily access over 208 Windows administrative and management tools and settings within one folder. It still works in 2021, and we’re going to show you how to enable Windows 10 God Mode.

Windows 10 makes it a lot easier to find various Settings that are usually hidden behind multiple layers. This wasn’t always the case with previous versions of Windows. If you remember having to use the Control Panel, you can understand. Settings and features were often unnecessarily nested in so many categories and clicking through them all could quickly become tedious.

With everything available right inside one folder on your desktop, finding things is a lot easier. You do not have to guess what category something might be in. With Windows 10 God Mode enabled, you might find settings you didn’t even know existed. You can also use the God Mode in Windows 11 as well. Read further to know how to enable Windows 10 and Windows 11 God Mode.

Enable Windows 10 God Mode

While it is popularly called God Mode, you can name this folder anything you want. With that said, let’s see how you can enable Windows 10 God Mode folder.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

  1. Right-click on an empty space on your Windows 10 desktop.
  2. From the context menu, select New >Folder.
  3. Give the folder this name: GodMode.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

You should now see a GodMode desktop entry, which has the Control Panel icon instead of a folder. This is the Windows 10 God Mode folder. To name it something less promising or eye-catching, simply replace GodMode with whatever name you want. For instance, we named it MashTips. For that we used Mashtips. as the folder name

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Keep in mind, that there must be some text before the code in brackets otherwise you may get an error while naming the folder. It’s also possible that you don’t see any name under the icon at all. The name still exists, and you can see it in the window when you open the folder.

Should You Enable God Mode on Windows 10?

You can enable it but does that mean you should enable God Mode on Windows 10? Unless you share your PC with some very irresponsible people or children who might start clicking things in the God Mode folder without knowing what they’re doing, enabling God Mode is probably not a good idea. But other than that there really is no drawback to the Windows 10 God Mode trick.

When you decide you don’t need it anymore, you can always delete the folder, just like any regular folder on Windows. The trick is especially useful for IT professionals or those who often find themselves fixing computers. However, it’s not a good idea to enable Windows 10 God Mode for someone who is not so well-experienced with computers.

Disclosure: Mashtips is supported by its audience. As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Have you ever experience that your laptop suddenly shut down while you were working? If battery life of your laptop is not much and you want to extend it then Windows has something for you. There is a “Battery Saver” mode in Windows 10 that extends your laptop battery life when it’s too low and you can’t charge it due to whatever reason. Battery Saver mode is definitely helpful when you are working on a laptop but its battery is near to end.

Also Read : UC Broswer Mini

This mode gives you some extra time in which you can save your work and find your laptop’s charger to charge it. We are going to discuss in details that how does this mode operate and how does it save your laptop’s battery. After that, you’ll know the way to enable and set up this mode according to your needs. So if you’re interested in this then you should look further in the article.

How Does Battery Saver Mode Work?

As the name suggests, this mode tries to save the battery of your laptop or tablet by reducing your PC’s performance wherever it is possible. Whenever you turn on this mode, it tinkers with some of your computer’s settings which results in power saving. It extends your laptop’s battery power by reducing your screen brightness. It is one of the effective ways to increase battery power as your laptop screen uses most of the battery.

You should also know that this mode prevents battery power by shutting down all the apps that aren’t in use but still running in the background. There are many slightest changes in the laptop after enabling this mode. However, it automatically turns on when your laptop’s battery is near or less than 20%. It happens by default but you can change it according to you.

How To Turn On “Battery Saver” Mode And Configure It?

It’s very easy to enable this feature and you can do this whenever you wish to. Here are the steps to do it.

  • Drag your mouse to the taskbar.
  • To the extreme right in the taskbar, click on the battery icon.
  • There will be a slider. Drag the slider at extreme left so that your laptop will reduce your unnecessary battery power consumption.
  • Now, Battery Saver mode is on and you can work for some extra time.

If you wish to configure some settings related to Battery Saver mode then you can follow the steps shown below.

  • Go to System Settings and then to Battery.
  • If you don’t want to enable this mode manually then you can opt for option that turns this mode on whenever your laptop is at critical battery stage.
  • You also have a choice whether you want to reduce screen brightness or not. It’s up to you but we suggest you keep it enabled as screen backlight uses much battery power.

So that’s it. Now, you can enable and configure the Battery Saver mode as per our liking.

Conclusion

Battery Saver mode is very useful while you’re in an area where electricity breakouts are normal. You can enable this feature from the start to save battery power and then you can work for some extra time. So it’s a good thing that you know how to enable and set up the Battery Saver mode. Read our blog for more articles like this.

To conserve and extend battery run time, you can turn on the Battery Saver mode in Windows 10 laptop. Here is how to do it in simple steps.

One of the best things about Laptops is that you don’t need active AC power to use them. As long as you have a well-charged battery, you can use the laptop for a few hours without worries. Of course, depending on the laptop, its battery capacity, and what you are doing, the battery backup time will be completely different. For example, if you are trying to render a video or play games, the battery backup time will be a lot less when compared to doing simple things like web browsing, media consumption, etc.

Generally, Windows 10 is pretty good at managing the battery to extend its backup time and overall health. For a vast majority of users, this good enough. However, there might be situations where you need to extend the battery backup time. In those cases, you can turn on the battery saver mode in Windows 10. Once enabled, it will automatically control Windows 10 to increase the overall battery backup time.

This straightforward Windows 10 guide lets me show you how to enable battery saver mode and disable it when not needed.

Turn on battery saver mode in Windows 10

  1. Open the Settings app.
  2. Select “System.”
  3. Click on “Battery” on the sidebar.
  4. Turn on the “Battery Saver” option.

First, press the “Windows key + I” shortcut to open the Windows 10 Settings app. You can also search for it in the Start menu. After opening the Settings app, go to the “System -> Battery” page. This is where you will find the essential options to manage and monitor the laptop battery.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Here, turn on the “Battery Saver” option. Next, close the Settings app.

From now on, the battery saved mode is turned on on your laptop.

Important note: Windows 10 automatically enables the battery saver mode when the battery is 20% or lower.

Disable battery saver mode in Windows 10

  1. Open the Settings app.
  2. Select “System.”
  3. Click on “Battery” on the sidebar.
  4. Turn off the “Battery Saver” option.

Cannot turn on battery saver mode

The Battery Saver mode is greyed out if the laptop is plugged in. To turn on or turn off battery saver mode, unplug the laptop from the wall outlet.

What does battery saver mode do?

  • Background sync for many Windows apps is stopped.
  • Unnecessary background apps are automatically stopped. If needed, you can add specific apps to the exclusion list.
  • Windows 10 push notifications are disabled.
  • Non-critical Windows updates are temporarily paused.
  • Laptop display brightness is reduced to 30%.
  • The majority of Windows 10 background telemetry is blocked.
  • Some scheduled tasks might not run.
  • Windows 10 disables some eye candy effects like transparency and blur.
  • OneDrive sync is disabled.

That is all. It is that simple to turn on or turn off battery saver mode in Windows 10.

I hope that helps. If you are stuck or need some help, comment below, and I will try to help as much as possible.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Generally, people can use a laptop for a few hours constantly on a single charge. A laptop with better battery life could last longer. However, it’s true that your laptop battery life will be degraded over time. What you can do to prolong the laptop battery life manually? MiniTool gives you some advice.

Even if you’re running the best battery life laptops, you’ll be struggling to keep Windows 10 running for more than half a day. This will become more obvious as time goes by. However, the good news is that Microsoft offers you several ways to extend laptop battery life running Windows: enabling relative features, modifying settings, etc. In the following part, I’ll take Windows 10 as an example to show you how to save battery on Windows 10 (how to extend battery life on laptop running Windows 10).

How to Increase Battery Life on Laptop Windows 10 Using the Built-in Tools

Microsoft adds some features to Windows for better battery maintenance. In this part, I’ll show you how to maximize laptop battery life on Windows 10.

Configure Power and Sleep

The Power & sleep option was built in Windows 10 for battery optimization. You can access it by following steps.

  1. Press Windows + I to open Windows Settings.
  2. Click on the System option, which is in charge of display, sound, notifications, power, etc.
  3. Select Power & sleep from the left sidebar.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Here, you can configure the Screen and Sleep settings.

  • The Screen is running on battery power: specify the time that you want your system to wait before it turns off the screen when you’re not using the Windows 10 laptop.
  • The Screen is running when plugged in: specify the time that you want your system to wait before it turns off the screen when you’re not using the laptop.
  • The Sleep mode is activated on battery power: specify the time that you want your PC to go to sleep when you’re not using the Windows 10 computer.
  • The Sleep mode is activated when plugged in: specify the time that you want your PC to go to sleep when you’re not using Windows 10.

The smaller the number is, the more the battery will be saved. However, it would be inconvenient if the number is too small. You need to find a good balance between power usage and convenience. That’s all about improving battery life via Power & sleep.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

It’s annoying to find your computer keeps waking up from sleep when you want it stay asleep for certain reasons.

Use Battery Saver

How to increase battery life of laptop using battery saver:

  1. Open Settings.
  2. Choose System.
  3. Select Battery in the left pane.
  4. Look for the Battery saver section in the right pane.
  5. Toggle the switch of Battery saver status until next charge to On.
  6. If you the battery saver to turn on automatically whenever the battery falls below a certain level, you should check Turn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below and then set a battery level by dragging the slider.
  7. Also, you can check the Lower screen brightness while in battery saver option to save more battery.

By default, the battery saver will be enabled automatically in Windows 10 when the battery level falls below 20%.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Turn to powercfg Command

How to improve laptop battery life using the Command Prompt tool: press Windows + S -> type cmd -> right click on Command Prompt -> select Run as administrator -> type the following commands and press Enter.

  • powercfg /a: find out what are the available sleep status and what are the unavailable status.
  • powercfg /energy: trace the system usage for 60 seconds and show the power efficiency.
  • powercfg /batteryreport: show the results of the up-to-date analysis of your battery.
  • powercfg -devicequery wake_armed: keep track of your unwanted processes and disable them.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

16 Other Tips on How to Increase Laptop Battery Life Windows 10

Here are some practical tips to save battery power in Windows 10:

  • Change display settings: reduce the brightness, use a dark theme/background, set a shorter active display duration, etc.
  • Change power settings: set a shorter PC sleep duration, disable Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection when in sleep mode, select a lower power mode, choose what the power buttons do, put a lid, etc.
  • Change sync settings: specify the emails/calendars/contacts you want to sync, sync items less often, etc. .
  • Mute the volume or turn it down.
  • Turn off the keyboard backlights.
  • Close unnecessary applications and processes.
  • Control startup apps and services.
  • Turn on the airplane mode when it’s possible.
  • Browse with Microsoft Edge, instead of Chrome or other browsers. regularly.
  • Remove all unnecessary peripherals.
  • Keep the PC plugged in until it’s fully charged.
  • Disable some of the CPU processors.
  • Disable special effects like UI animations and shadows.
  • Run the Troubleshooter to let Windows fix battery problems for you.

That’s all I want to say about how to keep Windows 10 laptop battery healthy.

  • Facebook
  • Twitter
  • Linkedin
  • Reddit

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

Position: Columnist

Sarah has been working as an editor at MiniTool since she graduated from university. Sarah aims at helping users with their computer problems such as disk errors and data loss. She feels a sense of accomplishment to see that users get their issues fixed relying on her articles. Besides, she likes to make friends and listen to music after work.

How to access and adjust Windows 10’s battery-saving mode.

Sarah Jacobsson Purewal

Sarah is a freelance writer and CNET How To blogger. Her main focus is Windows, but she also covers everything from mobile tech to video games to DIY hardware projects. She likes to press buttons and see what happens, so don’t let her near any control panels.

Sarah Jacobsson Purewal/CNET

Windows 10 has a couple of different tools for helping you eke the most life out of your laptop’s ailing battery . There’s the traditional power options menu that lets you pick and choose how long your computer should stay awake when you’re not using it, and there’s also a new battery saver feature that switches off things like push notifications — because Windows 10 is basically a mobile operating system, and it has push notifications.

Here’s what you need to know to tweak your battery settings in Windows 10:

Power & sleep

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Sarah Jacobsson Purewal/CNET

The Power & sleep menu (Settings > System > Power & sleep) is nothing new. Here, you can choose how long your computer is idle before it automatically shuts off the screen or goes into Sleep mode, based on whether your computer is plugged in or running on the battery.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Sarah Jacobsson Purewal/CNET

You can also find the Additional power settings, which opens up the Power Options menu in the Control Panel. Here, you can edit your power plans, choose what happens when you close the lid of your laptop, and choose whether to require a password when your computer wakes from sleep mode.

Battery saver

In addition to the Power & sleep settings, Windows 10 has a new feature called Battery saver. Battery saver is a battery-saving power mode specifically optimized for Windows 10, which means it does things like limit background app activity and push notifications — similar to the battery-saving modes you find on smartphones and tablets.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Sarah Jacobsson Purewal/CNET

Battery saver automatically turns on when your computer falls below 20 percent battery life, but you can also turn it on manually by going to Settings > System > Battery saver and switching the toggle from Off to On.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Sarah Jacobsson Purewal/CNET

Battery saver mode is tweakable. In the Battery saver menu, click Battery saver settings to enter the settings menu. Here, you can adjust the point at which Battery saver mode automatically turns on (between 5 and 100 percent battery life), choose whether to allow push notifications or lower screen brightness in Battery saver mode, and add app exceptions to Battery saver mode. Apps that you choose to exclude from Battery saver mode will be able to run in the background and send push notifications at all times.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Sarah Jacobsson Purewal/CNET

In the main Battery saver menu, you can also see how much of your battery different apps are using (including background usage) by clicking Battery use. This will help you determine whether Battery saver mode will really help you out — according to my Battery use screen, in the past week, background app activities have only accounted for less than 1 percent of my battery use. Because I don’t use a lot of apps that work in the background, I probably won’t see a dramatic jump in battery life with the Battery saver mode.

Hello there. I have problem enabling Battery saver when I am running my laptop on battery. When I press it it is just nothing happening. Anyway when I navigate to Start -> settings -> system -> battery and click the toggle it turns on. What I have tried so far:

  • 3 reinstalls of latest Windows 10 2004 version.
  • Reinstalling, updating and so on of the Microsoft ACPI-Compliant Control Method Battery
  • Removing the laptop battery and then reassemble it

I literally have no Idea what else to do as this stopped working suddenly and it is not related to any new software or any kind of installation on the system.

Is there anybody else who is experiencing the same issue and can you please advice me what to do?

p.s. I have tried to put Turn battery saver automatically at – > always option but it is also not working that way. Anyway – when I set it to a certain percentage it is working.

  • Subscribe
  • Subscribe to RSS feed

Report abuse

Replies (7) 

My name is Rhaine, I’m Independent Community Volunteer. I’m so glad assisting you today.
I am also Windows user. Let us work together to sort this out.

Try to restore to default using the command prompt

1. Windows Key + R
2. Type CMD and run as admistrator
3. Copy and paste the command below.

You can refer to this link below as reference to reset the power plans

Disclaimer: This is a non-Microsoft website. The page appears to be providing accurate, safe information. Watch out for ads on the site that may advertise products frequently classified as a PUP (Potentially Unwanted Products). Thoroughly research any product advertised on the site before you decide to download and install it.

We show you how to turn Battery saver on or off in Windows 10 so you can increase battery life on your laptop.

Though the amount of juice you can get out of a laptop’s battery has improved over the years, it’s still far from perfect. As a result, Windows 10 has techniques to squeeze out every last drop when you’re in a bind. Today we’re going to walk you through Battery saver, including how to turn off Battery saver when you don´t need it to change power saver mode.

What is Battery saver mode?

Before we get into it, let’s talk a little bit about what Battery saver is and the effect it will have on your system. This way, you can make an informed decision about whether you want to leave in on.

The first thing you should know about Windows 10 Battery saver is that it will automatically kick in when your laptop’s battery falls below 20%. Microsoft assumes that if you aren’t charging at this point, you have a good reason for it, and therefore need some help to keep your laptop alive.

However, putting your computer in this mode has some downsides. Namely, it will disable some features.

What does Battery saver do?

Battery saver for Windows 10 takes the following actions:

  • Disables syncing for the Microsoft Store, Mail, People, and Calendar apps
  • Blocks background apps
  • Blocks Non-critical Windows update downloads
  • Reduces your display brightness by 30%
  • Blocks the majority of Microsoft’s telemetry
  • Stops most Windows Task Scheduler tasks from running

Now let’s talk about what Battery saver isn’t. Battery saver is not the same as the power save mode. The power-saving plan in Windows 10 is separate and does things like adjust your sleep time, turn off your hard disk, and change your system performance.

Now that you’re aware of the consequences, let’s dive into how to turn it on or off:

How to Turn On or Turn Off Battery Saver via the Windows 10 Action Center

The simplest way to turn Windows 10 Battery saver on or off is through the Action Center. Unless you have disabled the Action Center, this should be your main method of interacting with the mode.

    Open the Action Center and click “Battery saver”

If you haven’t realised, you can access the Action Center by pressing the message icon in the bottom right corner of your taskbar. If the Windows battery saver icon is lit up, it indicates that battery saver is on.

Simply click the icon to turn it on or off whenever you like.

How to Manually Turn Off or Turn On Battery Saver Mode in Settings

If you don’t like to use the Action Center, you can access Battery saver through the Windows 10 Settings menu. This will give you the additional ability to control whether your brightness dims independently.

    Open Settings

Press Start and then click the settings cog in the Start Menu, above the power button.

In the Settings sidebar, click “Battery”, then look for the “Battery saver” heading in the main pane. Switch the toggle underneath “To get more from your battery when it’s running low, limit notifications and background activity”. Naturally, putting it to off will turn off the power saving mode, while “On” will turn on battery saver mode.

Optionally, you can keep Battery saver on but untick the “Lower screen brightness while in battery saver” option. This will ensure you can still see your laptop on low battery even if it’s a sunny day.

How to Turn Automatic Battery Saver On or Off in Settings

We’ve shown you how to turn Battery saver on or off manually, but that won’t stop it from kicking in automatically when your battery reaches 20%. For that, we need to dive into the Settings app once more, where you can change the percentage or disable it entirel

    Open Settings

Press Start, then click the settings cog above your power button. Alternatively, press “Windows + I”.

Click “Battery” in the Settings sidebar, then looking for the text that says “Turn battery saver on automatically at”. Click the drop-down and choose a value from the list.

Optionally, choose whether Windows 10 dims your brightness by ticking or unticking the “Lower screen brightness while in battery saver” setting.

That’s all for this Battery saver in Windows 10 guide. However, if you’re still experiencing problems with your battery life, it may be worth checking your battery health. You can also squeeze out some extra juice by telling Windows to turn off your hard disk when idle.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Battery Saver issues can sometimes arise on a Windows 10 laptop. This mode is fundamental, especially when running out of battery and your laptop tries to increase the time you can use your laptop without causing any excessive drain on the battery. If you are experiencing an issue where this mode isn’t working any need to worry. I will show you step-by-step how to fix battery saver mode not working on Windows 10 laptops.

Fix Battey Saver Mode Issues In Windows 10 Laptop

Usually, when such an issue exists, users cannot enable the mode from the Action Center. If you are wondering what this is, let me explain. At the bottom of your desktop screen is a taskbar and at the extreme right corner is the action center or the notifications icon.

alt=”Task Bar” width=”740″ height=”33″ />
If you click on the icon at the notification icon, it will expand, and you will find the battery saver option.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

If you cannot turn on the battery saver mode from here, there are three ways that this issue can be resolved, and I will go through each method in detail.

Fix Battery Saver Mode In Settings

Step-1: Go to the Start Menu and click on the Settings cog. (Shortcut Keys: Win + I)

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-2: Once the settings open up, click on System.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-3: When the system settings open up, you will see that at the left side of your screen are various options. Click on Battery.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-4: When the battery settings open up, an on/off toggle switch underneath the battery saver settings. Click on it to switch it On.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

If this solution doesn’t work, read on forward to follow the next method.

Power Troubleshooter

Step-1: Go to Start Menu and click on the Settings cog. (Shortcut Keys: Win + I)
Step-2: When the settings open up, Click on Update & Security.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-3: On the left side of the screen, you will see various options. Click on Troubleshoot.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-4: Select Additional troubleshooters.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-5: Scroll down a little and under Find and fix other problems, click on Power.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-6: Once you click on the option, it expands. Click on Run the troubleshooter.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Let the troubleshoot complete.

Hopefully, this will fix battery saver mode for your Windows 10 computers.

Restore Default Settings

Restoring settings is always the last resort to fixing any issue. Follow these steps if the above methods did not work for you.

Step-1: You have to access the power options in the control panel to restore settings. Go to the Start Menu and type Control panel in the search bar. Click Open.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-2: Now, Click on System and Security.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step3: Select Power Options.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-4: Click on Change plan settings next to the power plan that is currently active on your computer. [The plan active on my computer is Dell, so I clicked on the Change plan settings next to this option]

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-5: Click on Restore default settings for this plan.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step-6: Once this is done, you will get a prompt asking for confirmation. Click Yes. Then click on Save Changes.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Now once the plan has been restored to its default settings, Restart your computer and see if the issue has been fixed.
After all these methods, the issue with battery saver mode in Windows 10 will hopefully be resolved.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Windows 10 bevat een "Battery Saver" -modus die is ontworpen om de levensduur van uw laptop of tablet te verlengen. Windows schakelt Battery Saver automatisch in als de batterij van uw pc bijna leeg is, maar u kunt dit regelen en kiezen wat Battery Saver precies doet.

Wat doet de Battery Saver Mode precies?

Battery Saver is vergelijkbaar met Low Power Mode op een iPhone of Battery Saver op Android. Wanneer het wordt geactiveerd (of wanneer u het activeert), brengt het een paar wijzigingen aan in de Windows-instellingen om de levensduur van uw laptop verder te vergroten.

Ten eerste verlaagt het automatisch de helderheid van uw display. Dit is een grote aanpassing die de levensduur van de batterij op elk apparaat kan verminderen, omdat de achtergrondverlichting behoorlijk wat stroom verbruikt.

Battery Saver versnelt agressief achtergrond-apps die u niet actief gebruikt, zelfs als dit desktop-apps zijn. Deze functie is toegevoegd met de Fall Creators Update. 'Universele apps' uit de Windows Store kunnen ook niet op de achtergrond worden uitgevoerd en pushmeldingen ontvangen als deze modus is ingeschakeld.

Standaard wordt de batterijbesparingsmodus automatisch geactiveerd wanneer uw laptop of tablet een batterijduur van 20% bereikt. Sluit uw pc aan om op te laden en Windows zal de batterijbesparingsmodus deactiveren.

Hoe het aan te zetten

U kunt de batterijbesparingsmodus inschakelen wanneer u maar wilt. U kunt het bijvoorbeeld handmatig aan het begin van een lange dag inschakelen als u weet dat u een tijdje niet in de buurt van een stopcontact bent.

Om dit te doen, klikt of tikt u gewoon op het batterijpictogram in het systeemvak op uw taakbalk. Sleep de schuifregelaar naar de meest linkse positie om de modus "Batterijbesparing" te activeren.

Deze optie is één klik verwijderd van het batterijpictogram, net zoals het energiebeheerschema van Power Saver op Windows 7 en Windows 8 was. Het is duidelijk dat Microsoft dit liever gebruikt in plaats van te knoeien met die oude en verwarrende energieplannen.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

U vindt ook een sneltoets voor de 'batterijbesparing' in het Action Center van Windows 10. Veeg naar rechts of klik op het pictogram Action Center in het systeemvak om er toegang tot te krijgen.

Klik op de koppeling "Uitbreiden" boven de tegels onder aan het paneel van het Actiecentrum als u de batterijbespaartegel niet kunt zien. U kunt deze tegels opnieuw rangschikken om de optie gemakkelijker toegankelijk te maken, als u dat wilt.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Hoe batterijbesparing te configureren

U kunt configureren wat Battery Saver doet en wanneer het wordt geactiveerd. Ga hiervoor naar Instellingen> Systeem> Batterij. U kunt ook op het batterijpictogram klikken in uw systeemvak en op de koppeling "Batterijinstellingen" in de pop-up klikken om deze te openen.

Onder "Batterijbesparing" kunt u kiezen of Windows de modus Batterijbesparing automatisch inschakelt of niet, en wanneer dat het geval is. Standaard schakelt Windows de batterijbesparingsmodus automatisch in bij 20% resterende batterij. U kunt dit wijzigen. U kunt bijvoorbeeld Windows automatisch Batterijbesparing op 90% van de batterij inschakelen als u problemen ondervindt met de levensduur van de batterij op uw laptop.

U kunt ook de optie "Helderheid van het onderste scherm uitschakelen terwijl de batterij wordt bespaard" uitschakelen, maar dit is erg handig op alle apparaten, dus u moet die waarschijnlijk ingeschakeld laten. Helaas is er geen manier om het helderheidsniveau van het scherm te configureren dat Battery Saver zal gebruiken.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

U kunt op de link "Batterijgebruik per app" boven in het batterijscherm klikken om te zien welke apps de meeste batterij gebruiken en hoe agressief Windows ze in de batterijbesparingsmodus regelt.

Hoe bruikbaar is de Battery Saver Mode, echt waar?

De schermhelderheid van de Battery Saver alleen zou een behoorlijk serieuze batterijduur moeten besparen. Natuurlijk, als je de gewoonte hebt om de helderheid van je scherm handmatig te verlagen, iets anders wat je kunt doen met een snelle klik of tik op het batterijpictogram, dan zul je deze functie misschien niet helemaal nodig vinden. Hoeveel dit kan helpen, is afhankelijk van hoe helder u normaal uw scherm bewaart en hoe sterk de achtergrondverlichting is.

Deze functie vermindert nu het vermogen dat wordt gebruikt door desktop-apps op de achtergrond, evenals universele apps, waardoor het bruikbaarder wordt op alle pc's. Zelfs als u alleen traditionele desktop-apps gebruikt, is het de moeite waard om in te schakelen als u meer batterijlevensduur van uw computer wilt persen.

Als u worstelt met een slechte levensduur van de batterij, zal het volgen van onze gids om de levensduur van uw laptop te verlengen waarschijnlijk meer helpen dan de Battery Saver-modus. Toch is het een mooie toevoeging en veel gemakkelijker te gebruiken dan de oude "powerplannen" van Windows 7 en 8.

Net als veel andere delen van Windows 10, lijkt de Battery Saver-modus een beetje op een work-in-progress. Het kan agressiever zijn als u de snelheid van uw CPU verlaagt en andere aanpassingen uitvoert om de levensduur van uw batterij te verlengen, en Microsoft kan dit in de toekomst toevoegen.

Maar ondanks dat is de batterijbesparingsmodus nog steeds nuttig genoeg voor de meeste mensen. Windows kan de Battery Saver-modus automatisch inschakelen en indien nodig uitschakelen, zodat u niet langer hoeft te wachten op micromanagement.

Windows 10 sisaldab režiimi „Aku säästja”, mis on mõeldud sülearvuti või tahvelarvuti aku tööea pikendamiseks. Windows lubab akusäästja automaatselt, kui teie arvuti aku hakkab tühjaks saama, kuid saate seda juhtida ja valida täpselt, mida akusäästja teeb.

Mida täpselt teeb akusäästja režiim?

SEOTUD:Kuidas hallata Windows 10 uut "võimsuse reguleerimist", et säästa aku kasutusaega

Aku säästja on sarnane iPhone'i vähese energiatarbega režiimile või Androidi akusäästjale. Kui see aktiveeritakse (või kui aktiveerite), muudab see Windowsi seadetes mõningaid muudatusi, et pikendada sülearvuti aku kasutusaega.

Esiteks vähendab see teie ekraani heledust automaatselt. See on üks suur näpistus, mis võib säästa iga seadme aku eluiga, kuna taustvalgus kasutab üsna palju energiat.

Akusäästja piirab nüüd agressiivselt taustarakendusi, mida te aktiivselt ei kasuta, isegi kui need on töölauarakendused. See funktsioon lisati koos Fall Creators Update'iga. Selle režiimi lubamisel ei saa Windowsi poe universaalsed rakendused ka taustal töötada ega tõuketeateid saada.

Vaikimisi aktiveeritakse akusäästja režiim automaatselt alati, kui teie sülearvuti või tahvelarvuti jõuab 20% aku kasutamiseni. Ühendage arvuti laadimiseks ja Windows inaktiveerib akusäästja režiimi.

Kuidas see sisse lülitada

Aku säästmise režiimi saate igal ajal sisse lülitada. Näiteks võite pika päeva alguses selle käsitsi sisse lülitada, kui teate, et olete mõnda aega pistikupesast eemal.

Selleks klõpsake või puudutage lihtsalt tegumiriba teavitusalal akuikooni. „Battery Saver“ režiimi aktiveerimiseks lohistage liugurit vasakpoolsesse asendisse.

See suvand asub akuikoonist ühe hiireklõpsu kaugusel, täpselt nagu energiasäästuprogramm „Energiasäästja“ oli Windows 7 ja Windows 8 puhul. On selge, et Microsoft soovib, et kasutaksite seda vanade ja segaste energiaplaanidega jamamise asemel.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Windows 10 tegevuskeskusest leiate ka kiirseadete paani „Aku säästja”. Pühkige paremalt paremale või klõpsake sellele juurdepääsemiseks süsteemses salves ikooni Action Center.

Kui te ei näe akusäästja paani, klõpsake paneeli Action Center all paanide kohal linki „Laienda”. Soovi korral saate neid plaate ümber paigutada, et see oleks hõlpsamini juurdepääsetav.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Kuidas seadistada akusäästjat

Saate konfigureerida, mida akusäästja teeb ja millal see aktiveerub. Selleks minge menüüsse Seaded> Süsteem> Aku. Võite ka klõpsata oma teavitusalas akuikoonil ja sellele juurdepääsemiseks klõpsata hüpikaknas linki „Aku seaded”.

Jaotises „Aku kokkuhoid“ saate valida, kas Windows lubab automaatselt akusäästja režiimi või mitte. Vaikimisi lubab Windows automaatselt akusäästja režiimi, kui aku jääb järele 20%. Saate seda muuta – näiteks võite lasta Windowsil lubada akusäästja automaatselt 90% aku kasutamisel, kui näete vaeva sülearvuti aku kasutusaega.

Võite ka keelata valiku „Madalam ekraani heledus akusäästja ajal”, kuid see on kõigis seadmetes väga kasulik, seega peaksite selle tõenäoliselt lubama. Kahjuks pole ekraani heleduse taset võimalik konfigureerida.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Akuekraani ülaosas oleval lingil „Aku kasutamine rakenduste kaupa” saate klõpsata, et näha, millised rakendused kasutavad kõige rohkem akut ja kontrollida, kui agressiivselt Windows neid akusäästja režiimis gaasitab.

Kui kasulik on tegelikult akusäästja režiim?

SEOTUD:Kuidas suurendada Windowsi sülearvuti aku kasutusaega

Ainuüksi akusäästja ekraani eredus peaks säästma üsna tõsist aku kasutusaega. Muidugi, kui teil on kombeks ekraani heledust käsitsi vähendada – midagi muud saate teha kiire klõpsuga või puudutada akuikooni – ei pruugi see funktsioon vajalikuks osutuda. Kui palju sellest abi on, sõltub sellest, kui eredalt ekraani tavaliselt hoiate ja kui palju energiat näljane on taustvalgus.

See funktsioon vähendab nüüd nii töölaua taustarakenduste kui ka universaalsete rakenduste kasutatavat võimsust, muutes selle kõigi arvutite jaoks kasulikumaks. Isegi kui kasutate ainult traditsioonilisi töölauarakendusi, tasub see lubada, kui soovite arvutist rohkem aku kasutusaega pigistada.

Kui teil on probleeme halva aku kasutamisajaga, aitab meie sülearvuti aku tööea pikendamise juhend tõenäoliselt rohkem kui akusäästja režiim. Sellegipoolest on see kena kaasamine ja seda on palju lihtsam kasutada kui Windows 7 ja 8 vanu "toiteplaane".

Nagu paljud Windows 10 osad, näeb ka akusäästja režiim veidi välja nagu pooleliolev töö. See võib olla agressiivsem, kui vähendate protsessori kiirust ja teete muid muudatusi, et pikendada aku kasutusaega, ja Microsoft võib seda funktsiooni tulevikus täiendada.

Vaatamata sellele on akusäästja režiim siiski enamiku inimeste jaoks piisavalt kasulik. Windows saab automaatselt sisse lülitada akusäästja režiimi ja vajadusel selle keelata, säästes tüütu mikrojuhtimise arvelt, et saaksite tööd jätkata.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

If your Windows 11 device is running low on battery life – or you want to get the most out of every minute of power, you can turn on Battery Saver mode. Here’s how to do it.

What is a battery saver?

Battery Saver is a special Windows Power Saving mode that removes more life from your battery by dimming your screen brightness, reducing background activity and limiting certain notifications. It’s like “Low Power Mode” on iPhone and “Battery Saver” mode on Android. Windows 10 also includes battery saver mode.

By default, Battery Saver turns on automatically when your battery reaches 20% or less, but can be configured in Settings under System> Power and Battery. Once you plug in to recharge your device, it will turn off automatically. Also, you can use the battery saver manually anytime you want to save battery life.

Related: How to use and configure Windows 10 “Battery Saver” mode.

Turn on the battery saver using the quick settings.

The fastest way to activate Battery Saver is through the Quick Settings menu. To open it, click the “Quick Settings” button hidden in your taskbar – this is where you see the icons for Wi-Fi, speaker, and battery indicator. Or you press Windows + A on your keyboard.

When Quick Settings opens, click “Battery Saver”.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

(If you don’t see “Battery Saver” in Quick Settings, click the pencil icon at the bottom of the menu, select “Add”, then select “Battery Saver” in the list that appears.)

After clicking, the battery saver will be activated immediately. When you’re ready to turn it off, re-open Quick Settings and click the “Battery Saver” button until it’s highlighted.

Related: How Windows 11’s New “Quick Settings” Menu Works

Turn on Battery Saver in the Settings app.

You can also enable (and configure) the battery saver in the Windows 11 Settings app. To do this, first open Windows Settings by pressing Windows + i on your keyboard. Or you can find “Settings” in the Start menu and click on its icon when it appears in the results.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

When the settings open, click “System” in the sidebar, then select “Power and Battery”.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

In the Power and Battery settings, scroll down to the “Battery” section. Click the “Turn on” button next to the “Battery Saver” option.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

The battery saver will turn on immediately. To turn it off again, click the “Turn off now” button with the “Battery Saver” label.

When you’re on this screen, you can also select the percentage at which the battery saver will automatically activate using the “Automatically turn on the battery saver” drop-down menu. This menu includes an “always” option to keep the battery saver permanently and a “never” option to disable it completely.

You can also toggle the battery saver dimming the screen using the “low screen brightness” switch when using the battery saver. In general, keeping your screen brightness off will have a big impact on extending your computer’s battery life. good luck!

Related: 6 Ways to Improve Battery Life on Windows Laptops

When Microsoft created Windows 10 it borrowed a few features from the world of smartphones. One of the more obvious ones is Barrage fire Saver. Just as your phone has a miserable-battery mode, the battery life on Windows 10 laptops and tablets can be extended by turning off things like automatic email and calendar sync, live tile updates, and play down processes for some apps. Battery Saver also lowers your display’s screen brightness, though you can undo that mount.

With Battery Saver enabled, you can keep checking Facebook, writing electronic mail, or coating your thesis for a fewer more proceedings ahead your Personal computer has to shut down.

Here’s how the feature works in the Windows 10 Anniversary Update.

Where to find it

Battery Saver in the quick-actions area of the Action Center.

Battery Saver lives in two different spots connected your PC. The first is in the hurried-actions area at the behind of the Action Center. Here you can quickly turn Battery Saver on and unsatisfactory at testament.

You can as wel get to the Battery Saver fast-actions tile aside clicking on the bombardment icon on the far right of the taskbar.

Note that you cannot turn happening Battery Rescuer if you’re using your PC’s big businessman cord. That seems obvious, only nonetheless bears mentioning.

The other placement for Battery Saver is in the Settings app.

The battery section of the Settings app.

To have a look offer to Start > Settings > System > Battery. When you’re running connected battery baron you’ll see your battery’s leftover percentage at the top under the heading Overview, too as the estimated fourth dimension left over before your PC has to close down. This section also has a link tagged Battery usage by app that takes you to another test that shows a breakdown of that information.

Below that, the Battery Recoverer subhead houses the actual settings you can tweak for the feature. Prototypic, you will see a checkbox—that should be enabled by default—to turn on Battery Saver automatically when your battery waterfall below 20 percent. If you’d rather turn on Battery Saver manually every time, just uncheck this box.

Next, you’ll encounter a yellow-bellied terrapin labeled Battery saver position until side by side charge. This is just another way to turn along Battery Saver. When this slider is activated you’ll enter Battery Recoverer mode until you nag in your device.

At long last, one last checkbox at the bottom of the Bombardment Saver expanse allows you to go into Battery Saver manner without the lower screen brightness.

Battery Saver is a good feature to know about for those times you want to extend your Windows 10 device’s cord-free power for as long as possible.

It has always been possible to change power plan settings in recent versions of the Windows operating system to save and extend battery life. There are dozens of software around that claim to improve battery life. That good news is that you no longer need to go for third-party battery-saving software as Windows 10 ships with a built-in Battery Saver feature.

Battery Saver is one of the hundreds of new features introduced with Windows 10. As the title of the functionality goes, the function is designed to extend the battery time of devices running Windows 10 operating system.

By default, the feature gets automatically activated when the battery level falls below 20%. And when the Battery Saver is active, you can see a small green icon on the battery icon located in the system tray to indicate that the Battery Saver feature is active.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

According to Microsoft, Battery Saver limits background activities to improve the battery time. Additionally, Windows Store, Calendar, and People apps do not sync. Windows 10 reduces the computer’s screen brightness by 30% to save the battery (you can turn off this under battery settings). When the Battery saver is turned on, Windows 10 doesn’t download non-critical Windows updates. Lastly, Windows 10 also blocks most of the telemetry.

As mentioned above, with default settings, Battery Saver is turned on only when the battery level goes below 20%. You might want to change this default setting to 40 or 50% to improve the battery time in Windows 10.

It’s important to note that Battery Saver is turned off while charging even if the battery level is below the specified percentage. Needless to say that the Battery Saver functionality is not available on computers without batteries.

Quickly turn on the Battery saver in Windows 10

Step 1: Click on the battery icon in the system tray area of the taskbar to see the battery flyout.

Step 2: Move the slider to the Best battery life position (extreme left) to turn on the Battery saver feature.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Turn on Battery Saver in Windows 10

By default, the Battery Saver kicks in when the battery charge goes below the 20% mark. But if the feature is not getting activated automatically, you can use this method to enable the feature.

Step 1: Open the Settings app. Navigate to System > Battery.

Step 2: Here, in the Battery saver section, make sure that Turn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below option is turned on. If not, select the option to turn on the Battery saver feature when the battery level falls below 20%. To turn on the Battery saver now (irrespective of the battery level), turn on Battery saver status until next charge option.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

To completely disable Battery Saver in Windows 10

Step 1: Navigate to Settings > System > Battery.

Step 2: Here, uncheck the Turn battery saver on automatically if my battery falls below option to disable the Battery saver.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

To enable or disable Battery Saver in power options

UPDATE: This method doesn’t work in the newest version of Windows 10.

It’s possible to enable or disable Battery Saver for a particular power plan. Here is how to do it:

Step 1: Type Power Options in the Start search box and then press Enter key. Power Options window can also be launched by clicking on the battery icon and then clicking Power Options.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step 2: Under Power Options window, click or tap Change plan settings link next to your desired power plan.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step 3: Click or tap Change advanced power settings to open the small Power Options dialog.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Step 4: Here, expand Energy saver settings, and then expand the Charge level.

Step 5: Change On battery (Percent battery charge) value to 0 to disable Battery Saver.

I hope this helps you!

Filed Under: Windows 10 Tagged: Tips

Related Articles

Comments

Started recently, whenever I plugged in my laptop it won’t show any sign of charging expect 0 percent, someone told me the battery has been off or something like that but unable to on it what can do.

I have same problem as many others do fix please

david blum says

hello, whatever i do i cannot find this menu on my windows 1607 14393.331 build 🙁 is it another menu ? netiher on the desktop or power scheme i GPO.

There are several ways to enable Battery Saver in Windows 11, which we will review in today’s post. Battery Saver is an essential part of power management in Windows-based laptops and tablets. It allows you to prolong the battery life by disabling background activities, limiting notification, and slightly reducing the overall performance.

However, keep in mind that you cannot turn on Battery Saver in Windows 11 when your device is plugged in. In such a case, the Battery Saver button in Windows 11 appears grayed-out. Once you unplug the AC power source, you’ll be able to turn on Battery Saver.

Tip: You can combine Battery Saver with other options, such as Airplane Mode and with disabling background apps to improve battery life of your device.

Enable Battery Saver in Windows 11

There are multiple ways to turn on Battery Saver. You can use either Quick Settings, the Settings app, or even make the OS activate it automatically depending on device’s battery charge level. Let’s review these methods in detail. So, to enable the Battery Saver feature in Windows 11, do the following.

Using Quick Settings

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

  1. Press Win + A to open the Quick Settings flyout menu. You can also open it by clicking one of the following indicators in the notification area: Network, Volume, and Battery.
  2. Click the Battery Saver button
  3. To disable it later, just repeat the above sequence. Clicking on the Battery Saver option second time will disable it.

If the Battery Saver button is missing in the Quick Settings menu, you need to add it manually there. do the following.

Add Battery Saver to Quick Settings

  1. Open the Quick Settings menu and click the edit button with a pencil icon.
  2. Click Add, then select Battery Saver from the list of available toggles.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  3. Click Done to save the changes.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

You are done. From now, you’ll have the Battery Saver button in Quick Settings.

The Quick Settings menu allows you to turn on or off Battery Saver without customizing it. Alternatively, you can enable or disable it using the Windows 11 Settings. Also, the Settings app allow changing additional power-related options.

Turn on Battery Saver in Settings

  1. Press Win + I to open the Settings app.
  2. Go to System > Power and Battery.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  3. Scroll down and find the Battery section.
  4. Click the arrow down icon next to the Battery Saver.
  5. Click Turn on Now. That action enables instantly Battery Saver.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

Automatically Enable Battery Saver in Windows 11

You can set Windows 11 to enable Battery Saver automatically once the battery in your laptop or tablet hits a specific threshold. By default, Windows 11 turns on Battery Saver on a 20% charge. Because Battery Saver limits background activity and reduces performance, some users might want to decrease that threshold or disable automatic Battery Saver altogether.

To automatically enable Battery Saver in Windows 11, do the following.

  1. Open Windows Settings and go to System > Power and Battery.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  2. Click Battery Saver and find the Turn battery saver on automatically at option.
  3. Select the required value from a drop-down list.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  4. If you want to disable the automatic Battery Saver in Windows 11, select “Never.”

Disable Battery Saver in Windows 11

If you want to turn off Battery Saver in Windows 11, repeat any of the steps above. Press Win + A , then click Battery Saver. Alternatively, open Windows Settings ( Win + I ) and go to System > Power and Battery. Under the Battery Saver group of options, click Turn off.

Finally, those who frequently change Battery Saver settings in Windows 11 can create a special shortcut to access its options with a single click.

Create Battery Saver Shortcut in Windows 11

  1. Right-click the empty space on the Desktop and select New > Shortcut.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  2. On a new window, enter ms-settings:batterysaver .How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  3. Click Next, then give your shortcut a proper name, for example, Battery Settings.How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode
  4. Click Finish to save changes.

How to use and configure windows 10’s “battery saver” mode

You are done. Note that Windows 11 will assign the default Settings icon to your shortcut, but you can change it using the properties menu.

That’s it. Now you know how to enable or disable Battery Saver in Windows 11.

Winaero greatly relies on your support. You can help the site keep bringing you interesting and useful content and software by using these options:

If you like this article, please share it using the buttons below. It won’t take a lot from you, but it will help us grow. Thanks for your support!

Author: Taras Buria

Taras is here to cover stories about Microsoft and everything around, although sometimes he prefers Apple. You can stay in touch with him on Twitter. View all posts by Taras Buria

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

For computer file systems, fdisk is a command-line utility that provides disk partitioning functions. In versions of the Windows NT operating system line from Windows 2000 onwards, fdisk is replaced by a more advanced tool called diskpart. Similar utilities exist for Unix-like systems.

There are 10 fdisk Commands to Manage Linux Disk Partitions:

1. View all Disk Partitions in Linux

Use this command to check all:
sudo fdisk -l

2. View Specific Disk Partition in Linux

Use this command to check only one:
fdisk -l /dev/sda

3. Check all Available fdisk Commands

This command helps you to use fdisk:
fdisk /dev/sda
Enter “m” for help.

4. Print all Partition Table in Linux

Use this commands and after enter “p” in shell:
fdisk /dev/sda

5. How to Delete a Partition in Linux

Use this command:
fdisk /dev/sda
When asked for command, enter “d”
After, enter partition number that you want to delete.

6. How to Create a New Partition in Linux

Use this command:
fdisk /dev/sda
When asked for command, enter “n”
After, enter “e” for extended partition and “p” for the primary partition.
Next, enter the size of the partition.
To save it, enter “w”.

7. How to Format a Partition in Linux

To format any partition, enter this command:
mkfs.ext4 /dev/sda3
Note: change /dev/sda3 with the disk location that you want to format.

8. How to Check Size of a Partition in Linux

Use this command to view size of a partition:
fdisk -s /dev/sda3

9. How to Fix Partition Table Order

Use this command to fix:
fdisk /dev/sda
Enter “f” in command, to fix it.
And enter “w” in command, to save it.

10. How to Disable Boot Flag (*) of a Partition

Use this command to Disable boot flag:
fdisk /dev/sda
Enter “p” command to view the current partition.
Next, enter “a” to disable flag.
Then enter a number of the partition.

You have successfully learned How to Use Fdisk to Manage Partitions on Linux.
Enjoy it.

By Genesis Emmanuel Gonzales – April 26, 2016 – no comments Email article | Print article

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Fdisk is a text facility which is used to view and manage the hard disk partition on Linux. It can be the most powerful tool for the which can be used for managing the hard disk partitions, but it is also confusing to the new users.

On some of the distributions of the Linux, there is a need of using a word sudo as prefix before the commands fdisk and mkfs, and those distributions which do not require using this word as a prefix are required to use the word “su” to get to the root shell, then you must type every other command without sudo.

List partitions:

To list the partitions, write…

sudo fdisk –l

You can also add the name of the disk devices name to list only partitions on it. For instance to list only the partitions on the first disk device, you have to write:

sudo fdisk –l /dev/sda

Entering command mode:

If you want to work on the partition of the disk, you just need to enter the command mode. You can get the name of the device from the fdisk –l command. If you want to enter the first disk device, following command is used.

sudo fdisk /dev/sda

There is a warning that does not edit partitions when they are in use. If you desire to edit them boot it from the live CD first.

Using command mode:

In this mode, in this mode you just need to single letter to specify your command and tell the system what to do. Just type m and then press to see the list of the commands

Deleting the partition:

If there is a need to delete the partition use the button ‘d’. the screen will prompt you asking the number of partitions you want to delete, which you have got from the ‘p’ command.

After deleting the desired partition, type the command ‘p’ again if you want to view the current partition. At this type it appears that the partitions are deleted but these partitions are not written on the disk until you press the ‘w’ button.

Creating partition:

In order to create the new partition use the button ‘n’. you have the option to create the logical or primary partition. ‘l’ for the logical and ‘P‘ for the primary partition. A disk can only have 4 primary partitions. The next thing to do is to specify the sector of the partition which you want to start portioning at. To choose the default sector press Enter key.

The last thing to do is to specify the last sector of the partition. After selecting the initial sector if you want to select all available space, press Enter. You have the option that you can also specify the size +6G for the partition of 5 Gigabytes and +512M for the partition of 512 megabytes. If you will not specify the unit after pressing +, fdisk will utilize sectors as the unit.

fdisk is a menu-driven command-line utility, and hence new users find this tool confusing and difficult to use. fdisk is not an easy tool to use and should be used with caution. You need to have root access or sudo privileges to make changes to storage partitions.

So, today in this article, I will give you a tutorial on how to create a partition in Linux using the fdisk command.

You can carry out the following operations using the fdisk command.

  • Create New Partition
  • Manage Space
  • Reorganize space on old drives.
  • Move data to a new disk

How to list partitions?

Before making any changes to the drive, you first look at the basic structure of the drive and its partitions. To view all the partitions on the drive, run the following command in the Linux terminal.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Partitions are displayed by their device name, such as dev/sda, dev/sdc, etc., as you can see in the above screenshot.

If you wish to view partition on the specific disk, you have to use ‘-l’ followed by the device name as shown in the command below.

This command will show the output as shown in the screenshot below.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Creating Partition:

To create a partition on a specific drive, you have to run the fdisk command with the device name, as shown in the command below.

Once you’re on the device where you want to create a partition, type M and press enter.

You will see the list as shown below screenshot. This is the list of single-letter commands you can use to take specific action using fdisk.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

To create a partition, you have to use the N command. Both logical and primary partitions can be created where I denote logical partition and P denotes primary partition.

By default, the first free sector on the disk is chosen to create a new partition. Just like that, you also have to specify the last sector of the partition. You can also specify the size of the partition according to your requirement.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Deleting Partition:

To delete the specific partition, you have to use the D command. Use the P command to make sure which partition you want to delete.

When you fire the D command, it will ask for the partition number you want to delete. Just type that partition number and hit the enter button. This will delete the selected partition.

So, this is how you can use the fdisk command to create and delete the partition on Linux. fdisk is a very useful command-line tool when used efficiently and correctly. Make sure you have the back of the partitions where you are going to use the fdisk command. Good day!

About the author

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Swapnil Tirthakar

A Software Engineer who loves football and passionate about traveling. I often spend my free time playing with gadgets and exploring new possibilities in tech world. I am Linux enthusiast and have about 6 years of experience in web development. I have good command on Python, Java, SQL and system security.

Fdisk is a text based utility used in Linux to manage disk partitions. Using fdisk you can view all disk partitions, create a new partition, delete an existing hard disk partition and view the size of the partition.

Using fdisk you are allowed to create a maximum of four primary partitions, and any number of logical partitions, based on the size of the disk. Keep in mind that any single partition requires a minimum size of 40MB.

In this tutorial, let us learn how to use fdisk command in linux with some examples.

1) View all existing disk partitions

Before you create a new partition or modify an existing partition, you might want to view all available partitions in the system.

The command will list partitions from all the connected hard disks. When you have more than one disk on the system, the partitions list are ordered by the device’s /dev name. For example, /dev/sda, /dev/sdb, /dev/sdc and so on.

Use fdisk -l to view all available partitions as following:

2) View partitions of a specific hard disk

To view all partitions of the ‘/dev/sda’ hard disk, do the following.

View all fdisk Commands Using fdisk Command m

Use fdisk command m , to view all available fdisk commands as shown below:

3) Delete a hard disk partition

Let us assume that you like to combine several partitions (for example, /dev/sda6, /dev/sda7 and /dev/sda8) into a single disk partition. To do this, you should first delete all those individual partitions, as shown below.

4) Create a new disk partition

Once you’ve deleted all the existing partitions, you can create a new partition using all available space as shown below.

After the partition is created, format it using the mkfs command as shown below.

5) View the size of an existing partition

As shown below, fdisk -s displays the size of the partition in blocks.

In the following example it shows the size ‘/dev/sda7’ as 4900MB.

6) Toggle the boot flag of a partition

Fdisk command displays the boot flag of each partition. When you want to disable or enable the boot flag on the corresponding partition, do the following.

As seen above, the boot flag is disabled on the partition ‘/dev/sda5’.

7) Fix partition table order

When you delete a logical partition and recreate it again, you might see the ‘partition out of order’ issue. i.e ‘Partition table entries are not in disk order’ error message.

For example, when you delete three logical partitions (sda6, sda7 and sda8), and create a new partition, you might expect the new partition name to be sda6. But, the system might’ve created the new partition as sda7. This is because, after the partitions are deleted, ‘sda9’ partition has been moved as sda6 and the free space is moved to the end.

To fix this partition order issue, and assign sda6 to the newly created partition, execute the expert command f as shown below.

Once the partition table order is fixed, you’ll not get the ‘Partition table entries are not in disk order’ error message anymore.

Conclusion

In this tutorial, we learned how to use fdisk command in Linux to manage partitions. I hope you enjoyed reading and please leave your suggestion on the below comment box. Note: Don’t delete, modify, or add partition, if you don’t know what you are doing. You may end up losing your data. Be careful.

There are different options to create or manage partitions under Oracle Linux – fdisk is one of them. This post describes its usage and the use case when creating a new partition table. fdisk is a menu-driven program for the creation and manipulation of partition tables. It understands GPT (experimental for now), MBR, Sun, SGI, and BSD partition tables.

Hard disks can be divided into one or more logical disks called partitions. This division is recorded in the partition table, found in sector 0 of the disk. (In the BSD world one talks about ‘disk slices’ and a ‘disklabel’.)

Linux needs at least one partition, namely for its root file system. It can use swap files and/or swap partitions, but the latter is more efficient. So, usually one will want a second Linux partition dedicated as a swap partition. On Intel-compatible hardware, the BIOS that boots the system can often only access the first 1024 cylinders of the disk. For this reason, people with large disks often create a third partition, just a few MB large, typically mounted on /boot, to store the kernel image and a few auxiliary files needed at boot time, so as to make sure that this stuff is accessible to the BIOS. There may be reasons of security, ease of administration and backup, or testing, to use more than the minimum number of partitions.

The basic fdisk commands needed are:

  • p print the partition table
  • n create a new partition
  • d delete a partition
  • q quit without saving changes
  • w write the new partition table and exit

Changes you make to the partition table do not take effect until you issue the write (w) command.

Further information can be found at the man pages:

Partitioning a disk with fdisk

1. Run fdisk against the desired device “/dev/device_name”.

2. Choose option “p” to print the partition table of the disk:

3. Choose option “n” to create a new partition:

Here is an exaple of creating another partition on the same disk:

4. Check the partition table with the option “p“:

5. Choose the option “w” to write the new partition or partitions.

6. Run the command partprobe to inform the OS of partition table changes:

fdisk command is a free and open source utility widely available on Linux Based Platforms to Manage Disk Partitions Table. It understand different partitions table like BSD, GPT, MBR, SUN and SGI. fdisk command can be used to create a new partition, delete a partition, change the partition ID, resize the partition, move a partition and so on.

One can create a maximum of four primary partition using fdisk command and n number of logical partitions based on available disk size. Partition number from 1 to 4 are reserved for Primary partitions and then logical partition starts from number 5. fdisk command creates partition of minimum 40 MB size and maximum of 2 TB size.

What is Block Device

A Block device in Linux is defined as a file which represents devices like Hard Disk, CD-ROMs from where data can be read in fixed size blocks.

What is Partition

A Block device are usually divided into one or more logical disks which are known as partitions. The information of these partitions are stored in a table Known as Partition Table.

Synopsis

fdisk [-uc] [-b sectorsize] [-C cyls] [-H heads] [-S sects] device

fdisk -l [-u] [device. ]

fdisk -s partition.

fdisk -v

fdisk -h

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Fdisk Command Examples to Manage Disk Partitions in Linux

Example 1: How to Check fdisk Command Version

To check fdisk command version you need to use -v option as shown below. Here current fdisk version is 2.23.2 .

Example 2: How to List All Disk Partitions in Linux

If you want to List all the disk partitions then you need to use -l option with fdisk command as shown below. Here we have two disks /dev/sda and /dev/sdb but partitions are created only on /dev/sda disk. We have two partitions /dev/sda1 and /dev/sda2 available on /dev/sda disk.

-l : List the partition tables for the specified devices and then exit. More on fdisk Man Page.

Example 3: How to Check total number of partitions in a Disk

If you want to check all the partitions of a Specific disk then you can also use -l option along with the disk name. In this example we are checking all the partition information of /dev/sdc disk using fdisk -l /dev/sdc command as shown below.

Example 4: How to Delete a Disk Partition in Linux

To delete a disk partition you need to use command d as shown below. In this example we are deleting partition /dev/sdc1 using d command and then writing the partition table changes using w command.

Example 5: How to Create a Disk Partition in Linux

To create a disk partition you need to use n command as shown below. In this example we are creating partition on /dev/sdc disk using fdisk /dev/sdc command. Then selecting n command to create a new partition and selecting p to create it as a primary partition type. Here we are using default sector value i.e first sector value as 2048 and last sector value as 16777215 which will create partition on entire 8 GB disk and then writing the changes to partition table using w command.

Example 6: How to Check the Size of Disk Partition in Linux

To check the size of disk partition you can use -s option with fdisk command as shown below. In this example we are checking the size of /dev/sdc1 partition using fdisk -s /dev/sdc1 command. Here you will see size in number of blocks. So the total size of /dev/sdc1 partition is 8387584 blocks.

-s : Print the size (in blocks) of each given partition. More on fdisk Man Page.

Example 7: How to Verify Disk Partition table in Linux

Another useful command that you can use is v command to verify the disk partition table in Linux. In this example we are verifying /dev/sdc disk partition using v command and then writing the changes to partition table using w command.

Example 8: How to Quit fdisk Command without saving any changes

To quit fdisk command utility without saving any changes you need to use q command as shown below. In this example we have exited the /dev/sdc disk changes without saving it by using q command.

Example 9: How to Save and Exit fdisk Utility

If you want to exit after saving partition table information then you need to use w command as shown below. This command will save all the partition table changes and then exit out from fdisk command.

Example 10: How to Change Disk Partition ID to “Linux LVM” type

If you want to change disk partition ID to Linux LVM type then you need to use hex code 8e after selecting the partition through t command as shown below. In this example we are changing the partition Id of /dev/sdc1 partition from 83 to 8e to convert the partition from normal disk to LVM type.

Example 11: How to Change Disk Partition ID to “Linux Swap” Type

For creating a swap partition you need to change the partition type to Linux swap type by using hex code 82 as shown below. In this example we are changing partition ID of /dev/sdc1 from normal partition to Linux swap type.

Example 12: How to Disable/Enable Boot Flag(*) of a Partition

If you want you can also disable/enable boot flag of a partition using fdisk command in Linux. As you can see from below output, partition /dev/sda1 is currently marked as boot partition.

To disable the boot flag from /dev/sda1 partition you need to use command a under fdisk utility and then select the partition to disable the boot flag as shown below.

After writing the disk partition table changes if you check the /dev/sda1 partition status again then you can notice that star(*) marked is removed now. This confirms boot flag is now disabled. You can follow the same procedure to enable it again.

Example 13: How to Correct the Partition Table Order

If you want to correct the partition table order then you need to use the extra functionality available by using x command and then use f command to correct the partition table order. Since in this example our disk partition table is already in order so it won’t do any changes here.

Example 14: How to Disable/Enable DOS Compatibility Mode

If you want to disable/enable DOS compatibility mode from a disk partition then you need to use c command as shown below. In this example we are changing the DOS Compatibility mode of partition /dev/sdc1 using c command.

Example 15: How to Check all the available options of fdisk command

To check all the available options of fdisk command you need to use m command as shown below. This command will list all the available actions that can be done on disk partition using fdisk command.

Example 16: How to check Man Page of fdisk command

Man Page of fdisk command can be checked using man fdisk command as shown below.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Fdisk(fixed disk or format disk) is a text-based command-line utility for viewing and managing hard disk partitions on Linux. Using fdisk you can view, create, resize, delete, change, copy and move partitions. Fdisk allows you to create a maximum of four primary partitions as permitted by Linux with each requiring a minimum size of 40mb. You can also have a much larger number of logical partitions by subdividing a primary partition. ​In this article, let us review how to use fdisk command to manage disk partitions by employing some very simple and practical examples.

Important points to note

  1. Fdisk requires root to operate. On Debian and Ubuntu based systems, you can prefix with sudo. On other distros, use su- command to get a root shell and then enter the commands without sudo.
  2. Take note of the form the device names (disks) are presented. Usually, you see the following names
  • /dev/hd[a-h] for IDE disks
  • /dev/sd[a-p] for SCSI disks
  • /dev/ed[a-d] for ESDI disks
  • /dev/xd[ab] for XT disks

​ 3. Warning: Do not delete, modify, or add partition unless you know exactly what you are about. You ran the risk of losing your data!

1. View All Existing Disk Partitions

​The first thing you want to do before tampering with your disks and partition is to view basic details about all available partitions in the system. The commands list the partitions on your system. When you have more than one disk available, the partitions list is ordered by the device’s /dev name as in /dev/sda, /dev/sdb and so on. Use the following command to view all existing partitions in the system –

2. View Partition on a Specific Disk

​If you want to look at all the partitions on a specific disk, use the following command to view all disk partitions on device /dev/sdb. # sudo fdisk -l /dev/sdb

3. View all fdisk Commands

​You can use the following command to view all available fdisk – # sudo fdisk /dev/sda This will provide you with a prompt. Enter m to see the list of all available commands of fdisk which can be operated on /dev/sda.

Command (m for help): m

The output will be this – Command action
a toggle a bootable flag
b edit bsd disklabel
c toggle the dos compatibility flag
d delete a partition
l list known partition types
m print this menu
n add a new partition
o create a new empty DOS partition table
p print the partition table
q quit without saving changes
s create a new empty Sun disklabel
t change a partition’s system id
u change display/entry units
v verify the partition table
w write table to disk and exit
x extra functionality (experts only)

4. Delete a Hard Disk Partition

Assuming you need to combine some partitions to form a larger one, you will first have to delete those partitions. To delete a specific partition on /dev/sdb2, follow the following -1. Enter the following command to enter/view the disk – # sudo fdisk /dev/sdb 2. Enter ‘d’ to delete a partition.​Command (m for help): d

3. You will be prompted to enter the partition number. We enter 2 in our case to delete /dev/sdb2. Save changes by entering ‘w’ at command and reboot for changes.

5. Create a New Disk Partition with Specific Size

To create a new partition, enter the following command -1. Enter the following command to enter/view the disk
# sudo fdisk /dev/sdb

2. Enter ‘n’ to create a new partition that will prompt you to specify for either a primary partition or an extended partition. Enter ‘p’ for a primary partition or ‘e’ for an extended partition.

3. You will then be prompted to enter the first cylinder or sector number of the partition to be created. You may press Enter to accept the defaults.

4. You will then be prompted to enter the Last cylinder or sector number of the partition to be created. You may press Enter to use all available space after the first sector or enter a specific size such as +2G or +256M for a 2 gigabyte or 256 megabyte partition respectively.

5. Run ‘w’ command to write the changes and reboot your system.

6. How to Format a Partition?

After you have created your partition, you need to format it with a file system. Use the following command to format to ext4 file format –

7. How to View the Size of your new or existing Partition?

​If you want to check the size of a specific partition, use the following command to check the size of the partition on /dev/sda2.

8. Viewing the Partition Table

​You can use the following command to look at your current partition table –
Use ‘p’ in command mode.

Command (m for help): p

Conclusion

​With this simple tutorial, you can manage your disks and partitions with Fdisk. Hope this has been useful. If you have any issues with anything above, let me know in the comment section below this article. Thank you!

Mohd Sohail is a web developer and a Linux sysAdmin. He also loves to write how-to articles, applications reviews and loves to use new Linux distributions.

2 responses to “‘fdisk’ Command To Manage Disk Partitions In Linux”

Dear Sir,
Thanks so much for sharing your powerful in depth of Linux tutorials(creating partition)which has really change my perspective and also broaden my horizon in Linux.
I say kudos and God bless you.I want to be a master in Linux so kindly show me steps I should take daily for me to be powerful in Linux and Linux Bash.
Thanks
Acquaye

You can start with installing a simple beginner friendly Linux distribution. I have written an article covering best beginner-friendly Linux distributions. Check that out here –

You can follow Linux communities including LinuxAndUbuntu. I have also written an article covering best sources to learn Linux for free.

There are different options to create or manage partitions under Oracle Linux – fdisk is one of them. This post describes its usage and the use case when creating a new partition table. fdisk is a menu-driven program for the creation and manipulation of partition tables. It understands GPT (experimental for now), MBR, Sun, SGI, and BSD partition tables.

Hard disks can be divided into one or more logical disks called partitions. This division is recorded in the partition table, found in sector 0 of the disk. (In the BSD world one talks about ‘disk slices’ and a ‘disklabel’.)

Linux needs at least one partition, namely for its root file system. It can use swap files and/or swap partitions, but the latter is more efficient. So, usually one will want a second Linux partition dedicated as a swap partition. On Intel-compatible hardware, the BIOS that boots the system can often only access the first 1024 cylinders of the disk. For this reason, people with large disks often create a third partition, just a few MB large, typically mounted on /boot, to store the kernel image and a few auxiliary files needed at boot time, so as to make sure that this stuff is accessible to the BIOS. There may be reasons of security, ease of administration and backup, or testing, to use more than the minimum number of partitions.

The basic fdisk commands needed are:

  • p print the partition table
  • n create a new partition
  • d delete a partition
  • q quit without saving changes
  • w write the new partition table and exit

Changes you make to the partition table do not take effect until you issue the write (w) command.

Further information can be found at the man pages:

Partitioning a disk with fdisk

1. Run fdisk against the desired device “/dev/device_name”.

2. Choose option “p” to print the partition table of the disk:

3. Choose option “n” to create a new partition:

Here is an exaple of creating another partition on the same disk:

4. Check the partition table with the option “p“:

5. Choose the option “w” to write the new partition or partitions.

6. Run the command partprobe to inform the OS of partition table changes:

Recently, one of our customers asked us to upgrade his server hardware. Unfortunately, they can’t…

Basic information smartd is a daemon that monitоrs the Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T)…

Recently, We described how to configure your server for high load and prevention of DDoS.…

Introduction If you are using old software on new software you can receive some weird…

Introduction Python is an interpreted, high-level, general-purpose programming language. Created by Guido van Rossum and…

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linuxOn Linux distributions, fdisk is the best tool to manage disk partitions. fdisk is a text based utility.

Using fdisk you can create a new partition, delete an existing partition, or change existing partition.

Using fidsk you are allowed to create a maximum of four primary partition, and any number of logical partitions, based on the size of the disk.

Keep in mind that any single partition requires a minimum size of 40MB.

In this article, let us review how to use fdisk command using practical examples.

Warning: Don’t delete, modify, or add partition, if you don’t know what you are doing. You will lose your data!

1. View All Existing Disk Partitions Using fdisk -l

Before you create a new partition, or modify an existing partition, you might want to view all available partition in the system.

Use fdisk -l to view all available partitions as shown below.

The above will list partitions from all the connected hard disks. When you have more than one disk on the system, the partitions list are ordered by the device’s /dev name. For example, /dev/sda, /dev/sdb, /dev/sdc and so on.

2. View Partitions of a Specific Hard Disk using fdisk -l /dev/sd

To view all partitions of the /dev/sda hard disk, do the following.

View all fdisk Commands Using fdisk Command m

Use fdisk command m, to view all available fdisk commands as shown below.

3. Delete a Hard Disk Partition Using fdisk Command d

Let us assume that you like to combine several partitions (for example, /dev/sda6, /dev/sda7 and /dev/sda8) into a single disk partition. To do this, you should first delete all those individual partitions, as shown below.

4. Create a New Disk Partition with Specific Size Using fdisk Command n

Once you’ve deleted all the existing partitions, you can create a new partition using all available space as shown below.

In the above example, fdisk n command is used to create new partition with the specific size. While creating a new partition, it expects following two inputs.

  • Starting cylinder number of the partition to be create (First cylinder).
  • Size of the partition (or) the last cylinder number (Last cylinder, +cylinders or +size ).

Please keep in mind that you should issue the fdisk write command (w) after any modifications.

After the partition is created, format it using the mkfs command as shown below.

5. View the Size of an existing Partition Using fdisk -s

As shown below, fdisk -s displays the size of the partition in blocks.

The above output corresponds to about 4900MB.

6. Toggle the Boot Flag of a Partition Using fdisk Command a

Fdisk command displays the boot flag of each partition. When you want to disable or enable the boot flag on the corresponding partition, do the following.

If you don’t know why are you are doing this, you’ll mess-up your system.

As seen above, the boot flag is disabled on the partition /dev/sda5.

7. Fix Partition Table Order Using fdisk Expert Command f

When you delete a logical partition, and recreate it again, you might see the “partition out of order” issue. i.e “Partition table entries are not in disk order” error message.

For example, when you delete three logical partitions (sda6, sda7 and sda8), and create a new partition, you might expect the new partition name to be sda6. But, the system might’ve created the new partition as sda7. This is because, after the partitions are deleted, sda9 partition has been moved as sda6 and the free space is moved to the end.

To fix this partition order issue, and assign sda6 to the newly created partition, execute the expert command f as shown below.

Once the partition table order is fixed, you’ll not get the “Partition table entries are not in disk order” error message anymore.

The fdisk command is a text-based utility for viewing and managing hard disk partitions on Linux. It’s one of the most
powerful tools you can use to manage partitions, but it’s confusing to new users.
This tutorial will go through the basics of using fdisk to manage a partition table. After using fdisk, you’ll have to use a mkfs
command to format new partitions with a �le system.

Sudo vs. Su
On Ubuntu, Linux Mint or other Ubuntu-derived distributions, the fdisk and mkfs commands must be pre�xed with sudo.
On distributions that don’t use sudo, use the su – command �rst to get a root shell, then type every command without sudo.

List Partitions
The sudo fdisk -l commands lists the partitions on your system.

You can add a disk’s device name to list only partitions on it. For example, use the following command to only list partitions
on the �rst disk device:
sudo fdisk -l /dev/sda

Entering Command Mode
To work on a disk’s partitions, you have to enter command mode. You’ll need the device name of a disk from the fdisk -l
command. The following command enters command mode for the �rst disk device:
sudo fdisk /dev/sda

How to Use Fdisk to Manage Partitions on Linux

Don’t edit partitions while they’re in use. If you want to edit system partitions, boot from a live CD �rst.

Using Command Mode
In command mode, you use single-letter commands to specify actions you want to take. Type m and press Enter to see a list
of the commands you can use.

Viewing the Partition Table
Use p to print the current partition table to the terminal from within command mode.

Deleting a Partition
Use the d command to delete a partition. You’ll be asked for the number of the partition you want to delete, which you can
get from the p command. For example, if I wanted to delete the partition at /dev/sda5, I’d type 5.

How to Use Fdisk to Manage Partitions on Linux

After deleting the partition, you can type p again to view the current partition table. The partition appears deleted, but fdisk
doesn’t write these changes to disk until you use the w command.

Creating a Partition
Use the n command to create a new partition. You can create a logical or primary partition (l for logical or p for primary). A
disk can only have four primary partitions.

Next, specify the sector of the disk you want the partition to start at. Press Enter to accept the default sector, which is the
�rst free sector on the disk.
Last, specify the last sector of the partition on the disk. If you want to use up all available space after the initial sector, just
press Enter. You can also specify a speci�c size, such as +5G for a �ve gigabyte partition or +512M for a 512 megabyte
partition. If you don’t specify a unit after the + sign, fdisk uses sectors as the unit. For example, +10000 results in the end of
the partition being 10000 sectors after its beginning.

System ID
The n command I just ran recreated the swap partition I deleted earlier — or did it? If I run the p command again, I’ll see that
the new /dev/sda5 partition is a “Linux” partition instead of a “Linux swap” partition.
If I want to change its type, I can use the t command and specify the partition’s number.
I’ll be asked for the hex code of the type. I don’t know it, so I can type L to view a list of hex codes.

How to Use Fdisk to Manage Partitions on Linux

It says 82 is the code for Linux swap partitions, so I can type that.

This doesn’t format the partition with the �le system you select. You’ll have to do that later with the appropriate mkfs
command.

Writing Changes
Use w to write the changes you’ve made to disk.
Use q if you want to quit without saving changes.

Formatting a Partition
You must format new partitions with a �le system before you can use them. You can do this with the appropriate mkfs
command. For example, this command formats the �fth partition on the �rst disk with the ext4 �le system.
sudo mkfs.ext4 /dev/sda5

Use the mkswap command if you want to format a partition as a swap partition:

How to Use Fdisk to Manage Partitions on Linux

sudo mkswap /dev/sda5

Fdisk contains a variety of other commands, including expert commands you can access by running the x command �rst.
Check out fdisk’s man page with the man fdisk command for more detailed information.

JOIN THE DISCUSSION

Chris Ho�man is a technology writer and all-around computer geek. He’s as at
home using the Linux terminal as he is digging into the Windows registry.
Connect with him on Google+.

Linux users create partitions to organize their data in an efficient manner. As easy as they are created, Linux partitions can be deleted to reformat a storage device and regain storage space.

In this step-by-step tutorial, you will learn how to delete a partition on a Linux system.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

  • A system running Linux
  • A user account with sudo or root privileges
  • Access to a terminal window / command line (Activities > Search > Terminal)
  • The fdisk command-line utility

Delete a Partition in Linux

Deleting a partition in Linux requires selecting the disk containing the partition and using the fdisk command-line utility to delete it.

Follow the steps outlined in the sections below to delete partitions in Linux.

Note: The fdisk command-line utility is a text-based partition table manipulator. It is used for partitioning and repartitioning storage devices.

Step 1: List Partition Scheme

Before deleting a partition, run the following command to list the partition scheme.

In our case, the terminal prints out information about two disks: /dev/sda and /dev/sdb . Disk /dev/sda contains the operating system, therefore its partitions should not be deleted.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

On the /dev/sdb disk, there is a /dev/sdb1 partition which we are about to delete.

Note: The number 1 in /dev/sdb1 indicates the partition number. Make a note of the number of the partition you intend to delete.

Step 2: Select the Disk

Select the disk that contains the partition you intend to delete.

Common disk names on Linux include:

Step 3: Delete Partitions

Before deleting a partition, back up your data. All data is automatically deleted when a partition is deleted.

To delete partition, run the d command in the fdisk command-line utility.

The partition is automatically selected if there are no other partitions on the disk. If the disk contains multiple partitions, select a partition by typing its number.

The terminal prints out a message confirming that the partition is deleted.

Note: If you wish to delete multiple partitions, repeat this step as many times as necessary.

Step 4: Verify Partition Deletion

Reload the partition table to verify that the partition has been deleted. To do so, run the p command.

The terminal prints out the partition structure of the disk selected in Step 2.

Step 5: Save Changes and Quit

Run the w command to write and save changes made to the disk.

After following the instructions in this tutorial, you should have learned how to delete a partition in Linux.

If you want to learn more about partition manipulation, we recommend reading our tutorial on creating partitions in Linux or if you are running NTFS partitions, check out our article on how to mount NTFS partitions in Linux.

Partitioning a disk allows you to create separate sections within the disk inorder to manage your data more efficiently. For example, in Windows you have C, D or E drives. There are various uses of partitioning a disk like:
a) Allows to boot different OS from same disk
b) Allocate separate partition to different users
c) Creating separate area for OS virtual memory swapping
In this post we will cover how to create disk partitions in Linux using the fdisk utility.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Prerequisite

  1. root user access
  2. free disk

The process to create disk partitions

Step1: List the disks

Use the lsblk command to list the exiting disks along with partitions. An alternate command is fdisk -l.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

The output shows that two disks sdb and sdc are both un-partitioned whereas sda is partitioned into sda1 and sda2. Think of sda disk as your hard disk which is partitioned into C(sda1) and D(sda2) drive. All the devices are listed in /dev directory. So the path of these disks are /dev/sda, /dev/sdb, /dev/sdc and so on.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Note: If you do not have a free disk like /dev/sdb or /dev/sdc, add a new virtual disk from your Virtual Box or VMWare software. As an alternate, you can run the below commands to add a disk temporarily.

This will add a disk /dev/loop1 whose size is 5Gb. Keep in mind that on the next reboot, the disk and the created partition(s) will be lost.

Step2: Specify the disk to partition

As the root user run the fdisk command by specifying the disk name as an argument. I will use the /dev/sdc disk for partitioning.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Step3: Request a new partition

Press ‘n‘ to request for a new partition. On pressing “enter” key, the system will ask for partition type, either primary or extended. Press ‘p‘ for primary and ‘e‘ for extended partition. The default is primary. maximum 4 primary partitions can be created. If you intend to create more then create 3 primary partitions and 1 extended partition. Then this extended partition can be used as a container to create more logical partitions can be created.

Step4: Specify partition number, first sector and last sector

Next, assign a partition number. Then specify the size of partition. For size you need to tell two things: first sector and last sector. The best way is to choose the default value of First sector (manual specification may result in wastage of sectors if you are not aware about the details). Simple press “enter” key to choose the default starting sector. F theor Last sector you can either specify the sector or give the exact size. Its better that you specify the size in Mb or Gb as shown in the example below.

So, here I choose the size to be 1Gb and the partition is created.

Step5: Specify the partition type

The default partition type is “Linux” as shown in the previous figure. If you want to change it to something else then press the ‘t’ key. If you don’t know the type code then use the ‘L’ key to see a list of all the available types.

Step6: Save the Partition Table

Use the ‘w‘ command to save the partition table. It is must to do this otherwise the partition will not be created.

Step7: Initiate kernel re-read of partition table

Use the partprobe command to force a re-read of the partition table

Now, re-run the lsblk command and you will see the partition.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Creating File systems

A partition can not be used until a file system is applied over it. There are different file systems but the most popular ones are xfs and ext4. mkfs command can be used for the same

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Mounting file system

Finally, to access the partition we need to attach it to the directory structure. So, first create a mount point, which is nothing but a directory using the mkdir command.

There are two ways to mount: manually or persistently

Manually mounting the file system

Use the below command to manually mount the device or partition at the mount point

and start creating or accessing files as shown below.

However, on the next reboot, the file system will not be automatically mounted. For a persistent mount as an admin you need to make the entry in the /etc/fstab file

Persistently mounting the file system

To permanently mount a device at a mount point add an entry for that device in the /etc/fstab file. /etc/fstab is a white space-delimited file with six fields.

The first filed is the device name, second is the mount point, third is the file system type, fourth field applies default mount settings. The last two fields are the dump flag and the fsck order.

Caution:

A wrong entry in /etc/fstab file my render the system unbootable. Hence, use the

command. If the command returns no error this means everything is perfect.

fdisk command is a free and open source utility widely available on Linux Based Platforms to Manage Disk Partitions Table. It understand different partitions table like BSD, GPT, MBR, SUN and SGI. fdisk command can be used to create a new partition, delete a partition, change the partition ID, resize the partition, move a partition and so on.

One can create a maximum of four primary partition using fdisk command and n number of logical partitions based on available disk size. Partition number from 1 to 4 are reserved for Primary partitions and then logical partition starts from number 5. fdisk command creates partition of minimum 40 MB size and maximum of 2 TB size.

What is Block Device

A Block device in Linux is defined as a file which represents devices like Hard Disk, CD-ROMs from where data can be read in fixed size blocks.

What is Partition

A Block device are usually divided into one or more logical disks which are known as partitions. The information of these partitions are stored in a table Known as Partition Table.

Synopsis

fdisk [-uc] [-b sectorsize] [-C cyls] [-H heads] [-S sects] device

fdisk -l [-u] [device. ]

fdisk -s partition.

fdisk -v

fdisk -h

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Fdisk Command Examples to Manage Disk Partitions in Linux

Example 1: How to Check fdisk Command Version

To check fdisk command version you need to use -v option as shown below. Here current fdisk version is 2.23.2 .

Example 2: How to List All Disk Partitions in Linux

If you want to List all the disk partitions then you need to use -l option with fdisk command as shown below. Here we have two disks /dev/sda and /dev/sdb but partitions are created only on /dev/sda disk. We have two partitions /dev/sda1 and /dev/sda2 available on /dev/sda disk.

-l : List the partition tables for the specified devices and then exit. More on fdisk Man Page.

Example 3: How to Check total number of partitions in a Disk

If you want to check all the partitions of a Specific disk then you can also use -l option along with the disk name. In this example we are checking all the partition information of /dev/sdc disk using fdisk -l /dev/sdc command as shown below.

Example 4: How to Delete a Disk Partition in Linux

To delete a disk partition you need to use command d as shown below. In this example we are deleting partition /dev/sdc1 using d command and then writing the partition table changes using w command.

Example 5: How to Create a Disk Partition in Linux

To create a disk partition you need to use n command as shown below. In this example we are creating partition on /dev/sdc disk using fdisk /dev/sdc command. Then selecting n command to create a new partition and selecting p to create it as a primary partition type. Here we are using default sector value i.e first sector value as 2048 and last sector value as 16777215 which will create partition on entire 8 GB disk and then writing the changes to partition table using w command.

Example 6: How to Check the Size of Disk Partition in Linux

To check the size of disk partition you can use -s option with fdisk command as shown below. In this example we are checking the size of /dev/sdc1 partition using fdisk -s /dev/sdc1 command. Here you will see size in number of blocks. So the total size of /dev/sdc1 partition is 8387584 blocks.

-s : Print the size (in blocks) of each given partition. More on fdisk Man Page.

Example 7: How to Verify Disk Partition table in Linux

Another useful command that you can use is v command to verify the disk partition table in Linux. In this example we are verifying /dev/sdc disk partition using v command and then writing the changes to partition table using w command.

Example 8: How to Quit fdisk Command without saving any changes

To quit fdisk command utility without saving any changes you need to use q command as shown below. In this example we have exited the /dev/sdc disk changes without saving it by using q command.

Example 9: How to Save and Exit fdisk Utility

If you want to exit after saving partition table information then you need to use w command as shown below. This command will save all the partition table changes and then exit out from fdisk command.

Example 10: How to Change Disk Partition ID to “Linux LVM” type

If you want to change disk partition ID to Linux LVM type then you need to use hex code 8e after selecting the partition through t command as shown below. In this example we are changing the partition Id of /dev/sdc1 partition from 83 to 8e to convert the partition from normal disk to LVM type.

Example 11: How to Change Disk Partition ID to “Linux Swap” Type

For creating a swap partition you need to change the partition type to Linux swap type by using hex code 82 as shown below. In this example we are changing partition ID of /dev/sdc1 from normal partition to Linux swap type.

Example 12: How to Disable/Enable Boot Flag(*) of a Partition

If you want you can also disable/enable boot flag of a partition using fdisk command in Linux. As you can see from below output, partition /dev/sda1 is currently marked as boot partition.

To disable the boot flag from /dev/sda1 partition you need to use command a under fdisk utility and then select the partition to disable the boot flag as shown below.

After writing the disk partition table changes if you check the /dev/sda1 partition status again then you can notice that star(*) marked is removed now. This confirms boot flag is now disabled. You can follow the same procedure to enable it again.

Example 13: How to Correct the Partition Table Order

If you want to correct the partition table order then you need to use the extra functionality available by using x command and then use f command to correct the partition table order. Since in this example our disk partition table is already in order so it won’t do any changes here.

Example 14: How to Disable/Enable DOS Compatibility Mode

If you want to disable/enable DOS compatibility mode from a disk partition then you need to use c command as shown below. In this example we are changing the DOS Compatibility mode of partition /dev/sdc1 using c command.

Example 15: How to Check all the available options of fdisk command

To check all the available options of fdisk command you need to use m command as shown below. This command will list all the available actions that can be done on disk partition using fdisk command.

Example 16: How to check Man Page of fdisk command

Man Page of fdisk command can be checked using man fdisk command as shown below.

Sometimes we stuck in a situation where we just have access to the terminal and need to delete partition, or you have stepped down in Linux, and your logical mind pushes you to delete the partition using a command.

But you don’t know how to delete the partition using the terminal, not a big deal, and I’m here to rescue you just follow the instruction, and your motive will be accomplished.

In this article, we will use fdisk command-line based utility to delete the partition.

Table of Contents

Prerequisites

  • Privilege account (sudo users)
  • Terminal
  • fdisk (Already preinstalled in Linux)
  • A partition should exist (If you think you can delete unallocated partition, then I suppose you might be wrong)

Delete a Partition in Linux using fdisk

To Delete partition first, we need to list out the available partitions and select the appropriate disk. For that, we can use the fdisk command to list out and delete the selected partition.

If you don’t know what is fdisk read these short descriptions and move ahead to delete partitions.

In short fdisk is a command-line utility tool to manage disk it allow you to view, create, delete, change, resize, copy and move partitions on a hard drive.

Note:- This below step will format your USB drive, so it requests you to make a backup of your USB drive else you may lose your valuable data.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Step 3: Delete Partitions using fdisk

We are one step back to delete partition, from the above measure we confirmed we had selected correct Disk.

In this step we will delete partition If you have important data, please make sure to take a backup and proceed next.

To delete partition type d or del command in the fdisk command-line utility followed by partition number in case of multiple partitions.

In my case, multiple partitions are available to /dev/sda because of that, and I have to pass partition number manually.

If you are thinking How to get the partition number, check the above output of p command and note it down.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Step 4: Verify changes

From the above command, we are able to delete selected partitions, To make sure whether the partition is deleted pass the p command in the fdisk command-line utility.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

We can see the change earlier total of 10 partitions was available in /dev/sda now it’s 9, hold on our work is not completed one last command is required to type.

Step 5: Save and exit

This is the last step to delete partition, after that you will not be able to revert changes.

Inside the same terminal type w command to write changes once the changes apply you will get the exit from fdisk utility tool.

This is a demo of the above explanation you can a look at the below output screen.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Wrap-up

That’s all my friend to delete the partition using the fdisk command-line utility. In case you need some assistance from my end, feel free to comment Down.

If you want to share some feedback or any topic feel free to comment down.

A man with a tech effusive, who has explored some of the amazing technology stuff and exploring more, While moving towards, I had a chance to work on Android Development, Linux, AWS, DevOps with several Open source tools.
One of my life mottos “Always be lifelong Students.”

The fdisk command utility is useful for viewing and editing hard drive or SSD partitions on Linux and its distributions such as Ubuntu. It is one of the most powerful tools for managing hard drive partitions on Linux. There are other tools available to do hard drive partition on Linux, but fdisk is one of the most commonly used.

fdisk is a menu-driven command line utility, and new users will find this tool confusing and difficult to use. fdisk is not a simple tool and should be used with caution. You need root access or sudo permissions to make changes to storage partitions.

Today in this article I am giving you a tutorial on how to create a partition on Linux using the fdisk command.

You can perform the following operations with the fdisk command.

  • Create a new partition
  • Manage storage space
  • Relocate the space on old drives.
  • Move data to a new hard drive

How to List Partitions

Before making any changes to the drive, first look at the basic structure of the drive and its partitions. To view all of the partitions on the drive, run the following command in the Linux terminal.

Partitions are displayed by their device name, e.g. B. dev / sda, dev / sdc etc. as you can see in the screenshot above.

If you want to view the partition on the particular hard drive, you need to use ‘-l’ followed by the device name as shown in the following command.

$ sudo fdisk -l / developer / sda3

This command will display the output as shown in the screenshot below.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Create partition:

To create a partition on a specific drive, you need to run the fdisk command with the device name as shown in the following command.

$ sudo fdisk / developer / Loop1

Once you are on the device you want to create a partition on, type M and hit Enter.

You will see the list as shown in the screenshot below. This is the list of single letter commands you can use to perform specific actions with fdisk.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

To create a partition, you must use the N command. Both logical and primary partitions can be created, where I will denote the logical partition and P denotes the primary partition.

By default, the first free sector on the hard drive is selected to create a new partition. You must also specify the last sector of the partition in the same way. You can also set the size of the partition according to your needs.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Delete partition:

In order to delete the specific partition, you need to use the D command. Use the P command to make sure which partition you want to delete.

When you trigger the D command, it asks for the partition number you want to delete. Just type in that partition number and hit enter. This will delete the selected partition.

Here’s how you can use the fdisk command to create and delete the partition on Linux. fdisk is a very useful command line tool when used efficiently and correctly. Make sure you have the back of the partitions that you will be using the fdisk command on. Good day!

Fdisk is a partition table manipulator for Linux. Linux partitioning with fdisk is quick and simple. We can view, create, modify and delete partitions using fdisk from the Linux command line. In this post i will explain how to manage Linux partitioning with fdisk. I will view existing partitions on system, add a new hard disk, create new partitions, modify partitions system ID and delete partitions.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Linux partitioning

1. Viewing existing partitions with fdisk

To list the existing partitions on your hard disk we use “fdisk -l” command. “Fdisk -l” lists the partition tables for the specified devices and then exit. If no devices are given, those mentioned in /proc/partitions (if that exists) are used.

Let’s see an example:

We can see, that this system has one disk /dev/sda the size of 16.1 GB. There are two partitions created on this disk:

  • /dev/sda1

This is the first partition which is a bootable partition (this is the * at “Boot” column). This partition starts at cylinder 1 and ends at cylinder 64. It takes 512000 Blocks on disk and has the ID 83 which means it is a Linux partition (seen in the “System” column).

  • /dev/sda2

This is the second partition and it starts at 64 cylinder and ends at 1959. It takes 15215616 Blocks on disk and has the ID 8e which means it is a Linux LVM partition.

We see the error “Partition 1 does not end on cylinder boundary.” This is not a big deal. Drives have not used cylinder boundaries since hard drives exceeded 8GB and BIOS uses LBA or large block allocation. But all the partition tools thru Linux & Win installs still followed cylinders so partition tools never changed the error messages.

We also see two more disks called /dev/mapper/vg_foo-LogVol01 and /dev/mapper/vg_foo-LogVol00 but these disks are actually mapped and located on /dev/sda disk (mind the “mapper” in the name). This is an additional layer on top of our /dev/sda disk. We can create this kind of mapped disk using LVM (Logical Volume Management). Since this is not the topic of this post we won’t lose time on this… I am preparing a separate post on Logical Volume Management on CentOS.

We will now add another hard disk to our system. Let’s check “fdisk -l” output again:

We can see that there is a new /dev/sdb hard disk the size of 1073MB without any partitions on it. In order to use the disk and create a filesystem we need to create a partition on it.

2. Creating a new partition with fdisk

To start linux partitioning for a desired hard drive we must enter a command “fdisk /dev/harddrive“.

Here is an example:

I think help is self explanatory. Since we want to create a new partition, we need to enter “n”.

We will be creating a primary partition this is why we entered “p”. One hard drive can only hold 4 primary partitions – to increase the number of partitions over 4, the 4th partition should be made an extended partition. If we continue…

Partition number is the /dev/sdbX number. Since this is the first partition on this hard drive, the partition number is 1 (/dev/sdb1). The first partition will start at the first cylinder (just press “Enter” and first cylinder is the default value) and the last cylinder may be entered as the number of cylinder or the size of partition. We have entered “+500M” so our partition will be 500MB large (mind the “+” in front of the partition size!!). You can also enter the size in Kilobytes (K) and Gigabytes (G).

No changes have yet been done to the disk and partitions until we write changes out. We can see what we did with the “p” key:

We can see a new partition on /dev/sdb hard drive. Now i want to create another partition on the same disk but with different partition system ID. Let’s try and do that:

OK. So we can now see two new partitions on /dev/sdb. We can see the start and end cylinder and the partition system ID. For cylinders (size) we used the default values by entering “Enter“. Both partitions ID is 83 which means it is a Linux partition. Let’s change the partitions system ID:

As we can see, we must enter “t” for partitionss system ID change. Next we must enter the number of the partition which ID we want to change – in our case this is partition number 2 (/dev/sdb2). Next we list the codes of partition’s system ID with “L” and choose the one we like. We have changed our /dev/sdb2 system ID to “Linux swap“. Let’s check if we successfully changed the ID:

We are now satisfied with the partitioning of the /dev/sdb hard drive and can write changes out by entering “w”. DO NOT FORGET to write changes out. If you hit “q” to quit, all changes are lost!

If we check for partitions, we see that our changes have been written out and our partitions exist. To start using them you still need to create a filesystem. This is not the topic of this post – i will try to cover it in a post about filesystem creationg on Linux.

3. Delete partition with fdisk

To start linux partitioning for a desired hard drive we must enter a command “fdisk /dev/harddrive“.

We enter “p” to print out the existing partitions on /dev/sdb hard drive. We can hit “m” for a quick list of fdisk help:

Again, help is self explanatory. To delete a partition we need to enter “d”.

After entering “d” we need to choose the partition number we want to delete. We need to delete partitions in the order they were created! We chose to delete partition number 2 (/dev/sdb2). We can now check partitions again:

We can see, that partition 2 (/dev/sdb2) no longer exists – it was deleted. Now we can delete the first partition too, if we choose to..

After making changes to with fdisk linux partitioning we MUST ALWAYS CONFIRM changes with “w” – write out. DO NOT FORGET TO WRITE OUT!

Last check to see, if changes were successfully applied with “fdisk -l“:

This was a quick guide on how to use fdisk for linux partitioning on CentOS 6. You can do alot more with fdisk regarding the partitions. Fdisk help can be very useful so do not hesitate to read it!

..and do not forget to always write your changes to partition changes with “w”!

The first thing that we need to know is there is no C drive or E drive in Linux. We will see something like /dev/sda, /dev/sdb, /dev/sdc, … etc. instead. The dev is short for device. The sd was short for Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) mass-storage driver.

  • /dev/sda – The first SCSI disk SCSI ID address-wise.
  • /dev/sdb – The second SCSI disk address-wise and so on.
  • /dev/sda1 – The first partition of disk sda
  • /dev/sdb1- The first partition of disk sdb

Understanding Disk Partition Tables

A partition table shows the partitions of a Hard Drive or any other storage device. There are two standards for the partition table:

  • Master Boot Record (MBR) – MBR also know as MS-DOS, is what us might call the original standard. MBR is still the most widely used partition table, it comes with two major limitations.
  • GUID Partition Table (GPT) – GPT came later. While MBR is still in use, the limitations are what led to the development of GPT. GPT overcomes the two limitations of MBR. We can have multiple primary partitions, and the drive sizes can exceed 2 TB.

The limitation of MBR:

  1. It does not allow us to create more than four main partitions. Those partitions are called primary partitions.
  2. Disk partitions may not exceed 2 TB.

Understanding Disk Partitions and Partition Numbering

To install an operating system on a hard drive, we have to divide it into distinct storage units. We call those storage units partitions. Under MBR – which is the default on virtually all Linux distributions, there are three different types of partitions – Primary, Extended, and Logical.

  • Primary – Holds the operating system files. Only four primary partitions can be created.
  • Extended – Special type of partition in which more than the four primary partitions can be created.
  • Logical – Partition that has been created inside of an extended partition.

With MBR any partition that is not explicitly created as an extended or logical partition, is a primary partition.

Any unallocated space is shown as Free. While it may be free, we cannot use it in that state. As far as the system is concerned that free space does not exist until it is partitioned.

Names without a trailing digit refer to the whole disk, while names with a trailing digit refer to a partition of that whole disk. By convention, SCSI disks have a maximum of 16 minor numbers mapped to a single disk.

Thus, for each whole disk, there is a maximum of 15 partitions per disk because one minor number is used to describe the entire disk (for example /dev/sda), and the other 15 minor numbers are used to refer to partitions for that disk (for example /dev/sda1, /dev/sda2, etc).

Understanding Disk Extended Partition

By tagging a partition as an extended partition, it is possible to create many more partitions under the extended partition. Those partitions are called logical partitions, and there is effectively no limit to the number of logical partitions that us can create. This means us can have three primary partitions and one extended partition and then create numerous partitions from there.

Check disk Partition with fdisk command in Linux

The best way to check disk partition in Linux is using fdisk command. It is a text-based utility for viewing and manipulating disk partitions. Typing fdisk -l at the command prompt will list all of the partitions on your Linux system.

You can also use the fdisk command to create, delete, or resize partitions. For more information on using fdisk, consult the man page by typing: man fdisk at the command prompt.

parted -l and fdisk -l can both list disk partitions on Linux.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linuxHow to use fdisk to manage partitions on linuxHow to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

  • Model – Model of the storage device.
  • Disk – Name and size of the disk.
  • Sector size – Logical and physical size of the memory. Not to be confused with available disk space.
  • Partition Table – Partition table type (msdos, gpt, aix, amiga, bsd, dvh, mac, pc98, sun, and loop).
  • Disk Flags – Partitions with information on size, type, file system, and flags.

Check disk Partitions with ls command in Linux

Here we can see that there are 3 partitions on disk sda.

  • # ls -l /dev/sda*
  • brw-rw—- 1 root disk 8, 0 May 24 08:09 /dev/sda
  • brw-rw—- 1 root disk 8, 1 May 24 08:09 /dev/sda1
  • brw-rw—- 1 root disk 8, 10 May 24 08:09 /dev/sda2
  • brw-rw—- 1 root disk 8, 11 May 24 08:09 /dev/sda3

Check disk partitions with cat /proc/partitions in Linux

/proc/partitions file also has much important info about disk and disk Partitions.

  • major minor # blocks name
  • 8 0 17774160 sda
  • 8 1 1052226 sda1
  • 8 10 208845 sda2
  • 8 11 10490445 sda3

What is the difference between a partition and a filesystem?

A partition is a section of a disk that is allocated for use by an operating system. A filesystem is a method for organizing and storing files on a partition.

What is the purpose of partitions?

Partitions are used to separate different types of data. For example, you might have a partition for your operating system and another partition for your personal files. Partitions can help to improve performance and stability by isolating different types of files. For example, you can use a separate partition for your operating system files and another partition for your personal data files. This way, if one partition becomes corrupted, the other partition will not be affected.

What is the difference between primary and extended partitions?

Primary partitions are the first four partitions on a disk. Extended partitions are any partitions after the fourth partition. You can create up to four primary partitions or three primary partitions and one extended partition.

How do I delete a partition in Linux?

You can use the fdisk command to delete partitions in Linux. First, you need to find the device name of your disk. You can do this by running the lsblk command. Next, you need to run the fdisk command with the device name as an argument. Then, you will need to enter d to delete a partition. Finally, you will need to enter w to write the changes to the disk.

1. View All Disk Partitions:The first thing to do before doing any thing with the disks and partition is to view basic details about all available partition in the system. The below command is used to list the partitions on your system and see their /dev names. For example /dev/sda, /dev/sdb or /dev/sdc.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

2. View Partition on a Specific Disk: Below command is used to view all disk partitions on device /dev/sda.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

3. View all fdisk Commands: To see all the command which are available under fdisk command you can use /dev/sda partition with fdisk command.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Note: This will prompt for a command. Type m for seeing all the operations which can perform on /dev/sda. After pressing m you will get:

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

4. Create a Hard Disk Partition: For this go inside the hard drive partition that is the /dev/sda partition, and use the following command:

Now you have to type n to create new partition and then type p for making a primary partition and e for making an extended or logical partition depending on the type of partition to make.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Run w command to write the changes and reboot your system.

5. Delete a Hard Disk Partition: To delete a partition for the hard disk and free up space occupied by that partition for example /dev/sdb. Go to the command menu using following:

and then type d to go to the delete partition menu. It will prompt the partition number you want to delete(type the number).

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

Run w command to write the changes and reboot the system.

fdisk یک ابزار خط فرمان است که بهترین ابزار برای پارتیشن بندی یک هارد به حساب می آید.وقتیکه یک توزیع لینوکسی را توسط واسط گرافیکی نصب میکنید در اصل با آن واسط کاربری دارید از fdisk استفاده میکنید فرض کنید یک هارد جدید به سیستم اضافه کرده اید با اجرای دستور زیر میتوانید فهرست تمامی پارتیشن های هارد اول را مشاهده کنید

برای توضیحات تکمیلی در ارتباط با نام گذاری دیسک ها پیشنهاد میکنم مطلب آشنایی با نام گذاری دیسک ها در لینوکس را مطالعه کنید.
برای شروع به پارتیشن بندی ابتدا دستور fdisk را به همراه نام هارد دیسک جدید بصورت زیر اجرا کنید:

وقتی دستور فوق را اجرا کنید یک اعلان مانند زیر نشان داده میشود که بیان میکند برای نمایش help باید کلید M را وارد کنید

کلید M را بزنید تا فهرستی از تمام دستورهای fdisk را مشاهده نمایید. در زیر مهمترین آنها فهرست شده اند:

با اجرای دستور fdisk -l جدول پارتیشن های موجود روی سیستم نشان داده میشود وقتی با دستور N یک پارتیشن جدید ایجاد میکنید و یا با دستور D یک پارتیشن را حذف میکنید تا زمانیکه W را اجرا نکنید هیچ تغییری ذخیره نخواهد شد و برای خروج بدون ذخیره تغییرات باید Q را بزنید. هر نوع سیستم فایل مانند ext3 یک عدد منحصر به فرد را دارد بطور مثال پارتیشن نوع ext3 عدد ۸۳ و پارتیشن swap عدد ۸۲ را دارد. برای مشاهده این اعداد باید دستور L را اجرا کنید.

فرق گزینه L که بصورت fdik -l بکار رفته با دستور L ی که جلوی اعلان Command m for help استفاده کردید این است که L اولی برای نمایش جدول پارتیشن ها و L دومی برای نمایش اعداد معادل هر کدام از نوع سیستم های فایل ها استفاده شده است.

اگر دستور P برای چاپ کردن جدول پارتیشن ها را اجرا کنید خروجیش همانند زیر خواهد بود

یعنی که هیچ پارتیشنی وجود ندارد.

ایجاد پارتیشن

برای ایجاد یک پارتیشن جدید باید ۶ گام را دنبال کنیم.

گام اول

جلوی اعلان Command (m for help) دستور o را بزنید تا جدول پارتیشن ساخته شود

گام دوم

حالا دستور n را بزنید تا اعلان command action ظاهر شود.

گام سوم

از بین گزینه های e و p باید p را نوشته و Enter بزنید.

گام چهارم

عدد ۱ را برای ایجاد شدن اولین پارتیشن primary انتخاب کنید.

گام پنجم

باید شروع sector را انتخاب کنید در داخل پرانتز عددی – default است که میتوانید همین عدد را وارد کنید.

گام ششم

باید انتهای سکتور را انتخاب کنید در داخل پرانتز عددی – default است که میتوانید همین عدد را انتخاب کنید یا اینکه سایز دلخواهتان را بر حسب K یا مگابایت M انتخاب کنید( دقت کنید که حروف K و M می بایست بزرگ نوشته شوند) برای ساخت پارتیشن های دیگر مراحل دوم تا ششم را تکرار کنید برای ساخت پارتیشن extended در جلوی اعلان command action باید دستور e را وارد کنید و برای اعمال تغییرات روی هارد باید دستور w را وارد کنید. در این مرحله هارد شما آماده است و فقط باید پارتیشن های خود را فرمت کنید برای اینکار باید از دستور mkfs استفاده کنید در صفحه خودش به طور کامل آموزش لازم ارائه شده است

حذف یک پارتیشن

برای حذف یک پارتیشن جلوی اعلان Command (m for help) باید از دستور d استفاده کنیم.
وقتی جلوی اعلان دستور d را میزنید اعلان partition number ظاهر میشود که درون پرانتز تعداد پارتیشن ها را نشان میدهد اگر ۴ پارتیشن داشته باشیم تعداد ۴ پارتیشن وجود دارد و برای پاک کردن پارتیشن اول باید جلوی اعلان partition number عدد یک را بزنید و یا برای پاک کردن پارتیشن چهارم عدد ۴ را بزنید. دقت کنید اگر دستور w را وارد نکنید هیچ تغییری در جدول پارتیشن ها نوشته نمیشود.
اگر میخواهید پیش از پاک کردن پارتیشنی بدانید که کدام عدد متعلق به چه پارتیشنی است میتوانید جلوی اعلان Command (m for help) دستور p برای چاپ جدول پارتیشن استفاده کنید.

Creating partitions via the command line interface is simple and quick, also having the kernel acknowledge the partition table has been modified and having the partition scheme take effect without having to reboot your workstation/server and without having to use the parted utility.

The first step to this guide is to see what hard drives are available and what hard drive you would like to partition. If you have multiple hard drives in your machine, fdisk will report them to you as shown in Figure 1. There are two hard drives shown in Figure 1 “sda” and “sdb”.

The fdisk command with the -l qualifier (“fdisk -l“) will display the current partition tables along with the hard drives that are attached to your workstation/server as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1: fdisk -l output.

Once you have determined which hard drive you want to partition you can issue the fdisk command followed by the hard drive (“fdisk /dev/sda“), in this article we will use the first hard drive (sda).

Figure 2: Partitioning the first hard drive (sda).

Once fdisk has been executed your command prompt will change to “Command (m for help):” and you are ready to examine and partition your hard drive. The commands that are supported by fdisk can be displayed by pressing the “m” character followed by the return key. The commands that we will be using are “p” for printing the partition table, “n” for creating a new partition and “w” for saving the changes and exiting.

Displaying the current partition table

The first step before we start to partition our hard drive is to get a sense of what disk space we have available and what the current partition table looks like. The command we will use from fdisk is the “p” character which will print the current partition table as show in Figure 3.

Figure 3: Current partition table.

The output shown in Figure 3 shows that we have 1809 cylinders available (9729 ? 7920 = 1809) and with this we can use the calculation (1809 * 16065 * 512 = 14879531520 Bytes) which is roughly about 14 gigabytes. (The 16065 and 512 were taken from the “Units =” statement and may differ on your system, so you may be require to substitute them if necessary).

Creating a new partition

The next step is to create our new partition. For our example, we will create a partition of type “Linux” with the partition size of one gigabyte. The command that we will use to create our new partition is the “n” character, we will then be asked to select what cylinder to start from (I recommend sticking with the default) and the size of the partition as shown in Figure 4.

Figure 4: Creating a new partition with the size of one gigabyte.

Once the partition has been created, using the “p” character we can display our new partition table which will show the newly created partition, as shown in Figure 5.

Figure 5: Newly created partition (sda6).

Writing the new partitions to disk

Now that the partition has been successfully created you can save the changes by issuing the “w” character which will write the new partition table to the hard disk as shown in Figure 6.

Activating the newly created partition

Once the new partition table has been written to the hard disk it is possible to have the kernel read the new partition table without the need of rebooting. The first step is to create a mount point for the new partition, in our example we will use “/media/newpart” and also use the command “partprobe” to have the kernel re-read the partition table, as shown in Figure 7.

Figure 7: Creation of a new mount point and a re-read of the partition table.

Now that a new mount point has been created and the partition table has been re-read by the kernel you can now format the partition and place a file system of your choice on it. (ext2, ext3, ResierFS etc) In our example we have chosen the ResierFS file system as shown in Figure 8.

Figure 8: Formatting the newly created partition.

Once the partition has been formatted with the file system of your choice you can mount and use your newly created partition, Figure 9 shows the newly created partition being mounted.

Figure 9: Mounting the newly created partition.

Final thoughts

Once you have mounted your newly created and formatted partition you can store your files on the partition without having any problems, you may also add your new partition to the “/etc/fstab” file so that the partition will be mounted after every reboot.

The latest version of this article, and future updates, will be located at the Computer Underground.

  1. /usr/src/linux/Documentation/ide.txt
  2. man fdisk
  3. man lilo
  4. man lilo.conf
  5. man sfdisk # for scripting fdisk
  6. man hdparm # side issue — you might find this useful for other things.

Introduction to Fdisk

The purpose of this article is to explain how we use fdisk manually to initialize IDE hard drives instead of using Disk Druid that comes with Red Hat 6.0. Why do you want to do this? Well, it can be one way of many ways to solve the problem where you need to have your bootable files for Linux before the 1024th cylinder. There are many ways to solve this problem, but for this article, we are only going to concentrate on redoing the number of heads and cylinders for your IDE hard drive. For further information about why you can do this, read the file “/usr/src/linux/Documentation/ide.txt” on your RedHat 6.0 computer (assuming you have the source code for the kernel installed).

Fdisk is a tool that allows you to change the partitioning of your hard disks. For example, you can make DOS, Linux, FreeBSD, and many other types of partitions.

Disk Druid is a tool, used by Red Hat 6.0, to set up partitions and to initialize hard drives when you install Red Hat 6.0. The problem is, I never found out how to use Disk Druid to initialize a second hard drive after RedHat 6.0 is installed.

There are also extra functions in fdisk. Some of them can be used to initialize your new hard drive for use with linux, which requires you to have 1024 or less cylinders. For most of the people these functions will never be needed, but let’s say that you have your computer with Linux on it and decide to add an extra hard disk. The easiest and fastest way to initialize it is to use fdisk.

Having 1024 cylinders or less is not an issue before you start using very large hard disks. The brief reason is, you can remap the heads and cylinders using LBA to make it so you reduce the number of cylinders and maximize the number of heads. In general up to 10G bytes there shouldn’t be any problem, but with the fairly low prices of large hard disks today, more and more people go past the 10G bytes size and this is when having 1024 or less sectors becomes an issue. Also, there are other simple ways to get around the 1024 cylinder problem without remapping your hard drive (like using a partition for /boot) but we won’t get into that here.

How to use Fdisk to initialize your new hard disk

There are two steps you need to do. First, find out the number of heads, cylinders, and sectors your hard drive has in the LBA setting in your BIOS. Then, use fdisk to you remap the hard drive.

First, turn off your computer, install the second hard drive, turn your computer on, and before it boots your operating system, get into your computers BIOS. Usually pressing the delete key, the F1 key, or perhaps some other key, gets you into the BIOS of your computer before it gets ready to start booting your operating system. It is recommended that you get professional help when your install another hard drive.

Then, in your BIOS you should be able to find the LBA settings for the hard drive. Sometimes if you have a feature in your BIOS which lets you auto-detect your IDE devices, it will let you know what the LBA settings for your hard drives should be. Get the LBA settings for the cylinders for your new hard drive. The LBA settings for the sectors and heads should be: heads=255, sectors=63.

Second, you want to start fdisk with one of the following commands after booting your Linux operating system: After you choose which command is appropriate, you will have the following prompt: Pressing ‘m’ will result in the following help menu: At this point you have to enter ‘x’, which will lead you to the extra functionality menu: Pressing ‘m’ again will show you the options in this menu: Notice that you have ‘c’ for changing the number of cylinders, and ‘h’ for changing the number of heads. These are the options we are going to use. The idea is to maximize the number of cylinders and minimize the number of heads. In order to do this, enter ‘c’ at the Expert menu and you will get the following prompt: At this prompt you should enter the number that the LBA shows for cylinders in the BIOS. After you enter the number of cylinders, you will be back at the expert menu. Press ‘h’ and this prompt will ask you for the number of heads: You can leave the number of heads at 64, since this is the lowest you can go. After you enter 64, you are back at the Expert prompt. At this point you need to save the changes by entering ‘w’. After that the fdisk will exit and you are done.

Actually, before typing “w”, I might enter “r” or return you to the main menu, and then enter “p” just to see what you have done. If the number of heads is 255 and the sectors are 63, and the number of cylinders is correct, then you are done and you can enter “w”.

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linuxLes Chatfield (CC BY 2.0)

How much do you need to know about disks to successfully manage a Linux system? What commands do what? How do you make good decisions about partitioning? What kind of troubleshooting tools are available? What kind of problems might you run into? This article covers a lot of territory – from looking into the basics of a Linux file systems to sampling some very useful commands.

Disk technology

In the beginning days of Unix and later Linux, disks were physically large, but very small in terms of storage capacity. A 300 megabyte disk in the mid-90’s was the size of a shoebox. Today, you can get multi-terrabyte disks that are the size of a slice of toast.

Traditionally, files resided within file systems that resided in disk partitions that were themselves simply slices of disks. This organization still dominates today, though servers in large data centers often take on an entirely different structure.

This simplistic view still works for many systems, but these days there are lot of complexities that make disk management harder in some ways and easier in others. A file system might be virtual – no longer residing on a single disk and more complex to manage, but far easier to resize as needed. In fact, the entire system could be virtual. And what we might manage as if it were a single disk could actually be some portion of a very large disk array.

Disk management

Sysadmins generally have to deal with many issues when it comes to managing disks. These include:

  • Partitioning disks
  • Creating file systems
  • Mounting file systems
  • Sharing file systems
  • Monitoring free space within file systems
  • Backing up (and sometimes restoring) file systems

The reasons to partition a disk include:

  • protecting some file systems from running out of space (e.g., you may want the OS partition to be separated from home directories or applications to keep it from being affected if users’ files begin to take up far an excessive amount of disk space)
  • improving performance
  • allocating swap space
  • facilitating maintenance and backups (e.g., you might be able to unmount /apps if it’s not part of / and you might want to back up /home more frequently than /usr)
  • more efficient (and targeted) fsck
  • maintaining (particularly on test systems) multiple operating systems
  • reserving enough disk space for file system expansion
  • sharing select file systems with other systems

Partitioning commands

For most Linux servers, partitioning is done before the servers are deployed. On the other hand, you might add disks at some later time or hold back some significant amount of free disk space for future use.

To make changes or verify partitions, enter a command such as fdisk /dev/sda to start fdisk interactively and then type m to see a list of the things that you can do with the fdisk command.

As you can see, the fdisk command provides a lot of functionality. The partitions that you set up may look something like this configuration in which four partitions have been set up on a single disk – /dev/sda.

Examining disk space and disk partitions

There are a number of excellent commands for examining disk partitions. The df command is one of the most commonly used commands for reporting on disk space usage. With the -h option, the df command displays the measurements in the most “human-friendly” format and that is, in fact, what the “h” is meant to imply. As you can see in the example below, the measurements are displayed in kilobytes, megabytes or gigabytes depending on the sizes rather than all using the same scale.

The pydf command (think “python df” as it’s really a python script) also provides a very useful disk usage display showing mount points and cute little illustrations for how full each partition is.

The parted command displays partition information in a different format:

The lsblk (list block devices) command illustrates the relationship between disks and their partitions graphically and also supplies the major and minor device numbers and mount points.

The fdisk command reports more details on disk partitions and uses very different numbers. You can also use fdisk to create or delete partitions, list unpartitioned space, change a partition type, or verify the partition table.

The sfdisk command is similar to fdisk, but makes some partition manipulation activities easier to perform.

NOTE: A mebibyte (MiB) = 2 20 bytes or 1,048,576 bytes.

The cfdisk command can also be used to display or manipulate disk partitions.

Monitoring disk performance

The iostat command can display statistics that illustrate how disks are performing, including how heavily they are being used. It also displays important measurements that show how busy the CPU is and how much of its resources are used for types of work. The system described below is idle more then 95% of the time. More importantly for our focus on disks, the %iowait (CPU waiting on disk IO) is very low. This would not be true if the disk were unusually busy and disk IO were a bottleneck.

Probably one of the most informative commands for looking at disk health is smartctl (part of smartmontools). While the command generates a lot of output, it provides valuable measurements that might help you pinpoint disk problems, particularly once you get used to working with its extensive output.

In this article, we will look at how to extend/increase a standard partition online (no downtime) without losing data and we will use the root partition (/) as an example.

How To Increase / Extend The Root (/) Partition In Linux Using The fdisk Utility

NOTE 1: Take a backup of your system if you can. If it a VM on Azure or any other cloud services provider, take the snapshot of the OS disk

NOTE 2: The reason for the backup is to roll back if anything goes wrong. If your filesystem is healthy, it is very rare for an issue to occur. These steps are the steps I usually take and have used in a production environment before and was successful. So, no worries.

NOTE 3: When you use the “d” option to delete the partition and use the “n” option afterward, what you are doing is actually creating a partition table and remains in memory and not deleting the whole partition, so no worries.

Step By Step Process

1. verify the root (/) filesystem size

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

2. verify the root(/) filesystem type

You can see that the root filesystem type is “xfs”

3. Initialize /dev/sda using the fdisk utility

enter the letter “p” to print all the partitions on sda

enter the letter “d”to delete a partition

enter the partition number 3 or press enter to leave it at default which is 3

NOW, ENTER THE LETTER “n” TO RECREATE THE PARTITION TO YOUR DESIRED SIZE

enter the letter “p” to make it a primary partition, yours might be secondary depending on the number of partitions you have. A disk can have only four partitions as primary partitions

enter the partition number which is 3 or press enter to leave at default which is 3

press the enter key again to get to the last sector

enter the new partition size or press the enter key to use the whole available space on sda. In this scenario, we are using the whole available space

enter “no” not to remove the signature

enter the letter “w” to write or save the changes and press enter

4. verify the partition increment

5. resize the filesystem,

If the filesystem is xfs, use the command,

If you get the error above, use the command,

If the filesystem is ext (2,3,4), use “resize2fs” instead

6. you may also run the command below to make immediate changes to the kernel

7. verify the filesystem new size

How to use fdisk to manage partitions on linux

You can see that the size has increased.

Tutorial Video On How To Extend Root Partition Using fdisk In Linux

Your feedback is welcomed. If you love others, you will share with others.

• Create a new partition using fdisk. Set the partition’s system id as “82” (Linux Swap / Solaris).

Note: You should be familiar with the Linux fdisk command to learn this lesson. Click the following link to learn how to use the Linux fdisk command.

Command (m for help): n
Command action
e extended
p primary partition (1-4)
p
Partition number (1-4): 1
First cylinder (1-783, default 1):
Using default value 1
Last cylinder or +size or +sizeM or +sizeK (1-783, default 783): +512M

Command (m for help): t
Selected partition 1
Hex code (type L to list codes): 82
Changed system type of partition 1 to 82 (Linux swap / Solaris)

Command (m for help): w
The partition table has been altered!

Calling ioctl() to re-read partition table.
Syncing disks.

• Create the swap filesystem on the raw partition using “mkswap” command.

]# mkswap /dev/sdd1
Setting up swapspace version 1, size = 518156 kB

• Enable swaping on the swap partition created now.

• Update /etc/fstab to make use the new swap partition whenever the system is rebooted.

LABEL=/ / ext3 defaults 1 1
LABEL=/boot /boot ext3 defaults 1 2
devpts /dev/pts devpts gid=5,mode=620 0 0
tmpfs /dev/shm tmpfs defaults 0 0
proc /proc proc defaults 0 0
sysfs /sys sysfs defaults 0 0
LABEL=SWAP-sda3 swap swap defaults 0 0
# Beginning of the block added by the VMware software
.host:/ /mnt/hgfs vmhgfs defaults,ttl=5 0 0
# End of the block added by the VMware software
/dev/sdd1 swap swap defaults 0 0

Note: To disable swaping on a partition, use “swapoff” command.

Enable file based swaping

We can create file based swap space (similar to Windows pagefile), if there is not available partition, but space is available in already existing partitions.

• To enable file based swap space, you must create a file using “dd” command.

]# dd if=/dev/zero of=/root/swap bs=1024 count=524288
524288+0 records in
524288+0 records out
536870912 bytes (537 MB) copied, 4.98139 seconds, 108 MB/s

• Overlay a swap file system on the binary file created using the above command.

]# mkswap /root/swap
Setting up swapspace version 1, size = 536866 kB

• Enable swaping on the swap file created now by using “swapon” command.

• Update /etc/fstab to make sure that the swap file is available to the OS after a reboot.

LABEL=/ / ext3 defaults 1 1
LABEL=/boot /boot ext3 defaults 1 2
devpts /dev/pts devpts gid=5,mode=620 0 0
tmpfs /dev/shm tmpfs defaults 0 0
proc /proc proc defaults 0 0
sysfs /sys sysfs defaults 0 0
LABEL=SWAP-sda3 swap swap defaults 0 0
# Beginning of the block added by the VMware software
.host:/ /mnt/hgfs vmhgfs defaults,ttl=5 0 0
# End of the block added by the VMware software
/dev/sdd1 swap swap defaults 0 0
/root/swap swap swap defaults 0 0

How to turn find my ipad on or off

You can find your iPad on a map if this feature is turned on

  • University of Texas at Arlington
  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email
  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email
  • iPad
  • Macs

What to Know

  • Go to Settings > your name > Find My, and then toggle the Find My iPad switch to turn the feature on and off.
  • Toggle on Send Last Location to send Apple the iPad's location data so you can find the device even if it's off or the battery dies.
  • Track a lost iPad: Go to iCloud.com, select Find iPhone > All Devices, and choose your iPad. Select Play Sound, Lost Mode, or Erase iPad.

This article explains how to turn the Find My iPad feature on or off. Turning the feature on allows you to track the device. You’ll need to turn the feature off before selling your iPad or giving it away. Instructions cover iPadOS 14 through iOS 9.

How to Turn Find My iPad On and Off

Access your iPad's settings to enable or disable Find My iPad.

Open the Settings app.

In the Settings pane, tap your name.

Tap iCloud in iOS 12 and earlier. (In newer iPadOS versions, select Find My instead and jump to Step 5.)

In the Apps Using iCloud section, tap Find My iPad.

Turn on the Find My iPad toggle switch to enable the feature or turn off the toggle switch to disable it.

For Find My iPad to work, Location Services must be turned on. In the Settings app, go to the Privacy area and confirm Location Services is turned on or turn it on.

Turn on the Send Last Location toggle switch to send Apple the iPad's location information when the battery is low, so you can find it even if its battery ran down and it is turned off.

When this feature is turned off and the iPad is powered down or not connected to the internet, you won't be able to see a location.

How to Use Find My iPad

A benefit to Find My iPad is that you don't need an iPad to use it. Here's how to use it to track a missing tablet:

Open a web browser and go to iCloud.com.

Tap Find iPhone.

Use Find iPhone to locate any device set up on Find My, including desktop and laptop computers, Apple Watch, iPhone, and iPad.

In the default Find My iPad screen, click the All Devices drop-down arrow and choose a specific device.

When using an iPad to locate another iOS device, hold the tablet in landscape mode so that the list appears on the side of the screen.

The device screen zeroes in on the location of that device and offers these options:

  • Play Sound: Plays a sound on the iPad to locate the tablet when you're sure it's somewhere within hearing range.
  • Lost Mode: Locks the iPad so that nobody else can access it. You can also type a message to appear on the iPad screen. Use this option if you left the iPad and want to protect it from being used. This also tells anyone that finds it your phone number, email address, home address, or other contact information so that they can return it to you.
  • Erase iPad: Erase the iPad when you know you will not get it back and want to clear it for security reasons. Another reason to erase an iPad is to reset it without plugging it into a computer if it keeps freezing up.

You can manage every device on your Apple ID from this site.

What Is Find My iPad?

The Find My iPad option on the iPad is one of the most important features on the tablet. It can locate an iPad using GPS or locate an iPad that’s hiding under a couch or beneath a pillow. To locate a missing device, use an iPhone or a computer to play a sound on the iPad. Find My iPad has other features, such as Lost Mode, and you can completely erase the iPad remotely if someone steals it.

If you plan to sell your iPad or give it to a friend, turn off the Find My iPad feature and then reset the iPad to its factory default settings. Also, turn off Find My iPad before you have any repairs done to it.

Для включения iPad используйте верхнюю кнопку. Для выключения iPad можно использовать верхнюю кнопку (вместе с любой из кнопок громкости на некоторых моделях) или приложение «Настройки» .

Если iPad работает некорректно, попробуйте его перезагрузить. Для этого сначала выключите, а затем включите iPad. Если проблема сохранилась после выключения и включения устройства, попробуйте принудительно перезагрузить его.

Выключение и включение iPad (модели с Face ID или Touch ID в верхней кнопке)

Если на Вашем iPad нет кнопки «Домой», выполните следующее.

Включение iPad. Нажмите и удерживайте верхнюю кнопку до появления логотипа Apple.

Выключение iPad. Одновременно нажмите и удерживайте верхнюю кнопку и любую из кнопок управления громкостью, затем перетяните бегунок.

Выключение и включение iPad (модели с кнопкой «Домой»)

Включение iPad. Нажмите и удерживайте верхнюю кнопку до появления логотипа Apple.

Выключение iPad. Нажмите и удерживайте верхнюю кнопку, затем перетяните бегунок.

Либо, чтобы выключить любую из моделей, откройте «Настройки» > «Основные» > «Выключить», затем перетяните бегунок.

Find My iPad is a reliable option for iPad users as it helps to locate your device if it’s stolen or missing. However, if you want to perform different things, such as factory reset, you have to disable this option. But the situation becomes complicated when you don’t remember your Apple ID and password. Don’t worry as we have got your back. If you want to turn off Find My iPad without a password, read this blog for a quick solution.

Part 1: Can I Turn Off Find My iPad without Password

To turn off Find My iPad, you are asked to enter the Apple ID and password. But in case you have forgotten your credentials, you can use different third-party applications to reset your device details or remove your Apple account. But some tools can be a bit risky. Therefore, we have mentioned a tool for you that will remove Apple ID without causing any issues. Don’t forget to read about this software in the next section.

Part 2: How to Turn Off Find My iPad without Password

Turning off Find My iPad without a password is no longer a difficult task if you have a reliable tool with you. You can easily remove your Apple account to turn off the “Find My”.

But the question is, which program will help to achieve this goal? You can use Tenorshare 4uKey for this purpose as it is easy to use and doesn’t require any technical skills. It will help you erase your Apple ID without any complicated steps.

Follow the guide below for more details.

Download and install Tenorshare 4uKey on your computer. Then run 4uKey. Click on “Unlock Apple ID”.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Connect your device to the computer and then choose “Start Remove” to continue.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

If your device is running iOS 11.4 or later, you need to make sure that you’ve enabled the screen lock and two-factor authentication.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

And you need to download the firmware package. When it is downloaded successfully, 4uKey will start removing the Apple ID.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

When the Apple ID has been successfully removed, you will find the Find My is also turned off.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Note: If you’re running iOS 11.4 and below, you need to reset your device first. You just need to follow our guide to complete the process.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Part 3: FAQs about Find My iPad

Find My iPad is not a new feature, but some users don’t know what it is and how you can locate it. If you don’t have any idea about this function, don’t panic because after readings these answers, you will also be able to find a solution on how to turn off Find My iPad without an iCloud password.

Q1. Where is Find My iPad on My iPad?

  • Go to your iPad settings. On the sidebar, you will find your profile, click it and select the iCloud option.
  • Now scroll down a bit and search for the “Apps Using iCloud” section.

You will find the “Find My iPad” option there.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Q2. How Do I Find the Last Location of My iPad?

In case you have lost your iPad, you can use the Find My iPad option to locate your device. To do that, we read the steps below.

  • Sign in to iCloud using your ID and password. You can also use the iCloud.com/find link on the web. In case you are using iPhone or iPad, you can directly open the Find My iPhone option.
  • Now, select the device to view the location. It will probably show you the location on the map.

In case the device is near your area, you will hear a sound. In this way, you will easily find your device. However, to complete this procedure, make sure that the Find My [device] option is enabled.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Q3. Can I Find My iPad If It Has Been Reset?

If your device is stolen and your data has been reset, then it’s not possible to locate your device using the Find My iPad option. The reason is that the eraser command will remove all your details, including your phone’s settings, which will not allow any tool to track the location.

Q4. How Do I Restore My iPad without Turning off Find My iPad?

Here are the steps that you can follow to restore MY iPad if you don’t want to turn off Find My iPad option.

  • First, you have to connect your iPad with your PC.
  • Now sign in to iCloud using your Apple ID.
  • After that click, the “All Devices” option and choose the offline device. After that, you have to select “Remove from Account.”
  • In the last step, select the “Delete” button to remove the account.

If this method didn’t work for you, then you can try a third-party application to recover iPad settings.

Conclusion

Are you worried about how to turn off Find My on an iPad without a password? This guide is definitely a quick fix for all your Find My iPad issues. Besides, you don’t have to remember the password to turn off this option. However, we recommend you try a third-party application, such as 4ukey, so you don’t have to worry about any technical errors. It’s a simple application and works amazingly for all devices.

Find My iPad/iPhone is an essential feature of an iPad that allows the users to lock, track and remotely access their iOS device whenever it is stolen or lost. This feature must always be turned on in order to offer your iPad an extra level of security. On the other hand, it may sometimes be necessary to turn off this feature, especially when you want to reset your device. Turning off Find My iPad is easy when you remember the password. But what if you don’t know? No worries!! This guide has solutions to your concern of “how do I turn off Find My iPad without password”.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Read on to learn three effective ways to disable Find My iPad without password.

Part 1: How to Turn Off Find My iPad without iCloud Password on iOS 7/8/9?

If you are an iOS 7 user and want to know the workable ways on how to remove Find My iPad activation lock without previous owner or iCloud password, follow the below steps:

  1. Step 1: Turn on your iPad and go to “Settings.”
  2. Step 2: Scroll down and then click on “iCloud.”
  3. Step 3: Click on “Delete Account” and tap to disable “Find My iPad.” Now, a new window will pop up that will ask you to enter your iCloud password. Here, you need to press and hold the “Power” button and shut down the iPad.
  4. Step 4: Turn your iPad on and go to “Settings”> “iCloud Settings.”

Step 5: Click on “Delete Account” and disable “Find My iPad.”

How to turn find my ipad on or off

That’s how to turn off Find My iPad without iCloud password on iPad with iOS 7/8/9. Continue reading to disable Find My iPad on other iOS versions.

Part 2: How to Turn Off Find My iPad without Password on iOS 10, iOS 11, and iOS 12?

So, how do I turn off Find My iPad if you’re using iOS 10-12? Follow the below steps:

  1. Step 1: Go to “Settings” on iPad and click on “iCloud.”
  2. Step 2: After clicking on “iCloud,” you will be asked to enter the password. Simply enter any random number and hit the “Done” button.
  3. Step 3: After entering a random number in the password field, you will be notified that the password is incorrect. Click on the “OK” button.
  4. Step 4: Tap on the “Cancel” button at the top left corner of the screen, and then the iCloud section will reappear.

Step 5: Now, click on “Account” and tap on the “Delete” button. After this, you will see the main iCloud section once again, and the Find My iPhone feature will automatically be turned off now.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

It was this hassle-free and straightforward to solve the issue of how to turn off Find My iPhone on iPad without password on iOS 10-12.

Part 3: How to Turn Off Find My iPad without Password on All iOS versions?

If your concern is how to remove Find My iPad activation lock without previous owner, then look no further from UltFone Activation Unlocker. On top of all, disabling Find My iPad is hassle-free and quick with this tool. It supports a wide variety of devices that involves iOS 9 to iOS 15 on all iPhone/iPad models

Whether you could not activate your iPad without a password or you are encountering an activation error, the UltFone Activation Unlocker will help you fix the issue “can’t turn off Find My iPad to restore” with no technical skills required.

Here’s how to turn off Find My iPad without Apple ID password on iOS 14 using UltFone Activation Unlocker:

Step 1 Launch the UltFone Activation Unlocker and select “Turn off Find My iPhone” from the main interface. Now, connect your iPad to a computer.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Step 2 Once the iPad gets recognized, follow the onscreen instructions to start the process.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Step 3 After that, disable the “Find My iPad” option. For this, you need to:

  • Wait for a while and copy the serial number to verify FMI Status.
  • Wait for a while again to remove your Apple ID.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

That’s how to turn off Find My iPad from the computer.

Part 4: Find My iPhone on iPad FAQs

1. What Is Find My iPhone on iPad?

Find My iPhone is an inbuilt feature of Apple devices that allows an iDevice user to track their lost Apple device. So, in case you lost your iPad, you can easily use the Find My iPhone/iPad app on another device to check the last known location of your iPad. This feature of the Apple device makes it easy for the user to monitor their iPad even remotely. In simple words, Find My iPhone will help you to locate your lost or stolen iPad.

2. What happens when you turn off Find My iPhone?

Find My iPhone comes with a handful of capabilities that are excellent to have in any device. If you turn off or disable Find My iPhone on your iPad, you’ll no longer be able to avail the benefits it offers. It can moreover make your iPad even more challenging to recover.

Conclusion

So, how do you turn off Find My iPad without a password? We hope that this guide has helped you disable Find My iPad without a password on your device. If you need a quick solution and your iPad is running an iOS 13 or later, we highly recommend using UltFone Activation Unlocker. It offers a highy success method to turn off Find My iPad without password or when your iPad disabled Find My iPad without password.

Some apps require that you turn on Location Services

  • University of Texas at Arlington
  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email
  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email
  • iPad
  • Macs

Much like a smartphone, the iPad’s location-tracking sensors are fairly accurate at pinpointing your location. An iPad that can connect to a cellular network also includes an Assisted-GPS chip to help determine the location, but even without GPS, it works almost as well using Wi-Fi triangulation.

However, while Location Services can come in handy in many situations, you should disable it if you’re concerned about apps knowing your location. Another reason to disable Location Services on the iPad is to save some battery power.

These instructions apply to iPadOS 14, iPadOS 13, and iOS 12 through iOS 8.

How to Turn Off Location Services for All Apps

Location services are probably turned on for your iPad, so here's how to shut off location tracking for all your apps at once:

Open the iPad’s Settings by tapping Settings.

Scroll down and tap the Privacy menu item.

Tap Location Services at the top of the screen.

Tap the toggle switch next to Location Services to off/white to disable the feature.

When asked if you're sure, tap Turn Off.

With Location Services off, apps won’t be able to see your location, and you won’t be able to use services like Find My Friends.

How to Temporarily Disable Location Services

You can quickly turn Location Services off and on through the Control Center on your iPad.

To do so, swipe down from the upper-right corner of the screen and tap the airplane icon to turn on Airplane Mode. While this method will shut down Location Services for all your apps in just a moment or two, it also stops your phone from taking or making calls and connecting to networks via cellular or ​Wi-Fi.

How to Manage Location Services for One App

While it is easier to disable Location Services for all the apps at once, you can also toggle the setting off for single apps so that they can't identify your location.

Every app that uses location services asks your permission first, but even if you allowed it before, you can still disallow it.

Go to Settings > Privacy > Location Services on your iPad.

Scroll down through the list of applications and tap whichever one you want to disable (or enable) Location Services for.

You have two or three options to define when Location Services can use your data. Tap the one you want to use.

  • Never means the app can't use your location at all.
  • While Using the App means the app can see and use your location when the app is open.
  • Always means that the app can read your location whether the app is open or not.

The Always choice isn't always available, but you should avoid using it on apps you don't trust.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

The Find My option on your iPhone, iPad, and Mac is incredibly useful for locating your device when it gets misplaced, lost, or stolen. It lets you view your device’s location, remotely lock it, or erase the data, and more. Therefore it’s highly recommended that you always use Find My on your Apple devices. However, in some instances, you might want to disable it. So, let’s learn more about how to turn off Find My on iPhone, iPad, and Mac.

Why Do I Need to Turn Off Find My?

There are a few different reasons why you might need to disable Find My on an iPhone, iPad, or Mac. For instance, it is recommended that you do this before selling your device or passing it on to a new owner.

You might want to deactivate Find My iPhone or Find My Mac because it can allow someone to track you. This is because anyone who knows your Apple ID log on details can use the Find My feature to locate the devices that you’re logged into.

What Happens When You Disable Find My?

If you disable Find My on your iOS or Mac, it will become nearly impossible to trace or recover your device if it is lost or stolen. Find My helps you locate your phone by viewing it on a map, playing a sound on it, remotely wiping the data, locking it, etc. It also includes Activation Lock that prevents others from using your device.

So, turning off the Find My feature will eliminate these options, and it won’t be easy to find your device. Of course, if you’re selling or giving away your iPhone, iPad, or Mac, you should disable the Find My feature. Along with turning off this feature, you can also add or remove devices from Find My.

How to Turn Off Find My iPhone on your iPhone

  1. Open the Settings app.
  2. Tap on your name and then tap on Find My.
  3. Tap on Find My iPhone ( On an iPad, tap “Find My iPad”).How to turn find my ipad on or off
  4. Toggle OFF Find My Phone.
  5. Enter your Apple ID password and tap on Turn Off.How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to Turn Off Find My on Mac

  1. Open System Preferences.
  2. Click on Apple ID.How to turn find my ipad on or off
  3. Click on Checkbox for Find My Mac.How to turn find my ipad on or off
  4. Enter your Apple ID password.How to turn find my ipad on or off
    How to turn find my ipad on or off

Summing Up

We hope this guide has equipped you to disable Find My on iOS and macOS. You can also remotely remove Find My iPhone using iCloud.

You may also like to read these:

How to turn find my ipad on or off

iGeeksBlog has affiliate and sponsored partnerships. We may earn commissions on purchases made using our links. However, this doesn’t affect the recommendations our writers make. You can read more about our review and editorial process here.

If you are an iPhone/iPad user then it is pretty much sure that you should know about Find My iPhone feature. This is one of the best feature in iDevice that helps users keep their devices safe and unauthorized access can’t happen.

But there are so many users who manage to turn on the feature but don’t know how to turn off Find My iPhone. Today, I will be showing you how do you turn off Find My iPhone using different methods.

What is Find My iPhone?

Apple’s Find My iPhone is a tool used to help you track down your iPhone/iPad/iPod no matter what happens to it. Whether you’ve lost it at a corner of your bedroom or it’s been stolen right out of your hands, the Find My iPhone can be very useful.

Why Need to Turn Off Find My iPhone?

Sometimes, you may need to disable Find My iPhone because:

  • You iPhone battery dies so fast when this app tracks where your device is.
  • Find my iPhone disables you to restore your iPhone when you really want do that because you forgot the passcode.
  • You need to delete data on your iPhone and gave it to your friend and relative but Find My iPhone prevents you from wiping.

Way 1: How to Turn Off Find My iPhone Using iCloud

If you don’t wish to keep “Find My iPhone” feature turned-on on your device then you can easily turn it off. All you need to know is the Apple ID and password that is associated with the device and then follow the given process accordingly. You will be able to turn off Find My iPhone within few minutes. Make sure to have an internet connection on your computer.

Steps on how to turn off Find my iPhone from Computer by iCloud:

    First type www.iCloud.com on the URL bar of any web browser.

Next enter the same Apple ID and Password that has been used in the iPhone.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Then select “All Devices” option that you can see on the top of the screen and also select the iPhone which you want to turn off “Find My iPhone” feature.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

You will be thrown to new windows screen where you will see the selected device with few features beneath it.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Now click on “Name of the iPhone” which you can see on the top of the screen. This time the drop down will came with “X” just beside the device name. Simply, click on “X’ icon.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

After that you will see a confirmation messages on the screen. Click on “Remove” option.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

You have successfully turned off Find My iPhone from your device.

Way 2: How to Turn Off Find My iPhone from Settings?

If you have the physical access on the iPhone then you can turn off Find My iPhone/iPad in few minutes. This method also requires the Apple ID and Password that is linked to the iPhone whose Find My iPhone feature you are going to turn off.

Steps to turn off Find My iPad/iPhone on devices:

  • First go to Settings of your iPhone/iPad.
  • Next tap on your name (which you can see on the top of the screen) and click on iCloud option from the list.

Then scroll down the screen until you don’t see Find My iPhone.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Way 3: How to Turn Off Find my iPhone without Password

Somtimes, you might forget password to turn off Find My iPhone. If you no longer remember the password of the Apple ID that is linked to your device then this method will definitely help you. There are many users who ask, how to disable Find My iPhone without Apple ID or password. Here, we’ll walk you through an ideal way – Tenorshare 4uKey, a great tool which can help you disable Find My iPhone without password free-hassle.

Tenorshare 4uKey widely supports devices which runs almost all iOS versions. The most important thing you need to keep in mind that your iPhone wil be restored to factory settings.

First of all, download and install Tenorshare 4uKey on your Windows/Mac. After that, you’ll see an interface saying “Unlock Apple ID”. Click it.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Then you need to connect your iPhone to computer with usb cable. Then make your iPhone trust the computer.

After your phone is recognized by 4uKey, there are 2 situations to turn off find my iPhone: 1. for iOS 11.4 and earlier; 2. for iOS 11.4 and later, click Start Remove to go on.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Set screen lock and Two-Factor Authentication. If you have already set them up, download the firmware package.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

After that, 4uKey willl start to remove Apple ID from your device. The process will take no less than 2 minutes.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Now, your iPhone has been successfully removed form Find My/Apple ID. You can restore and activate your iPhone while Unlock with Passcode.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Conclusion

I hope you have learned how to turn off Find My iPhone using different methods. All the methods are easy to use and work perfectly fine, just use the one that is convenient for you. Also remember to use Tenorshare 4uKey. Comment below, if you have any query.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Activation Lock is a form of theft protection designed to prevent people from taking, wiping, and restoring your iPhone or iPad without your express permission. It does this by using your Apple ID. Before an iPhone can be activated with a new account, it needs to be removed from yours. If you’re selling or giving away your iPhone or iPad yourself, you’ll need to sign out of iCloud first. If you’re buying or receiving an iPhone or iPad, you’ll need to make sure it’s not locked to someone else’s Apple ID first. If anything goes wrong and you can’t get through Activation Lock… well, read on!

Update: There have been some reports of iPhone 7 and iPhone 6s showing Activation Lock that can’t be removed. If that happens with you, you’ll need to contact Apple to have it taken care of.

How to turn off Find my iPhone on iPhone and iPad

Activation Lock is tied to the Find my iPhone (or iPad) app on iOS. If you have your iPhone or iPad in your hands, this is the fast way to turn off Activation Lock.

Note: You can also reset your iPhone to erase all content and settings. Do that, and you’ll be asked to remove Find my iPhone — and Activation Lock — as part of the process.

  1. Launch Settings from the Home screen.
  2. Tap your Apple ID banner.
  3. Tap on iCloud.
  4. Tap Find My iPhone.How to turn find my ipad on or off
  5. Switch Find My iPhone to Off.
  6. Enter your Apple ID password to confirm.
  7. Tap Turn Off.How to turn find my ipad on or off

You’ll then need to sign out of iCloud on the iPhone or iPad if you plan on selling it.

How to turn off Activation Lock with Apple

If all else fails, Activation Lock is turned on, and you can’t turn it off, you still have an option:

You can either call AppleCare or go to your local Apple Store and present proof of ownership. From there, Apple will confirm that it is indeed your iPhone or iPad and, if satisfied, remove the Activation Lock for you.

How to erase an iPhone, iPad, or Mac with the Find My iPhone app

You can no longer simply remotely turn off Find My iPhone. From a separate device or the Find My iPhone app, the only way to remove an iPhone or iPad from Find My iPhone is by erasing it. Here’s how to do it using the Find My iPhone app.

  1. Launch the Find My iPhone app from any iOS device. If you don’t already have it you can get it for free in the App Store – Download Now
  2. Sign in with your iCloud account, if prompted.
  3. Tap on the device you’d like to erase.How to turn find my ipad on or off
  4. Tap on Actions at the bottom of the screen.
  5. Tap Erase on the bottom righthand corner of the screen.
  6. Tap Erase to erase all contents and settings from the device.How to turn find my ipad on or off

Boom. Your iPhone or iPad has now been essentially reset to factory settings. This is a good tool if you’ve completely lost your device and are totally sure you’re never getting it back. It’s also a good idea to do if you’re selling or giving away your device. The only issue is that, if you did not sign out of iCloud first, then Activation Lock still may be active on the phone.

How to erase an iPhone, iPad, or Mac with iCloud.com

  1. Click Find My iPhone on the iCloud website, from any web browser on your Mac or Windows PC.
  2. Sign in to your iCloud account when prompted.
  3. If you’re not immediately taken to Find My iPhone, click on Find My iPhone from the Home menu.
  4. Click on All Devices at the top of the Find My iPhone screen.How to turn find my ipad on or off
  5. Click the device you’d like to erase.
  6. Click Erase (device) on the upper right of the screen, beneath the picture of your device.
  7. Click Erase.How to turn find my ipad on or off

The device will now be wiped of its content and settings. Make sure you’re sure that you’re sure you want to erase your iPhone, iPad, or Mac, because when it says “Erase,” it means “Erase.” All of it. If you plan on selling your device, note that erasing it via Find My iPhone may not necessarily disable Activation Lock. You’ll need to sign out of iCloud on the device to fully disable Activation Lock.

i want to restore my ipad but it wants to turn off the find my ipad.I went to icloud on my device but it does not take my apple id password as correct but when i want to sign in app store it says it is correct. Same password same account but it takes it as incorrect. What should i do?

Posted on Dec 25, 2014 1:26 AM

All replies

Loading page content

Page content loaded

User level: Community Specialist

Hello there, kramermichalis.

To turn off Find My iPad, there are a few options available to you. The following Knowledge Base article offers a few solutions you can try:

Remove an iOS device or Mac by turning off Find My iPhone

Remove a device from Find My iPhone by turning off Find My iPhone on the device.

  • On an iOS device: Go to Settings > iCloud, then tap to turn off Find My [ device ].

  • On a Mac: Choose Apple menu > System Preferences, click iCloud, then deselect Find My Mac.

Remove an iOS device or Mac on which you can’t turn off Find My iPhone

If you can’t turn off Find My iPhone on the device, turn off the device so it goes offline, then remove it from Find My iPhone on iCloud.com.

  1. Turn off the device you want to remove.

  2. Sign in to icloud.com/#find on another computer with your Apple ID (the one you use with iCloud).

    If you’re using another iCloud app, click the app’s name at the top of the iCloud.com window, then click Find My iPhone.

  3. Click All Devices, select the offline device, then click Remove from Account. If you don’t see Remove from Account, click All Devices again, then click the Delete button next to the device.

    If the device comes online again, it will reappear in Find My iPhone. If your device reappears, turn off Find My iPhone on the device (follow the instructions above for removing a device by turning off Find My iPhone), or if it’s an iOS device and you no longer have it, follow the instructions below for removing an iOS device you no longer have.

It’s no secret that “Find My iPhone” is one of the most useful features of an iOS device. It lets users remotely locate their iPhone/iPad in case it goes missing or gets stolen. You can even virtually wipe your entire data if you’re unable to locate the device. The truth is “Find My iPhone” has helped many users find their lost devices and save hundreds of dollars. However, there are many situations when you’ll need to turn-off this feature. For instance, if you’re planning to sell your device to someone else, it’ll be important to disable “Find My iPhone” first. Similarly, if you’re leaving your device at the service center, you’ll be asked to disable the feature as well. So, in this article, we are going to discuss how to turn off Find My iPhone from the computer so that you can disable the feature without any hassle.

Part 1: What’s the Difference between Find My iPhone and Activation Lock?

Many iOS users get confused between Find My iPhone and Activation Lock. It’s worth noting that these two are slightly different from each other. “Find My iPhone” is a feature that’s designed to help users locate their stolen/lost iDevices. However, “Activation Lock” is an iOS feature that restricts unauthorized people from accessing your device (when it gets stolen or lost). Basically, when your iPhone or iPad goes missing, the ‘activation lock’ will automatically get enabled if “Find My iPhone” is turned on. So, when you want to sell your device to someone else or leave it at the service, it’ll be crucial to disable “Find My iPhone” so that the activation lock doesn’t get activated.

Part 2: How to Turn off Find My iPhone from Computer on iCloud.com [For Both Windows and Mac Computer]

The easiest way to turn off “Find My iPhone” from the computer is to sign into your iCloud account. Whether you’re using Windows or Mac, you can easily log into your iCloud account and disable “Find My iPhone” with one click.

Follow these steps to turn off Find My iPhone from a PC using iCloud.com.

    1.Open the web browser on your PC and go to iCloud.com. Sign in with your iCloud credentials to get started.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

That’s it; “Find My iPhone” will be disabled on the selected devices and you’ll be able to sell it to someone else easily.

Part 3: How to Turn off Find My iPhone on Mac Computer

Alternatively, you can also use your Macbook to directly disable “Find My iPhone”. This method will be helpful for users who have configured “Find My iPhone” for their Macbook as well. Like an iPhone or iPad, it’ll be crucial to disable the feature before you give away the Macbook to someone else.

Let us walk you through the step-by-step procedure to turn off “Find My iPhone” on your mac OS.

  1. 1.On your Macbook, go to System Preferences and select your Apple ID.
  2. 2.Then, uncheck the Find My Mac option.
  3. 3.Enter your Apple ID password and click Continue to complete the process.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

So, that’s how to turn off “Find My iPhone” from your Mac computer.

Part 4: How to Turn off Find My iPhone from Computer without Password

Now, whether you use a Windows system or a Macbook, you’ll need your Apple ID credentials to turn off Find My iPhone. But, there are many situations when the users don’t know the password and can’t disable the feature using any of the above-mentioned methods. If that’s the case, we recommend using UltFone Activation Unlocker to turn off “Find My iPhone”. It is a professional Activation Unlocker that’s primarily tailored to help iOS users bypass the activation lock on their iPhone. However, it also had a dedicated “Turn Off Find My iPhone” feature that’ll allow you to disable Find My iPhone without using the password.

Some of the key features of UltFone – Activation Unlocker include:

  • Remove activation lock from an iPhone/iPad/IPod Touch
  • Turn off “Find My iPhone”, even if you don’t know the Apple ID password
  • Supports all iOS versions (even the latest iOS 14)

So, if you’ve also forgotten the password of your Apple ID, here’s how to directly turn off “Find My iPhone” using UltFone – Activation Unlocker.

    Step 1 Install and launch UltFone – Activation Unlocker on your PC and click Turn Off Find My iPhone.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

So, that’s how to turn off “Find My iPhone” from a computer.

Bonus Tips: Turn off Find My iPhone on Phone with Password

Another way to turn off “Find My iPhone” is to directly use your iDevice itself. If you have your iPhone near you, you won’t have to sign into iCloud at all. Simply follow these instructions to disable the feature instantly.

  1. 1.On your iPhone/iPad, go to Settings and tap your name at the top of the screen.
  2. 2.Navigate to iCloud>Find My iPhone.
  3. 3.Then toggle the Find My iPhone switch off to disable the feature. You’ll be asked to enter your iCloud credentials. Enter your Apple ID & Password and then press Turn Off to complete the process.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Sum up

It doesn’t matter if you want to sell your iPhone to a friend or leave it at the service center for a while, it’ll be imperative to turn off “Find My iPhone” beforehand. When it comes to disabling the feature, you can utilize any of the above-mentioned solutions to get the job done. But, if you’ve forgotten the Apple ID password, it would be better to use a professional tool such as UltFone Activation Unlocker. It’ll allow you to turn off Find My iPhone from a computer without the password and remove the Apple ID at the same time.

Are you among those seeking the best alternative on how to remove find my iPad activation lock without previous owner? You need to read the entire part of this article. Each section contains some great solution you need to easily remove activation lock on your device.

Part 1: Can You Remove Find My iPad Activation Lock without Previous Owner?

You can remove iPad activation without the need for previous owner intervention. However, you will need to learn how to remove find my iPad activation lock without the previous owner in the USA. That’s what this post covers. Check other parts of this article to gain insights on how to remove your iPad activation lock.

Part 2: How to Remove Find My iPad Activation Lock without Previous Owner-Using 4MeKey

Tenorshare 4MeKey is a great software Tenorshare develops for iOS device users. This software was created to help people bypass iCloud activation lock on their device. It offers people access to a locked device without any need for an Apple ID or password!

More importantly, the software can guard your Apple device against the illegal usage of your phone. Once you unlock your device with the software, you can easily log in to your Apple device with a new Apple ID through App Store or iTunes.

This software standout for its ability to help users :

  • unlock iCloud without Apple ID/Password
  • remove previous iCloud activation lock
  • create new Apple login credentials

If you’re someone who desires to know how to remove find my iPhone activation lock on ipad without the previous owner, then follow the guide below :

A Video Tutorial: How to Remove iCloud Activation Lock

Download Tenorshare 4Mekey. This is the essential step you must take to unlock your iOS device.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

After you’ve downloaded and install the software, the next action is to jailbreak your device.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Immediately after the jailbreak is completed, you can start to remove the iCloud activation feature on your device. To do so, click on the start remove button and confirm the device info.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Wait for few minutes for the process to be completed.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Part 3: How to Remove Find My iPad Activation Lock without Previous Owner-DNS Bypass

If you chose to learn another way on how to remove find my iPad mini 4 activation lock without previous owner, then you may consider DNS bypass tool. The DNS bypass tool is an online tool that makes people watch video, browse websites, play games, chats with friends, listen music and radio on their iCloud Locked device. It helps people change their device DNS to unlock the activation lock on their device.

When you use it, you will be able to manually change the DNS address from your manual WIFI settings. Also, this tool offer you the chance of enjoying almost all the features and apps on your iOS device.

To use the tool for your iCloud activation unlock purpose, kindly follow the procedures below :

  • On your device, choose your LANGUAGE and COUNTRY from the menu.
  • Click “Proceed” to enter the Wi-Fi settings page. If asked to connect to Wi-Fi, look for the “I” symbol closed to the Wi-Fi tab.
  • Now, disconnect the Wi-Fi network, go to “Connection Settings” and click “Forget this Network”.

Now, click the “I” and enter a DNS server IP address to bypass the iCloud activation lock. You can choose from the list below according to your location:

  • USA: 104.154.51.7
  • South America: 35.199.88.219
  • Europe: 104.155.28.90
  • Asia: 104.155.220.58
  • Australia and Oceania: 35.189.47.23
  • Other continents: 78.100.17.60

The disadvantage of using this software include :

  • No guarantee that the service will unlock your device.
  • Failure to access all the features of your iPhone after unlocking your device.
  • Compatibilty issue as it doesn’t work for all versions of iOS especially the recent ones.

Part 4: How to Remove Find My iPad Activation Lock without Previous Owner-Online Service

You will be needing online unlock services to accomplish this goal. This service is often provided by companies that send your cell unlock code via email.Company like AppleiPhoneUnlock is worthy to mention in this scenario.

Appleiphoneunlock.uk has several reviews that indicate the quality of their service delivery to customers. The company offers a 100% Money Back guarantee to dissatisfied customers. You can chat their customer support for more information regarding their service.

Part 5: How to Remove Find My iPad Activation Lock with Previous Owner?

You can remove activation lock with the help of previous owner by following the steps below :

  • Visit the iCloud official site and enter the Apple ID. Or the owner does that on his device.
  • Tap on the Find my iPhone web app and launch it.
  • Click the All Devices button at the menu bar.
  • You or the person should select the devices needed to be deleted.
  • Select Remove from Account.
  • This method works dor people that erased their own devices.

Final Words

How to remove find my ipad activation lock without previous owner for free is not hard to achieve. More importantly, when you use 4mekey, you can easily achieve the goal. People using the software testifies to its uniqueness and ability to remove all blockages on iOS devices.

The Find My app helps you quickly locate a lost Apple device or keep tabs on friends and family, but there are times when you need to disable it, revoke access for specific devices, or stop sharing your location.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

With Apple’s Find My app on iPhone, iPad, and Mac, you can track the location of a lost phone, find missing luggage with an AirTag, or keep tabs on close friends and family members (with permission). We recommend you keep it on for those reasons, but there are times when you’ll need to shut it off.

Perhaps you’re selling your device and need to disconnect it from your Apple ID before wiping it. Maybe you just want to purge your device of the services (and people) who can track your location. Whatever the reason, you can shut down the Find My app in a few easy steps.

Turn Off Find My Services

If you need to quickly shut everything down, including location and device tracking, head to Settings > [your name] > Find My > Find My iPhone. Tap the switch next to Find My iPhone, then enter your Apple ID password to disable the service. For iPad users, the instructions are the same but the options will say Find My iPad instead.

You should notice two other options on this screen. Find My network, which will allow your device to be tracked even when it’s offline. Send Last Location will automatically send your location when the battery is low. If you don’t want to turn everything off, you can instead turn one or both of these options off to minimize when your location is tracked.

Remove Individual Devices

There are several ways to remove a specific device from the Find My app. On mobile, open Settings and tap your name. Scroll down to view the different devices, select the one you wish to remove, then select Remove from Account to disconnect it from your Apple ID. You can also remove devices from the Find My app under the Devices tab. Tap a device and select Remove This Device from the pop-up menu to disconnect it from your account.

Another way to do this is from the iCloud website, where you select Find iPhone, click your name in the right-hand corner and choose Account Settings. Select the device from the My Devices section and click Remove.

Mac users who have Find My set up can go to System Preferences > Apple ID and click Options next to Find My Mac. You can then turn off Find My Mac and Find My network.

How to turn find my ipad on or off Nicole Campbell

If you purchased a second-hand iPad and you find that the Activation lock is enabled on the iPad, you will not able to access or use any of the apps and features of the iPad. In most cases, the best solution is just to contact the previous owner and ask them to remove the iCloud Activation lock.

If this is not an option for you, the following solutions will help you remove Activation Lock from the iPad without contacting the previous owner. Let’s begin by defining exactly what activation lock is.

What is Activation Lock?

Activation Lock is a security measure introduced by Apple to discourage the theft of devices. It is often automatically enabled when you enable the “Find my” feature on your iPhone, iPad, iPod Touch, Apple Watch, AirPods, and Macs with the T2 security chip.

When the Activation lock is enabled on the iPad, no one will be able to set up the iPad without the iCloud password. In this way, if the iPad is stolen, the thief will be unable to use the iPad. When they try to set up the iPad, they will be asked to enter the Apple ID details of the connected account. Apple will not show the full email address of the connected account, but the iPad owner will get an automated email saying Activation Lock is still enabled.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

If the previous owner of the iPad you purchased didn’t give you their password and you are not able to contact them, the following are some of the options you have:

About 3rd-Party Online Activation Lock Removal Services

There are a lot of iCloud Activation removal tools that you could use online. These tools typically require that you provide the iPad’s IMEI number and pay a small fee for the service.

But you should be very cautious when using these tools as many of them are scams, only out to get the $30 and may not be able to unlock the iPad at all. Many will even claim the service is just $30, only for them to contact you a few days later asking for more money. They will do this a few times, before sending you an email saying it is impossible to unlock the iPad with a refund in the form of a voucher for their service.

Even if an online iCloud Activation tool has wonderful reviews, treat it with suspicion, and only use it if you are certain that it can help you.

The Tool that Truly Works

The best tool to use to remove iCloud Activation from your device when you can’t reach the previous owner is iToolab UnlockGo. This tool is easy to use and highly effective, allowing you to unlock the iPad and get access to the iPad in a matter of minutes.

But before, we take a look at how you can use UnlockGo to remove iCloud activation, let’s first of all stake a look at some of its most useful features. They include:

  • You can use it to very easily remove the iCloud Activation Lock without the password.
  • You can log into the iTunes store with a new Apple ID, and enjoy all functions except for calls, iCloud, and cellular, once the iCloud lock is unlocked. .
  • It is useful when you want to remove the iPad’s passcode whether the iPad’s passcode is a 4-digit/6-digit passcode or Face ID and Touch ID.
  • It is very easy to use, allowing you to unlock the iPad in a matter of minutes.

To use this program to remove the Activation lock from your iPad, download and install the program onto your computer, and then follow these simple steps:

📍 The “Find My” is a very useful feature designed to help you locate your Apple devices. Previously known as “Find my iPhone”, it was renamed with the release of iOS 13, since it now works with your iPad, AirPod, Apple Watch, and MacBook.

You can use “Find My iPhone” from computer or any other Apple device, simply log in with your Apple ID to iCloud and you will be able to find all of your Apple products on a map. Devices that have their “Find My iPhone” turned ON and are linked to your Apple ID will show up as a green dot, devices that are currently offline will show a grey dot for the last known location. Tap on the name of each device to play a sound, put your device into lost mode, or erase your device.
Pretty neat, isn’t it? So how does this work?

If your device got misplaced, forgotten, or, god forbid, stolen, log in to your iCloud account and click “Find My” tab. You will see a screen that looks like this:

How to turn find my ipad on or off

To see your device on the map, click “Lost mode”. If you do not have a passcode set up, you will be asked to come up with one.
DO NOT LOSE this passcode, you will need it to turn off the “Lost mode” on the device. You will also be prompted to include your contact phone number and a message that would appear on the lost phone:

How to turn find my ipad on or off

This is how your device will look like on the map:

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Here is a very useful User guide by Apple that would guide you through the whole process.

As useful as it sounds, there are times when you need to have “Find My iPhone” disabled:

🔹 To reset or restore your device, to bring it to out-of-the-box condition.

🔹 When bringing it for service to Apple store technicians.

🔹 Before you sell it ot give it away.

The reason behind turning off “Find My iPhone” tool is a feature called Activation Lock. Its purpose is to prevent a potential thief from reseting the stolen device to factory settings and being able to use it. The phone will not accept another Apple ID, except for the old one. Activation Lock is enabled automatically when you turn on “Find My iPhone”.

Before restoring a backup or selling your device to someone, you’ll need to disable Activation Lock by turning off Find My iPhone.

There are two ways to turn off Find My iPhone:

📱 From your device:

💻 From your computer

How to Turn OFF Find My iPhone

📎 iOS 13, 14 and 15

On your iPhone, iPad, or iPod Touch, go to Settings > tap on Your Name.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Click on “Find My”, then click on “Find my iPhone”.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Disable “Find My” by sliding the switch to the left.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Once prompted, enter your iCloud password and tap “Turn Off”.

Disable Find My iPhone

📎 iOS 12 and earlier versions

On your iPhone, iPad, or iPod Touch, navigate to Settings > tap on Your Name > iCloud and look for “Find My iPhone” at the bottom.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Disable “Find My iPhone” by sliding the switch to the left.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Once prompted, enter your iCloud password and tap “Turn Off”.

Disable Find my iPhone from computer

  1. Log-in to your iCloud account.
  2. Go to Account Settings.
  3. Go to My Devices and remove the device from the list by clicking a blue cross icon, like so:

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Now this device is no longer associated with your Apple ID and can be used by someone else. It is also ready to be restored. Check out the best Backup and Restore options below. 👇

Best Backup and Restore Options

To restore your device from a backup disabling “Find My” is also required.

Here at CopyTrans we have designed our own Backup and Restore app, we called it CopyTrans Shelbee. It is a versatile multi-tool, capable of:

Here is a taster screenshot for you:

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

💾 CopyTrans Backup Extractor

Backups are always saved as a bunch of code, they only start making sense when restored back to the device. Ever wondered if it is possible to export your selected data from an old backup directly to your PC? Let’s say you needed your old WhatsApp conversation for some reason, and it is stored in an old backup.

With CopyTrans Backup Extractor you can get it in .PDF format in a couple of clicks without restoring to the device. We can also extract Photos, Messages, Contacts, Calendars, and Notes.

Wondering how to turn off Find My iPhone? You’ve come to the right place!

Find My is an awesome app from Apple. It enables you to track your iPhone, iPad, Mac, iPod touch, AirTags, Apple Watch, and AirPods all from a single app. This means if you lose any one of these, you can log into your other devices – or iCloud.com from any computer – and track down your missing devices.

Find My is an evolution of the original Find My iPhone app that Apple debuted years and years ago. But in recent years Appel decided to rename the app since it can track many more devices than the iPhone.

But just understand when people talk about the “Find My iPhone” app and the “Find My” app they are talking about the same app. The shorter name is just the later version of the app.

With the app you can choose to automatically play a sound from the missing device, helping you locate it if you are within audible range of the app. Also, if you device is stolen, you can remotely wipe its data using the Find My app.

But what about if you want to turn off the Find My app? Read on…

Why You May Want To Turn Off The Find My App

How to turn find my ipad on or off

I know, it sounds odd that an iPhone owner may want to turn off their Find My app. But there are actually a few reasons you may want to do this.

The first reason is if you are going to sell your iPhone. In this case, you’ll want to remove all logins associated with the device – including the Find My app.

Other reasons include if you’re going to give your iPhone away to a friend or family member. Finally, you’ll want to turn Find My off if you are going to trade in your iPhone for a new one – like you can do with Apple.

How To Turn Off Find My On iPhone: If You Have Your iPhone Still

How to turn find my ipad on or off

So how do you actually go about turning off Find My on iPhone? It’s pretty easy if you still have the iPhone:

  1. Open the Settings app on the iPhone.
  2. Tap [your name] > Find My.
  3. Tap Find My iPhone.
  4. Tap the Find My iPhone toggle OFF (so it turns from green to white).
  5. Enter your Apple ID password when prompted. This step ensures it’s the iPhone’s owner turning off Find My for that iPhone.
  6. Tap Turn Off.

And that’s it! You’ve now turned off Find My for that iPhone.

How To Turn Off Find My On iPhone: If You Don’t Have Your iPhone

How to turn find my ipad on or off

But what happens if you no longer have your iPhone? Can you still turn off the Find My app for it? Thankfully, yes.

But don't worry, we won't let the same happen to you. This article will show you how to turn off Find My iPhone on computer.

Part 1. What Does Find My iPhone Do?

It is acknowledged that Find My iPhone aims to track, locate, erase and remotely access your iOS device in order to protect your iPhone or iPad if they are stolen or lost.

There are numerous features in the following:

Have a clear location about your or your family members' iDevices on the map.

Track your iDevice in line with use Lost Mode.

Remotely access your iDevice or erase your iDevice's data.

Prevent your iDevice if it's lost or stolen by Activation Lock.

In line with above-mentioned features, it is suggested that you need to turn on Find My iPhone. However, if you want to restore a backup or erase your iDevice, what you need to do is to disable it.

Part 2. How to Turn off "Find My iPhone" on Computer

In this part, what your priority thing is to own a computer because it is quite essential for the first step. Then the Apple ID account and password are needed.

Here are the steps about how do I turn off Find My iPhone from iCloud:

Step 1. Please make sure your computer has a good connection with the Internet because iCloud.com belongs to Cloud Corner. Then, use your computer to login into iCloud.com and sign in with your Apple ID and password.

Step 2. Please moves your mouse to choose "All Devices" (you can see it at the top on your screen). Then, choose the device which is stolen, lost or selling.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Step 3. After completing the above-mentioned, you will be informed about the device you choose. Ignore it and go to the next step.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Step 4. Back to the center of the screen which appears "All Devices". If you see your name of the device which is stolen, lost or selling. Please click on this name and you will see numerous devices in the list. Then, the "x" will be appeared in the right of the device and click it.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Step 5. When you've been completed the aforementioned steps, you can be allowed to remove the device and you just need to click "Remove". Done!

How to turn find my ipad on or off

According to the above-mentioned method, you may clearly understand how to turn off Find My iPhone online and no longer troubled by can't turn off Find My iPhone.

Tips. How to Completely Wipe Device After Turn Off Find My iPhone

As a common user, you may not clearly understand how to use third-party software. FoneCope iPhone Data Eraser is an effective software which can erase data from your iPhone.

It aims to help users to have the option for removing their data permanently in a simple way. There are lots of key features about this third-party software in the following:

Selectively wipe out the private data forever and make sure your personal data including the previously deleted is non-recoverable.

Wipeout Snapchat history, Facebook, or Chrome private fragments, and more third apps.

Clean up all hidden junk such as files, trash, caches or temp files by one-click.

Depending on your demands or preferences, choose the appropriate level of security because it provides users with 3 levels of security.

Here are the steps to completely wipe the iPhone after turning off Find My iPhone:

Step 1. Open your computer. Connect your iPhone to your computer via the USB wire and launch FoneCope iOS Data Eraser.

Step 2. Depending on your preferences and needs, choose the appropriate mode for wiping out the data. By these erasing categories, it can guide you to delete your iCloud account permanently without using a password. Then, select a suitable option such as the Erase All Data and click Scan.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Step 3. After completing the scan, the window will appear all data and you can choose the data that you desire to wipe out. For example, click Photo & Video and select the photos you want to delete.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Step 4. Eventually, find the "Erase Now" button at the right of the bottom of the screen and click it. The software will delete the data. When the process completed, it also erases your iCloud account.

The Bottom Line

In the end, hope this article can make you know how to turn to Find My iPhone off from computer. Meanwhile, you can learn how to erase data on your iPhone through iOS data eraser when the Find My iPhone is disabled or forgetting the password.

Provided that you have any suggestions or problems, please let me know. I am very pleased to hear the customer's voice to make this article better.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Last Updated: February 13, 2019

Author: Elio G. M /

A smartphone geek who perseveres in generating esay-to-follow solutions to various Android and iPhone issues.

How do I turn off Find My iPhone from my computer? There are two ways of turning off Find My iPhone feature from a laptop. The first one is to do it via iCloud.com, and the second one is to turn the feature off by using Tenorshare 4uKey software. Here in this article, you will get to know about both the two ways of turning off Find My iPhone feature from a laptop in detail.

Part 1: What Is Find My on iPhone/iPhone/iPod Touch?

Find My iPhone is an Apple security highlight that enables you to find your gadgets so you can discover them if they got missing or taken. At the point when Find My iPhone is enacted, you can sign in to iCloud.com or launch the “Find My iPhone” application, and see the area of you missing gadget on a guide. You can likewise play a sound to find your gadgets or even wipe them remotely.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Find my iPhone incorporates a feature called Activation Lock that is intended to prevent any other person from using your iPhone, iPad, or iPod contact if it’s ever lost or taken. Activation Lock is enabled mechanically when you turn on Find My iPhone.

Part 2: How Do I Turn off Find My iPhone from My Laptop?

Your iCloud account should be removed and “Find My iPhone” should be disabled before you sell your iPhone, Apple Watch, iPod Touch, iPad, Mac, or Air pods. Usually, there are two ways of turning off the Find my iPhone feature from a laptop.

Way 1: Turn off Find My iPhone via icloud.com

One can easily turn off Find My iPhone via iCloud by following the below mention steps:

  • Step 1: First of all, login to iCloud.com from your computer.
  • Step 2: After this, click on the setting icon.

Step 3: After this select your device from the settings. In setting, under the “My devices” option you can see different device names. Select your device and click on the “x” sign which is present next to the device name.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Way 2: Turn off Find My on Someone Else’s Using 4uKey

Tenorshare 4uKey is your best friend when it comes to turning off Find My iPhone from a laptop. It is essentially a tool that is used to remove Apple ID on an iOS (iOS 15.4 included) device without having the account password. In the situation where you’ve overlooked your password or the past owner left their iCloud account signed into the device, then this iPhone unlocker will help you in removing the Apple ID without a password so that you can easily turn off Find My iPhone. Simply follow the below mention steps to turn off Find My iPhone on your device by removing Apple ID.

First of all, download and install Tenorshare 4ukey on your Windows/Mac. Open the program, select “Unlock Apple ID” in the lower left corner of the interface.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Then you need to connect your iPhone to computer with a usb cable. Then make your iPhone trust the computer.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

After your phone is recognized by 4uKey, there are 2 situations to turn off find my iPhone:

1. If you device is running iOS 11.3 and earlier, pleses refer to this guide to remove Apple ID.

2. If you device is running iOS 11.4 and later, then click on “Start Remove” to proceed.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Then you need to follow the guiding steps to set up screen lock and Two-Factor Authentication on your device. Please follow every step in order and click on “Yes” once confirmed.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

How to turn find my ipad on or off

After that, you will need to download a firmware package for your device. Simply click the “Download” button.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

When the firmware package is downloaded, click on “Start Remove” and 4uKey will start to remove the Apple ID from your device.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Now, the Apple ID has been successfully removed from your device. You can restore and activate your iPhone by following the on-screen instructions.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

So, that’s how easy you can turn off Find My iPhone from your laptop with the help of Tenorshare 4uKey.

Part 3: What Will Happen If Turn off Find My iPhone?

Find My iPhone can help you with finding your phone when you have left it on the train or if it is stolen. This feature can help you in providing constant updates to your phone’s present area. As long as the device is charged and working properly, it keeps on broadcasting its tracking signal until you catch up with it. If you turn off this feature on your phone then you are not able to get these benefits.

alt=”findmyiphone icon 2x” width=”250″ height=”250″ />Find My iPhone (or Find My iPad) is an iOS feature that enables users to locate a lost or missing Apple device. When you sign in to iCloud.com or the ‌Find My‌ ‌iPhone‌ app, you can see your missing device on a map and play a sound to locate it if it’s close by. It also has a Lost Mode to lock, track, or remotely erase all of your personal information.

For these reasons, Apple recommends that users keep Find my ‌iPhone‌ enabled, but there are circumstances where you might want to turn it off. If you’re selling your ‌iPhone‌ or passing it on, for example, you should disable ‌Find My‌ ‌iPhone‌ beforehand, because the new owner won’t be able to disable it (unless they have your Apple ID password), which means they won’t be able to restore the device to its factory settings.

Likewise, if you’ve acquired a second-hand ‌iPhone‌ or ‌iPad‌ and the previous owner hasn’t disabled ‌Find My‌ ‌iPhone‌, you’ll want to unlink the device from their ‌Apple ID‌, but of course you’ll only be able to do this if you know their ‌Apple ID‌ password. Whatever the reason, here’s how to turn off ‌Find My‌ ‌iPhone‌ in iOS.

How to Turn Off Find my iPhone in iOS

  1. Launch the Settings app on your ‌iPhone‌ or ‌iPad‌.
  2. Tap your name in the ‌Apple ID‌ banner at the top.
  3. Tap iCloud.
    alt=”how to turn off find my iphone” width=”800″ height=”772″ />

That’s all there is to it. To do the same thing on a Mac, check out our separate article on how to turn off Find My Mac. Note that signing out of iCloud on an ‌iPhone‌ or ‌iPad‌ will also disable ‌Find My‌ ‌iPhone‌ as it requires an ‌iCloud‌ account to work.

Sometimes when you try to restore your iPhone with iTunes, you get an error that says Find My iPhone must be turned off before iPhone can be restored. Many of you who do not know what Find My iPhone is are going to get confused as to what this item iTunes is talking about. There is actually a good reason why iTunes asks you to disable Find My iPhone before you can restore your device.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

The following guide tells you the reason why Find My iPhone must be turned off before iPhone can be restored and how you can then successfully restore your device. You will also learn what to do if you can t turn off Find My iPhone to restore in the below guide.

Part 1. Why Does Find My iPhone Need to Be Off to Restore?

One major reason why Find My iPhone must be turned off before you restore the phone is that Apple does not want unauthorized users to use your phone. In order to keep your data and your device secure, you have a feature called Find My iPhone on your device.

When your phone gets stolen or it gets lost, you can use this feature to keep track of your device. It will not let anyone use the device until and unless they enter the correct Apple ID logins.

The reason iTunes prevents you from restoring your device is that it does not want for the thieves to be able to find your device and then restore it and use it.

Part 2. How to Turn off “Find My iPhone” with Password and Restore Your iPhone

Now that you have an answer to your do I need to turn off Find My iPhone to restore question, let us check out what all methods are available to turn off Find My iPhone on your iPhone.

1. Turn off “Find My iPhone”

One of the easiest ways to disable Find My iPhone is to go to settings on your iPhone and turn off Find My iPhone before restoring your iPhone.

  • Go to Settings and tap your “Account Name” at the top.
  • Tap Find My

Turn off Find My iPhone and enter your Apple ID password.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Find My iPhone should now be turned off and you can now restore your device with iTunes.

2. Restore iPhone with iTunes

After turning off Find My iPhone, you can use iTunes to restore it. The following shows how you can do it on your iOS device.

  • Connect your iPhone to your computer and launch the iTunes app.
  • In the iTunes, click the Device button.
  • Click Summary.

Click Restore, then follow the onscreen instructions.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Your iPhone should be successfully restored now.

Part 3: How to Restore Disabled iPhone Quickly with Tenorshare 4uKey

What If you forget the Apple ID password? Is there any way to turn off Find My iPhone/iPad/iPod touch? Yes, you can find answer here. Today, we’ll tell you how to do it with a cutting-edge desktop software called Tenorshare 4uKey and it allows you to turn off Find My iPhone and remove Apple ID.

Download and launch the software on your computer. Click on Unlock Apple ID on the main software interface.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Plug-in your iPhone to your computer and allow Trust this computer and click on Start Remove in the software.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

It is important to ensure you have set a screen lock and two-factor authentication on your iPhone to proceed. If not, go to set them up. Then select Download to download the firmware for your iPhone.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Hit Start Remove when the firmware is downloaded to start removing the Apple ID on your device.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

You will see the following when your iPhone is restored. Be careful to follow the on-screen tips to activate your device.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

You are all set. That is how to restore iPhone with Find My iPhone on using Tenorshare 4uKey.

People Also Ask About Find My iPhone

If you have a specific question about this procedure, the following likely has covered the answer to your question.

1. What happens when you erase an iPhone from Find My iPhone?

When you erase an iPhone from Find My iPhone, all the data and settings stored on your device get wiped off. If you then select the option to remove your device from your account, your device can then be used with any other Apple accounts.

2. Does reset all settings turn off Find My iPhone?

No, the reset all settings option doesn’t turns off Find My iPhone on your device. You can turn off it from iPhone setting or erase iPhone from iCloud website.

3. Do you have to turn off Find My iPhone to restore?

Yes, if you use iTunes, you need to turn off Find My iPhone to restore your device. If you use a third-party tool like Tenorshare 4uKey, then you do not need to disable Find My iPhone to restore your device.

Summary

If iTunes constantly displays the Find My iPhone/iPad must be turned off before can be restored message, that means you need to first disable the Find iPad or iPhone feature on your device before you can restore it. The above guide tells you why that happens and how you can get past it. Tenorshare 4uKey is here to help you.

How to turn find my ipad on or off Dave Patterson

In this article, we provide you with the best ways to disable Find my iPhone without the password.

These solutions can be very helpful if you purchased a second-hand iPhone and you need to disable the Find my iPhone without a password.

Let’s get started.

What Is “Find My iPhone?”

Find my iPhone is a security feature that is enabled automatically as soon as you connect the device with an iCloud account. It is essential in that it can help you locate your iPhone in case it is lost or stolen. It can also allow you to erase the iPhone remotely, thereby preventing unauthorized individuals from accessing the data on the device. If you put the device in Lost Mode, anyone without the password from unlocking the device.

Therefore, if someone sells you a second-hand device without removing it from the iCloud account, you may find it very difficult to use the device.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Why Disable Find My iPhone?

Since Find My iPhone does is a great feature for the protection of your data, it may not be a good idea to disable it. But under certain circumstances, it may become necessary to turn it off. They include the following:

  • You may want to disable Find My iPhone before selling the device to not only make it easier for the buyer to use the device, but also to prevent them from accessing your data.
  • If you purchase a second-hand iPhone, you may need to remove Find my iPhone to add your own iCloud account and to prevent the previous owner from begin able to track the device from the Find My iPhone website.

Use UnlockGo to Disable Find My iPhone without Password

One of the best ways to both unlock the device and turn off Find my iPhone is iToolab UnlockGo. This iOS unlocking tool provides the simplest solution when it comes to unlocking any iOS device.

Pros

  • Turn off the Find My iPhone on your device without password easily.
  • It is also one of the best ways to remove iCloud Activation from the device.
  • It allows you to remove the previous Apple ID and use a new one.
  • Your device won’t be erased or tracked by the previous iCloud account.
  • Support iPhone 5S to iPhone X running iOS 12.3 and later versions,including the latest iOS 15.

Cons

  • UnlockGo will jailbreak the iOS before removing Find My iPhone.

Here’s how to use UnlockGo to unlock the device and disable Find my iPhone:

Before passing on an old iPhone, Apple recommends that users should turn off the ‘Find My’ feature to avoid exposing the location of the new owner.

Before selling, trading, or giving away an iPhone, iPad, or any Apple device, it is recommended that users turn off the ‘Find My’ feature. Find My is a location tracker app that finds a person’s iPhone or any other Apple device if it gets lost or stolen. The same functionality that helps a user to locate a lost device, though, can pose a security risk for the new owner of a device should it be passed on.

Find My was first introduced at the Worldwide Developer Conference in 2019. It is made up of two previous Apple features, Find My Friends and Find My iPhone, with the two having been combined to make it easy to keep track of devices and friends from one place. The service has evolved to be more than just a location tracker, though.

Find My can locate missing iPhones, iPads, Apple Watches, Macs, and even AirPods. The location of a user’s devices — and their relatives’ devices if Family Sharing is set up — can be seen on a map and Find My can be used to trigger a sound to be played from a device to help pinpoint it when nearby. If a device’s battery is low, its last known location can be flagged on a map and the Find My network can also help to locate devices by relaying a beacon via other people’s Apple devices. If needs be, devices can be marked as lost, with a message and contact number displayed for whoever finds them, or be set to have all data erased if they are unrecoverable. People can use Find My to share their location and send notifications to friends when they arrive or leave a specified location too. Throughout all this, the owner’s information and location are kept private.

Turning Off Apple’s ‘Find My’

Apple recommends turning off the Find My feature before giving away an iPhone for security reasons. When the Find My feature is turned off, the iPhone is removed from the devices list in the Find My service. This eliminates the possibility of the new owner’s location being exposed to the previous owner. It also turns off Activation Lock, which prevents other people from using a lost iPhone.

To turn off Find My on iPhones with iOS 12 or earlier, go to ‘Settings’, tap the user’s name, tap ‘iCloud’, and then ‘turn off Find My iPhone’. Once the Apple ID password has been entered, the user can turn off Find My. If the iPhone is running iOS 13 or later, go to ‘Settings’, tap the user’s name, locate ‘Find My’, and then tap ‘turn off Find My iPhone’. Again, the user’s Apple ID password will be required to finish the process.

Компания Readdle была основана в Украине, и для многих наших сотрудников эта страна стала родным домом. Прямо сейчас российские вооруженные силы бомбят и атакуют Украину на суше, в воздухе и на воде.

С начала войны тысячи мирных жителей были убиты и ранены, среди них много детей. Более 1000000 человек были вынуждены покинуть свои дома, спасаясь от ужасных военных бесчинств. Число жертв продолжает расти.

В силу этого компания Readdle предпринимает следующие меры:

  • Мы удалили все наши продукты из App Store и Google Play в России;
  • Мы больше не сотрудничаем с компаниями, которые принадлежат российским гражданам или имеют к ним отношение;
  • Мы не ведем бизнес с компаниями, которые продолжают отрицать войну в Украине, поддерживают российскую агрессию в Украине или связаны с любыми лицами, выступающими на стороне захватчика.

И хотя мы понимаем, что вы можете не разделять взгляды и убеждения российского правительства, идущего на нарушения прав человека и военные преступления, мы должны предпринять действия, направленные на поддержку борьбы Украины за свою свободу.

  • Для текущих пользователей:
    Для текущих пользователей в России доступ к установленным приложениям сохраняется, но все новые функции и обновления безопасности с нашей стороны предоставляться не будут. Кроме того, мы больше не будем обеспечивать “техническую поддержку” наших приложений пользователям из России.
  • Для новых пользователей:
    Приложения Readdle больше не будут доступны для продажи в российском App Store и Google Play. Мы не будем предлагать наши продукты и услуги пользователям в России.

Считаем, что вы заслуживаете знать правду. Поэтому мы отобрали достоверные источники, которые круглосуточно следят за событиями войны в Украине. Ниже вы можете найти список надежных СМИ, освещающих войну в Украине на русском языке:

Вы можете помочь не только словом. Есть и более действенные способы остановить войну. Здесь вы можете узнать, как помочь Украине уже сейчас. Помните, каждый ваш шаг имеет значение.

Maggie Tillman, US contributing editor

How to turn find my ipad on or off

– Here's how to remove your device from the Find My app

(Pocket-lint) – Not everyone is a fan of Find My iPhone – which is now known as Find My after the Find My Friends and Find my iPhone apps were combined in 2019.

The Find My service makes it easy for you to track down your lost or stolen Apple device, but, for whatever reason, some people don’t want that ability.

If you find yourself among that crowd, no worries, we’ll help you figure out how to turn off Find My for your iPhone, or any other Apple device you want to turn it off for. If you’re no longer using an Apple device, and you want to remove it from Find My, we can help you with that, too. This guide covers everything.

How to turn off Find My iPhone

Those of you who own an iPhone, iPad, Apple Watch, AirPods, or Mac and want to turn off Find My feature can do so via the steps below.

iPhone or iPad users

On an iOS device, go to Settings > [your name] > Find My > Toggle off Find My [iPhone/iPad]. You can also remove your device by turning off iCloud completely on that device. Turning off Apple’s iCloud subsequently turns off all iCloud features on the device.

Mac users

On a Mac, choose Apple menu > System Preferences > click Apple ID > and then deselect Find My Mac. You can also remove your device by turning off iCloud completely on that device. Turning off Apple’s iCloud subsequently turns off all iCloud features on the device.

Apple Watch or AirPods users

To turn off Find My for Apple Watch or AirPods, you have to remove them from from Find My iPhone on iCloud.com. So, turn off Apple Watch or put AirPods in their case to make them go offline, then log in to iCloud.com, go to Find My iPhone, click All Devices at the top, select the offline device, and click Remove from Account.

If you don’t see Remove from Account, click All Devices again, then click the “x” button next to the device.

How to remove your device from Find My iPhone

If you no longer have the iOS device, Mac, Apple Watch, or AirPods because you gave it away or sold it, you can still remove it from your Find My iPhone app. However, you need to remotely erase the device first. You can do this from iCloud.com or the Find My iPhone app.

iCloud.com

Log in to iCloud.com, then go to Find My iPhone, and click All Devices.

Now, select the device you want to erase. To erase an iOS device or Apple Watch, enter your Apple ID credentials and answer the security questions or enter the verification code that is sent to your other devices. To erase a Mac, do the same thing. If either device is offline, the remote erase begins the next time it’s online. You receive an email when the device is erased.

Finally, when the device is erased, log back into iCloud.com, click All Devices, find your device, and click Remove from Account.

Find My iPhone app

Again, you need to remotely erase a device before you can remove it. Open the Find My app on your iPhone or iPad > click on the Devices tab > Tap the device you want to erase > Swipe up from the card at the bottom of the display > Tap on Erase This Device > Follow the instructions. If the device is offline, the remote erase begins the next time it’s online.

When the device is erased, open the Find My app again > click on the Devices tab > Tap the device you have just erased and want to remove > Swipe up from the card at the bottom of the display > Tap on Remove This Device > Follow the instructions.

How to turn find my ipad on or off

Like any other app from Apple, Find my iPhone is a great app as useful as many other iPhone tracking apps which enable you to track your iPhone all in one place at the comfort of your home. However, if you are planning to upgrade your phone or iPad, selling your existing device or even if you are trading, in all these cases you must make sure that you turn off Find my iPhone entirely before handing it to someone else. This will make sure that the new user cannot access any of your personal information and files and that they will be able to link the device to their iCloud account.

Now if you are wondering how to turn off find my iPhone? Just keep reading this article to have a clear picture of the process.

Part 1: How to remotely turn off Find My iPhone using iCloud

This method works perfectly to disable Find my iPhone using iCloud on your personal computer, even when your iPhone screen is locked. All you need to do is follow the below-given instructions and you will be able to disable Find my iPhone in no time. To follow this method, you have to ensure that you have a desktop or PC available as you need to have the desktop version of iCloud to execute this method.

The stepwise execution of this process is as follows:

Step 1. To start simply power off Your Device. This is important as the iOS device should not be online to progress to the next step. If in case the device is online or connected to the internet you will not be able to disable you Find My iPhone.

Step 2. Now in your Web browser visit iCloud.com and log in by entering your account information (Apple ID and Password) the way you normally log in to access your files.

Step 3. After you are in your account you need to click on Find iPhone this will further take you to inside the app to make any necessary changes.

Step 4. As shown in the graphic below, simply click on the icon “All devices” which is located on the top of the screen and choose the device you wish to turn off.

Step 5. To turn off Find my iPhone remotely, move your cursor on the device and you will see an “X” sign next to the device. Click the “X” sign to remove your device from Find my iPhone.

And this is all that it takes to disable Find my iPhone using iCloud on computer. If you don’t have a computer, you can download Find My iPhone app on another iOS device and log in your iCloud account. You can then also remove the offline device and turn off Find My iPhone remotely.

Part 2: How to turn off Find My iPhone from an iPhone/iPad

This method is comparatively simpler but you need to make sure you still have access to your iPhone or iPad, and this will prove to be the fastest and simplest way to turn the Find my iPhone off.

To understand this, follow the stepwise procedure:

Step 1: To start with this process, open our Settings from the Home screen and simply click iCloud.

Step2: Here you will see Find My iPhone. Simply tap on it as shown in the figure below

Step3: Now you need to turn the Find My iPhone to Off.

Step4: Moving further, to confirm you will have to insert your Apple ID password.

That’s about it. That’s all you need to do to disable Find my iPhone. Your iPhone or iPad will no longer be visible via Find My iPhone. Just follow the same steps in case you want to turn it back on.

Part 3: How to turn off Find My iPhone without password

Step 1: By opening the Settings page go to your iCloud account.

Step 2: Here you need to remove the current password and enter any passcode and click ok

Step 3: As expected iCloud will inform you that either your username or your password is incorrect and does not match as displayed in the image below

Step 4: Now just tap OK and then click cancel. You will reach the iCloud page.

Step 5: Further, tap on Account and erase the description. Press ok

Step 6: It will now return to the main page on iCloud and won’t ask for the password this time. Here you’ll see that Find My iPhone app has been on OFF mode automatically.

This is how you can Disable Find my iPhone without your password and without the need to jailbreak your phone. Scroll downward and choose to remove the account. Reconfirm and you are good to go.

We hope this article has helped you and answered your Questions related to Turning off Find my iPhone using different techniques. We would love to hear back from you and get your suggestions in delivering accurate and up to date information.

Note: Find my iPhone is a great and extremely useful application and in this, you won’t be able to disable Find My iPhone without knowing the Apple ID and password that you once used to set it up. Hence, if you are unable to turn off Find My iPhone, you simply cannot completely restore your factory settings on your iPhone. We suggest you must turn off Find My iPhone before selling, or passing on, your iPhone to ensure the safety of personal information.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Nowadays, there are still a lot of people using PS3 controller. That’s still no reason to ditch your PS3 console or throw out your controllers quite yet. In this post, MiniTool shows you how to connect PS3 controller to PC.

Quick Navigation :

A keyboard and mouse may be the preferred input device for PC gaming, but there are others who are more comfortable with a console controller. Nowadays, although the PS4 has stolen the spotlight from the PS3, you can still get plenty of use out of your PlayStation 3 controllers.

The PS3 controller, Dualshock 3, has something the best PC controllers don’t have: pressure-sensitive analog face buttons. That makes the Dualshock 3 the best choice for emulating PS2 games with PCSX2.

Then, How to use PS3 controller on PC? Please read the following content to get the guide.

How to Use PS3 Controller on PC Windows 10 (Wired Connection)

Step 1: Make sure you have these components installed:

  • Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5
  • Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Redistributable Package
  • Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 Runtime
  • DirectX Runtime

Step 2: Turn on your controller by pressing the stylized “PS” button in the middle of your controller. Then, connect your PlayStation 3 controller to your PC using a Mini USB cable.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Do you know how to start Steam in offline mode properly? You may encounter some problems during this process. The post will provide you with a full guide.

Step 3: Click ScpToolkit to download it. Then, run the installer, accept the terms, choose your install location, and then you’ll get a menu of all the options to install. Just leave this to the default and click Install to begin the installation.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Step 4: After about 30 seconds, ScpToolkit will be installed successfully, and you’ll be required to Run Driver Installer. Then, check the boxes for the drivers you want to install. In this case, you should check “Install Dualshock 3 driver“, and then click the arrow next to “Choose Dualshock 3 controllers to install” to open a dropdown list. From the list, check PlayStation 3 controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Step 5: Watch the SCP Toolkit run through its installation process. If you see “Dualshock 3 USB Driver installed”, it means a successful installation and then you can click Exit. After SCP Toolkit is installed, you can open ScpToolkit Settings Manager to change some settings like disabling rumble, adjusting analog stick deadzones, and more.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

PS4 controller is blinking white? How to fix the problem? In this post, you can get 4 solution to it. Try them one by one until it is fixed.

How to Connect PS3 Controller to PC via Bluetooth (Wireless Connection)

If you want to be able to use the controller wirelessly, please follow the steps below:

Step 1: Make sure you have a Bluetooth dongle plugged in or your motherboard’s Bluetooth enabled.

Step 2: You also need to install ScpToolkit. When you choose features to be installed, you should make sure the ScpToolkit Bluetooth Pair Utility option is ticked. Then, when installing drivers, you should make sure the “Install Bluetooth driver” box is checked, then click the arrow next to “Choose Bluetooth dongles to install” and find your Bluetooth device in the list to check it.

Step 3: If all went well, you should be able to simply unplug the controller, and after a couple seconds it will sync via Bluetooth.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

This post recommends 2 PS3 internal hard drives and 2 PS3 external hard drives to you. In addition, it shows you how to replace PS3 hard drive step by step.

  • Facebook
  • Twitter
  • Linkedin
  • Reddit

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

Position: Columnist

Author Linda has been working as an editor at MiniTool for 1 year. As a fresh man in IT field, she is curious about computer knowledge and learns it crazily. Maybe due to this point, her articles are simple and easy to understand. Even people who do not understand computer can gain something.

By the way, her special focuses are data recovery, partition management, disk clone, and OS migration.

This article explains how to connect and use a PS3's DualShock 3 controller with a PC, with or without a Bluetooth dongle, so you can play games on Steam without a mouse and keyboard. We cover computers with Windows 10, Windows 8, Windows 7, or macOS.

How to Connect a PS3 Controller to a PC

In addition to your DualShock 3 controller and PC, you'll need a mini-USB cable and the following files:

When you've assembled everything you need, here's what to do:

If your DualShock 3 controller is paired with a PS3, first unplug the PS3 from its power source, or else it can cause syncing conflicts.

Plug the DualShock 3 into your PC via a mini-USB cable.

If your computer doesn’t have built-in Bluetooth support, plug in your wireless Bluetooth dongle.

Download and run ScpToolkit Setup.exe. It should automatically download all of the other files it needs, so just follow all the prompts.

If you're on Windows 7, download and install the Xbox 360 controller drivers.

After the ScpToolkit finishes setting up, select the big green button above Run Driver Installer on the window that pops up.

On the next screen, make sure the boxes next to Install DualShock 3 driver and Install Bluetooth driver are checked (if you have a Bluetooth dongle plugged in).

Uncheck Install DualShock 4 driver (and uncheck Install Bluetooth driver if you don't have a Bluetooth dongle).

Select the arrow beside Choose DualShock 3 controllers to install and choose your PlayStation 3 controller from the drop-down menu.

If connecting a Bluetooth dongle, select the arrow beside Choose Bluetooth dongles to install and choose your Bluetooth device from the drop-down menu.

Select Install. When finished, select Exit.

The ScpToolkit Settings Manager will then appear in your system tray. Select it to add another device.

How to Use Your PS3 Controller With Your Computer

Once installed properly, the DualShock 3 should automatically work with the Steam client and any PC game that supports gamepads. You may be able to adjust the control settings for individual games, but your computer will recognize the PS3 controller as an Xbox controller, so keep that in mind when adjusting the button mapping. When you're done playing, turn off the DualShock by holding down the PS button on the center of the controller.

ScpToolkit must be running for the DualShock 3 controller to work on your PC.

How to Use a Wireless PS3 Controller With a PC via Bluetooth

To use your PS3 controller wirelessly, you'll either need a PC with built-in Bluetooth compatibility or a Bluetooth dongle plugged in. You must plug in the controller before you can play wirelessly. After unplugging the controller, it should automatically sync with your PC via Bluetooth if the proper drivers are installed.

How to Connect a PS3 Controller to a Mac

Using a DualShock 3 controller with a Mac is much simpler than connecting it to a PC because the necessary drivers are already present in OS X Snow Leopard and later. But setting up wireless connectivity requires some extra steps.

If you have the latest version of macOS, you can skip steps 7-10 below, as the process has become more streamlined.

If your DualShock 3 controller is paired with a PS3, first unplug the PS3 from its power source, or else it can cause syncing conflicts.

Reset your PS3 controller by inserting a paperclip into the tiny hole under the L2 button on the back of the DualShock 3.

From the Apple menu on your Mac, select System Preferences > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on.

Connect the controller to your Mac with a USB cable.

Hold down the PS button on your controller for 1-3 seconds until you see the red lights on top of the DualShock 3 flashing.

Unplug the controller from your Mac.

Click the + icon in the System Preferences menu, then select Bluetooth Setup Assistant.

When prompted for an access code, enter 0000 and select Accept.

Close the assistant and select PLAYSTATION3 Controller in the Bluetooth list in your System Preferences.

Select the gear icon and choose Add To Favorites and Update Services.

Disable your Mac's Bluetooth and wait a second.

Enable Bluetooth again and wait another second. Your DualShock 3 should now work with games that supports controllers.

Once you set up controllers to be compatible with your PC, you can connect multiple PS3 controllers using a wired USB connection. You may not be able to use multiple PS3 controllers wirelessly.

You can use an Xbox 360 controller, an Xbox One controller, or an Xbox Series X controller on your PC without any extra setup. Just plug the controllers into your computer's USB ports.

Anthony Heddings
How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pcAnthony Heddings
Writer

Anthony Heddings is the resident cloud engineer for LifeSavvy Media, a technical writer, programmer, and an expert at Amazon’s AWS platform. He’s written hundreds of articles for How-To Geek and CloudSavvy IT that have been read millions of times. Read more.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Sony

Controller support is limited on Windows PCs. While the latest generation of console controllers will work out of the box with Windows, even last-generation gamepads like the PlayStation 3’s DualShock 3 require custom drivers.

A previous version of this article detailed the use of MotioninJoy to use your Sony PS3 controller as a joystick on your Windows PC. Unfortunately, MotioninJoy was a proprietary piece of software that turned into malware over the years. Luckily, you don’t have to infect your computer, as there is an open-source alternative in ScpToolkit. Don’t use MotioninJoy.

How to Install ScpToolkit

ScpToolkit has to modify some system drivers to make the controller work, so it’s not the safest install process. Proceed with caution, follow our instructions, and don’t click anything you don’t understand.

Download the latest release of ScpToolkit from the project’s Github page, open up the setup program, and agree to the Terms and Conditions—if you read them, of course. You’ll be shown a dialog with a list of install options:

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

You probably don’t need the Gamepad Analyzer and Debug Info Collector, but you should install everything else.

The installation process will take a few minutes. You should take this time to find your PS3 controller and plug it in with a USB cable. After the utility is done installing the toolkit, it will ask you to run the driver installer. Click “Run,” and you’ll be shown a list which should now include your controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click the “Initialize All Connected Devices” button (don’t skip through with next button), let it install, and then click “Next.” This will configure the controller to be recognized as a PS3 controller, and install some drivers.

The next screen is for Bluetooth support, which you may not want because it requires a dedicated Bluetooth dongle to be “sacrificed.” Rightly so, there’s a huge “WARNING” label on this screen, because installing it to a wireless mouse dongle on accident will cause you to have a very bad time.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

If you really want wireless support, you’ll need to plug in the sacrificial dongle, make sure it’s the ONLY device in the list, and then click “Initialize All Connected Devices.”

Otherwise, feel free to hit “Next” and skip this process.

The next step is installing a virtual Xbox 360 Controller driver, which will trick Windows into thinking your PS3 controller is an Xbox 360 controller. This will make it work for more games.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

To install the driver, click “Install virtual Xbox 360 Controller driver” and click “Next.”

After that, ScpToolkit will want to install a Windows Service to handle communication with the controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click “Install Windows Service” and click “Next.” You’re now done, and you should be able to use your PS3 controller in any game that supports Xbox 360 controllers. That’s practically every game that supports a controller, so go nuts. You can also remap the controller’s buttons to make it work in other games.

  • › The Best Retro Game Controllers for Your PC or Raspberry Pi Emulators
  • › More Than Headsets: 5 Things You Can Do With Bluetooth
  • › How to Connect Any Console Game Controller to a Windows PC or Mac
  • › How to Put Your PS5 DualSense Controller Into Pairing Mode
  • › Every Microsoft Windows Logo From 1985 to 2022
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Arriving Today
  • › The 5 Most Ridiculously Expensive Phones of All Time
  • › Roborock Q5+ Review: A Solid Self-Emptying Robot Vacuum

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc Anthony Heddings
Anthony Heddings is the resident cloud engineer for LifeSavvy Media, a technical writer, programmer, and an expert at Amazon’s AWS platform. He’s written hundreds of articles for How-To Geek and CloudSavvy IT that have been read millions of times.
Read Full Bio »

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Alternatively, you can use a reliable driver update tool, like DriverDownloader. DriverDownloader is absolutely free to download, install, and run. When you run it, you will get a free driver update. Then you’ll have the option to register the software. When you register the software, you’ll get free updates, money-back guarantee, and technical support.

Download DriverDownloader

Click the Start Download button.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click Run or Save

You’re likely to see the following message on your screen. You can choose to either click Save or Run. If you’ve clicked Run, go to the next step straightaway. If you’ve clicked Save, go to the Downloads folder, locate driver_downlaoder.exe file and double-click it, and then go to the next step.

Click Install

Click the Install button.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Register Driver_Downloader

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Register the software to get automatic driver updates.

After you have installed required drivers, you will need an emulator which will recognize your PS3 controller as Xbox 360 controller. We are using SCP toolkit as the emulator.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Sony

Controller support is limited on Windows PCs. While the latest generation of console controllers will work out of the box with Windows, even last-generation gamepads like the PlayStation 3’s DualShock 3 require custom drivers.

A previous version of this article detailed the use of MotioninJoy to use your Sony PS3 controller as a joystick on your Windows PC. Unfortunately, MotioninJoy was a proprietary piece of software that turned into malware over the years. Luckily, you don’t have to infect your computer, as there is an open-source alternative in ScpToolkit. Don’t use MotioninJoy.

How to Install ScpToolkit

ScpToolkit has to modify some system drivers to make the controller work, so it’s not the safest install process. Proceed with caution, follow our instructions, and don’t click anything you don’t understand.

Download the latest release of ScpToolkit from the project’s Github page, open up the setup program, and agree to the Terms and Conditions—if you read them, of course. You’ll be shown a dialog with a list of install options:

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

You probably don’t need the Gamepad Analyzer and Debug Info Collector, but you should install everything else.

The installation process will take a few minutes. You should take this time to find your PS3 controller and plug it in with a USB cable. After the utility is done installing the toolkit, it will ask you to run the driver installer. Click “Run,” and you’ll be shown a list which should now include your controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click the “Initialize All Connected Devices” button (don’t skip through with next button), let it install, and then click “Next.” This will configure the controller to be recognized as a PS3 controller, and install some drivers.

The next screen is for Bluetooth support, which you may not want because it requires a dedicated Bluetooth dongle to be “sacrificed.” Rightly so, there’s a huge “WARNING” label on this screen, because installing it to a wireless mouse dongle on accident will cause you to have a very bad time.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

If you really want wireless support, you’ll need to plug in the sacrificial dongle, make sure it’s the ONLY device in the list, and then click “Initialize All Connected Devices.”

Otherwise, feel free to hit “Next” and skip this process.

The next step is installing a virtual Xbox 360 Controller driver, which will trick Windows into thinking your PS3 controller is an Xbox 360 controller. This will make it work for more games.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

To install the driver, click “Install virtual Xbox 360 Controller driver” and click “Next.”

After that, ScpToolkit will want to install a Windows Service to handle communication with the controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click “Install Windows Service” and click “Next.” You’re now done, and you should be able to use your PS3 controller in any game that supports Xbox 360 controllers. That’s practically every game that supports a controller, so go nuts. You can also remap the controller’s buttons to make it work in other games.

RELATED: How to Remap any Controller to Keyboard Keys on Windows and MacOS

Do you find it hard to steer your mouse and hit the right keyboard key to play PC games? If you happen to have PS3 controllers, why not use them as Joysticks to play games?

Before we begin, head over to MotionInJoy website to install the required drivers for Windows. The installer comes for both x86 (32-bit operating system) and x64 (64-bit operating system), so make sure you download the right installer for your system. If you are in doubt, just go to Start -> Control Panel –> System, to verify your system settings.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Once you have downloaded the installer, unzip it, and execute the .exe file to start the installation. The installation begins with a standard welcome screen,

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

… and ends with asking you to run the software.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Plugin your PS3 controller to your USB port, and you should see a small icon on your system tray, showing you that Windows is installing drivers for your controller. At this point, even though your controller will be recognized in the “Game Controllers”, Windows will not recognized the buttons movement.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Open the DS3 tool, and press the “Load Driver” button.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Windows will warn you that it can’t verify the publisher of the driver; don’t worry, MotionInJoy’s drivers are safe for us to install.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Your PS3 controller is ready for use when you see a message: “SUCCESS: Install Completed”.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click the “Profile” button, and you should see that your controller appears under the “Connected game controller(s)” drop down list. You can click on the Vibration Testing button, to test that Windows recognizes your controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

We recommend that you open your “Game Controller Settings” from Start Menu → Devices and Printers → right click on “HID-compliant game controller” → select “Game controller setting”, to calibrate your PS3 controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click on the “Properties” button to calibrate your controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Guess what, MotionInJoy not only enable you to use your PS3 controller via USB, you can even use it as Joystick via Bluetooth. Click the “BlueToothPair” button, and click the “Pair Now” button, and your Windows should pair with your PS3 controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Disconnect your controller from the USB cable, head back to the profile page, and click the “Vibration Testing” button. If your controller is vibrating, this means that your PS3 controller is now connected to your Bluetooth. Now you can sit back, relax, and kill those zombies with your PS3 controllers.

MotionInJoy works with games that support JoySticks, and they have verified the software with a bunch of games. Feel free to share your experience with MotionInJoy with the other fellow readers in the comments section.

Run scpdriver.exe , if your on Vista or XP check force install.

If you want it to use a bluetooth dongle, first plug it in, allow windows to install the >default drivers.

Then when in scpdriver.exe check the bluetooth driver option. (Note that the dongle will only be useable for PS3 controllers)

Now if your on Windows Vista or Windows XP install the Xbox360 drivers from here.

Run scpserver.exe within the directory C:/Program Files/Scarlet.Crush Productions/bin/

You'll need to run scpserver.exe every time your computer starts so I would >recommend adding it to your startup items.

Just add a shortcut to scpserver.exe in the startup folder if you want it to launch at >startup.

Download SCP filter (latest version not update), then download the latest update.

Copy the files from the latest update and paste it into the 1.2.0.160 version's bin.

Connect your PS3 controller and run SCPDriver.exe as admin.

Make sure that configure service and blutooth driver are checked and hit install.

Wait for windows to recognize your 'xbox 360' controller and install drivers.

For PS4 controllers, there's a much better bit of software you can use than SCPFilter – InputMapper, previously known as DS4Windows:

It's based on the SCPFilter code and does a pretty darn good job – it's easy to install and update, easy to configure, has a reasonable UI. It's come a long way. Just install it, run it, and configure your devices.

That said, I've not confirmed that it works on dual-shock 3 (DS3) controllers – it was originally written to support the DS4 controllers. However, the author has indicated his specific goal is to support more than just DS4s (hence the name change from DS4Windows to InputMapper), and since it's based on the same old code that supported DS3s, there's a good chance it'll support them.

A guide for using the Dualshock 3 wired and Bluetooth on Windows 7, Windows 8 and Windows 10.

  • Setup
  • Software installation
  • Using it
  • Bluetooth

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

The Playstation 3’s controller, the Dualshock 3, isn’t the easiest pad to get working on the PC. So why bother when it’s so much easier to use something newer? Well, in some ways, the PlayStation 3 controller is still special. The Dualshock 3 has something the best PC controllers don’t have: Pressure-sensitive analog face buttons. That makes the Dualshock 3 the best choice for playing emulated PS2 games in the PCSX2 emulator. Metal Gear Solid 3, for example, just doesn’t play right without those analog buttons.

And if you simply prefer the feel of Sony’s older controllers over the redesigned Dualshock 4, this is the perfect controller for playing those classic Final Fantasy games on Steam. Here’s the best way to get your PS3 controller working on PC, using an open source tool called ScpToolkit.

Note: Steam actually has native support for the DualShock 3, meaning you can simply plug the controller in and set it up through the Big Picture mode Controller settings menu. However, Steam does not support the DualShock 3’s gyro controls or (more importantly!) its analog face buttons, which are what we’re really after. Follow this guide to get the PS3 controller working on PC with those buttons working, too.

Setup

What you need

Hardware

  • Dualshock 3 and mini-USB cable
  • Optional: Bluetooth dongle

Software

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Software installation

ScPToolkit installation guide

1. Download the software linked above, and start by installing the four Microsoft packages. If you’re on a Windows 7 PC, you’ll also need to install the Xbox 360 controller driver. On Windows 8 and 10, it’s already built in!

2. Important step: plug your Dualshock 3 into your PC with a mini-USB cable. Now we can start making it work.

Bluetooth installation note: if you also want to be able to use the controller wirelessly, make sure you have a Bluetooth dongle plugged in or your motherboard’s Bluetooth enabled. ScpToolkit notes you need a Bluetooth 2.0 or higher dongle that supports Enhanced Data Rate (EDR).

3. Download ScpToolkit and run the installer. After accepting the terms and choosing your install location, you’ll get a menu of all the options to install, as in the screenshot above. I recommend leaving this to the default. Click Install to begin the installation.

Bluetooth installation note: Make sure the ScpToolkit Bluetooth Pair Utility option is ticked.

4. After about 30 seconds, ScpToolkit will be installed, and you’ll see this screen, with a big green button that says Run Driver Installer. Since this is a fresh install, that’s what we want to do. Click the button.

5. This screen may look intimidating, but it’s still pretty simple! Check the boxes for the drivers you want to install. In this case, we want to make sure Install Dualshock 3 driver is checked (it should be by default). Now click the arrow next to “Choose Dualshock 3 controllers to install” to see a dropdown list of USB devices attached to your computer. Find the PlayStation 3 controller in the list and check it.

Bluetooth installation note: Make sure the “Install Bluetooth driver” box is checked. Like you did with the Dualshock 3, click the arrow next to “Choose Bluetooth dongles to install” and find your Bluetooth device in the list. Check it.

Note: If you’re on Windows Vista, check the box for “Force Driver Installation.” Otherwise, leave it unchecked. Click Install.

6. Watch the SCP Toolkit run through its installation process. You’ll see lots of pop-ups on the side of your screen as it detects your hardware. Scroll to the bottom of the log and you should hopefully see “Dualshock 3 USB Driver installed” (and “Bluetooth Driver installed” if you chose to), signifying a successful installation. If all went well, click Exit.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

7. Now that it’s installed, you’ll see ScpToolkit as an icon in your system tray. Look in your Start Menu for ScpToolkit Settings Manager. Here you can change some settings like disabling rumble, adjusting analog stick deadzones, and more. Most of these settings you should be able to leave alone.

ScpToolkit starts up with Windows by default, and also plays some sound effects that you might find obnoxious. To disable them, click the Sound settings tab and uncheck “Enable notification sounds.”

PCSX2 emulator note: The PCSX2 settings tab allows you to patch the emulator’s LilyPad controller plugin to support the pressure sensitive buttons. If you plan to use your PS3 controller with the emulator, click Browse to navigate to your PCSX2 installation folder, then click Enable to install the patch. Voila!

Using it

Using your Playstation 3 controller on PC

Now that it’s installed, the Dualshock 3 should behave like an Xbox 360 controller. Any game with native XInput support—pretty much any modern PC game that supports gamepads—should recognize it without a hitch. Unfortunately, this means that it won’t register as a PlayStation controller to the few games that have native DualShock 4 support, so you won’t get the correct Square/Cross/Triangle/Circle button icons by default. Some games let you manually choose your button icons, though. Look for that in game settings!

If you ran into issues installing ScpToolkit or using the controller, you can try posting in the official thread at the PCSX2 forums, but you may not get an answer.

Video games have gained great strength in recent times, thus creating a vast network of players around the world. With i Games you can connect to a virtual world where you can live fantastic experiences.

In general, video games are divided into different categories, in these the games are classified according to the characteristics with which they are designed. These categories range from adventure, action, racing, strategy, sport, games and many others.

Game development companies or console for Video games are constantly working, looking for new ideas like recording PS3 console screen without capture, connecting Skype to PS3 camera, using a PS3 control as N64 control, etc. to apply them on their consoles and thus satisfy the demands of consumers.

How to use and connect PS3 controller to PC to play on Windows or Mac?

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

One of the brands currently leading in this market is PlayStation, developed by the Sony company and officially launched on the market in 1994. Since then the success it has achieved has been resounding, becoming one of the most used consoles for playing video games.

This brand is characterized by always being in step with the times, improving its features and functionality more and more. From time to time, it releases consoles with more advanced features than previous versions.

One of the consoles that has had the best receptivity is the PlayStation 3, thanks to its functionality, design and operability, it is one of the most used. It has many functions and features that we need to know to make the experience much better.

On the other hand, even the the companies Microsoft e Apple with them systems operational Windows e iOS have developed very advanced game interfaces. That we can reproduce on our computers.

Since our computers are designed to perform different tasks, playing games can be a little tricky. However, there is a way to solve this problem.

The controllers or controllers we use to play games on our PS3 consoles they can be used to play games on our Windows or Mac computers. The PS3 controls are designed exclusively for playing video games.

Therefore, if we connect them to our computers, we will have an unparalleled gaming experience. In this article we will learn how to use and connect PS3 controller to PC to play on Windows or Mac.

Steps to connect PS3 controller to PC to play on Windows

To connect the PS3 controller to our computer running Windows we have to follow the following steps. First on our Windows computer we open our trusted browser.

Then in the search bar we write Scptoolkit and we give sending. We will have several options to download Scptoolkit, let’s select the one we are looking for. What we will do with this program is to have the options to be able to connect the PS3 controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

It should be noted that we have to download the option for Windows, it will start the download and we wait until it is finished. Then we open the previously downloaded program and run.

We accept the terms and conditions and click Next until the installation begins. After the download we can connect the controller of our PS3 via USB or Bluetooth to our Windows computer and it will recognize it immediately.

Steps to connect PS3 controller to PC to play on Mac

The iOS operating system was characterized as a very closed system compatible only with the devices produced by the company. However, connecting the PS3 controller is very simple.

Since it is possible to connect it via Bluetooth as any Peripheral normally connects, to connect it we must activate the bluetooth of our remote control. So let’s go to our Mac and go to the Bluetooth and other devices option.

It will recognize it automatically, we just have to click on the device and connect it to start using it. Ready in this way, we were able to successfully connect the PS3 controller to our PC with Windows and Mac operating systems.

Finally, we hope this article has been of help to you, however we would like to know, could you connect PS3 controller to computer easily? Do you know a simpler method? Leave your opinion in the comments.

Connecting a PS3 controller to a PC will not work straightaway. It requires more than just connecting a gaming controller and using it. This is because Windows won’t allow the installation of the drivers needed for the controller to work.

To fix this, we need to disable Driver Signature Enforcement and then install Motioninjoy to enable your DualShock controller work. If you have already disabled Driver Signature Enforcement, you can skip to Step 2 of this guide. In this guide, I will assume you’re using Windows 10.

Step 1: Disable Signature Enforcement

  1. Press Windows + C and click on PC settings.
  2. Click the Update & Recovery tab and then click the Recovery option on the left pane.
  3. Under the recovery options, you will see an advanced startup section on the right side of the window. Click on the Restart Now button and wait for while your PC reboots into the recovery mode.
  4. In the recovery mode, choose Troubleshooting > Advanced options > Startup Settings.
  5. Your PC may restart one more time and present you with a list of startup settings you can change. Choose Disable driver signature enforcement by pressing F7.

Step 2: Installing and Configuring Motioninjoy

  1. Download and install Motioninjoy from here.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

  1. Connect the controller to your PC via the supplied USB cable. Once plugged in, Go to the Driver Manager Here, you will see your controller listed with information on its location and ID. If you’re unsure about which of the listed devices is your controller, replug it into your computer.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

  1. Select the checkbox of your controller and then click Install all. Once this is done, you will have all the required drivers on your PC.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

  1. Head back to the Profiles tab and confirm if your DualShock controller is listed under the Connected Game Controller section and is connected.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

  1. Under the Select one mode section, click on the little circle next to Xbox 360 Controller Emulator and then Enable at the bottom of the screen.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Next time you connect the controller to your PC, open Motioninjoy and repeat step 5. There’s no need to install the drivers again at this point.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc1

Okay, so I have an AfterGlow third party ps3 controller that I bought for my ps3. I bought a couple games from steam and wanted to use that to play on my PC but could not get it working through DS3 Tool or Better DS3 because the programs would not recgonize the device because it was third party. Anyway, I spent a while looking online and on youtube for a solution to the problem or a way to make the controller work and most forums told me it would not work and to go buy the sony dualshock controller instead. Being broke, I decided to fiddle around with an xbox emulator but it would not work. I noticed alot of people online having trouble with the program as well and have errors and such. I figured out how to make it work though and thought I’d share with you guys on steam just in case you were having problems. If you have made it work already, then awesome, but I decided to post this to help those who do not know what to do.

First you need to make sure the Visual C++ 2012 is installed. Here is the link: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=30679
Press download and then select both the x64-bit and x86-bit. Both are needed (for my computer anyway).

Next download this: http://www.microsoft.com/en-in/download/details.aspx?id=35. This is needed for the program to work.

After that, click this link: http://code.google.com/p/x360ce/ and scroll down to where the download options are. One will be 32-bit and one will be 64-bit. Even if your computer is a 64-bit computer like mine is, still download the 32-bit. The 64-bit has issues and was not detecting my controller, but once I downloaded the 32-bit, it worked.

After that, click the file and extract the files. Once you’ve done that, run the file as an administrator. The program will ask you if it can make a file, click yes on both questions. After that the program will open and ask you if it can search online for drivers and such, click next and then finish.

After it is done setting up the controllers, beside controller 1, the box should be lit up green meaning the controller has been detected and it working. Try moving your controls around and testing them out. You can customize your controller in the program but it should be automatically set up.

Head into steam and the controller should work. If not, simply go to controller settings in the game and manually set it up.

If this does not work for you, I’m sorry, but it worked for me. If it doesn’t work, let me know and I can see if I can help.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Sony

Controller support is limited on Windows PCs. While the latest generation of console controllers will work out of the box with Windows, even last-generation gamepads like the PlayStation 3’s DualShock 3 require custom drivers.

A previous version of this article detailed the use of MotioninJoy to use your Sony PS3 controller as a joystick on your Windows PC. Unfortunately, MotioninJoy was a proprietary piece of software that turned into malware over the years. Luckily, you don’t have to infect your computer, as there is an open-source alternative in ScpToolkit. Don’t use MotioninJoy.

How to Install ScpToolkit

ScpToolkit has to modify some system drivers to make the controller work, so it’s not the safest install process. Proceed with caution, follow our instructions, and don’t click anything you don’t understand.

Download the latest release of ScpToolkit from the project’s Github page, open up the setup program, and agree to the Terms and Conditions—if you read them, of course. You’ll be shown a dialog with a list of install options:

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

You probably don’t need the Gamepad Analyzer and Debug Info Collector, but you should install everything else.

The installation process will take a few minutes. You should take this time to find your PS3 controller and plug it in with a USB cable. After the utility is done installing the toolkit, it will ask you to run the driver installer. Click “Run,” and you’ll be shown a list which should now include your controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click the “Initialize All Connected Devices” button (don’t skip through with next button), let it install, and then click “Next.” This will configure the controller to be recognized as a PS3 controller, and install some drivers.

The next screen is for Bluetooth support, which you may not want because it requires a dedicated Bluetooth dongle to be “sacrificed.” Rightly so, there’s a huge “WARNING” label on this screen, because installing it to a wireless mouse dongle on accident will cause you to have a very bad time.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

If you really want wireless support, you’ll need to plug in the sacrificial dongle, make sure it’s the ONLY device in the list, and then click “Initialize All Connected Devices.”

Otherwise, feel free to hit “Next” and skip this process.

The next step is installing a virtual Xbox 360 Controller driver, which will trick Windows into thinking your PS3 controller is an Xbox 360 controller. This will make it work for more games.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

To install the driver, click “Install virtual Xbox 360 Controller driver” and click “Next.”

After that, ScpToolkit will want to install a Windows Service to handle communication with the controller.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Click “Install Windows Service” and click “Next.” You’re now done, and you should be able to use your PS3 controller in any game that supports Xbox 360 controllers. That’s practically every game that supports a controller, so go nuts. You can also remap the controller’s buttons to make it work in other games.

RELATED: How to Remap any Controller to Keyboard Keys on Windows and MacOS

So I bought this PC/PS3 Controller that works for both PC and PS3. It works fine when playing Virtua Tennis 4 (on my PC), but how do I connect it to Skyrim? The only option I can see is for 360 controllers. Any help is appreciated!

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

6 Answers 6

Use the MotioninJoy DS3 tool, it comes with a Xbox 360 controller emulator and it works great. Just be sure to read the guide on how to install the PS3 control and enabling the emulator.

Xpadder works ok, but i’ve got noticeable lag, particularly with the R1 L1 buttons. It’s only a cheap gamepad though. Got gfriends spare PS3 dualshock so trying to set that up with motionjoy on 64-bit 7.

  • Install MotioninJoy
  • Open it up and click the device manager tab
  • Select your device and click load driver – be patient as this can take a while.
  • After it finished loading it will ask you to restart your computer.
  • After doing the restart open up MotioninJoy again (In the profiles tab) select Xbox 360 Controller Emulator and then click enable, done!

Open Skyrim and it will automatically recognize it.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

x360ce will emulate an XInput (read: 360 compatible) controller with any old DirectInput (read: any other controller in existence). It is a free, open source wrapper with a minimal footprint. I use it with my PC/PS2/PS3 controller with great success.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Getting your PS3 controller on PC wireless to work is a simple process that you can do on your own if you have all the right equipment. Generally, to get a PS3 controller on PC Windows to work, you need to plug the controller into the PC’s USB input and download a specific software that we’ll explain how to do. Even though most wireless PS3 controllers come packaged with a USB charge cable, PS3 owners can purchase a third-party charge cable ($1.50) if missing the component.

Here’s is a quick guide to connecting a PS3 controller to a PC, so you can start playing PS3 games on your computer without the mouse and keyboard. This process will allow you to use a PS3 controller on PC with Windows 8 and Windows 7. The process for doing this depends on if you want to use the controller wirelessly or with wired controller, but it’s essentially the same regardless of the controller.

Downloading the Better Program

You need to download the right software so your computer will recognize your PS3 controller. The best way to do this is by downloading software called Better DS3. After the software is downloaded, you just need to plug the controller in to start playing.

  1. Go to the Better DS3 website and download the driver configuration tool.
  2. After it downloads, open the resulting ZIP folder — titled “5.3
  3. Next, double-click the Better DS3 application to open the software.

Running the Program & Creating a Profile

After Better DS3 has been downloaded and installed, plug in your PS3 controller into the USB port of the PC. If you want to use the controller wirelessly, then connect the USB cable first to the PS3 controller, then the USB port of the computer. After the computer reads the controller, the device will appear on your computer.

After the controller is recognized, create a profile on your computer so the computer will know when you plug it in the future, this way eliminating having to keep setting up the controller every time you plug it in.

To create a profile, select the drop-down menu that is labeled “New” and select “XInput”. After that is complete, a new window will show you different options for customizing your controllers and how you want it to respond.

Syncing with Bluetooth

To sync you PS3 controller with Bluetooth, first you need to open the Better DS3 software and select “Bluetooth Pairing” button. Then unplug the charging cable connecting the PS3 controller to the PC. If the sync was done correctly, you can now game with your ps3 controller on PC Windows wirelessly.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Back in the day, you needed third party adapters or complicated USB hardware hacks to use the controllers from your game console with your PC. But thanks to a flexible design from Microsoft and some some enterprising hackers working on the PlayStation 3 gamepad, you can now easily use both controllers with your computer. While the Xbox 360 gamepad is extremely easy to set up, the PS3 gamepad is simple, but requires a few extra steps.

Xbox 360
If you have a wired Xbox 360 gamepad, you can just download the driver straight from Microsoft and plug it in. It will show up in the Windows Device Manager in the Control Panel, and you’ll be able to use all the buttons, sticks, and pads, just like you would on your Xbox.

If you have the wireless controller, you’ll need purchase the Xbox 360 Wireless Gaming Adapter ($10-$20 online). It’s a USB dongle that lets you connect your Xbox 360 controller to your PC using the same wireless protocol the Xbox 360 uses.

PlayStation 3
For PlayStation 3 controllers, you need to use a third-party driver called MotioninJoy. The bad news is that it isn’t as polished or integrated as the Xbox 360 controller driver. The good news, though, is that if your PC supports Bluetooth, you can play wirelessly without buying a USB adapter. Here’s what you need to know:

First, download and install the MotioninJoy driver. Next, run the installation program and launch the DS3 Tool. Plug the PS3 controller into the USB port with a mini-USB-to-USB cable and click the Driver Manager tab. Depending on whether you have a Sixaxis or Dual Shock 3 controller, one or two devices will be listed under “Hardware Location.” Check everything under that section and click “Load Driver.” The software will load the driver for the controller, which will require your confirmation (and might warn you that it’s an unsigned driver).

Once that’s done, go to the Profiles tab to select the type of controller you have (PlayStation 3) and change settings like button layout and vibration. You can remap each button on the controller in the Options link next to the controller name, so you can set it to play however you want.

If you want to use the controller wirelessly, there’s one last step: Click on the BluetoothPair tab and click Pair Now. The controller will then pair with your Bluetooth adapter, letting you use it without the USB cable. If you want to go back to using it with your PS3, you’ll have to plug it into your system and pair it again.

For another way to play games on your PC with a gamepad, read our review of the OnLive Wireless Controller.

2.Install the drivers
3.After drivers are installed ds3 tool will automatically run
How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

4.Close ds3 tool
5.Connect PS3 contoller
6. Run ds3 tool as administrator
7. Go to Driver Manager tab
How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc
8. Check all the boxes in Driver Managger
How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

9. Then Click Load Driver

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

10. You will probably get this

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

11. Just wait until ALL of them are installed
12. If all are installed correctly it should look like this

13.The MotionJoy should have a check mark
14. Then Head over to Home Tab
How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Though it’s a platform that began with the joystick the dominant control method, over the past 20 years the keyboard and mouse overtook it to become the only way to play most games on the PC. Which is a shame, because there are a lot of them that play better with a control pad.

This has become especially true over the past 3-4 years, as the PC has started to get a lot more ports of console titles, thanks to both the relative ease of bringing code over and the increasing popularity of Steam leading to a bigger market.

While the keyboard and mouse remain the best means of controlling many titles, especially PC staples like FPS and strategy, there are plenty of other options – from Dark Souls to Remember Me to DMC to Dirt 2 – that are really crying out for a pad.

You could go and buy a custom PC control pad, but that would be stupid. Chances are you already own a control pad you can use on the PC: the ones that came with your Xbox 360, PS3 or Nintendo console.

XBOX 360

Most of you will probably be aware of this, but just in case you’re not: you can use Xbox 360 control pads on a PC. With a little help.

Standard wireless pads won’t automatically connect to a PC, since your computer won’t be able to read the controller’s proprietary wireless tech. Microsoft do, however, offer a dongle you can buy, which plugs into a USB port on your PC. They run about $US20 officially, though you can of course get third-party alternatives for less (though your performance results may vary). If you want to go down this path, Microsoft has a handy guide on configuring your controller here.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

The better option, though, is to spend the cash on a custom “Xbox 360 Controller For Windows“. It’s a wired controller with the same 360 design that’s custom-made for the PC (though it also works on your Xbox 360 if you feel like disconnecting it and moving it around). I bought one when they first came out and it instantly became my primary controller, even on console, because occasionally having to move it between platforms was worth never again having to deal with 360 pad’s woeful battery life.

With one of these, all you need to do is plug it in and you’re set. Many games are even coded these days to automatically switch your control method from keyboard+mouse to control pad the instant the PC detects you plugging the pad in.

Let’s say you prefer the PS3’s DualShock 3, though. Or don’t already own an Xbox 360. The good news is you can get it running on a PC as well. The bad news is it’s a little more complicated.

The DualShock 3 communicates via Bluetooth, which your PC will be able to understand, but only if it’s got some means of Bluetooth connectivity. Laptops will probably have this already, but if you’ve got a desktop, you’ll need to go get a Bluetooth dongle (you can get decent USB ones for around $US10-20).

Once your PC has a means of talking to the DualShock 3, you’ll need the software to get things actually running. That software is called MotioninJoy, and if you’ve never messed around with this kind of stuff, before, it can seem a tiny bit complicated.

Download MotioninJoy from here.

After you’ve downloaded MotioninJoy, you’ve got some setting up to do. This video by IndeedGaming is probably the best available showing you every step you need to follow.

When that’s done, you should be good to go!

WII U

This isn’t exactly an ideal option, but if you’ve only got a Wii U, you can get the big Wii U controller working on a PC using a download that one of our readers, Chris, put together a few months back.

You can download the files necessary here.

A better option for Wii U owners, though, at least if you’ve got one, is to use the Wii U Pro Controller. TeHaxor69 made a good one earlier in the year that you can download here, while Screptilez’s tutorial video below should guide you through the process.

I’ve left the Wii off because the Wii Remote’s usefulness for the kinds of games you’d be playing on PC is limited, but if you absolutely must try it out, Instructables has a good tutorial here.

If you own more than one console, you’ve got a choice to make. It should be an easy one, as the Xbox 360 controller has emerged as almost the default option for the PC; most games that support pads, for example, will show button prompts for Microsoft’s controller.

But, hey, in case you want to try something else, at least you now know how to do it!

How to use the PS3 Camera on PC. PlayStation Eye (trademarked PLAYSTATION Eye) PlayStation Eye (trademarked PLAYSTATION Eye) is a digital camera device much like the webcam and is available for PlayStation 3. PlayStation 3. It uses computer vision and motion recognition to process the images captured from the Camera. It allows gamers to engage in games through motion and detection of colours in addition to sound via its inbuilt mic array. It’s the successor of the EyeToy that was released for PlayStation 2, launched in 2003.

The peripheral was launched as a package along with the game The Eye of Judgment in the United States on October 23 2007, and on the continent of Japan and Australia on October 25 2007. It was released in Europe on October 26 2007.

It was also released as a stand-alone product. PlayStation Eye was also released as a stand-alone item across Europe, the United States, Europe, and Australia. EyeToy creator Richard Marks stated that the EyeToy was used as a reference for the design of the rough cost. PlayStation Camera for PlayStation 4 followed the device.

A webcam lets a person sit on a screen to connect with the world visually. Numerous companies produce webcams specifically for computers. However, PlayStation 3 owners who have the PS3 EyeToy have the advantage of a camera that has motion sensing technology. This PS3 EyeToy camera can be utilized on a computer, provided that drivers for the specific device are installed. The process takes just some minutes to complete and won’t cause damage to either the EyeToy cameras or computer.

What's in It for You

How To Use The PS3 Camera On PC

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

  1. Click on the Windows “Start” menu, choose “Control Panel,” choose “Hardware and Sound”, and select”Hardware and Sound”, then click the “Device Manager” link under the Devices and Printers section.
  2. Connect the USB cable of the PS3 EyeToy camera to a USB port on your computer. Select “Cancel” if a dialogue box pops up.
  3. Locate it by searching for the PS3 EyeToy camera in the Device Manager under “Imaging devices” with an exclamation point. Note whether it is listed as a PS3 EyeToy camera is listed as a Logitech or Namtai model.
  4. Download and unzip on your desktop PS3 EyeToy camera driver compatible with the model you have selected (see the Resources).
  5. Click right-click to select the PS3 EyeToy camera visible within the Device Manager. Choose “Update Driver” from the pop-up menu. Keep a close eye on the update wizard starts.
  6. Follow the instructions to download the appropriate drivers. Navigate to a relevant PS3 EyeToy camera driver that was downloaded once the wizard informs you that it’s the right time to install it. Select the “Finish” button to end the wizard after it is finished installing.
  7. Restart your computer and then use your PS3 EyeToy camera as a webcam on your PC.

Instructions

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

1. Connect the minor part of the USB cable to your motion controller and the bigger end of the USB cable to the port on the back of the PS3 console.

2. Use”PS”. Press the “PS” button precisely in the middle of your motion control.

3. Use the “X” button on the motion controller to confirm the connection in your PS3.

4. Disconnect the USB cable from the motion control. Remove from the USB cable and connect it to your PS3.

5. Make use of the motion controller just like you would usually.

Conclusion

PS3 camera access via PC is a fantastic feature that lets you connect with your loved ones. Sony Computer Entertainment developed a remarkable feature that lets you travel to other places through virtual reality using the PS3 webcam or Camera. Furthermore, it lets you transmit voice with much lower background noise.

Considering these, we’ve reviewed all PS3 Cameras for PC in-depth within this post. It will also explain the features of the PS3 Camera and whether you can use it on a computer or not. In addition, we’ve explained step-by-step directions on how to use and open the PS3 Camera on a PC to improve communication speed and efficiency. Additionally, we have described the steps needed to broadcast using webcams or a PS3 Camera or webcam on a PC.

This way, you’ll be able to enjoy video chats, webchats, and record games, the rest of it. Give it some time and read up regarding the PS3 Camera on PC. PS3 Camera on PC in the shortest amount of time.

Do you find it hard to steer your mouse and hit the right keyboard key to play PC games? If you happen to have PS3 controllers, why not use them as Joysticks to play games?

Before we begin, head over to MotionInJoy website to install the required drivers for Windows. The installer comes for both x86 (32-bit operating system) and x64 (64-bit operating system), so make sure you download the right installer for your system. If you are in doubt, just go to Start -> Control Panel –> System, to verify your system settings.

Once you have downloaded the installer, unzip it, and execute the .exe file to start the installation. The installation begins with a standard welcome screen,

… and ends with asking you to run the software.

Plugin your PS3 controller to your USB port, and you should see a small icon on your system tray, showing you that Windows is installing drivers for your controller. At this point, even though your controller will be recognized in the “Game Controllers”, Windows will not recognized the buttons movement.

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Open the DS3 tool, and press the “Load Driver” button.

Windows will warn you that it can’t verify the publisher of the driver; don’t worry, MotionInJoy’s drivers are safe for us to install.

Your PS3 controller is ready for use when you see a message: “SUCCESS: Install Completed”.

Click the “Profile” button, and you should see that your controller appears under the “Connected game controller(s)” drop down list. You can click on the Vibration Testing button, to test that Windows recognizes your controller.

We recommend that you open your “Game Controller Settings” from Start Menu → Devices and Printers → right click on “HID-compliant game controller” → select “Game controller setting”, to calibrate your PS3 controller.

Click on the “Properties” button to calibrate your controller.

Guess what, MotionInJoy not only enable you to use your PS3 controller via USB, you can even use it as Joystick via Bluetooth. Click the “BlueToothPair” button, and click the “Pair Now” button, and your Windows should pair with your PS3 controller.

Disconnect your controller from the USB cable, head back to the profile page, and click the “Vibration Testing” button. If your controller is vibrating, this means that your PS3 controller is now connected to your Bluetooth. Now you can sit back, relax, and kill those zombies with your PS3 controllers.

MotionInJoy works with games that support JoySticks, and they have verified the software with a bunch of games. Feel free to share your experience with MotionInJoy with the other fellow readers in the comments section.

Bluetooth is a common wireless technology used in mobile phones, computers and Sony’s PlayStation 3. For PS3, the console’s peripherals, including its Dualshock 3 and Sixaxis gaming controllers, remote control, keyboard, mouse and headset communicate via Bluetooth technology. The use of Bluetooth in the PS3 should allow for universal connectivity for PC gaming; however, the PS3’s wireless gaming controllers are not compatible with a PC without installing custom drivers and software.

  • Bluetooth is a common wireless technology used in mobile phones, computers and Sony’s PlayStation 3.
  • The use of Bluetooth in the PS3 should allow for universal connectivity for PC gaming; however, the PS3’s wireless gaming controllers are not compatible with a PC without installing custom drivers and software.

Download and install a third-party software package, such as MotionJoy. The package should contain all the drivers and software needed to allow Bluetooth communications between the wireless controllers and the PC.

Open the Windows “Start” menu. Click on “All Programs”, “MotionJoy” and then right-click on “Install Bluetooth Driver”. Select “Run as Administrator”. Notepad will open, alerting you when the driver has been installed.

Click on the Windows “Start” menu, followed by “Control Panel”, “Printers and Other Devices” and “Game Controllers”. The new Bluetooth controller should appear on the list. Do not close the controller window.

Connect the USB cable to a USB port on the computer and the mini-B end to your Dualshock 3 or Sixaxis wireless controller. A USB game controller now appears in the game controller window.

  • Click on the Windows “Start” menu, followed by “Control Panel”, “Printers and Other Devices” and “Game Controllers”.
  • A USB game controller now appears in the game controller window.

Close the controller window and disconnect the USB cord from the controller. The drivers have been successfully installed.

Locate MotionJoy’s “DS3 TOOL”, which is located under “Start”, “All Programs”, then “MotionJoy”. After the program loads, click “Pairing”.

Press the PS button on the connected wireless controller. Your Bluetooth controller is connected.

Load a PC game with gamepad controller support. Your PS3’s wireless controller is fully functional within the game.

You must open the DS3 TOOL every time you want to use your PS3 controller on your PC; this allows it to successfully pair with the Bluetooth on your PC. At driver install, if you are using a 64-bit PC, press F8 while installing the Bluetooth drivers and select “Disable Driver Signature Enforcement”. This can prevent driver conflicts that can arise.

WARNING

As long as the pairing tool is open, you can press the PS button on the wireless controller to disconnect and reconnect the wireless controller from the PC. However, if you disconnect it and use it on your PS3, you must pair it again to use it on your PC. If you have multiple Bluetooth adaptors installed, then you will need to disable them.

Can you use a wireless Guitar Hero controller on PC?

All Guitar Hero games come with a guitar controller that works both on the console that the game was created for and on the PC. This controller can be used to play any game that has the ability to utilize a USB controller. You can connect your Guitar Hero controller to your PC to extend your control’s use to PC games.

How do you connect a wireless Guitar Hero controller to a ps3?

  1. Connect the wireless receiver dongle to USB port 1 on the front of the station.
  2. Turn on the controller by pressing the PS button on the front panel of the drum set.
  3. Press and hold the connect button on the top of the wireless receiver dongle.

How do I get my computer to recognize my ps3 controller?

How to Recognize a PS3 Controller on a PC

  1. Plug the mini USB charging cable into the PS3 controller, then plug the other end of the USB cable into a USB port on your computer. …
  2. Wait while Windows scans its driver files for a driver matching the new hardware. …
  3. Run the driver installation program specific to your PS3 controller type (see Resources).

Can you use a ps2 Guitar Hero controller on PC?

You might have noticed there’s no way to insert a PlayStation 2 controller into your PC. This is easily solved by buying a PlayStation 2 to USB converter. This little piece of hardware is easy to find both on eBay and in your local hardware store.

Can you play guitar hero on PC?

Several of the Guitar Hero games have been released for Windows and Mac, including Guitar Hero III, Guitar Hero: World Tour and Guitar Hero: Aerosmith, and USB-based instruments should work natively with them. None of the Rock Band games have been released for PC, however, and intercompatibility is generally bad.

Why won’t my ps3 Guitar connect?

A guitar connection issue may occur if the batteries are nearly drained. Turn the guitar controller power switch to the “On” position on the back. Plug the wireless guitar dongle into the USB port on the PS3. The dongle must be the matching one for the guitar controller.

Can you play guitar hero with a controller ps3?

Short answer, no, regular controller gameplay was left out from Guitar Hero: World Tour and every Guitar Hero game after that.

How do you connect a dongle to a guitar?

Turn off your console. Turn on the controller, then turn the console back on. Hit the Connect button on the USB dongle and hit the PS button on the controller again, and it should connect. That did the trick that night, just wanted to say thanks.

How do I connect my Dualshock 3 to my PC?

2. Important step: plug your Dualshock 3 into your PC with a mini-USB cable. Now we can start making it work. Bluetooth installation note: if you also want to be able to use the controller wirelessly, make sure you have a Bluetooth dongle plugged in or your motherboard’s Bluetooth enabled.

How do you put a ps3 controller in pairing mode?

Here’s how to sync a PS3 controller to a PlayStation 3 console:

  1. Turn on your PlayStation 3.
  2. Connect a mini USB cable to your controller.
  3. Connect the other end of the cable to your PS3.
  4. Push the PlayStation button in the middle of the controller to turn it on.
  5. Wait for the lights on the controller to stop flashing.

Does ps3 controller work on Windows 10?

After disabling driver signature enforcement, your Motionjoy drivers should work just fine. After you set up your drivers, follow the instructions from Motionjoy, and you’ll be able to use PlayStation 3 controller on your Windows 10 computer.

Can I connect my ps3 controller to my laptop?

If you want to use a PS3 controller on your Windows laptop, it can be done. You can set up the controller to work through a USB or wirelessly. To set up the controller via USB, you will need to plug in the controller. When you do so, Windows will recognize the controller and attempt to install different drivers.

Ever want to use an Xbox360 controller, or a PS3 controller for your PC edition Minecraft? Here is how!

FOR XBOX360 CONTROLLER:
Go to this website,and download Minecontrol. Plug in your controller, o pen Minecontrol,and then run it. After Minecontrol fully loads up, you should be able to use RS to move the mouse, if you cannot, don’t worry. Click the tab on Minecontrol that says device , and select your controller. Keep Minecontrol opened while you play.

PS3 controllers are different, but Minecontrol can still be used for it.

FOR PS3 CONTROLLER
Go to this website and download Minecontrol. You must also download DS3 tool , which is here , after you get to the site, download the latest version that fits your bit range. After you download it, down in the lower left corner of your screen should be the download, depending if you have Windows 7 or later. When the download is complete, click the small arrow on it and then click open. Then what you need to do is click DS3 tool , which will be an application type, go through the wizard installer, after you complete the wizard, a small window should show up that is mostly green. When this window comes up, plug in your USB port charger of your PS3 controller into your computer while it is connected to the controller. Then the orange loading bar should be going up. While it is loading click the bullet that says Xbox360 controller emulator . Then click the enable button. What this will do is disguise your PS3 controller as an Xbox360 controller so it will work for Minecontrol. After that, minimize DS3 tool ,open up Minecontrol and run it. When Minecontrol fully loads up, you should be able to move the mouse with the analog stick, if you cannot, don’t worry. Just click the tab that says device , and select your controller. Keep both; DS3 tool and Minecontrol open as you play.

It causes very little lag, hardly noticeable.

You can re-arrange the controls to your liking in the menus of Minecontrol. Also in DS3 tool you can convert the PS3 controls to
Xbox360 controls.

Joined Sep 12, 2009 Messages 12,510 Trophies 2 Age 36 Location Cyprus, originally from Toronto Website modmii.github.io XP 6,804 Country

  • Oct 10, 2012
  • #1

How to Use a PS3 Controller to play Star Wars Battlefront 2 on your PC

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

I decided to make my own button profile for this awesome game cuz everything else I found online was garbage or I couldn’t get it working. The controls match the controls for the PS2 perfectly!

Included in the above download is an Xpadder controller profile for the PS3 controller as well as a game profile for Battlefront2. As a bonus I’ve also included a "Windows" profile so you can use your PS3 controller to control your mouse if you wish.

I’ve also included a READ ME in the download that should explain everything you need to do (which isn’t much) to get it working. Here is a copy and paste of the Battlefront2 READ ME.

Star Wars Battlefront II Xpadder Profile for PS3 Controller
by XFlak

Installation
============
First, get MotioninJoy installed on your PC, connect your PS3 controller either via USB or bluetooth.
On the Driver manager tab, load\install the drivers for the usb ports of your choosing.
Back on the profiles tab, select DX-Default (Playstation 3), and click "=> Options"
Next to L1, select Button 14
Next to L2, select Button 15
The last four items are for "tilt", change all four of those to "None"

Then just make sure MotioninJoy and XPadder (with Battlefront2 profile) are running when you launch the game.

Optional: You can create a link to start Xpadder automatically with the game by following these steps.

1) Create a shortcut to XPadder on desktop and rename it "Battlefront II – Xpadder"

2) Go to the properties of "Battlefront II – Xpadder.lnk" and ADD the following to the end of the Target:
"Battlefront2" "%userprofile%\Desktop\Battlefront II.lnk" /M
so that it looks like this:
". PATH. \Xpadder [5.7].exe" "Battlefront2" "%userprofile%\Desktop\Battlefront II.lnk" /M

Optional: Change icon of "Battlefront II – Xpadder.lnk" to match "Battlefront II" and hide the original "Battlefront II.lnk"

USAGE
=====
Start the game using "Battlefront2" Xpadder profile, then it will automatically switch controls when entering vehicles or turrets.
To manually switch between Battlefront Controls and Battlefront-Starfighter Controls (in case they get out of sync by hitting
triangle without being near a vehicle) hit left on the PS or triangle buttons again to switch the controls back.

You can also use up on the d-pad to use "triangle" without changing to vehicle controls (i.e. to change at CP).

You can view a diagram of all the controls as I’ve configured them from within Xpadder.

Star Wars Battlefront 2 Infantry Controls

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

Star Wars Battlefront 2 Starfighter Controls

How to use a ps3 controller with your windows pc

There are a couple things that you will need that is not included in the above download link.
The first is MotioninJoy: It’s free and is still being updated so just grab the latest version from http://www.motioninjoy.com
The second is Xpadder itself, you can buy it for $10 bucks or so, but there are cracked versions floating around the net if you just want to try it out before you buy it.

Also, I wanted to point out that you can play online multiplayer with this game (and many others) for free using tunngle. Half the reason I’m sharing this is cuz I hope it will help grow the Battlefront 2 tunngle community! So hopefully I’ll see some of you in the tunngle Battlefront 2 room\server!

edit:
On a sidenote, MotioninJoy can also allow your PS3 controller to emulate an xbox 360 controller. So you can use MotioninJoy’s Xbox 360 Controller emulator (without Xpadder) to play games like Borderlands 2, Blur, etc.

edit:
if you have audioloop errors like I did, this is the solution

How to Use a PS3 Controller on a PC
All Credit goes to Jonathan, from Gamefront, for this!

1. Download MotioninJoy

Motion in Joy is a Chinese company that makes a relatively straightforward utility for using PS3 controllers with PCs. Your first step is to download their client from GameFronts fast, free servers.

MotioninJoy 32-bit Client
[ Register or Signin to view external links. ]

MotioninJoy 64-bit Client
[ Register or Signin to view external links. ]

2. Unzip and Install the program
The expanded archive will create an .exe file with the same filename. Run it.

3. Run DS3_tool and plug in your PS3 controller
When the installation completes, therell be a check-box prompting you to run DS3_tool, the Motion in Joy client. Leave it checked when you exit the installer. When the program opens, you should see this screen:

[ Register or Signin to view external links. ]

When you plug in your PS3 controller to the USB port, Windows will recognize it, and begin installing drivers. This is misleading even though the installation completes, and the controller shows up in the Device Manager, it will not work.

4. Load the driver
From the screen pictured above, click on Load driver. At this point, Windows security will ask you to verify that you want to allow the driver installation process to continue. Since the new versions of Motion in Joy include signed drivers, this step is easier than it used to be. Assent to the installation and you should see a rapid series of messages in the DS3_tool window, pictured below:

[ Register or Signin to view external links. ]

If you cant find the Load driver button, or you accidentally end up in a different part of the DS3_tool utility, click on Driver Manager to return.

5. Configure the controller
With the driver loaded, your next step will be to configure the controller for use. Click on the Profiles tab, pictured below. In order to take full advantage of the DualShock 3s twin analog sticks and many buttons, youll want to select Playstation 3, as shown in the picture. Once youve selected that setting, hit Enable, then Vibration testing. If youve followed these steps correctly, you should feel your controller vibrate. Motion in Joy also provides a convenient Game Controller Panel button, which whisks you directly you to the Windows controller calibration utility. You can use it to ensure that all of your controllers buttons are functioning correctly.

[ Register or Signin to view external links. ]

6. Et voila! Enjoy gaming with your PC-connected PS3 Controller!
Some addition configuration and button-mapping may be required to get it working with your game of choice

[Ed. Note: The below instructions do not work for Windows 7 machines]

One industrious modder out there has created a simple program so you can use your PS3s SIXAXIS controller on a PC like a game pad. Heres what youll need to do:

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Harry Guinness
How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless cameraHarry Guinness
Writer

Harry Guinness is a photography expert and writer with nearly a decade of experience. His work has been published in newspapers like The New York Times and on a variety of other websites, from Lifehacker to Popular Science and Medium’s OneZero. Read more.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Mirrorless cameras are proving more and more popular. As they’ve developed in the last few years, they’ve become really useful in certain circumstances.

One of the really interesting features of mirrorless cameras is, due to their design, you can use new and old lenses from different manufacturers with an appropriate adapter. This is thanks to the “flange distance” which is the distance between the lens mount and the film plane. Most DSLRs and SLRs have very similar flange distances (around 45mm) which means that any adapter would need to be unworkably thin. Mirrorless cameras, however, have a flange distance of about 20mm. This give manufacturers a lot of room to play with. So, let’s look at how to go about using any lens on your mirrorless camera.

Buy Third Party Lenses With the Correct Mount

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

The simplest way to use different lenses with your mirrorless camera doesn’t actually need any adapter: just buy lenses from third-party manufacturers that come with the correct mount. For example, Sony’s Alpha series of cameras use the E-mount. Sigma, Tokina, Voigtlander, and Zeiss all make a range of E-mount lenses that will just work with your camera.

One thing to watch out for; some of the lenses, like the Zeiss Loxia 35mm f/2, will be E-mount but manual focus. This means you won’t be able to use your camera’s autofocus features.

Unfortunately, the range of third-party lenses that are available for mirrorless cameras still doesn’t come near the amount available to DSLRs.

Buy a Cheap Adapter for Old Manual Focus Lenses

Old manual focus lens with manual aperture controls are the easiest lenses to get working with your mirrorless camera. The adapters are really just dumb bits of metal (or plastic) that adjust the flange distance so that the lens can focus on the mirrorless camera’s film plane. You won’t have autofocus or electronic aperture control, but otherwise they’ll work just fine.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

This means that pretty much any lens made before 1985 (after that, camera manufacturers started really getting into electronic controls) is your best bet. You can also use Nikon and Pentax autofocus lenses that still have aperture rings, such as the Nikon AF FX NIKKOR 50mm f/1.8D, but again, you’ll have to use them without autofocus.

The combination of adapters, lenses, and cameras is way too wide here for me to make any solid recommendations. Instead, you should try and find a well reviewed, inexpensive metal adapter that is compatible with the lens mount and the camera mount. For example, this $14.95 adapter from Fotodiox fits the bill perfectly for connecting the Nikon lens I mentioned earlier to a Sony Alpha camera.

Buy a “Smart” Adapter for Modern Lenses

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

If you want to use modern autofocus lenses with electronic controls with your mirrorless cameras, then a dumb bit of metal just won’t cut it. Instead, you need to look for adapters that also connect the electronics in the lens and camera body.

There are a wide range of smart adapters available, but the most popular combination is connecting Canon’s EF-mount lenses to Sony’s E-mount mirrorless cameras. If you’re considering buying a mirrorless system and want to have the most options, that’s the way to go. At the low end, you can get a Fotodiox Pro Fusion Adapter for $99.95, while at the high end there is the Metabones Canon EF Lens to Sony E Mount Smart Adapter (Fifth Generation) for $399. Both adapters do largely the same thing, although the Metabones adapter has a few extra features to give you more control over how the lens and camera work together.

For every other combination, I’d recommend you look for a Fotodiox adapter if you’re budget conscious or a Metabones adapter if you want something closer to the top end. If you can’t find one, then the best advice I can give is do a bit of research and buy the best reviewed adapter at the price you want to pay. Expect to pay between $100 and $500 for most set ups.

A Note on Speed Boosters

As well as straight up adapters, if you’re researching how to connect different lenses to mirrorless cameras you’ll run into “Speed Boosters”. As well as connecting the lens to the camera, they also increase its maximum aperture. There are, however, several downsides.

First, speed boosters are a lot more expensive than regular adapters. The Metabones Canon EF to Sony E-Mount Speed Booster (Fifth Generation) costs $649, a full $250 more than the regular adapter.

Second, speed boosters only work with crop sensor (APS-C) and Micro 4/3 mirrorless cameras. If you have a full-frame mirrorless camera you will need to use it in APS-C compatibility mode which digitally reduces the size of the sensor’s capture area.

If you have an APS-C or Micro 4/3 mirrorless camera, and don’t mind the extra expense, go ahead and consider getting a speed booster adapter for a little more low light performance. On the other hand, if you have (or you’re planning to upgrade to) a full-frame mirrorless camera, or the price seems a little silly, just get a regular adapter.

  • › Should You Use a Lens Adapter with a Mirrorless Camera?
  • › How to Move to a Dedicated Camera After Using a Smartphone Camera
  • › Should You Switch to a Mirrorless Camera?
  • › Roborock Q5+ Review: A Solid Self-Emptying Robot Vacuum
  • › What Does “Touch Grass” Mean?
  • › Every Microsoft Windows Logo From 1985 to 2022
  • › Samsung T7 Shield Review: The Best Portable SSD, Now Rugged
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Arriving Today

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera Harry Guinness
Harry Guinness is a photography expert and writer with nearly a decade of experience. His work has been published in newspapers like The New York Times and on a variety of other websites, from Lifehacker to Popular Science and Medium’s OneZero.
Read Full Bio »
Harry Guinness
How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless cameraHarry Guinness
Writer

Harry Guinness is a photography expert and writer with nearly a decade of experience. His work has been published in newspapers like The New York Times and on a variety of other websites, from Lifehacker to Popular Science and Medium’s OneZero. Read more.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Canon

Mirrorless cameras aren’t the future, they’re the present. If you’re switching from an older DSLR, though, the obvious thing to do is just buy an adapter so you can keep using your old gear.

The Advantages of a Lens Adapter

The biggest advantage of lens adapters is pretty clear: they enable you to use your existing collection of lenses on your new camera. With many mirrorless cameras starting at over $1,000, anything that offsets the cost of switching is much appreciated. After all, mirrorless lenses cost as much as the new camera body.

For most photographers, simultaneously switching systems and replacing all their DSLR lenses with their mirrorless equivalents would cost more than they can justify spending.

So, as the upside of a lens adapter is pretty clear, are there any downsides?

Why Lens Adapters Are Necessary

Mirrorless cameras aren’t just DSLRs without the mirror—they’re a totally overhauled platform. Both Canon and Nikon took the opportunity to radically redesign their decades-old lens mounts, and with good reason. Canon debuted the EF mount in 1987, while Nikon’s F mount has been around since 1959.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

The adapter is actually wider than the lens because the new R mount is bigger. Canon

The most noticeable change is that the lens mounts are now bigger, and the rear lens elements sit closer to the image sensor. Of course, the actual mount connection has changed, too.

This means lens adapters are necessary because the lens mounts on mirrorless cameras are entirely different from the DSLR mounts they succeed. Canon’s RF mount isn’t just an updated EF—it’s new.

Lens Adapters Add Size, Weight, and Hassle

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Nikon

Lens adapters add physical size and weight to your lenses. It’s not a huge amount, but if you’re buying a mirrorless camera because you want a smaller, lighter setup, this is something to consider. For example, Canon’s most basic EF-EOS R adapter adds an extra inch and four ounces to any lens you use. Nikon’s FTZ adapter adds a bit more weight and bulk because of its tripod mount.

In addition to the size and weight penalty, a lens adapter is simply one more thing you have to remember to take with you on a shoot. If you forget it, you won’t be able to take any photos.

Compatibility Issues

If you switch from a Canon DSLR to a Canon mirrorless camera, and also use a Canon lens adapter, things are pretty sweet. You should be able to use all your lenses happily. If not, though, things get a bit more complicated.

Even if you switch from a Nikon DSLR to a Nikon mirrorless camera, and use a Nikon lens adapter, there are some compatibility issues. Most newer lenses should be fine, as they have built-in autofocus motors. However, because the adapter doesn’t have one, Nikon’s AF and AF-D lenses are manual focus only.

With some older lenses, there’s also no automatic aperture control, which means no electronic metering, automatic exposure modes, or EXIF data.

And that’s even if you stay with the same brand. If you want to mount a Nikon DSLR lens to a Canon mirrorless camera, you’ll need a pricey adapter to get even a fully manual experience.

With Canon, though, there are EF-to-other-brand adapters available for pretty much every platform. Photographer Ken Rockwell even claimed he’s had better results using Canon’s DSLR lenses instead of Nikon’s on his Nikon mirrorless.

Put simply, though, just because an adapter exists doesn’t mean you’ll have an easy (or pleasant) time switching—especially if you’re mixing brands. Generally, cheaper adapters will give you only manual control. They can also prevent features like image stabilization from working.

Make sure you research the specific trade-offs you’ll have to accept before committing to a new system.

Autofocus Might Be Slower

DSLRs and mirrorless cameras autofocus a bit differently. DSLRs have dedicated focus sensors, while mirrorless cameras generally rely on sensors built into the imaging sensor. Naturally, mirrorless lenses are designed to work with the focus on mirrorless cameras, while DSLR lenses are designed to work with DSLRs.

This means if you’re using a lens with an adapter, you might notice it autofocuses slower than it did on your DSLR or with an equivalent mirrorless lens. This is especially noticeable when you’re trying to focus on fast-moving subjects or action shots.

Of course, it’s always ideal if you can replace your DSLR lenses with the equivalent mirrorless lenses for your new mirrorless camera. Unless you’ve got a lot of cash to burn, though, a lens adapter can definitely be a worthwhile trade-off.

  • › The Best Mirrorless Cameras of 2022
  • › Roborock Q5+ Review: A Solid Self-Emptying Robot Vacuum
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Arriving Today
  • › What Does “Touch Grass” Mean?
  • › Samsung T7 Shield Review: The Best Portable SSD, Now Rugged
  • › The 5 Most Ridiculously Expensive Phones of All Time
  • › Every Microsoft Windows Logo From 1985 to 2022

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera Harry Guinness
Harry Guinness is a photography expert and writer with nearly a decade of experience. His work has been published in newspapers like The New York Times and on a variety of other websites, from Lifehacker to Popular Science and Medium’s OneZero.
Read Full Bio »

Apple’s AirPods “just work” with iPhones thanks to their W1 chip, but they’re also standard Bluetooth headphones. That means they work with any device that supports Bluetooth audio—even Android phones.

What Is Apple’s W1 Chip?

The pairing process won’t be as effortless as pairing with an iPhone, and the connection may not be quite as solid, but they’ll work with anything from an Android phone or Windows PC to other Apple devices like an Apple TV. There’s also an easy pairing process if you’re using a Mac or iPad.

How to Pair Your AirPods With a Mac or iPad

If you’ve already paired your AirPods with your iPhone, this pairing status will sync between your iPhone and any iPads and Macs you have on your account thanks to iCloud. For this to work, you have to be signed into the iPad or Mac with the same Apple ID you use on your iPhone. For Macs, you must have Handoff enabled.

Older Macs that don’t support Handoff can’t take advantage of this easy pairing process, and you’ll have to manually pair it with them using Bluetooth. This pairing status also doesn’t sync to Apple TVs, so you’ll have to use Bluetooth to pair AirPods with an Apple TV, too.

If everything is set up properly, you can simply select your AirPods like any other audio device from your iPad or Mac. First, ensure either your AirPods case is open, the AirPods are out of the case, or that they’re in your ears. If they’re in the case and the case is closed, they won’t be available as an audio device option.

On an iPad, open the Control Center, tap the audio wave icon at the top right corner of the music controls or long-press the music controls and tap the device switcher icon, and select your AirPods in the list of audio devices.

On a Mac, click the volume icon on your Mac’s menu bar and select your AirPods in the list of available devices or head to Apple menu > System Preferences > Sound and choose the AirPods. You can also enable the volume icon on your Mac’s menu bar from here by checking the “Show volume in menu bar” box, if it isn’t already enabled.

How to Pair Your AirPods With an Android Phone, Windows PC, Apple TV, or Anything Else

To pair your AirPods with any other device—or an older Mac, if you don’t meet the above requirements—you’ll just need to find the easy-to-miss pairing button on the AirPods charging case.

Look on the back of your AirPods case. See that faint silver circle near the bottom, just above the Lightning port? That’s the “setup button” you need to pair your AirPods with other devices where the W1 chip can’t pair it automatically.

To place your AirPods in pairing mode, here’s what you need to do:

Place both your AirPods in the charging case.

Open the lid on the case. You’ll see the light come on, indicating the charging status.

Press and hold the circular button on the back of your AirPods case. The light inside the case will begin to blink white. This indicates that your AirPods are in pairing mode.

While the white light is flashing, your AirPods will be “discoverable”. In other words, they’ll appear as a peripheral you can pair from your Bluetooth settings, just like any other Bluetooth headphones or speakers. For example:

Android: Go to Settings and tap the “Bluetooth” option under Wireless & networks. Ensure Bluetooth is enabled and you’ll see the AirPods as an available device here.

Windows 10: Head to Settings > Devices > Bluetooth & other devices > Add Bluetooth or other device > Bluetooth. Select your AirPods in the list of nearby devices.

Windows 7: Head to Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers > Add a device. Choose your AirPods.

Mac: Click the Apple menu and head to System Preferences > Bluetooth. Select your AirPods in the list and click “Pair”.

Apple TV: Navigate to Settings > Remotes and Devices > Bluetooth. Pick your AirPods in the list.

Other Devices With Bluetooth: Just navigate to the Bluetooth settings screen where you can view and connect Bluetooth devices. Your AirPods will appear as an option here like any other Bluetooth headphones would.

If you take a little while to find the Bluetooth options, your AirPods might leave pairing mode and you’ll see the white blinking light stop. Just long-press the circular setup button again and your AirPods will re-enter pairing mode and be discoverable from your other devices once again.

Once they’re connected, your AirPods will function as normal Bluetooth headphones with whatever device they’re paired to.

How to Reconnect Your AirPods to Your iPhone or iPad

Your AirPods will be disconnected from your iPhone after you pair them with another non-iOS device. You’ll need to reconnect them to your iPhone to use them with your iPhone once again.

To do this, first place your AirPods back in their case. Head to your iPhone’s home screen, open the AirPods case, and hold it near your iPhone. (This same process works on an iPad, if you want to pair your AirPods with an iPad instead of an iPhone.)

You’ll see a “Not Your AirPods” message appear on your screen. Tap “Connect.” You’ll then be prompted to press and hold the circular button on the back of the case. Release the button when “Connecting” appears on your screen and they’ll be automatically reconnected to your iPhone.

Commercial fashion photographer and teacher, Mark Wallace enjoys sharing his wealth of experience in a fun and creative series of how-to videos.

Use Vintage Lenses with Your Mirrorless Camera: Exploring Photography with Mark Wallace

Learn how to mix and match vintage lenses (of almost any brand) with modern mirrorless cameras (of almost any brand). Add flavor to your photography with “flawed” used lenses. An old lens and a simple lens adapter is all you need to start having tons of fun.

Related Products at Adorama:

Additional Images courtesy of RJ ProtacioInstagram: @rjprotacio_photos

Like, share, and comment on the video below. let’s get the conversation started!

If you have questions, please share them below.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Are you the creator of this podcast?

and pick the featured episodes for your show.

Listen to Exploring Photography with Mark Wallace

RadioPublic

A free podcast app for iPhone and Android

  • User-created playlists and collections
  • Download episodes while on WiFi to listen without using mobile data
  • Stream podcast episodes without waiting for a download
  • Queue episodes to create a personal continuous playlist

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Connect with listeners

Podcasters use the RadioPublic listener relationship platform to build lasting connections with fans

Harry Guinness
How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless cameraHarry Guinness
Writer

Harry Guinness is a photography expert and writer with nearly a decade of experience. His work has been published in newspapers like The New York Times and on a variety of other websites, from Lifehacker to Popular Science and Medium’s OneZero. Read more.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Buying lenses for your camera isn’t always simple. The two major manufacturers, Canon and Nikon, both have different options depending on whether you’re getting a lens for a full-frame or crop sensor camera. Even if you’ve got a Canon camera, you can’t be sure that any Canon lens will work.

Third parties, like Sigma and Tamron, make things even more confusing. They also make lenses that come with a choice of mount. You can get a Sigma 24-105 for either Canon or Nikon cameras.

Let’s break things down a bit and look at what mounts Canon and Nikon are currently using for their cameras and lenses.

Canon: EF, EF-S, EF-M

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Canon cameras use one of three lens mounts: the standard EF mount and then two derivatives, the EF-S mount and EF-M mount.

The EF mount was introduced by Canon in 1987. It’s what’s used by their modern full-frame cameras like the 5D Mark IV and the 6D Mark II. Every EF lens has an autofocus motor build into it—the EF stands for Electro-Focus. You can’t buy non-autofocus EF lenses from Canon, but third party manufacturers do make manual focus lenses that fit the EF mount. If a lens is listed as for Canon cameras without specifying further, it’s almost certainly an EF lens.

The EF-S mount is used by Canon’s crop-sensor cameras such as the 7D Mark II, 80D and 1300D. Since the sensor is smaller, the lenses can also be smaller and lighter. An EF-S lens will not work on an EF mount camera, however the reverse is not true—EF lenses work perfectly with EF-S mount cameras.

The EF-M mount was created for Canon’s mirrorless cameras such as the M100. EF-M lenses will only work on EF-M cameras. EF and EF-S lenses can be used with an adapter.

Nikon: FX and DX

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Unlike Canon, Nikon only has one lens mount: the F-mount, which was introduced in 1959. There are, however, still a few complications.

Nikon has two sensor sizes: the FX full-frame sensor, used in cameras like the D810, and the DX APS-C sensor, used in cameras like the D500. There are lenses available for each that use the F-mount.

The DX sensor is smaller, so lenses designed just for it don’t need to project as big an image. A DX lens will still fit on any F-mount camera, however, they won’t be able to fully use the larger sensor. Modern Nikon FX DSLRs will automatically crop out the empty image space if they detect you’re using a DX lens, but you will be left with a lower resolution, and potentially lower quality, image.

FX lenses are designed to work with the larger FX sensor. They also use the F-mount so you can use them with your DX cameras as well.

Nikon also has a mirrorless mount: the Nikon 1 mount. Nikon 1 lenses can only be used with Nikon 1 cameras, although F-mount lenses can be used with an adapter.

Any third-party lens designed for Nikon cameras will use the F-mount, though some might be designed just for DX cameras.

Before you get too complacent and think you can use any Nikon lens on any camera, there’s another wrinkle. Unlike Canon cameras, where every lens has an autofocus motor, some Nikon lenses, like this 50mm f/1.8, don’t. Instead, they use an autofocus motor that’s built into high end Nikon DSLRs. Confusingly, these lenses are called AF lenses.

At the moment, the only Nikon cameras without an autofocus motor are the D5600, D5500, D5300, D5200, D5100, D5000, D3400, D3300, D3200, D3100, D3000, D60, D40X and D40. These are all entry-level DX models. You can still use AF lenses on them, however you will need to manually focus them.

Lenses with an autofocus motor build in are called either AF-S or AF-P, depending on the kind of motor they have. These can be used on any Nikon DSLR and will always have autofocus.

Camera and lens standards have changed and developed as new technologies have evolved. Camera gear, however, can last along time. Most lenses from the 90s will work on modern Canon cameras and some lenses from the 70s will work on Nikon cameras. Just make sure they’ve got a compatible mount.

  • › Should You Buy Crop Sensor Specific Camera Lenses?
  • › What Lenses Should I Buy for My Nikon Camera
  • › How to Use Old and Differently-Branded Lenses with Your Mirrorless Camera
  • › What’s the Difference Between Canon’s Regular and L-Series Lenses and Which Should You Buy
  • › How to Get Started With Film Photography
  • › How to Move to a Full Frame Camera
  • › Why Are Good Camera Lenses So Important?
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Arriving Today

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera Harry Guinness
Harry Guinness is a photography expert and writer with nearly a decade of experience. His work has been published in newspapers like The New York Times and on a variety of other websites, from Lifehacker to Popular Science and Medium’s OneZero.
Read Full Bio »

I had a thought recently when I was looking for a decent adaptor so that I could use my FD lenses with my new mirrorless camera. I have two FD cameras and a few lenses but an adaptor suddenly seemed so inconvenient. Would it not be worth the likes of Canon, Olympus, or even a third party, making a mirrorless version of an AE-1 or an OM-1? The demand for them for the sake of using these old lenses must be there. I’d consider buying one if it was under £1000/US$1500. Might be a little indulgent admittedly…

What are you looking for on mirrorless versions of AE-1 and OM-1 that aren't available on current mirrorless bodies? Do you mean a mirrorless AE-1 that can mount FD lenses natively? In that case, you lose the ability to mount lenses of similar or shorter flange distance (Minolta MD, Leica M, Konica Hexanon, Olympus PEN, etc), so I can't see why people would buy that instead of a Sony A7 which is more flexible.

It's more that it seems to me that a Mirrorless camera which fits an older mount natively is a missed opportunity so far for the retrospective/nostalgia market. If it had fewer menus, art modes and superfluous features, and focused on the simplicity of things like the old SLR's that wouldn't be bad. I wasn't that interested in switching lens mounts around to be honest, but I understand where you're coming from in regards to flexibility

If they made an SLR that small that's FF, THAT would be the miracle. But I agree with you about the compatibility, it creates a very small user base.

The demand for them for the sake of using these old lenses must be there.

I imagine the number of people who have a lot of FD lenses, who want to shoot digitially exclusively with these lenses and are at the same time unwilling to use adaptors is extremely small.

Also the concept of producing a camera which people wont buy any lenses for is a non-starter. Much better to get them to buy into an ecosystem of expensive native lenses!

There's no real reason for Canon to make a new camera with an older mount. Making a digital FD body would only really help the used lens market, but they wouldn't make any profit from lenses, since FD was a previous mount. They'd have to start making FD lenses again, which would conflict with the sales of their more pricey modern EF glass. And even if they did re-make FD glass, it'd be expensive to do so, and it'd undermine their current market because they'd have to be cheaper than the EF counterparts, and they'd lose sales on EF because who is going to shell out $2k for a fast EF prime when they can get a new FD for less.

Just use an adapter with FD lenses on your mirrorless camera. I use a $7 adapter from amazon to use FD lenses on my X-T1. I personally find that the older FD lenses are a great bang for your buck, I have a 50mm f1.2, a 85mm f1.2L, and a 35mm f2.8 Tilt Shift all with an inexpensive adapter so they're always ready for use.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

You’ve just bought a new mirrorless camera and you’re ready to start shooting the moment it arrives. It is important that you test your new gear before you head out on an adventure with it in tow. In this blog post we will cover 5 ways to test your new camera so that you can be sure everything is working properly and capture some amazing shots!

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

One of the most important things you should do when testing your new mirrorless camera is calibrating it. This ensures that all of the buttons are working as they’re supposed to and there aren’t any issues with autofocus or exposure settings. It’s best if this test can be done on location so that you can ensure everything works properly.

Make sure to use a tripod when calibrating your camera so that there is no movement and the settings stay consistent. The first thing you should do is find an object with some texture (a tree, brick wall or even an old barn door will work). Set up your tripod and frame it in the center of your composition – this ensures consistency throughout all of your shots.

Next, manually focus on the object you have chosen and take a picture. Take note of what exposure setting was used for this shot – it should be spot on if things are going well! While still looking through the viewfinder, change your exposure to brighten or darken the scene by one stop increments while checking the “Exposure” value in the viewfinder each time. Make sure to write down what changes were made for each stop so that you can use this information later when setting up your shot!

Another way to test your new mirrorless camera is by using a tripod and varying the ISO settings on your camera until something interesting pops out of the shadows. As with the calibration test, it’s best to do this in a location that has some texture or detail so you can see what is happening.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Choose an area of your scene and set up your tripod accordingly – making sure the focus point will be where you want it for your final shot. Set up manual focus on “infinity” by rotating the focus ring until it reads “∞” and take a picture.

Now, open up your image in Adobe Camera Raw or another post-processing software that allows for this type of editing. Find the Histogram panel on your screen (it might be labeled differently depending on which program you are using) and find where there is detail without clipping (when a graph is pushed up against the left or right side of your histogram).

Clip some shadows and see how it affects the overall look of your photo. If you’re not happy with what has happened to your image, change the ISO setting on your camera and try again! This time, make sure there aren’t any clipped shadows before taking your next picture.

One way to test out the capabilities of your new mirrorless camera is by using it in adverse conditions – this ensures that you will be ready when things get crazy! There are two good ways to do this: shooting with extremely low light and high ISO settings or testing out your autofocus during fast moving events.

While it might seem like a good idea to shoot with the lowest ISO and aperture settings, this is not actually what you should be doing. It’s best if these photos can be shot with your lens wide open (the smallest F-stop number) so that there isn’t any issue with depth of field or diffraction . You will want to be sure that the ISO is set as low as it can go to maintain a clean image.

If you want to test out your autofocus, an easy way to do this is by taking shots of moving lights or objects at night. This ensures there will always be something for your camera’s autofocus system to lock onto and gives you a good idea of how accurate it is.

Make sure you have AF-C mode enabled so that your camera will continue to focus as long as the shutter button remains depressed and take shots of moving lights or objects at night. You can also set up an object on another surface (like a wall) where there are regular patterns – this allows for easy use of the autofocus tracking feature.

A great way to test how well your mirrorless camera performs is by taking lots and lots of photos! This ensures that you are getting a variety of shots – each with different settings, compositions , etc . It also gives you an idea about whether there are any issues (like shutter lag or noise) that you need to work on.

Take a variety of photos – with different settings, compositions , and exposures . Make sure to take shots in burst mode as well so that the camera fires off several images at once! If there is any sort of shutter lag or noise (graininess), this will become evident pretty quickly and give you an idea of what you need to focus on for your next shoot.

One way to test out the capabilities of your new mirrorless camera is by taking it outside in natural light – this ensures that there are no issues with different lighting conditions, etc . You can do this pretty much anywhere where there isn’t extreme weather or other unexpected circumstances! Make sure to take a variety of images – this ensures that you are able to see what the camera can do in different situations.

Take photos indoors, outdoors , and at night! Make sure your ISO is set as low as possible so there aren’t any issues with graininess or noise . This way, you’ll be able to get an idea about how each image turned out – which ones are good and which ones need improvement.

Using the tips outlined above, you’ll be able to test your new mirrorless camera in just about any setting! This ensures that when it comes time for a real shoot , you’ll be ready to get amazing shots with ease . Being confident will allow you to focus on your subject and capturing the most beautiful images possible.

With a little bit of practice, you’ll be able to test out your new mirrorless camera in no time!

If you're just getting into photography and want the flexibility of an interchangeable lens model, you'll want an entry-level camera that's affordable and easy to use without sacrificing your room to grow as an artist. Here are some of our favorites.

  • Related Camera Picks:

Our 8 Top Picks

Best for Getting Started With Full-Frame

Canon EOS RP

Best for Stabilized Imaging and Fuji Color

Fujifilm X-S10

Best SLR for Nikkor Lenses

Nikon D5600

Best Dust-and-Splash-Protected Full-Frame Starter Model

Nikon Z 5

Best for 4K Video With Micro Four Thirds Lenses

Panasonic Lumix DMC-GX85

Best Front-Facing Screen for Vlogging

Canon EOS M50 Mark II

Best Small SLR for Optical Viewfinder Fans

Canon EOS Rebel SL3

Best Low-Cost Option for Stabilized 4K

Olympus OM-D E-M10 Mark IV

With a smartphone in your pocket, everyone is a photographer. The latest iPhone, Galaxy, and Pixel handsets capture images that turn heads and rack up social media likes, but there’s a limit to what they can do. If you’re interested in trying new photo techniques, it’s time to think about a camera with interchangeable lens support. Whether it’s for capturing distant wildlife, trying your hand at long exposure landscapes or night sky astrophotography, or delving into the tiny world of macro, you’ll find that a dedicated camera offers big benefits over your phone, and you don’t need to spend a ton of money on one.

Don’t Get an SLR

There’s a better-than-average chance that you’re reading this after searching for recommendations on SLRs for beginners. And here’s what we have to say about that: Most beginners shouldn’t buy SLRs.

Technology has moved beyond the scope of the optical viewfinder. A decade ago the best cameras were all SLRs; today they are mirrorless. The idea is the same—a large image sensor, interchangeable lenses, and a direct view through the lens—but now the view is created by the image sensor and shown on a rear screen or eye-level electronic viewfinder.

There are palpable advantages for beginners. For one, you’ll get a preview of your exposure in the EVF, freeing you to experiment with manual exposure modes and see feedback in real time. Autofocus coverage typically extends much farther, so you’ve got more creative freedom to position a subject in the frame.

The creative side is there, too. If you’re thinking about making photos in black and white, you can set a mirrorless camera to preview your scenes in monochrome. The same is true for any color looks you want to apply—almost every camera offers vivid and neutral modes, but others extend them to more artistic looks.

That said, we’ve included a couple SLRs in our list for folks who strictly prefer an optical viewfinder. They’re worth thinking about if your eyes don’t deal well with digital displays, but you’re definitely missing out on the more modern trappings of a mirrorless camera.

Choosing a Mirrorless System

When you buy an interchangeable lens camera, you’re not just buying the camera. The system you choose dictates what lenses you’ll be able to use.

That’s not a big deal if you’re just starting out—you’ll buy a camera with a bundled zoom, and if you want to add a telephoto, wide aperture prime, or macro lens, you’ll have no problem finding one that works with your camera.

If you think you’re going to move to higher-end equipment down the road, you’ll want to take a little more into consideration. The Fujifilm X, Micro Four Thirds, and Sony E offer the widest range of lenses, and Canon’s EOS M has the basics covered.

For more detail on what every camera system offers, check out our guide to choosing a system.

Should You Go Full Frame?

Most cameras marketed toward budding photographers use image sensors that are smaller than the 35mm film models of yesteryear.

The bigger sensor size means that lenses are also a little bit bigger, and pricier, generally speaking. But there are some real reasons to mull a full-frame camera, even if you’re starting out.

I recommend them especially to photographers whose main interests lie in portraiture, landscapes, and other more artistic pursuits, especially those who love the blurred-background bokeh look.

They’re also a good choice if you’re interested in trying out old, manual focus lenses, to give your images a bit of a vintage feel.

We’ve included a couple of full-frame picks here. The Canon EOS RP is built for beginner users and can be had for around $1,300 with the basic 24-105mm kit lens. The Nikon Z 5 is a bit pricier, $1,700 with a short 24-50mm zoom, but is a bit better built.

If you’re still mulling a camera and want to get the best shots out of your phone, you can check out our tips for getting better photos with your smartphone, or our advice for beginning photographers working with phones and cameras alike.

I have my first wedding photography job coming up next year for my cousin. I've been told that you can use analog lenses with mirrorless cameras and get a similar visual effect to film photography. I've heard that sony alphas are good but are there any other camera / lens combinations that you would recommend? I have a small budget of about £500. Thank you!

Much safer to go with the a camera you know with modern lenses and then play with filters afterwards in lightroom (VSCO, for example).

IMHO weddings are not the time or place to experiment with manual focus or use lenses that could be dodgy.

I have both a digital Sony film camera that I use via adapters with vintage glass and vintage analog cameras that I use with film.

It is definitely true that you can get good results with analog lenses on mirrorless cameras; practically all vintage lenses can be adapted to mirrorless cameras of all manufacturers. Keep in mind that lens technology made a huge progress during the last decades. This is in particular noticeable with vintage zoom and wide angle lenses, those are often of inferior quality in comparison to modern glass. Prime lenses in the range between 50 and 135mm are often of good quality and can yield beautiful results when used correctly.

"Used correctly" is another important point here, these lenses are all completely manual, meaning that you can set your camera to aperture priority, but you have to set the aperture and focus yourself on the lens. If you are used to fully electronic lenses that is something that needs practice, and honestly I would not want to try to manual focus during the critical moments of a wedding (candid shots during the party is a different question).

As for the film look, you will get the optical imperfections of these old lenses but not the grain and colors of film. Of course this look can be simulated in editing, even though film offers a soft roll-off of highlights that digital sensors can simply not capture.

I myself was asked to shoot a wedding next year and I plan to have a digital main camera with fully electronic lens (plus another backup in the bag) and an analog second camera for some candid shots.

What are your favorite non camera branded lenses and what do you use it on? For example, I have a Yonguno 50mm that is supposed to be a good clone of canon’s 50mm. I’ve been impressed with it so far. This weekend Im renting a Tamron 150-600. I use a canon. Always up to learn about new brands and share my thoughts.

Yeah, I just meant non camera brands. Oh well, can't edit the title now. Numerous people suggested Samyang, I will have to check them out. What do you shoot with your 40mm? I have a 50mm but I originally bought it to play around with reverse mounting for macro. On a crop, it almost feels to close but I don't do a lot of portrait style shots. Sharp though, I do like what I have taken with it.

Love my Tamron 70-200 G2.

I have shot my last 4 shoots without literally ever taking my Tamron 70-200 G2 off my camera. Love this lens.

That one looks super nice, I like wildlife shots so a really nice zoom is on the wishlist.

This and the Sigma 35mm 1.4 Art are the best lenses in my bag. The bokeh the 70-200 generates is just gorgeous.

Tamron and Samyang. The Tamron lenses are great, looks amazing and have by far the best Stabilizer I personally have tested. And they cost pretty much half the price of what the equivalent Canon lenses does. I can never get myself to spend $2,099.00 on a Canon 70-200mm when Tamron's cost $1,299.00.

The above applies for other brands as well. I really hated my Canon 85mm F1.8 because it never managed to nail focus for me in lowlight, and I had other issues with it as well. I was looking at the Canon 85mm F1.4 IS, but the $1,599.00 was a slight deal breaker for me. Then I found out after a chat with another photographer that Samyang release a 85mm F1.4 for Canon, WITH autofocus for almost a third of the price. I bought that over the Canon one in a heartbeat.

So yeah, when I can save hundreds of dollars for the same results, I spend my money on "non branded" lenses.

These days there are a billion camera lens options, and so little time to research which lens you need for your camera.

While lenses are interchangeable – in that a camera can use different kinds of lenses (standard, wide angle, macro, etc), they aren’t completely interchangeable, across brands and types of cameras. So finding the right lens can be much more complicated than picking one and attaching it to your camera.

Swapping out the lens that came with your camera is a great way to expand the uses of your camera and allow you to use your camera in different ways. Whether you have had your DSLR for a while and are just now looking to upgrade your standard lens to something fancier, or you are buying your first DSLR, we have written a simple guide to camera lenses that are interchangeable, and lenses that aren’t.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Brands

If you have bought a DSLR from a major manufacturer, it’s likely that the manufacturer will have a range of lenses designed specifically for your new camera. Often, these lenses from major brands will only work with their brand cameras. So, for instance, a Canon lens won’t fit a Nikon camera.

This can be particularly frustrating if you have bought a new camera and can no longer use the old lenses from a different brand. While there are adaptors, they may not be worth it in the long run, as the camera won’t be able to use all the features of a different brand of lens.

Often, smaller independent brands make lenses that fit most common major camera brands. While they aren’t always as good as the ones made by the original manufacturer, they are a lot more affordable and can do the job just as well if they’re high quality.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Compact System Camera vs DSLR Lenses

These days you can get compact system cameras that can perform close to the same job as DSLRs. They are a more compact professional camera, and unlike compact cameras, give photographers the option of using a range of different lenses.

Generally, lenses that fit into your DSLR will not fit your compact system camera. Manufacturers usually have a separate range of lenses specifically designed for compact system cameras.

When buying a lens for a compact system camera, it’s important to check the specs. Independent brands may have adapters that will make it possible for you to use your DSLR lenses with your compact system camera, but the functions on your camera may be limited if you use an incompatible lens and an adaptor.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Mounts

The reason that lenses aren’t interchangeable across brands and camera types is mainly attributed to the mounts. While many third-party lenses clearly advertise which brand the lens is made for, often knowing the brand isn’t enough. Different cameras within a brand can have different mounts.

The Canon EF-lens mount has been around since 1987 and was designed for the EOS range of cameras. In 2003 Canon introduced the newer EF-S-mount which are used for cameras that use an APS-C sensor.

Sigma, Tamron, and Tokina manufacture lenses using the EF and EF-S mounts. Olympus, Kodak and Panasonic use the Micro Four Thirds mount. However it’s a good idea to check whether the image stabilisation feature sits within your camera body or the lens itself, as it often operates differently for various brands.

Introduced in 1959, the Nikon F-mount is one of the oldest mounts still being used. Other manufacturers, like Fujifilm, make cameras compatible with this mount. The Nikon 1-mount was introduced in 2011 and is used for Nikon compact system cameras.

If you’re ready to buy a new lens for your camera, head over to the Camera House online store. We include the specs so it’s easy to figure out what lens you need. If you still need help, why not head instore and have a chat with our friendly staff? They’ll have all the answers to your questions!

One of the main advantage of a mirrorless system is to being mirrorless (sorry for the pun). Of course in an ideal world where we all rich, the best solution is to buy the top of the gamma lenses of the brand we have and then we are pretty much sorted, but for who just started into photography, or like me, where the mirrorless camera is more a lightweight alternative to the heavy duty DSLR we already own, and maybe we don't want to invest billions on a second system knowing that we already have spend plenty of money for the lenses for the big boy. But there is any cheap alternative? Of course there is, and you can find it in vintage lenses.
On ebay and similar sites, or even in most of the camera shops in your city, it's pretty easy to find old used lenses, sometimes even older than us, and most of the times, unless you are looking for rarities, they are extremely affordable.

Vintage lenses can be mounted pretty much on every interchangeable lens camera with the right adapter, but in the case of a modern digital SLR the adapter needs a lens to correct the increased distance between the sensor and the camera, adding a crop factor in some cases that reduce the real angle of view of the camera, and in some cases you lose the ability to focus to infinity, and adding another piece of glass in front of the lens it effects the general image quality and these adapters are generally not super cheap, or at least you want something that doesn’t make you lens as useful as a bottom of a bottle.
But in the case of a mirrorless system it’s a totally different story, as the fact that the camera is smaller, they only need to cover the distance from the mount of the camera to where the lens supposed to be to work correctly, so no glasses on the way, which means that there are no such things as additional crop factor or decrease of image quality, and it’s way cheaper as it’s just a pipe of metal or plastic.

Why so cheap?

Well, it’s easy, these lenses are in the best case at least 20 years old, for example Canon, in the pre-autofocus era, used to have a mount called FD, which was replaced by the current EF mount in 1987. So as you can pretty much image, everybody rushed to move to the new system and leaving the lenses with the old system on the shelves, and the production of those lenses has stopped since then, so the only way to find them is on the used market. If you want some specific and rare lenses, they still cost good money, but for those lenses who were pretty common back then, the value of these lenses dropped dramatically.

But are they good?

If you compare to their modern counterpart, obviously the newer ones will beat them in any test, they are not as sharp as the new ones, they are not as contrasty and bokehy as the new ones, they don’t have autofocus, they are not weather sealed, and so on… But this doesn’t mean that they are bad lenses, it only means that the new ones are better, but these grandparents of photography can still make great shots. And especially if consider that their price, the quality/price ratio is pretty impressive.
Let me do you an example: a few months ago I bought two vintage lenses, and one of these is this beauty shown down here.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

It’s a Canon FDn 28mm f/2.8. At full aperture is decent, if you close down by a stop it’s very pretty sharp and it reaches the peak of image quality between f/5.6 and f/8. It’s a tiny and extremely lightweight lens, and to be honest is as sharp as the Canon EF 24mm f/2.8 I owned a while ago. Of course it doesn’t have autofocus nor even a focus confirmation, and things like image stabilisation were sci-fi for that era, the contrast is not as good as the EF counterpart, and you can’t even compare it with the newer Canon EF 28mm f/2.8 IS, but the newer EF version costs around €/$500, while I paid the vintage one for only €75 with 6 months of warranty and a leather case, but you can probably find it for even less, as I’ve seen it on ebay for around $50, a tenth of the price of the EF lens.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera
Another great lens I bought is the Canon FD 50mm f/1.4, paid €150 on Adverts.ie, and it’s the lens that stays the most on my Fuji X-E1. It’s not perfect as at full aperture is pretty much unusable, unless you love the argentinian soap opera effect, but from f/2 is already pretty sharp, and from f/2.8 onward is very sharp. The build quality of this lens is simply superb, despite it’s age is still in perfect conditions and the focus is extremely smooth. On my Fuji with a crop factor of x1.5 it becomes a 75mm, and it takes a few seconds to focus properly, but it’s a pure pleasure to use this lens.
But aside these two lenses, in internet you can find billions of different lenses, from brands like Olympus, Pentax, Nikon and so on.

Which adaptor I should buy?

On ebay you can find several brands that produces adaptors, some of them have contacts to allow some autofocus lenses to work with your camera, but they come with an higher price tag.
For my Fuji X-E1 I bought two Fotasy FD-FX adaptors sold by rainbowimaging, they cost about $10 each, and for that price they are really well build and they work perfectly on my camera. Obviously they sell several different adaptors, and I think they cover every possible mount combination, otherwise you just need to search on ebay for the one you need.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Conclusions

Vintage lenses are a great deal for photographers on a budget. Yes, they don’t have autofocus, and you need to set the aperture on the lens itself, but to be honest the lack of these modern comforts can only be a great school for who really wants to learn how to manually expose and focus a photo, and it slows you down, making you think a bit more before pressing the shutter button. You might spend a bit of time before you get the grip with it, but once you get it, it becomes as natural as breathing.

Images shot with the Canon FDn 28mm f/2.8 and Canon FD 50mm f/1.4.

By now we know lot about Mirroless camera, DSLRs, and point and shoot cameras. We also know composition and to find a balance in the frame is important part of photography, every photograph is an interpretation of your subject and message. Undoubtedly camera is an extension of your eyes, but I believe it is an extension of your soul too. You pour in all your efforts to express your feeling with your photography.

We already know that mirrorless cameras don’t have mirror that offers first line of defense against dust, so cleaning the sensor is a much more frequent activity, and constantly sending it to shop is unreasonable. So here in this special article on world photography day we list you few ways to keep the extension of your eyes safe and clean.

Dust free Environment

To start off with even before considering cleaning your camera sensor is to prepare a dust free environment. You can use Air filter in small areas or even in bathroom as the moisture there won’t allow dust to come between you and your photography. You can always keep you shower on and steam out the bathroom for few minutes this will help dust settle down. But make sure that bathroom is steam free before you start cleaning your camera sensor.

Air Blower:

Blower is a dry method which you can use to clean sensor of your mirrorless camera while lens changes or for general maintenance, it is one of the best ways to extend life of your camera and click some of your best photographs. Sometime you notice visibly large particles of dust on sensor or lint on camera sensor you can always use the blower to instantly remove it.

Sensor Cleaning Brush:

Sometimes even after using Blower few dust particles stays on the sensor like stubborn because static connection to the sensor. Here where the brush plays it role. But remember never to touch the bristles with bare hands and when using the brush second time use Air Blower on the bristles of your brush as this removes the old dust if there is any. This keeps the static charge which help in removing remaining dust from sensor. Do not, we repeat do not put pressure while cleaning the sensor, brush across gently few time. Brush is a must have thing when you love your mirrorless or DSLRs camera.

Sensor Cleaning Swab:

Air Blower and Brush are part of dry methods to keep your camera sensor clean, though this method works most of the time but there is some debris that needs wet method to remove them from sensor. Debris like salty misty particles or microscopic particles that accumulate while shooting near sea . Even sometime while changing lens we unintentionally sneeze and that microscopic spit get stuck to our sensor, here the swab works perfectly.

Always remember use Wet Method only after using the dry method else large particle will put scratch n you sensor while rubbing with swab.

Sensor Cleaning Swab are good for larger sensor like full frame and especially medium format, use the swab once across your sensor as even as possible.

Instead of buying the Box Set you can always go for cleaning kit and buy some extra Pec Pads so that you can reuse the spatulas.

You can always buy the Mirrorlss, DSLR sensor cleaning kit from online retail sites like Amazon India and Flipkart.com.

How to keep camera safe

Most of us in India prefer to carry camera in our laptop or some other bags. Never ever do this… Why? Camera bags are made to keep cameras safe they are padded enough to bear all sort of pressure even if you are travelling in public transport.

Always remember to keep lens intact with the body, if your camera bag doesn’t have space enough to keep them together do use the rear lens cover and Camera Body Cover Cap. This will keep sensor and lens safe.

In case if you have to use the camera in places where dust is all around like clicking in villages or doing street photography, when you return home follow the above mentioned method to keep your camera clean and safe.

The Canon R5 and R6 are a big deal in the Canon world. While the original full-frame mirrorless cameras were the EOS R and EOS RP, they were something of a stop-gap for the RF mount system while efforts were put into lens development for the new system.

The EOS R system uses Canon’s new RF mount instead of the older EF mount from the SLR and DSLR cameras. With millions of EF lenses in circulation from 20+ years of sales, it’s no wonder people are wondering whether they can use their beloved EF lenses on the new RF mount cameras like the R5 and R6.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Use one of Canon’s official EF-RF adapters to enable EF lenses to work on the Canon R5 and R6

Thankfully, the answer is YES! You can use EF lenses on the R5 and R6, although you will need to buy one of Canon’s EF-RF mount adapters to do so.

Canon was smart here. Instead of just making one basic adapter, they have actually created a series of EF-RF mount adapters that bring some additional functionality to the table. There’s a basic adapter that simply connects an EF lens to an RF mount, this one is the cheapest. Then there’s an adapter that includes a user programable ring around it, called the control ring. This is my personal favourite of the whole bunch. You can read a detailed review of the Canon EF-RF Control Ring Adapter here.

In addition to these two adapters, there are a further two adapters that include either a circular polarizing filter or a variable ND filter. The first being useful for landscape photographers, and the second being useful for filmmakers. Further details about the adapters in the lineup can be seen in the table beneath the gallery.

Weighing less than DSLRs the mirrorless cameras are capable to deliver 4K videos and offer almost similar result on the photography front. The mirrorless cameras are available in the market with affordable price tag; however there are very few accessories available to embrace them.

Undoubtedly, there are a number of companions for DSLRs including third party lenses but mirrorless camera owners you don’t need to feel left out as we have cherry picked top accessories for your camera in this article.

Table Dolly

We often had to shoot stepping in towards the subject with the camera (dolly in), or step backwards with the camera (dolly-out) as a result we get jerky videos. To get better result you need a table camera dolly featuring four skate style rubber wheels that glides over smoothly on tabletops or any flat surface. You can add straight and curved motion to your smartphone videos with the Table Dolly, you can also mount light or smartphone as per your requirement. Grab one for your lovely cam at starting price of Rs. 5,000.

Video Action Stabilizing Handle

Undoubtedly, tripods are a best solution to record stable videos, but you can also use handle Grips an inexpensive stabilisers — it provide necessary stability to action video shoots. The camera remains suspended in the Stabilizing Handle and helps to stable shots. It is a perfect accessory for your mirrorless camera as it reduces fatigue over lengthy filming session.

LED lights

Almost all the mirrorless cameras come with built in flash but that sometime does not give the result you want while shooting at night. Often the light produced by inbuilt flash is quite harsh. As most of the cameras come with hotshoe you can mount a dimmable LED lights that work as a perfect companion while shooting. The LED light come with couple of filters, Spotlight effect and Diffuse effect for reducing the color temperature to 3200K. You can also use the light to give special effects to the subjects.

Macro Ring Flash

Macro photography is an art of clicking extreme close-up snaps that shows subject in details. Many Mirrorless cameras are capable of talking such greats pictures, but when we get close to the subject lights are often improper. Here the Macro Ring Flash works – the circular LED light fixes around the lens and packs battery to offer better photography. You can also adjust intensity of light and color as per your need.

Microphone

Audio is very important part of quality video when you have 4K camera, at some point you can compromise with the shaky or less than sharp video but not with sound quality. Audiences quickly switches off videos with poor audio. So when you have to offer better audio at low cost for mirrorless and DSLR cameras, Rode microphones are the best companion. There is a range of mics in Videomic series which runs on battery and uses a standard 3.5mm jack; this is the reason why most bingers and pros recommend the brand.

One of the things we hear quite often in regard to mirrorless cameras is that it’s hard to find lenses for them, and that when they’re found, they’re expensive. While the latter can be said of most any high-end glass, it’s certainly true when you’re dealing with anything for the latest generation of photo gear. As always, we’re out there shaking the bushes and kicking the trees to find you the best deals on the equipment you need. Here are a few recent finds:

For Panasonic Lumix G

Panasonic’s line of Micro Four Thirds cameras have been drawing great reviews. If you’ve got one and want to expand your capabilities with it, here’s a selection of lenses you’ll appreciate and you’ll like these prices even more:

For Olympus 4/3

As one of the oldest and most respected names in the business, Olympus isn’t afraid of playing with the big boys. Hand in hand with the brand is the M.Zuiko lens, built to professional standards. Here’s one that covers just about any everyday shooting situation, from landscapes to portraits. If you need a good walk-around lens for your Olympus, grab one of these while they’re available:

For Sony

You can’t think mirrorless without thinking Sony. They were first to give the DSLR a real run for its money and they’re still competing. Take a look at some of the great deals we found on glass for your Sony mirrorless (one is a Zeiss!):

For Canon EOS-M

Canon isn’t exactly a stranger to the mirrorless market, either. Their compact, M-series APS-C cameras are favorites of many amateurs and pros for quick shooting. If you’re a Canon shooter, being able to mount your EF and EF-S series lenses on your EOS-M would really round out your gear, don’t you think? You can give yourself that capability for less than $70:

For Nikon 1

We’re not going to leave the Nikon compact shooters out. How about great walk-around lens for that little gem? How about an internal-focusing Nikkor for only a bit over $100? Take a look:

Hopefully you’re starting to see that buying great glass for your mirrorless camera doesn’t have to be a traumatic experience. We could list a lot more, but it’s really uch easier for you to simply visit Used Photo Pro yourself to take a look at what they’ve got to offer for all your photo gear needs. Their used merchandise is honestly rated and warrantied for a full 180 days. Plus, what you see is most definitely what you get! See for yourself!

When you're shopping for an interchangeable lens camera, Canon is the first name that comes to mind. But Canon has multiple mounts and sensor sizes, so it can be tricky to pick out the best lens for your SLR or mirrorless camera. If you're not sure which lenses work with your model, we've got you covered.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Canon currently markets three types of interchangeable lens cameras—and they all use different lenses. It makes shopping for a new lens for your Canon camera a little harder than for other brands, but we’re here to help.

Which Canon Camera Do You Own?

Before you buy a lens, you need to determine which Canon lenses are compatible with your camera. The first thing you’ll need to figure out is your camera type.

Most consumers with a Canon SLR own an APS-C model, one from the Rebel family, or a midrange entry like the EOS 80D or 90D. Canon doesn’t use the Rebel branding outside of North America. In Japan the series is called Kiss, and in Europe Canon uses model numbers with a three- or four-digit designation—the EOS 1500D and 800D are two examples.

If you don’t know a thing about cameras, you can tell an SLR apart from mirrorless models very easily: it’ll have an optical viewfinder and when you remove the lens you’ll see a silvered reflective mirror inside the camera.

If you have one of these Canon SLRs, you’ll want to use EF and EF-S lenses, as well as compatible entries from third parties. The same is true for full-frame Canon models in the 1D, 5D, and 6D series—we’ve covered options for them in depth. Click through to read our list of The Best Canon EF SLR Lenses to get started with the right lens for your SLR.

Canon’s other ILCs are mirrorless. It’s broken up into two families. Mirrorless cameras don’t have a mirror, so when you take the lens off you’ll see the green reflection of an image sensor, and they’ll either use an eye-level electronic viewfinder or rely solely on the camera’s rear display to see the view through the lens.

Canon is pushing casual photographers and budding hobbyists toward its compact EOS M system, a series of small cameras with lenses sized to match, but without an enthusiast or professional upgrade path. All of the cameras in the series have an EOS M designation, including the most recent EOS M6 Mark II and EOS M50 Mark II. The lens library isn’t vast, but they can use EF SLR lenses via an adapter if you don’t mind putting a big lens on a small camera. If you’re interested in a new lens for your EOS M series, click through to read our picks for The Best Canon EF-M Mirrorless Lenses.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

The Nikon Df DSLR is unique in that it can be used with many of the legacy NIKKOR lenses produced since 1959. The camera features an enhanced lens mount that works with current AF-S lenses as well as AF-D and AF lenses, and Ai (Aperture index) and Non-Ai lenses.

To determine if a lens is a Non-Ai, Ai, or more current model (AF, AF-D, AF-S), you need to look at the lens itself. You are looking for two distinctive properties of the lens.

A Non-Ai lens will have a meter coupling shoe without holes and it will be missing a meter coupling ridge.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Step 1. When to adjust the Meter Coupling Lever

When you want to use a Non-Ai lens on your Nikon Df, you will need to raise the meter coupling lever out of the way, on the camera body.

An Ai lens, on the other hand, will have a meter coupling shoe with holes and it will have a meter coupling ridge.

When you want to use an Ai lens or an AF, AF-D or AF-S lens on your Nikon Df, you will need to lower the meter coupling lever on the camera body, so it can be engaged by the lens.

Easy, right? Now onto Step 2.

Step 2. Entering non-CPU lens data

Because non-Ai lenses don’t have all the electronics built into them that are needed, to communicate with the Df regarding metering and exposure, you’ll need to provide the camera with some lens data, (lens focal length and maximum aperture), so you can shoot with it on the Df. This will allow you to gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using a non-CPU lens.

The camera can store lens data for up to nine non-CPU lenses.

First, attach the non-Ai lens to the camera, then go into the set-up menu and select Non-CPU lens data. Choose a lens # (one through nine), and enter the focal length and aperture. If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest one that is greater than that of the lens. Specify the exposure meter coupling method, Ai or non-Ai.

Then select either Aperture Priority or Manual exposure modes. These are the only exposure modes that will work with the type of lens attached.

If you want to use a specific aperture, use this order for the next two steps:

Adjust the aperture on the lens itself.

Lastly, use the exposure meter and turning the sub-command dial, set the correct exposure, matching the shutter speed to the aperture that you set on the lens.

If you don’t want a specific aperture, meter first.

Then, set the aperture on the lens itself to match the correct exposure.

Now you’re all set to go shooting!

Using an Ai lens on your Df

Because Ai lenses have the necessary hardware to communicate with the camera, all you need to do here make sure that you lowered the meter coupling lever on the camera body, and then attach the Ai lens to the camera, and you can start shooting.

Using an AF, AF-D or AF-S lens on your Df

Similarly, current AF, AF-D and AF-S lenses just need to have the meter coupling lever lowered. Once that’s done, you can mount the lens and shoot.

A teleconverter or extender (as Canon calls them) is a gadget that fits between the lens and the camera body to magnify the image made by the lens. A teleconverter sounds like the ideal solution for getting closer to a subject with your lens.

In practice, though, teleconverters have disadvantages, including the effect they have on your lens’s maximum aperture and often on the overall optical quality of your photos.

And you need to choose wisely, as the best teleconverters will not work well with all lenses and cameras. At one time, they were sold as inexpensive gadgets that were widely compatible with different camera systems and lenses, but these days lens and camera designs are more complex, with sophisticated electronic data transfer and, sometimes with protruding rear lens elements. There are few ‘generic’ teleconverters still on the market and these have to be chosen with care to match your lenses.

But teleconverters have not disappeared. They have taken on a new role, mostly in long-range sports and wildlife photography. A high-quality ‘dedicated’ teleconverter can massively increase the reach of a telephoto lens and saves the expense and weight of carrying bigger, longer telephotos.

• Check out our full guide to the best teleconverters for your camera to see what’s available for your system and the different lenses available.

So what do you need to know when choosing a teleconverter for your DSLR or mirrorless camera system?

1) Teleconverter magnification

Teleconverters come in three strength settings. 1.4x is the most common: it gives a useful increase in magnification without a big penalty in usability or image quality. They increase the focal length of the lens it is used with, so a 300mm becomes a 420mm – and a 70-200mm becomes a 98-280mm zoom

2x converters (also known as doublers) are popular too because they double the focal length, although the image quality may not be as good.

Some makers, such as Nikon, produce intermediate 1.7x teleconverters.

2) Teleconverters affect the maximum aperture

Because the lens’s image is being enlarged, the effective lens aperture is decreased. A 1.4x teleconverter brings a one-stop reduction in maximum aperture; a 2x teleconverter brings a two-stop reduction.

So if you use a 1.4x converter on a 300mm f/4 it becomes a 420mm f/5.6. And if you use a 2x teleconverter on a 70-200mm f/2.8 it becomes a 140-400mm f/5.6.

This means that teleconverters work best with lenses that have a wide maximum aperture to start with. You may need to accept either slower shutter speeds or higher ISO settings, and you won’t be able to reproduce the shallow depth of field effects you normally get with that lens.

3) Teleconverters and autofocus compatibility

This reduction in maximum aperture could affect your camera’s autofocus system, since some older systems won’t work with apertures lower than f/8; you may have to resort to manual focus. Many modern autofocus systems, however, especially on the latest mirrorless cameras, now go way beyond that, so it may no longer be an issue.

You should also make sure that your lens’s aperture control and any image stabilisation will still work as normal (you won’t have a problem with teleconverters manufactured by the maker of your lens) and that the lens will still supply correct EXIF (shooting) information to the camera.

4) Teleconverter compatibility

This is an important point. Lenses and lens mounts are far more complicated than they used to be, so you can’t assume any teleconverter will fit any lens. Far from it. In fact, the list of compatible lenses is often quite short.

The main camera and lens makers to list the lenses their teleconverters are compatible with (our guide to the best teleconverters lists compatibility information, where available). However, this information may be harder to check if you buy a cheap, generic third-party teleconverter online, for example.

5) Teleconverters can affect optical quality

Apart from the loss in maximum aperture, the biggest drawback of teleconverters is a potential loss in image quality. This is because you’re effectively magnifying the central part of the image captured by the lens, along with any defects or aberrations.

Dedicated ‘matched’ teleconverters will be designed to optically complement the lens they’re attached to, but cheaper generic teleconverters won’t be.

6) Own-brand teleconverters

Most camera and lens makers offer teleconverters for use with a small selection of their own telephoto or super-telephoto lenses. The teleconverter’s optical layout will be optimised for those lenses. Autofocus, image stabilisation and exposure controls will work as expected too. Canon, Nikon, Olympus, Panasonic, Fujifilm and other camera manufacturers make teleconverters with their cameras and lenses. Lens manufacuturers, notably Sigma, make teleconverters to work with Sigma lenses on a number of different camera body mounts.

7) Dedicated teleconverters

Dedicated, or matched, teleconverters are custom-designed for one specific lens, and offer a good solution for photographers who don’t want to compromise own quality but do need to travel light.

8) Generic third-party teleconverters

Third party teleconverters, such as those made by Kenko, are designed to offer a low-cost option. These are available in a number of different mounts – the mount for the lens it is used with is almost always the same as the camera mount the pair are being fitted onto. You need to check compatibility with your camera and lens carefully before buying.

Rod is the Group Reviews editor for Digital Camera World and across Future’s entire photography portfolio, with decades of experience with cameras of all kinds. Previously he has been technique editor on N-Photo, Head of Testing for the photography division and Camera Channel editor on TechRadar. He has been writing about photography technique, photo editing and digital cameras since they first appeared, and before that began his career writing about film photography. He has used and reviewed practically every interchangeable lens camera launched in the past 20 years, from entry-level DSLRs to medium format cameras, together with lenses, tripods, gimbals, light meters, camera bags and more.

Nikon's mirrorless Z camera system is backed by a growing library of quality lenses. We're here to break down what's available and recommend our favorites.

  • Related Lens Picks:
  • Categories

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Nikon is likely one of the first brands you think of when you think of SLRs. Its F series was the darling of photojournalists and artists in the film era, and the its high-resolution D850 is still one of the best SLRs available today.

But SLRs have had their time in the sun. Today’s best tech is in mirrorless systems. In general, you’ll enjoy quicker, more precise autofocus, better video features, and a real-time preview of your image in the viewfinder by going mirrorless.

A Growing System

Nikon’s mirrorless system uses the Z mount, but is compatible with F-mount SLR lenses using an adapter. That’s important for photographers who have been working with Nikon cameras and lenses for years and don’t want to buy all new lenses.

And it’s important to fill in some gaps. The Z system has many of the basics covered, but a few important lenses aren’t on sale yet. If you’re after a macro, an extreme telephoto prime, or a fish-eye, you’ll need to rely on the adapter, at least for now.

Most of the available lenses are for full-frame format sensors—Nikon refers to this 24-by-36mm format as FX. It’s also released a pair of DX models—Nikon’s branding for the 18-by-24mm APS-C format. If you own a full-frame Z, you should skip shopping for these DX lenses, but you can always use a full-frame lens on a DX Nikon.

S Line

You’ll know a lens is protected from dust and splashes if it has an S designation at the end of its name. The S Line includes the best construction and optics.

It’s not an exclusive club, as all but one of the full-frame lenses for the system are included so far. Nikon promises to change that, though—it has a few non-S primes on its development roadmap, including a pair of compact primes and a macro.

We expect Nikon to fill in missing pieces in the system. It’s certainly been a little slower to build things out when compared with Canon, which launched its EOS R mirrorless system at the same time, though both lag behind Sony and its much longer running mirrorless E system in terms of sheer volume of available lenses.

The major third parties—Sigma and Tamron—haven’t jumped on board yet, either. We’ve seen a spattering of Z glass from 7artisans, Venus Optics, and others, but most are manual focus.

In the meantime, you can supplement native lenses using the FTZ adapter. It works with AF-S Nikkor SLR lenses, the type with internal focus motors, with full functionality. Any lenses that rely on an in-camera motor for focus will work, but without autofocus.

If you’re happy with manual focus, you can reach to other adapters, too. You can use pretty much any vintage, mechanical lens with the right adapter; we have a guide if you’re interested in going down that rabbit hole.

Standard Zoom

The standard zoom is the first lens many will get with a camera. Full-frame editions typically start around 24mm or 28mm, an angle of view that’s considered moderately wide.

Zoom power and aperture vary from lens to lens. Nikon bundles the slim, affordable, but otherwise unremarkable Z 24-50mm F3.5-5.6 with its most basic models. Its zoom power is modest and its aperture is a bit dim, so it’s better suited for use in decent light.

The Nikkor Z 24-70mm F4 S is the step-up option. It’s priced around $1,000 when bought by itself, but gets a hefty discount when bought in a kit. It’s a slim lens, and one with excellent optics, but pros will likely find the Nikkor Z 24-70mm F2.8 S to be a better choice—it’s one of the best standard zooms you can get for any system. If you’re after more value, consider the Z 24-120mm F4 S, a recent release priced around $1,100, or think about the $1,200 28-75mm F2.8.

There’s also an all-in-one zoom for the system, the Nikkor Z 24-200mm F4-6.3 VR ($899.95). It has a relatively small f-stop, so it’s not the best choice for working in dimly lit interiors, but its long zoom power makes it an ideal choice for travel. It’s one of the few Z lenses to not be included in the S Line, but it does include some dust and splash protection.

Nikon Nikkor Z 24-70mm F2.8 S

The Nikon Nikkor Z 24-70mm f/2.8 S is a standard zoom with lens outstanding optical performance and a pro-grade build.

Nikon Nikkor Z 24-70mm F4 S

The Nikon Nikkor Z 24-70mm f/4 S is a sharp, compact zoom for the Z camera system that’s an especially good value when purchased as part of a bundle.

Nikon Nikkor Z 24-50mm F4-6.3

The Nikkor Z 24-50mm f/4-6.3 is a standard zoom for full-frame Nikon Z cameras, and while its narrow aperture isn’t exactly exciting, a slim design and reasonable pricing make up for it.

Nikon Nikkor Z 24-200mm F4-6.3 VR

The Nikkor Z 24-200mm F4-6.3 VR is built well, covers a wide range of angles, and nets sharp photos. It isn’t a low-light wonder, but it’s still a superzoom lens worth buying.

Wide Angle

Working at a wide angle nets images with a grand scale. You’ll see more of the world in each frame for landscapes, architectural work, and group shots. Many can also focus very near for dramatic close-ups.

Nikon has released two wide zooms, the 14-30mm F4 S and 14-24mm F2.8 S, and the 20mm F1.8 S prime for the Z system to date. Zooms are a bit more convenient, but the 20mm F1.8’s bright aperture makes it an appealing choice for astrophotography, vlogging, and architectural interiors.

It’s not as wide as some others, though. Venus Optics sells a range of wide-angle lenses for the Z system, but they are manual focus only. Its Laowa 15mm F2 Zero-D is a native option for photographers who want to go wide and bright. If you’re looking for a lens with autofocus, reach for the FTZ adapter and the Sigma 14mm F1.8 DG HSM Art for Nikon SLRs.

Wide zoom lenses cover a broader range of views, but don’t gather as much light. That’s not a concern for many landscape photographers, who enjoy using narrow apertures and neutral density filters for long exposure work.

The Nikkor Z 14-24mm F2.8 S balances its coverage range and f-stop. It’s not as suited for night sky photography as an F1.8 or F2.0 prime, but at F2.8 it’s still a solid fit for a good deal of indoor work. The Z 14-30mm F4 zooms a bit further, and costs less—if you don’t need to make images at F2.8, it’s the zoom to get.

Thanks to you, EOSHD.com is growing rapidly and I have some ideas on where to take it in the future I’d like to share with you! But first, I am excited about going to Philip Bloom’s London meet this weekend (14th August). Do come along if you can and talk about DSLRs, and shoot some great footage.

Are you from the UK and attending? Do let me know in the comments below this article, and if you can’t put a face to EOSHD.com, use the photo below and replace the background with a rainy London skyline, or see this video interview!

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

So what are the changes you can expect from EOSHD.com next month?

In September I’ll be at Photokina 2010 which only comes around every 2 years and this year is going to be exciting for a number of reasons. Firstly, it hails the dawn of the DSLR video 2nd generation. EOSHD will have a new section of the site to cover the news in Germany at first hand.

Later this month I am going to launch a project called Isgo.

Isgo.co.uk will be a creative ‘collective’ of skills. Through this a group of people will seek work and pool their talents in the areas of DSLR shooting, illustration, web design, branding and marketing. You can hire Isgo or EOSHD to shoot your project, to design your website or brand your business.

As an example – Video.Isgo will be our brand for creating adverts, music videos or corporate videos for businesses and individuals. The 2nd phase, Creativity.Isgo will allow networking of skills and for many more people throughout the world to join the collective and to seek work together as a team.

I believe the idea is really well suited to filmmaking too. I’d like to create a feature film, or a documentary by banding together lots of talented people with complimentary skills. And as the old Nike ads say – Just do it.

The DSLR revolution is the perfect excuse to do things differently.

How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

Do you guys know that the object reflects the light, whenever it falls on the object, and once the reflected light reaches our eyes, we see it. There are a lot of facts related to light, but two most common ones are an image formed by mirrors and bending of light through lenses. In simple terms, mirror means a smooth and highly polished glass surface, through which images are formed by reflection, as the light falls on it.

On the other extreme, a lens is a part of the transparent refracting medium, (i.e. glass), bounded by two surfaces, of which at least one is spherical. It helps in the formation of images, as the light passes through the medium. In this article excerpt, you will find an in-depth discussion on the difference between mirror and lens, so have a look.

Content: Mirror Vs Lens

Comparison Chart

Basis for Comparison Mirror Lens
Meaning Mirror implies a glass surface with a silvery backing, that produces image through reflection. Lens is a transparent substance of glass or plastic, bound by two surfaces, whose at least one surface is curved.
Nature It can be plane or curved. It is usually curved, with one or both sides.
Working Principle Law of reflection Law of refraction
Equation

Definition of Mirror

The mirror is defined as a shiny glass object, with a silvery coating at its back, which reflects light and results in the formation of an image of the object, which is in front of it. It is used in our homes, to see the reflection of our face or other objects. It is of two types:

  • Plane mirror: A mirror with a flat surface is called a plane mirror. It produces virtual and erect images.
    How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera
  • Spherical mirror: A mirror that has a curved surface, which is used to form a diminished or magnified image, is called a spherical mirror. It is of two types convex and concave mirror, as described below:
    • Convex Mirror: A mirror in which the reflection takes place from the curved surface is a convex mirror. In such mirrors, the inner side is painted, and the outer one is polished, which reflects the images. It is a diverging mirror that forms virtual and erect images of the object placed in the front.
      How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera
    • Concave Mirror: The concave mirror is one in which reflecting surface is curved inwards, and its face is towards the centre of the sphere. It is a converging mirror.
      How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

    Definition of Lens

    Lens implies a piece of transparent material, i.e. glass or plastic, that has two opposite surfaces, one or both of which are curved. It is most commonly used for correcting the vision. Lenses are either singly used or in a combination of two or more simple lens in an optical device, so as to produce an image by converging the beam of light.

    The working of the lens is based on the principle of refraction, i.e. the light rays bend after they pass through the lens and thus their direction changes and that is why the objects visible from the lens seems larger or smaller than the actual object. There are two types of convex and concave lens, which are discussed as under:

    • Convex Lens: The surface of a convex lens is curved outwards from the centre, which converges the rays of light. Binoculars and telescope, magnifier, etc. use this type of lens.
      How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera
    • Concave Lens: Concave lens has a surface that bulges inward towards the centre, and thus it diverges the light beam. It is mainly used TV projectors.
      How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

    Key Differences Between Mirror and Lens

    The points presented below are substantial so far as the difference between mirror and lens is concerned:

    1. By the term ‘mirror’ we mean a shiny piece of glass, that is polished from the back, which reflects a clear image of the object, placed in front of it. On the other hand, Lens is a transparent piece of glass, with a spherical surface, that concentrates or disperses the rays of light falling on it.
    2. A mirror is either plane or spherical. In contrast, a lens has two surfaces, at least one of which is curved inwards or outwards.
    3. As the light ray strikes the mirror, it reflects off the light in a different direction, resulting in the formation of an image. Conversely, in case of lenses, the light ray enters the medium (lens), which refracts (bends) the rays in a different direction, creating a focus, from where the rays seem to originate.
    4. To calculate the nature of images formed by a mirror and a lens, we use their equation, which is given as under:
      Mirror Equation:

      Lens Equation:

      Where v = Distance of image from the pole.
      u = Distance of object from the pole.
      f = focal length of a spherical mirror

    A tükrök nélküli kamerák egyre népszerűbbek. Ahogy az elmúlt években alakultak ki, bizonyos körülmények között nagyon hasznosak lettek.

    A tükör nélküli kamerák egyik igazán érdekes tulajdonsága, hogy a tervezésük miatt a különböző gyártók új és régi lencséit használhatja megfelelő adapterrel. Ez a „perem távolság” miatt van, amely a lencsetartó és a film sík közötti távolság. A legtöbb DSLR-ek és tükörreflexes fényképezőgépek nagyon hasonlóak a perem távolságaival (kb. 45 mm), ami azt jelenti, hogy minden adapternek nem kellően vékonynak kell lennie. A tükörmentes kameráknak a perem távolsága körülbelül 20 mm. Ez sok lehetőséget biztosít a gyártóknak. Tehát nézzük meg, hogyan lehet használni a lencsét a tükör nélküli fényképezőgépen.

    Vásároljon harmadik fél objektíveket a helyes rögzítéssel

    How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

    A legegyszerűbb módja a különböző objektívek használatának a tükör nélküli fényképezőgéppel valójában nem igényel semmilyen adaptert: csak a megfelelő gyártmányú külső gyártóktól vásároljon lencséket. Például a Sony Alpha sorozatú kamerái az E-mount-ot használják. A Sigma, a Tokina, a Voigtlander és a Zeiss mindegyik E-szerű objektívből áll, amelyek csak a fényképezőgéppel működnek.

    Egy dolog, hogy vigyázzon; egyes lencsék, mint például a Zeiss Loxia 35 mm f / 2, E-mount lesz, de manuális fókusz. Ez azt jelenti, hogy nem tudja használni a fényképezőgép autofókusz funkcióit.

    Sajnos a tükör nélküli kamerákhoz rendelkezésre álló harmadik féllel rendelkező objektívek még mindig nem érik el a DSLR-ek rendelkezésére álló mennyiséget.

    Vásároljon olcsó adaptert a régi kézi fókusz objektívekhez

    A kézi kézi fókuszú objektív manuális apertúrás vezérlőkkel a legegyszerűbb lencsék a tükör nélküli fényképezőgéppel való munkához. Az adapterek valójában csak a fém (vagy műanyag) hülye bitek, amelyek a perem távolságát úgy állítják be, hogy a lencse a tükör nélküli kamera film síkjára fókuszálhasson. Nem lesz autofókusz vagy elektronikus rekesznyílás-vezérlés, de különben jól fognak működni.

    How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

    Ez azt jelenti, hogy az 1985 előtt elõállított lencse (ezután a kameragyártók valóban elektronikus vezérlõkbe kezdtek) a legjobb ajánlat. Használhatja a Nikon és a Pentax autofókusz objektíveket is, amelyek még mindig rendelkeznek nyílásgyűrűkkel, mint például a Nikon AF FX NIKKOR 50mm f / 1.8D, de ismét autofókusz nélkül kell használni őket.

    Az adapterek, a lencsék és a kamerák kombinációja itt túlságosan széles, hogy szilárd ajánlásokat tegyek. Ehelyett meg kell próbálnod megtalálni egy jól áttekintett, olcsó fém adaptert, amely kompatibilis a lencse-rögzítővel és a fényképezőgép tartójával. Például a Photosiox 14, 95 dolláros adaptere tökéletesen illeszkedik a számlához a korábban említett Nikon objektív csatlakoztatásához a Sony Alpha fényképezőgéphez.

    Vásároljon egy „intelligens” adaptert a modern lencsékhez

    How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

    Ha modern autofókusz objektíveket szeretnénk használni elektronikus vezérlőkkel a tükör nélküli kamerákkal, akkor egy hülye fémfém nem vágja le. Ehelyett olyan adaptereket kell keresni, amelyek az objektívet és a fényképezőgép testét is összekötik.

    Az intelligens adapterek széles választéka áll rendelkezésre, de a legnépszerűbb kombináció a Canon EF-szerű objektívjeinek a Sony E-mount tükrök nélküli kameráihoz való csatlakoztatása. Ha egy tükrök nélküli rendszert vásárol, és szeretné, hogy a legtöbb opció legyen, akkor ez az út. Az alacsony végponton a Photosiox Pro Fusion Adaptert 99, 95 dollárért kaphatja meg, míg a csúcspontban a Canon EF EF objektívje a Smart E adapterhez (ötödik generáció) 399 dollárért. Mindkét adapter nagyrészt ugyanazt teszi, bár a Metabones adapternek van néhány további szolgáltatása, amely jobban szabályozhatja, hogyan működnek együtt a lencse és a kamera.

    Minden más kombináció esetén javasoljuk, hogy keresse meg a Photosiox adaptert, ha a költségvetés tudatos, vagy a Metabones adapter, ha valamit közelebb akar a felső véghez. Ha nem találja meg az egyiket, akkor a legjobb tanácsot adom, hogy egy kis kutatást végezzek, és megvásárolják a legjobb értékű adaptert a fizetendő áron. Várja, hogy a legtöbb beállított összegért 100 és 500 dollár között fizet.

    Megjegyzés a sebességfokozókról

    Az egyenes felfelé tartó adapterek mellett, ha azt kutatjuk, hogyan kell különböző lencséket csatlakoztatni a tükör nélküli kamerákhoz, akkor „Speed ​​Boosters” lesz. Amellett, hogy a lencsét a fényképezőgéphez csatlakoztatja, növelik a maximális rekesznyílást is. Vannak azonban számos hátrány.

    Először is, a sebességnövelők sokkal drágábbak, mint a hagyományos adapterek. A Metabones Canon EF a Sony E-Mount Speed ​​Booster-hez (ötödik generáció) 649 dollárba kerül, ami teljes 250 dollárral több, mint a hagyományos adapter.

    Másodszor, a sebességnövelők csak a terményérzékelővel (APS-C) és a Micro 4/3 tükör nélküli kamerákkal működnek. Ha van egy teljes képkocka tükör nélküli fényképezőgépe, akkor APS-C kompatibilitási módban kell használnia, amely digitálisan csökkenti az érzékelő rögzítési területének méretét.

    Ha van egy APS-C vagy Micro 4/3 tükör nélküli fényképezőgépe, és nem bánja a többletköltséget, menjen előre, és fontolja meg a sebességnövelő adapter beszerzését egy kevésbé gyenge fényerő érdekében. Másrészt, ha van egy teljes képkocka tükör nélküli fényképezőgépe (vagy azt tervezi, hogy frissíteni szeretne), vagy az ár egy kicsit ostoba, csak kap egy rendszeres adaptert.

    How to use old and differently-branded lenses with your mirrorless camera

    I t is so easy to live stream content to a community of like-minded people. Today, more than ever, streaming has proven to be more than just connecting a community for education, an impromptu Q&A session, gaming or entertainment—it’s a vital way that we’re keeping connected with each other.

    Using a compatible Nikon camera—Z series mirrorless or DSLR—gives you the ability to stream high quality video on a global scale. More than just the quality of the optics available in NIKKOR lenses, the features and functionality of Nikon mirrorless and DSLR cameras gives you a range of creative options to utilize in recording a live stream.

    Use a fast aperture lens, such as a 50mm f/1.8 lens for its shallow depth-of-field to separate yourself or your “talent” from the background. It also lets you declutter a busy background by blurring it at such a wide aperture or use a wider lens to capture more of the ambiance of your location.

    Getting Started Live Streaming with your Nikon Camera

    First, you need to decide if you want a quick and easy connection via USB or if you’re looking for a more high quality connection via HDMI. Your choice will depend upon what you’re using the streaming for and how elaborate you want to get with your set-up.

    In addition to your camera and lens, you’ll need a few items.

    A fully charged battery or Nikon AC Adapter. The AC Adapter will allow you to run the stream without interruption, for longer than just the battery could. Remember, if you opt to go with the AC Adapter, you will need both the Power Supply Connector and the AC Adapter. Your camera’s user’s manual will note which ones are compatible with your model.

    To connect using USB, you’ll need plug and play streaming software for your computer’s operating system along with the provided USB cable.

    To connect using HDMI, you’ll need a third party signal capture device and video conferencing software, along with an HDMI cable.

    Whichever route you choose, you may also want a tripod to steady the camera and keep it at eye level and a constant light source for nice, even illumination of your set. If you go with the HDMI route, an optional lavalier mic will provide clean audio, especially if you plan on moving around once you’ve started streaming

    Once you’ve got everything connected, based on the instructions provided with the gear, you can then go live via Facebook Live, Twitch, Zoom, YouTube or WebEx.

    Liucija Adomaite and
    Denis Tymulis

    Perception is reality until proven otherwise. But our perception may change in an instant depending on exactly how much we know. Recently, two Danish photographers have taken this idea to a whole new level.

    In these times of fake news, it’s hard to know what’s real anymore. Media manipulation is rife in some of the largest reporting outlets around the world. How do we know, from the pictures alone, that biased news articles and stories aren’t secretly being fed to us? It turns out, we can’t.

    Photographers Ólafur Steinar Gestsson and Philip Davali conducted an experiment for the photo agency Ritzau Scanpix. The Copenhagen-based artists used their cameras and certain optical illusions to capture the same people chilling out outside on the same day. The trick was to use two different lenses — a wide-angle lens and a telephoto lens — to create certain perspectives. Their photography techniques show a staggering difference in the perceived distance between these people. It makes us wonder if the journalism code of ethics is always being followed by photographers too.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Windows 8 has a feature where you can login to your Windows account using a 4-digit PIN. This PIN can consist of any number and is useful if your normal login password is too complicated to type on the virtual keyboard in a tablet. When using a 4 digit PIN there are a total of 10,000 combinations and it should be noted that using touch can leave fingerprints or smudges that may make it easier for people to determine your PIN. Therefore, this feature should only be used if necessary or for limited periods of time when your tablet is not connected to a keyboard.

To enable a PIN password, type pin at the Windows 8 Start Screen and then click on the Settings category as shown below.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

When the search results appear, click on the Create or change PIN option to open the User Settings screen.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

On the above screen click on the Create a PIN button. You will now be shown a screen asking you to confirm the password for the current account that you are configuring to use a PIN.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Enter the password for the currently logged in account and then press the OK button. You will now be shown a screen where you will need to create the PIN that you would like to use to login to your account.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

A PIN is a 4 digit code that can consist of only numbers. With this said, a valid PIN is 1921. An invalid PIN would be 8a2& as it contains characters and symbols, which are not allowed. When creating the PIN you are also allowed to use the same number twice. To create your PIN, enter the same 4 digit PIN in each of the fields. Once you are done entering your PIN, click on the Finish button. Your PIN will now be activated and ready to use when you login to Windows.

When you next login to your account you will now be presented with a prompt to enter your PIN.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Simply enter your 4 digit PIN and you will be logged into Windows. If you forget your PIN, you can click on the Sign-in options link and click on the key icon. This will bring you back to a normal textual password prompt where you can use your normal password to login.

If at any time you wish to remove the PIN you can go back into the User settings screen and click on the Remove button as shown in the image below.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

If you have any questions regarding this process, please feel free to ask us in the Windows 8 Forum.

Users who read this also read:

How to enable PIN sign-in for domain users in Windows 8

Windows 8 has a feature where you can use a 4 digit PIN to sign-in to your Windows account. If you are a domain user, though, this feature is disabled by default. It is possible, though, for an Administrator to enable a policy that allows this feature to be used by domain users.

How to disable the lock screen after waking in Windows 8

When you wake up Windows 8 after it has gone to sleep, you will be presented with the lock screen. You will then have to enter your password to start using Windows 8 again. For those who feel that their computer is in a secure environment, this feature can be annoying as it requires a few extra steps to get back to what you are doing. This tutorial will explain how you can disable the requirement .

How to use a picture password in Windows 8

Windows 8 includes a feature called picture passwords that allow you to login to your account by using gestures on an image with your finger or your mouse. This is especially useful for tablets where you want to avoid typing if you can. Instead of typing in a password, you select a picture and then create three gestures on it to act as your password. When you create the picture password you can .

How to enable the F8 key to start Safe Mode in Windows 8

Windows 8 introduced a new boot loader that decreased the time that it takes Windows 8 to start. Unfortunately, in order to do this Microsoft needed to remove the ability to access the Advanced Boot Options screen when you press the F8 key when Windows starts. This meant that there was no easy and quick way to access Safe Mode anymore by simply pressing the F8 key while Windows starts. Instead in .

How to disable picture passwords in Windows 8

Windows 8 has has a feature called password pictures where you can login to your Windows account by performing certain gestures on a picture. If you would not like this feature to be available for your users, you can disable it via a group policy.

You can try the following steps to resolve this issue.

  1. Click on the “ sign in options” in the lock screen.
  2. Click on “number pad” icon.
  3. Now the sign in option will change to Pin.

Hope this helps.

Please post back if the issue persists and we will be glad to assist you further.

Report abuse

5 people found this reply helpful

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn’t help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

I have this problem too. Where would I find the ‘sign in options’

the only options I have are ‘go’ (the arrow you click after typing in your password/pin

ease of access and shut down

thanks in advance

Report abuse

12 people found this reply helpful

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn’t help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

near the password blank look down

if this works please vote

Report abuse

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn’t help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

Dear Windows user

Report abuse

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn’t help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

You can find the signn in option under the password field in the lock screen.

Please post back if you face any issues related to Windows and we will be glad to assist you further.

Report abuse

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn’t help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

Karthik, thanks for the advice.. What you said is what I generally so, however there isn’t that option this time

any other ideas?

Report abuse

Was this reply helpful?

Sorry this didn’t help.

Great! Thanks for your feedback.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback, it helps us improve the site.

How satisfied are you with this reply?

Thanks for your feedback.

If you have a different user account on the computer, I suggest you to create a PIN for that other user account and check if you are getting sign in options in that user account.

Please post back with the status of the issue and we will be glad to assist you further,

Entering your full password on a touch screen device can really become a pain in the neck, luckily for us we can link a short 4 digit PIN to our user account and log in with that instead.

Note: PIN codes are nowhere near as safe as using an alphanumeric password, however, they do still have a purpose when you don’t want to enter your 15 character password on a touch screen device.

Creating a PIN

Press the Win + I keyboard combination to bring up the Settings Charm, then click on the Change PC settings link.

This will open up the Modern UI PC Settings app, where you can click on the Users section.

On the right hand side you will see a Create a PIN button, click on it.

Now you will need to verify that you are the owner of this user account by entering your password.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Then you can choose a PIN, remember that it can only contain digits.

Now when you get to the login screen you will have the option to use a PIN.

It’s impossible there is pin code asked if you don’t set it.

Did you see the logon screen as below?

If yes, click another Sign-in options as below:

input normal password to sign in.

Karen Hu
TechNet Community Support

  • Proposed as answer by ZigZag3143x Friday, May 30, 2014 11:30 AM
  • Marked as answer by Michael_LS Monday, June 9, 2014 1:12 AM

All replies

It’s impossible there is pin code asked if you don’t set it.

Did you see the logon screen as below?

If yes, click another Sign-in options as below:

input normal password to sign in.

Karen Hu
TechNet Community Support

  • Proposed as answer by ZigZag3143x Friday, May 30, 2014 11:30 AM
  • Marked as answer by Michael_LS Monday, June 9, 2014 1:12 AM

After some update last night, Windows asked for my PIN at login, even I never set it up.

And I am on a domain, which means PIN is not even in use!

I had to go to the PIN settings and remove it, and now setting a PIN is grayed out.

So it is possible to get a PIN question even when you have never set it up.

When you buy a new Windows 10 computer, out of the box, it will default to having you enter your Outlook or Microsoft account password every time you sign in. This can be a hassle, especially if you have a long, secure, and complicated password.

Thankfully, Windows has several other ways you can sign in to your laptop that are a little simpler. We’ll walk you through how to adjust your settings and opt into signing in using a PIN, your fingerprint, or picture password. (Facial recognition is also available, but only on specific Windows 10 systems.) We’ll also show you how to remove your password altogether (although, to keep your device secure, we recommend that you go with one of the options above rather than eliminating any kind of sign-in).

Windows 10 also gives you the option to use a physical security key (usually a USB key) to sign in, but you’ll have to purchase that key separately. Here are the methods you can use to sign in without any additional equipment.

To access your sign-in settings:

  • Click on the Windows icon in the bottom-left corner of your screen to open up the Start menu
  • Click the cog icon to open settings
  • Click “Accounts”
  • Click “Sign-in options”
  • Here, you can adjust how to sign in to your device. You can add a sign-on method by clicking on the option and then “Add.” And you can disable any of these options by clicking on the option and then “Remove.” You may be prompted to enter your Microsoft account password in order to remove an option.
  • You can also adjust when your device asks you to sign in again after you’ve been idle. Under “Require sign-in,” you can select a range of options, from every time the system has gone dark to if it’s been dark for 15 minutes. You can also select “Never.”

Using the drop-down options, you can adjust how long your device waits until asking you to sign in again.

To set up a PIN:

  • Click “Windows Hello PIN”
  • Click “Add”
  • A window titled “Create a PIN” will open up. Click “Next.”
  • You’ll then be asked to enter your Microsoft password. Enter it in, and click “Sign in.”
  • Choose a PIN and enter it in both boxes. The default requirement for the PIN is that it only contains numbers. If you want to use letters and symbols as well, you can check the box in the bottom of the window.
  • You can change your PIN later by clicking on “Windows Hello PIN” then “Change.” Enter your old PIN and then your new PIN twice.

You’ll have to enter your old PIN before entering and confirming your new PIN.

To use your fingerprint to sign in:

  • Click “Windows Hello Fingerprint”
  • Click “Set up”
  • Windows Hello will open up. Click “Get started.”
  • If you’ve already set up your PIN, you’ll be prompted to enter it in here
  • Next, you’ll be asked to your raise your finger and place it on the fingerprint scanner repeatedly

You will need to lower and raise your finger on the sensor repeatedly so it can capture your fingerprint.

  • Then, you’ll be asked to do the same, angling your finger differently each time
  • If you haven’t done so already, you’ll then be asked to choose a PIN as a backup. Click “Set up PIN” to continue.

Windows will recommend you set up a PIN as a backup.

To set up a Picture Password:

Microsoft’s picture password option allows you to use a sequence of gestures paired with a picture to sign in. Instead of using a PIN or password, you’ll have to draw on a picture.

  • Click on “Picture Password” in “Sign-in settings”
  • Click “Add”
  • You’ll be taken to the picture password setup page and asked to enter your Microsoft account password into a pop-up window
  • Click “Choose picture”
  • A window will open, and you’ll be able to browse through your photos. Select a picture, and then click “Open.”
  • Click “Use this picture” to proceed or “Choose new picture” to select a different picture
  • You’ll then be asked to draw three gestures — lines, circles, and taps — on the image. To sign in, you’ll have to repeat the gestures in the same order and in the same position on the image.
  • Then you’ll have to confirm your picture password by doing those same three gestures again. If you can’t remember, click “Start over.”
  • Click “Finish” on the next screen to complete setup.

You’ve finished setting up your picture password.

To remove a password altogether:

Typing in your password can be a hassle, which is why there are alternative sign-in methods. If you want to go an extra step further, you can remove your password altogether. (Of course, disabling your password altogether is a security risk — using at least a simple PIN is a better move.)

Please check to see if the guard below would help:

Microsoft Passport guide

Please remember to mark the replies as answers if they help, and unmark the answers if they provide no help. If you have feedback for TechNet Support, contact [email protected]

At the launch of Windows 10, the operating system supported three Hello types: PIN, Facial recognition. AND Fingerprint recognition.

Before you can use Windows Hello to enable biometrics on a device, you must choose a PIN as your initial Hello gesture. After you’ve set a PIN, you can add biometric gestures if you want to. You can always use the PIN gesture to release your credentials, so you can still unlock and use your device even if you can’t use your preferred biometric because of an injury or because the sensor is unavailable or not working properly.

So the answer here is no, there is no way to disable the PIN, instead, we could change it, at least for the current situation.

Please remember to mark the replies as answers if they help, and unmark the answers if they provide no help. If you have feedback for TechNet Support, contact [email protected]

  • Marked as answer by Entegy MVP Monday, October 26, 2015 2:01 PM
  • Proposed as answer by Olivier Martin (omartin) Tuesday, September 20, 2016 12:43 AM
  • Unproposed as answer by Olivier Martin (omartin) Tuesday, September 20, 2016 12:43 AM
  • Proposed as answer by martin.mcz Friday, December 16, 2016 12:54 AM
  • Unproposed as answer by Entegy MVP Tuesday, February 12, 2019 11:56 PM
  • Proposed as answer by martin.mcz Friday, December 16, 2016 12:54 AM

In Windows 10, PIN login is part of the new Microsoft Passport feature (described here) and is more secure than a traditional password. In particular:

Microsoft Passport provides strong 2FA, fully integrated into Windows, that replaces reusable passwords with the combination of a specific device and a Hello or PIN. Microsoft Passport isn’t just a replacement for traditional 2FA systems, though. It’s conceptually similar to smart cards: authentication is performed by using cryptographic primitives instead of string comparisons, and the user’s key material is secure inside tamper-resistant hardware. Microsoft Passport doesn’t require the extra infrastructure components required for smart card deployment, either. In particular, you don’t need a PKI if you don’t currently have one. Microsoft Passport combines the major advantage of smart cards — deployment flexibility for virtual smart cards and robust security for physical smart cards — without any of their drawbacks.

A PIN is not more secure than their domain account password that expires and has enforced complexity. It’s simpler, and just another thing for the user to remember.

I can completely understand a PIN requirement on a phone or a personal computer, but not on a domain-joined computer.

Microsoft Passport for Work offers complexity settings that match password complexity. In the release after RTM it will also include Expiration and History settings.

The term ‘PIN’ is used generally, but it can contain any combination of upper and lower case alphanumeric, special character and/or digits as defined in the complexity settings under Computer Configuration -> Administrative Templates -> Windows Components -> Microsoft Passport for Work.

The PIN in Windows 8.1 was a convenient logon option for consumers that offered little security and has been replaced in Windows 10. The ‘PIN’ in Microsoft Passport is more secure than passwords because there is no shared secret that can be harvested from a stolen server. The PIN is the primary gesture that Windows Hello requires. The PIN allows the system to gain access to the private/public key or certificate that is attested as being bound to the hardware TPM. The private key never leaves the device and all the server has is a copy of the public key on the user account. This is two-factor authentication much like virtual smart card. The user must type the correct ‘PIN’ in order to gain access to the keys in TPM. Having the ‘PIN’ won’t help unless the person also has access to the device.

Here is a good document outlining the benefits of Microsoft Passport.

When you use PIN you can define the length and the PIN is only stored in the very secure Passport on your local machine. If you use TPM you cant even extract it. This is the 2nd factor (machine plus another factor) to avoid Passwords. With passport we get rid of these as they are risky to use especially in areas where you can not make sure that a man in the middle attack would start or even when you are in an internet cafe.

We are now in a world where passwords alone are not anymore sufficient.

Checkout also this blog entry.

Since the private key is in the hardware TPM, each time the PIN is setup on a different machine, the pin can be different. So it is not only remembering the pin but also which pin belongs to which particular logon on a particular machine.

Love to see defenses to PtH, but right now, an employee needs access to this machine to do something productive. There must be some GPO or registry setting to disable for now.

The current state is really bad. Nobody is going to convince me, that a simple PIN is more secure than a complex password. Especially since the PIN can only be a numeric sequence, as Windows 10 won’t let you use anything else than numbers.

I take security very seriously – two factor authentication is the minimum standard for me, I use VPN everywhere, I have TPM chips and full encryption enabled on all my devices. Recently I bought Surface Pro 4 with Hello facial recognition and a fingerprint scanner on the type cover, upgrading from my previous SP3. And I am very disappointed thanks to this enforced policy. The PIN, as it is defined now, is much easier to steal than a full password – for example when a hidden camera is watching you – while you log in with it. Storing the PIN inside the TPM is no argument. You can store the MS Account password there as well. If the only other place where the MS Account password is stored is the MS cloud, then it should be completely safe. Are you trying to tell me it’s not? Because if someone’s able to breach the MS cloud security, then then don’t really need access to my device, as they already have access to all the sensitive info in the cloud.

Please, allow us to use the MS Account password instead of the PIN! The PIN is useless.

Kris Sednek

If you want a startup password then you need to edit the settings in gpedit.msc. then in there you click administrator templates, windows components, bitlocker drive encryption, and then operating system drives. The three policies that i enable are as follows:

require additional authentication at startup

enable use of bitlocker authentication requiring preboot keyboard input on slates

allow enhanced PINs for startup.

this will allow you to have startup authentication with a Password longer that 4 characters.

2 Replies

For Bitlocker, a PIN is more secure than a password, but there’s an option to enable “enhanced PINs” which allow letters, up to 10-20.

Kris Sednek

If you want a startup password then you need to edit the settings in gpedit.msc. then in there you click administrator templates, windows components, bitlocker drive encryption, and then operating system drives. The three policies that i enable are as follows:

require additional authentication at startup

enable use of bitlocker authentication requiring preboot keyboard input on slates

allow enhanced PINs for startup.

this will allow you to have startup authentication with a Password longer that 4 characters.

This topic has been locked by an administrator and is no longer open for commenting.

To continue this discussion, please ask a new question.

Spark! Pro Series – 26 April 2022

Today in History: 26 April 1514 – Copernicus makes his first observations of Saturn 1859 – Dan Sickles is acquitted of murder on grounds of temporary insanity – 1st time this defense used successfully in the US.

Snap! Emotet botnet, Win10 update, hospital hacked, & burger-flipping robots

Your daily dose of tech news, in brief. You need to hear this. The Emotet botnet is back, and it has some new tricks to spread malware Another day, another malware. Although this one is an old one learning new tricks as the Emotet malware phi.

Office 365 & Win XP

OK before all the comments about running XP still, I need help with an issue.I am forced to run a windows XP box to connect to and control some production machines that cost 300K to upgrade and replace, so that’s out of the question currently. It has been.

Windows Server 2019 VMs randomly losing partial network connectivity

Hello, we are seeing an issue which has had us scratching our heads for many months now with regards to some Windows Server 2019 VMs losing connectivity.We have four servers running Windows Server 2019 Standard on top of Hyper-V as gen 2 VMs. They also ea.

Best way to migrate file server

I need to move/upgrade our file server. Currently on 2012 (non R2). Just want to make sure this is still the best/easiest way since it was posted several years ago. Need to keep share/permissions in tact. Can I just. -Build new vm-add reg keys (from .

Walter Glenn
How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8Walter Glenn
Former Editorial Director

Walter Glenn is a former Editorial Director for How-To Geek and its sister sites. He has more than 30 years of experience in the computer industry and over 20 years as a technical writer and editor. He’s written hundreds of articles for How-To Geek and edited thousands. He’s authored or co-authored over 30 computer-related books in more than a dozen languages for publishers like Microsoft Press, O’Reilly, and Osborne/McGraw-Hill. He’s also written hundreds of white papers, articles, user manuals, and courseware over the years. Read more.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

A picture password is an alternative to typing regular passwords when signing into Windows 10. Setting one up is pretty easy, and we’re going to walk you through it.

Windows 8 and Windows 10 each brought in new ways of signing into your account. You now have options like signing in using a PIN or a picture password built into your basic account options. With the right add-on hardware, you can use Windows Hello to sign on with a fingerprint or even your webcam. And that’s all in addition to the unified login across devices you get when you use an online Microsoft account rather than a local user account.

What Is a Picture Password?

The picture password offers a way to sign in that’s easier than remembering and typing a long password, more friendly to touchscreen devices, and honestly a little more fun in general. You sign in by drawing shapes, tapping the right points, or making the right gestures over an image that you choose in advance.

Picture passwords are as secure as PINs, which is pretty secure. The data is stored locally, so someone must have your device to use them. But you must keep in mind that picture passwords and PINs aren’t really intended to provide an extra layer of security. At sign in, you always have the option of using your regular password instead of the picture password or PIN you have set up. All you have to do is click the “Sign-in options” text and then choose which way you want to sign in.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Put more simply: Picture passwords are easier and quicker, and offer an equivalent level of protection—but not any added protections—to passwords.

Keep in mind, though, that tapping and drawing gestures on screen leaves behind oils and other smears. In the right light at the right angle, someone might be able to decode your gestures—but a quick wipe of the screen after drawing your password should alleviate this.

How to Set Up a Picture Password

Setting up a picture password is pretty straightforward. Just hit Windows+I to bring up the Settings window and then click “Accounts.”

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

On the “Accounts” page, select the “Sign-in options” tab on the left and then, on the right, click the “Add” button in the “Picture Password” section.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Windows will ask you to verify that you’re the owner of the account by entering your password. Type your password and click “OK.”

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

In the “Picture Password” window, click the “Choose Picture” button. Using the Open/Save As dialog box, locate and select the picture you want to use. It will look best if you use a high resolution, full screen image.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

After choosing the picture, click the “Use this picture” button to continue or click the “Choose new picture” button if you want to try something else.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Next, you’re going to draw three gestures on the picture. You can click and drag to draw a simple shape like a circle or triangle or you can just click to create a tap. As you draw each gesture, you’ll see the numbers move from one to three. In this example, for the first two gestures, I’m drawing circles that match the lenses of the glasses and a final tap on the nose.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

After drawing your three gestures, you’ll be asked to draw them all again to confirm the password. If you mess up at any point while drawing or confirming the gestures, just click the “Start over” button to try again.

After you’ve successfully confirmed the gestures, click “Finish” to implement your new picture password.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Now, when you sign in, your sign-in screen will look something like the example below. Just draw your gestures on the picture and Windows will sign you right in.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

You can also click “Sign-in options” if you prefer to sign in using another method like a PIN or regular password. Windows will remember the last sign-in method you used and present that as the initial option on your next sign-in.

  • › How to Set a Custom Logon Screen Background on Windows 7, 8, or 10
  • › Roborock Q5+ Review: A Solid Self-Emptying Robot Vacuum
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Arriving Today
  • › The 5 Most Ridiculously Expensive Phones of All Time
  • › What Does “Touch Grass” Mean?
  • › Every Microsoft Windows Logo From 1985 to 2022
  • › Samsung T7 Shield Review: The Best Portable SSD, Now Rugged

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8 Walter Glenn
Walter Glenn is a former Editorial Director for How-To Geek and its sister sites. He has more than 30 years of experience in the computer industry and over 20 years as a technical writer and editor. He’s written hundreds of articles for How-To Geek and edited thousands. He’s authored or co-authored over 30 computer-related books in more than a dozen languages for publishers like Microsoft Press, O’Reilly, and Osborne/McGraw-Hill. He’s also written hundreds of white papers, articles, user manuals, and courseware over the years.
Read Full Bio »

Unless you disable the password login completely (not recommended) you’re going to have to type in a password every time you start Windows 8.x. But what if you could log into Windows with a four-digit pin number? Maybe it’s not a secure as logging in with a 14-character password, but it’s much better than turning off password log in all together.

If you’d like log into Windows 8x with a four-digit pin, follow the instructions below:

Open the PC Settings Charm from the Charms Bar (Windows Key + C)

Click on Accounts and click Sign-in Options (See below).

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Under PIN click “Add” (I’ve already added a PIN so my option says “Change” instead of Add). When you click Add under PIN you’ll be prompted to verify your Windows Password.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Enter a 4-digit PIN (see image below), verify it, then click Finish. The next time you restart Windows 8.x you’ll be prompted to enter your PIN. If you ever forget your PIN, you will be redirect to the normal password prompt and you can log in by typing in your password.

Pins aren’t to increase the security of your machine, they are to increase the security of your microsoft account.

Pins are for logging into the particular machine/account combination, and passwords CAN be for this, but also can be (and what microsofts wants) be multiplatform/cloud based (microsoft account) wide.

Therefore, using your microsoft account to log into the computer creates a point of vulnerability for something much larger than just that computer. If that password is compromised, a person has access to all of your platforms, and a vast amount of data.

If your pin is compromised, they only have access to that one computer, and perhaps your one drive.

There are also procedure issues. Because people want to log on convienently, they may make easy password. But because microsoft accounts are online and always vulnerable, AND worthwhile targets, it should never have a simple password. Pins relieve this conflict, and so increase security of microsoft accounts this way as well.

EDIT: Reading some posts made me realize that a lot of people missed a basic feature of the PIN. The login PIN is only enterable by someone who is physically present.

The PIN, like biometrics (the other login feature added to win10) requires the operator to be physically in possession of the device, and manually interface with it. So, brute forcing your PIN is a slow and bloody fingers affair, and the PIN can complement other features like a security camera. So, the PIN is highly secure by design.

by that same note if you make it so that only your PIN, and not your microsoft account, worked to logon to the machine, then switching to a PIN would make your machine more secure. But, as it stands, if your microsoft account is compromised, then the attacker can access your machine without knowing your PIN. This, coupled with the PIN being technically (though not meaningfully,) easier to guess manually, is why your PIN does not increase the security of the machine. PINs increase the security of your microsoft account, which, defacto, increases the security of the machine.

If you want no exposure to microsoft account vulnerability, I believe you have to setup the PC with only a locally stored login. That local only login/password would be more secure than a PIN.

IF you hear of someone logging in with a PIN remotely, then PINs become a huge liability until patched, and you should immediately disable it. no human enterable number is going to be secure against a brute force attack.

How to Enable or Disable PIN Expiration in Windows 10

A PIN is an additional security feature available in Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 to protect your user account and all the sensitive data inside it. When enabled, it can be entered instead of the password. Unlike a password, a PIN does not require the user to press the Enter key to sign in and it can be a short 4 digit number. Once you enter the correct PIN, you will be signed in to your Windows 10 account immediately. You can specify the number of days that a PIN can be used before the user will be asked to change it. Here is how it can be done.

How to Enable or Disable PIN History in Windows 10

A PIN is an additional security feature available in Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 to protect your user account and all the sensitive data inside it. When enabled, it can be entered instead of the password. Unlike a password, a PIN does not require the user to press the Enter key to sign in and it can be a short 4 digit number. Once you enter the correct PIN, you will be signed in to your Windows 10 account immediately. You can specify the number of past PINs that can’t be reused for a user account. Here is how it can be done.

Configure Minimum and Maximum PIN Length in Windows 10

A PIN is an additional security feature available in Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 to protect your user account and all the sensitive data inside it. When enabled, it can be entered instead of the password. Unlike a password, a PIN does not require the user to press the Enter key to sign in and it can be a short 4 digit number. Once you enter the correct PIN, you will be signed in to your Windows 10 account immediately. If you need to change your PIN complexity requirements, here is how it can be done in Windows 10.

Change PIN For a User Account in Windows 10

A PIN is an additional security feature available in Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 to protect your user account and all the sensitive data inside it. When enabled, it can be entered instead of the password. Unlike a password, a PIN does not require the user to even press the Enter key and it can be a short 4 digit number. Once you enter the correct PIN, you will be signed in to your Windows 10 account immediately. If you need to change your PIN, here is how it can be done in Windows 10.

Remove PIN For a User Account in Windows 10

A PIN is an additional security feature available in Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 to protect your user account and all the sensitive data inside it. When enabled, it can be entered instead of the password. Unlike a password, a PIN does not require the user to press the Enter key when logging in and it is a short 4 digit number. Once you enter the correct PIN, you will be immediately signed in to your Windows 10 account.
If you need to remove your PIN, here is it can be done in Windows 10.

Reset PIN For a User Account in Windows 10

A PIN is an additional security feature available in Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 to protect your user account and all the sensitive data inside it. When enabled, it can be entered instead of the password. Unlike a password, a PIN does not require the user to press the Enter key when logging in and it is a short 4 digit number. Once you enter the correct PIN, you will be immediately signed in to your Windows 10 account.
If you forgot your PIN, here is how to reset the PIN for your account in Windows 10.

Add a PIN to a User Account in Windows 10

A PIN is an additional security feature available in Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 to protect your user account and all the sensitive data inside it. When enabled, it can be entered instead of the password. Unlike a password, a PIN does not require the user to even press the Enter key and it can be a short 4 digit number. Once you enter the correct PIN, you will be signed in to your Windows 10 account immediately.

If you’re tired of having to remember or reset your password, try using Windows Hello or a FIDO 2–compliant security key to sign in to your Microsoft account instead. All you’ll need is a device running Windows 11 and the Microsoft Edge browser. (This functionality is not available yet on Xbox or phones.)

What is Windows Hello?

Windows Hello is a more personal way to sign in, using your face, fingerprint, or a PIN. You can use Windows Hello to sign in to your device on the lock screen and sign in to your account on the web.

What is a security key?

A security key is a physical device that you can use instead of your user name and password to sign in. It may be a USB key that you could keep on your keychain, or an NFC device like a smartphone or access card. Since it’s used in addition to a fingerprint or PIN, even if someone has your security key, they won’t be able to sign in without your PIN or fingerprint.

Security keys are usually available for purchase from retailers that sell computer accessories.

How to sign in with Windows Hello

Follow these steps to set up Windows Hello and then sign in to your Microsoft account in Microsoft Edge:

Select Start > Settings > Accounts > Sign-in options.

Under Ways to sign in, select a Windows Hello item to add.

To add Windows Hello as a sign in method for your Microsoft account:

Go to the Microsoft account page and sign in as you normally would.

Select Security > Advanced security options.

Select Add a new way to sign in for verify.

Select Use your Windows PC.

Follow the instructions to set up Windows Hello as a method for signing in.

How to sign in with a security key

There are different types of security keys that you can use, like a USB key that you plug in to your device or an NFC key that you tap on an NFC reader. Make sure to familiarize yourself with the type of security key you have by reading the instruction manual from the manufacturer.

Go to the Microsoft account page and sign in as you normally would.

Select Security > More security options.

Select Add a new way to sign in or verify.

Identify what type of key you have (USB or NFC) and select Next.

You will be redirected to the setup experience where you will insert or tap your key.

Create a PIN (or enter an existing PIN if you have already created one).

Take the follow-up action by touching either the button or gold disk if your key has one (or read the instruction manual to figure out what else it might be).

Name your security key so that you can distinguish it from other keys.

Sign out and open Microsoft Edge, select Use Windows Hello or security key instead, and sign in by inserting or tapping your key.

Note: Your security key manufacturer might provide software that can help you manage your key, such as by changing the PIN or creating a fingerprint.

Manage your keys

Follow these steps to delete keys that you have set up for your account:

Go to the Microsoft account page and sign in as you normally would.

Select Security > Advanced security options. Manage your security keys under Ways to prove who you are.

If you’re tired of having to remember or reset your password, try using Windows Hello or a FIDO 2–compliant security key to sign in to your Microsoft account instead. All you’ll need is a device running Windows 10 Version 1809 or later and the Microsoft Edge browser. (This functionality is not available yet on Xbox or phones.)

What is Windows Hello?

Windows Hello is a more personal way to sign in, using your face, fingerprint, or a PIN. You can use Windows Hello to sign in to your device on the lock screen and sign in to your account on the web.

What is a security key?

A security key is a physical device that you can use instead of your user name and password to sign in. It may be a USB key that you could keep on your keychain, or an NFC device like a smartphone or access card. Since it’s used in addition to a fingerprint or PIN, even if someone has your security key, they won’t be able to sign in without your PIN or fingerprint.

Security keys are usually available for purchase from retailers that sell computer accessories.

How to sign in with Windows Hello

Follow these steps to set up Windows Hello and then sign in to your Microsoft account in Microsoft Edge:

Go to the Start menu and select Settings .

Go to Accounts > Sign-in options.

Under Manage how you sign in to your device, select a Windows Hello item to add.

To add Windows Hello as a sign in method for your Microsoft account:

Go to the Microsoft account page and sign in as you normally would.

Select Security > More security options

Select Add a new way to sign in for verify

Select Use your Windows PC

Follow the dialogs to set up Windows Hello as a method for signing in.

How to sign in with a security key

There are different types of security keys that you can use, like a USB key that you plug in to your device or an NFC key that you tap on an NFC reader. Make sure to familiarize yourself with the type of security key you have by reading the instruction manual from the manufacturer.

Go to the Microsoft account page and sign in as you normally would.

Select Security > More security options

Select Add a new way to sign in or verify

Identify what type of key you have (USB or NFC) and select Next.

You will be redirected to the setup experience where you will insert or tap your key.

Create a PIN (or enter an existing PIN if you have already created one).

Take the follow-up action by touching either the button or gold disk if your key has one (or read the instruction manual to figure out what else it might be).

Name your security key so that you can distinguish it from other keys.

Sign out and open Microsoft Edge, select Use Windows Hello or security key instead, and sign in by inserting or tapping your key.

Note: Your security key manufacturer might provide software that can help you manage your key, such as by changing the PIN or creating a fingerprint.

Manage your keys

Follow these steps to delete keys that you have set up for your account:

Go to the Microsoft account page and sign in as you normally would.

Select Security > More security options and under Windows Hello and security keys, select Manage your sign-in methods.

  • How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  • Members
  • 1 posts
  • OFFLINE
  • Local time: 03:19 PM

BC AdBot (Login to Remove)

  • BleepingComputer.com

#2 AngryRaisin

  • Members
  • 235 posts
  • OFFLINE
  • Gender: Male
  • Location: Orange County, CA, US
  • Local time: 12:19 PM

there should be a keypad looking button under the password box and if you click that it should allow you to enter in your pin instead of you password.

#3 SomeChuck

  • How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  • Members
  • 1 posts
  • OFFLINE
  • Local time: 04:19 PM

I have the same problem as OMGreally does Above with a Twist. I too, can remember my Windows PIN and not the Password to Login to my Windows 8 Laptop. The problem is, there is NO Keypad or Key Symbol, Icon or Picture under the Box or Line to type the Password In. Is it still possible to change the Sign In Line or Box requiring the Password to Require the PIN instead? I do have a Microsoft Account but, do not use it to Login. Of course this type of thing only happens when you are under the gun to get something done. Any HELP would be Greatly Appreciated ! 

#4 Nyana

  • How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  • Members
  • 5 posts
  • OFFLINE
  • Local time: 10:19 PM

You can set a PIN code here:

– Go to your Charms bar (hover mouse to upper-right corner of screen)

– Go to Settings (cogwheel)

– Go to Change PC Settings (bottom-right most option)

– Go to Accounts

– Go to Login Options (not sure what the English term is as I am using a different language OS)

Windows Hello feature of Windows 11 allows you to use a PIN instead of a password. Using Windows Hello feature, one can set a PIN, facial recognition, or fingerprint to sign in to their account.

Microsoft says PIN is more secure than a password on a Windows 11 PC. However, if you have forgotten your Windows Hello PIN and want to reset it, then this gearupwindows article will guide you. Windows allows you to reset your saved PIN using the Settings app quickly. That means you don’t need a third-party password resetting disk.

Windows allows you to reset the PIN using two methods: from the sign-in screen or after login into your account. However, we will show the steps to reset the PIN from the Windows Settings app after login into your account.

How to Reset a PIN in Windows 11?

If you know the valid local or Microsoft online account password, then use the following steps to reset your account PIN:-

Step 1. First, sign in to your Windows 11 machine using a local or Microsoft online account.

Step 2. Then open the Settings app by hitting Windows + I keys on the keyboard.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Step 3. When the Settings window opens, hit the Accounts category in the left sidebar.

Step 4. After that, click the Sign-in options button on the right sidebar.

Step 5. Next, select the tile PIN (Windows Hello) under the ‘Ways to sign in’ section on the ‘Sign-in options’ settings page.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Step 5. When the “PIN (Windows Hello)” option expands, click the link I forgot my PIN beside “Related links.”

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Step 6. Now a pop-up window will open. Verify your account by entering the password and hitting the OK button.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Step 7. After verifying your account, a new pop-up window will appear. Here, you can enter your new PIN. Once done, click the OK button.

My password is very long, so I’d rather just use a PIN when locking my computer. However Windows 8 keeps asking me to enter my password instead of PIN.

Do you use the Simulator in VS2012? When it launches, it resets your “last-used” login method to password.

F**k, really? That might just explain why mine seems to randomly change back to password.

Do you use Remote Desktop frequently? On my desktop, Windows always uses the most recently used login method, but when I used Remote Desktop, it always reverts to password until I change it.

Nope. Just lock it.

What’s the point in having a very long password if you just want to use a PIN?

I use a Microsoft account, so I can’t just make it a shorter password.

Remote logon vs being at home.
I don’t mind having a 20+ character password to type in when I’m somewhere else, just makes it that much harder for people see what I’m typing. However, a 4-digit PIN on a numpad is a lot easier to see.

Because when you try to access the computer through the network, you need to use the long password. It’s pretty hard to physically bruteforce the PIN.

I can’t find any official documentation on this, but it appears PIN and picture passwords are only supported in the logon screen. Not in an UAC privilege escalation screens, store account logins or the like.

All of the new enhancements to the accounts in Windows are horribly half-assed attempt by Microsoft in my opinion. The only thing worse is the 16 character password limit for cloud-based account logins.

How to use an alternate password for a Windows 10 Live account

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

If you choose to connect your Microsoft Live account to your Windows 10 user profile, it automatically applies a password lock to your screen. The password you need to enter to unlock your system is the same password you use to log in to your live account. If you don’t like entering your live account password every time you unlock your system, you can set an alternate password for a Windows 10 live account and use it to log in to your desktop.

This alternative password for a Windows 10 real account is actually a built-in feature of Windows 10. In fact, it was also a part of Windows 8/8.1. You can set a PIN or picture password and use it to log in instead of entering your real account password.

Alternative password for Windows 10

To set up a picture PIN or password, open the Settings app and go to the Accounts group of settings

Select the ‘Login Options’ tab and choose one of two alternative password options; Picture PIN or password.

Device-specific passwords

If you have more than one Windows 10 machine, you can set a different picture PIN or password for each one. This particular type of password is not synced between devices. It’s just another bit of added security because the PIN, by default, is only four digits long and can be memorized. If you enter the same one on every machine you have, you will surely notice. Alternatively, you can change it so that the PIN includes alphabets as well. Doing so will extend the length of your PIN beyond the default 4 digits.

The settings screen for setting up the PIN says that you can use it to sign in to apps and services. If you’re concerned, this means your PIN can be used to log into your live account in, say, a browser, don’t be. This PIN will only work on the system it is configured for.

The feature doesn’t say which apps or services you can sign into with the PIN, and apps like Skype and Xbox still ask you to enter your real account password. If you have two-factor authentication enabled, the code will need to be sent to your phone or email to complete the login process.

An added benefit of using a PIN is that once you enter it, you don’t have to hit the Enter key. This applies only to four-digit PINs and not to alphanumeric ones. It’s a small advantage, but you’ll be surprised how quickly you get used to it.

How do you unlock your device if you forgot your password?

Choose Restore. On stock Android and most Android phones, turn off the device, then press and hold the Volume Down and Power (Sleep/Wake) buttons simultaneously to reboot the phone into a special diagnostics mode. Tap Volume Down to highlight Recovery Mode option, then Power to select it.

Can’t open my laptop with my password?

Use the hidden administrator accountStart up (or re-start) your computer and press F8 repeatedly.From the menu that appears, choose Safe Mode.Key in “Administrator” in Username (note the capital A), and leave the password blank.You should be logged in to safe mode.Go to Control Panel, then User Accounts.

How do I unlock my HP computer if I forgot my password Windows 7?

Steps to reset password on HP laptop using Windows Password Reset:Boot the computer and press and hold your BIOS entry key immediately the screen comes on. Use the directional keys to navigate to the “Boot” tab. Highlight the password reset media and using the “+” and “-“ keys, bring it up to the top of the list.

How do I reset my HP computer from lock screen?

Use one of the following methods to open Windows Recovery Environment:Restart your computer and immediately press the F11 key repeatedly. The Choose an option screen opens.Click Start . While holding down the Shift key, click Power, and then select Restart.

How can I wipe my computer without administrator password?

If you are locked out of your laptop and cannot access system, click the Power button on login screen while keep pressing shift button. Then select Troubleshoot > Reset this PC. If you can access your PC, click on the Start button > Settings > Update & Security and Reset this PC.

How do I reset my laptop without a removable battery?

Re: How to perform a power reset from a non removable battery laptop? With that type of laptop you can power reset it by shutting it down, remove all cables and any peripheral devices then hold the power button in for 15 – 20 secs. When you restart it, you may get a Start up menu to select restart normally.

Microsoft’s Windows 10 operating system ships with several means of authentication, including Pin authentication to sign in to the operating system.

Most Windows 10 users are probably using passwords, either for a local or Microsoft account, to sign in to devices running Windows.

Windows 10 ships with several alternative options to sign in to a user account, namely Pin, Windows Hello and Picture Password.

One question that may come to mind is why one would want to use different authentication means, and the answer to that question is convenience, and potentially limiting access if the data falls into the wrong hands as well.

A pin is not really more convenient than a password, apart from not having to tap on the enter-key to sign in after entering the pin if you set it up to be secure.

The main advantage however is that pins are linked to devices which means that they cannot be used to access the Microsoft Account online, or sign in to other devices the user has access to using it. For local accounts, it does not really make a difference unless the password is used elsewhere as well.

A Pin is mostly useful in situations where others may see what you enter when you sign in to the operating system, and not really beneficial at all in terms of security when no one is around and the screen is not recorded.

Setting up a Pin on Windows 10

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

To set up a Pin on Windows 10 which you can use to sign in on the device, do the following:

  1. Use the keyboard shortcut Windows-I to open the Settings application on the system.
  2. Navigate to Accounts > Sign-In options.
  3. Locate the Pin section on the page.
  4. Click or tap on the add button.
  5. Enter the account password for verification.
  6. Type the new pin you want to use, and confirm it. Only numbers can be used to set the Pin of which at least four need to be selected. There is probably an upper limit as well, but the system had no issues with a 32 digit pin

You may use the same configuration screen to change or remove the pin again from the device.

Pin Complexity Policies

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Microsoft added several policies to Windows 10 to change the complexity of the Pin. The Group Policy is only available on Pro and Enterprise versions of Windows 10.

  1. Tap on the Windows-key, type gpedit.msc and hit enter.
  2. Navigate to Computer Configuration > Administrative Templates > Windows Components > Microsoft Passport for Work > Pin Complexity.

These policies allow you to configure custom Pin complexity rules, for instance that the Pin should contain upper or lowercase characters, special characters, or needs to be of a minimum length.

Require Digits

If you enable or do not configure this policy setting, Microsoft Passport for Work requires users to include at least one digit in their PIN.

If you disable this policy setting, Microsoft Passport for Work does not allow users to use digits in their PIN.

Require Lowercase Letters

If you enable or do not configure this policy setting, Microsoft Passport for Work requires users to include at least one uppercase letter in their PIN.

If you disable this policy setting, Microsoft Passport for Work does not allow users to use digits in their PIN.

Maximum Pin Length

Maximum PIN length configures the maximum number of characters allowed for the PIN. The largest number you can configure for this policy setting is 127. The lowest number you can configure must be larger than the number configured in the Minimum PIN length policy setting or the number 4, whichever is greater.

Minimum Pin Length

Minimum PIN length configures the minimum number of characters required for the PIN. The lowest number you can configure for this policy setting is 4. The largest number you can configure must be less than the number configured in the Maximum PIN length policy setting or the number 127, whichever is the lowest.

Expiration

This setting specifies the period of time (in days) that a PIN can be used before the system requires the user to change it. The PIN can be set to expire after any number of days between 1 and 730, or PINs can be set to never expire if the policy is set to 0

History

This setting specifies the number of past PINs that can be associated to a user account that can’t be reused. This policy enables administrators to enhance security by ensuring that old PINs are not reused continually. PIN history is not preserved through PIN reset.

The value must be between 0 to 50 PINs. If this policy is set to 0, then storage of previous PINs is not required.

Require special characters

Use this policy setting to configure the use of special characters in the Microsoft Passport for PIN. Allowable special characters are: ! ” # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , – . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ `

If you enable this policy setting, Microsoft Passport for Work requires users to include at least one special character in their PIN.

If you disable or do not configure this policy setting, Microsoft Passport for Work does not allow users to use special characters in their PIN.

Require uppercase letters

If you enable this policy setting, Microsoft Passport for Work requires users to include at least one uppercase letter in their PIN.

If you disable or do not configure this policy setting, Microsoft Passport for Work does not allow users to use uppercase letters in their PIN.

Resources

The following resources offer additional information about the use of PINs on Windows 10.

Hello,
BitLocker provides three different types of character based key protectors for operational system drives. I have assumed that these differ as follows:

PIN: Only numeric characters; no minimum length
GP Element: “Require additional authentication at startup”

Enhanced PIN: Numeric characters, letters, symbols; no minimum length
GP Element: “Allow enhanced PINs for startup”

Password: Numeric characters, letters, symbols; Introduced configurable minimum length of at least 8 character
GP Element: “Configure use of passwords for operating system drives”

Unfortunately, I have now discovered that the length set for the password is not enforced when PIN+Enhanced PIN+Password is enabled.

Can someone please explain what the difference between the three protectors is and what influence the two Group Policy elements “Configure use of passwords for operating system drives” and “Configure minimum PIN length for startup” have?

3 Answers

  • Sort by Created Created
  • Sort by Oldest Oldest
  • Sort by Votes Votes

PIN: A user-entered numeric key protector that can only be used in addition to the TPM.
Enhanced PIN: A user-entered alphanumeric key protector that can only be used in addition to the TPM.
Recovery password: A 48-digit number used to unlock a volume when it is in recovery mode. Numbers can often be typed on a regular keyboard, if the numbers on the normal keyboard are not responding you can always use the function keys (F1-F10) to input the numbers.
Recovery key: An encryption key stored on removable media that can be used for recovering data encrypted on a BitLocker volume.
More detail see BitLocker key protectors and BitLocker authentication methods.

Configure use of passwords for operating system drives:
This policy controls how non-TPM based systems utilize the password protector. Used in conjunction with the Password must meet complexity requirements policy, this policy allows administrators to require password length and complexity for using the password protector. By default, passwords must be eight characters in length. Complexity configuration options determine how important domain connectivity is for the client. For the strongest password security, administrators should choose Require password complexity because it requires domain connectivity, and it requires that the BitLocker password meets the same password complexity requirements as domain sign-in passwords.
More on: Configure use of passwords for operating system drives

Configure minimum PIN length for startup:
This policy setting is used to set a minimum PIN length when you use an unlock method that includes a PIN.
More on: Configure minimum PIN length for startup

While Microsoft recently made an unprecedented change to the way Windows 10 cumulative updates would be rolled out from May 2020, that doesn’t mean version updates are a thing of the past. The next version of Windows 10 is expected to arrive this month, or possibly next, and bring with it some changes to security options that will surprise many. Microsoft wants users to stop using passwords and start using PINs. Yes, you read that right.

On March 10, Microsoft corporate vice-president, Yusuf Mehdi, announced that more than one billion people were using Windows 10. No great surprise there. When, on March 24, Microsoft announced that it was pausing all optional, cumulative, non-security updates to Windows 10 from May 2020, that raised a few eyebrows, but nothing more. Upping the surprise stakes, however, is the realization that the next incarnation of Windows 10, currently known to insiders as 20H1 or 2004, and which might well still reach ordinary users this month, wants you to replace passwords with PINs.

The Windows 10 20H1 update will likely bring with it a whole bunch of feature tweaks impacting everything from Cortana to Bluetooth connectivity and improvements to Notepad. So far, so meh. Where things get a lot more interesting for me are the changes that Microsoft is expected to make to security options. Reading through the latest Windows Insider Program notes for the Windows 10 20H1 build, reveals that Microsoft is continuing with its move towards a passwordless future for all users.

Swapping passwords for PINs

The insider notes for Windows 10 20H1 Build 18936 include details on how Microsoft is pushing for passwordless sign-in to Microsoft accounts on devices. This will be optional, by way of Settings|Accounts|Sign-in options using the new settings app that is slowly but surely replacing the old control panel. There will be an option here to “Make your device passwordless,” that Microsoft promises will improve security and provide a more seamless sign-in experience. “This will strengthen your device sign-in by switching all Microsoft accounts on your device to modern multifactor authentication with Windows Hello Face, Fingerprint, or PIN,” the Microsoft documentation states, “eliminating passwords from Windows.”

Score 5% Back In Your Top Spending Category With New Citi Custom Cash Card

Avoid These 6 Target RedCard Mistakes for Strong Savings

This requirement to use Windows Hello sign-in for Microsoft accounts will be the recommended option.

Meanwhile, Windows 10 20H1 Build 18995 brings with it, the Microsoft insider release notes reveal, another “step forward in our Passwordless journey.” That step is one that adds Windows Hello PIN support to signing-in when using safe mode.

Is a PIN more secure than a password?

All of this could leave you a little confused and wondering how a PIN can be more secure than a password? The key is understanding what the PIN protects here and how a PIN actually works in this context. Forget the idea that a four-digit PIN has to be less secure than a 25-character password, as that is missing the point. A point that Microsoft itself drives home in a 2017 posting: “The PIN is tied to the specific device on which it was set up. That PIN is useless to anyone without that specific hardware.” It’s a second factor, in other words, the first being physical access to the Windows 10 device itself. If someone compromises your Microsoft account password, they can log into your Windows 10 computer from anywhere. If they compromise, guess, steal, your PIN, then they still need access to the machine itself. The PIN itself is never transmitted to the server as it’s local to the Windows 10 device, so it cannot be intercepted during transit or stolen from a compromised remote server. In other words, this move makes your Microsoft account more secure rather than making your Windows 10 device more secure, although the one leads to the other.

A bold step in the right direction

“In my view, the idea of separating physical access authentication and network access authentication is a really good idea,” Ian Thornton-Trump, CISO at Cyjax, says, adding that “users like PINs!” Anything that can harden remote access while making physical access simpler is a good move, according to Thornton-Trump. “This seems like a great way to reduce the remote attack surface,” he says, concluding, “We will need to see how the researchers go after the new feature, but I think this is a bold step in the right direction.”

Benj Edwards
How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8Benj Edwards
Associate Editor

Benj Edwards is an Associate Editor for How-To Geek. For over 15 years, he has written about technology and tech history for sites such as The Atlantic, Fast Company, PCMag, PCWorld, Macworld, Ars Technica, and Wired. In 2005, he created Vintage Computing and Gaming, a blog devoted to tech history. He also created The Culture of Tech podcast and regularly contributes to the Retronauts retrogaming podcast. Read more.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

By default, whenever you set up a “Windows Hello” login method such as a fingerprint reader, facial recognition scan, or PIN, Windows 10 will disable the password login method. If you’d like to log in to your Windows account with a password again, here’s how to get that option back.

First, open Settings. Click the “gear” icon in your Start menu or press Windows+i on your keyboard to open it quickly.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

In Settings, select “Accounts.”

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

In “Accounts,” look in the sidebar and select “Sign-in options.”

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

In “Sign-in options,” scroll down until you see “Require Windows Hello sign-in for Microsoft accounts.” Flip the switch beneath it to “Off.”

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

After that, close Settings. The next time you log out or lock the screen (Press Windows+L to lock the screen quickly if you’d like to test.), you’ll have the password sign-in option available to you again. Best of all, you can still use the Windows Hello sign-in options if you want.

  • › What Does “Touch Grass” Mean?
  • › The 5 Most Ridiculously Expensive Phones of All Time
  • › Roborock Q5+ Review: A Solid Self-Emptying Robot Vacuum
  • › Samsung T7 Shield Review: The Best Portable SSD, Now Rugged
  • › Every Microsoft Windows Logo From 1985 to 2022
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Arriving Today

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8 Benj Edwards
Benj Edwards is an Associate Editor for How-To Geek. For over 15 years, he has written about technology and tech history for sites such as The Atlantic, Fast Company, PCMag, PCWorld, Macworld, Ars Technica, and Wired. In 2005, he created Vintage Computing and Gaming, a blog devoted to tech history. He also created The Culture of Tech podcast and regularly contributes to the Retronauts retrogaming podcast.
Read Full Bio »

During the setup or upgrade of Windows 10, you might be presented with a screen titled ‘Passwords are so yesterday’ after you sign in with a Microsoft account. With it, Microsoft makes the claim

“Using a PIN is faster and more secure than a password – we think you’ll love it.”

This seems contradictory to all that we have learned about passwords like the longer and the more complex, the better.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

This setting has actually been available since Windows 8 but I and many others managed to avoid using a Microsoft account until Windows 10’s tighter integration.

So, how is a short 4-6 number PIN better or stronger to use than a 14 character password? It’s not. Straight-up 4 digits versus 14 characters including mixed case, numbers, and special characters, the PIN doesn’t stand a chance.

However, it’s important to note that Windows 10’s use of a PIN is not a replacement for a password. You establish your PIN after signing in to your Microsoft account with your user name and password. You then create your PIN as a secondary authentication to your Microsoft account but, the trick is that it only works from your device.

You proved you are who you claim to be by entering your password. Now, Microsoft knows you sign into this device. It then uses the PIN as almost a two-factor authentication piece.

With physical access to your device, it is unlikely the malicious person will be able to access your account. PINs are configured for anti-hammering, which means after 5 incorrect attempts, it is locked out. The PIN is also more likely to be adopted than a strong password, so this might be an improvement in security for many people. This also protects your Microsoft account, which has access to more things. If your PIN is compromised, it is to a single device. Using a PIN increases the security of your Microsoft account, not your computer.

If you would like to enable a PIN, you can find it under Settings, Accounts, Sign-in options. You can also take advantage of Windows Hello to use your fingerprint, face, or iris as another means to sign in with an alternative to using a password.

Instead of trying to remember a long and complex password, try switching to passphrases. Learn why they’re important and how they work.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
Image: designer491, Getty Images/iStockphoto

Must-read security coverage

  • Best encryption software 2022
  • The 10 best antivirus products you should consider for your business
  • 8 enterprise password managers and the companies that will love them
  • Security incident response: Critical steps for cyberattack recovery (TechRepublic Premium)

Passwords were invented in the mid 1960s at MIT, and more than half a century later, they have aged about as poorly as expected. Passwords remain a cumbersome bane of IT departments and users alike. It’s frustrating having to remember or rotate them, and if they’re too simple they put users and data at risk by being easily cracked or guessed. If they’re too complex, there’s a higher chance of users forgetting them, fat-fingering them too many times and locking out their accounts or—worst of all—writing them down somewhere and keeping them with the device being used.

Password complexity is a well-meaning requirement; it generally entails requiring passwords to be a specific length and contain three out of four elements:

  • lower case letters
  • UPPER CASE LETTERS
  • Numbers
  • Special characters such as [email protected]#$%^&*()_+

As a result, you’ll likely end up with something like this:

That doesn’t look very fun to type, much less remember.

Enter the passphrase, which can eliminate much of these headaches. A passphrase is a sentence rather than a collection of random characters or mutated words (“[email protected]” for “bar” for instance). It can be something like:

I love B0st0n in the Spring! (note use of zeroes in the word “Boston” to fulfill complexity requirements)

However, you should be cautious about using passphrases based on commonly known things about you. The above ideas aren’t ill-advised, but if your dog’s name is Thunder the passphrase “My dog’s name is Thund3r” definitely would be.

Even better would be the use of a nonsensical word. As I gaze around my office I see an engraved bat from Cooperstown, NY, and a basket my wife uses to store stuff. So, I could create this passphrase:

There is a BatBasket 1n my @ffice

Then, when you envision your passphrase, a picture of a bat in a basket should come to mind, helping mnemonic retention.

You shouldn’t have much trouble remembering passphrases, but another way to ensure you’ll remember is to create a matrix with random words:

The passphrase is listed in this matrix; 2-5-3-1-3-2-5-4 is a key which represents the position of the proper word on each line. Print this matrix out, and you will never forget the passphrase.

Even better, IT departments provisioning accounts or systems for new hires or resetting passphrases or configuring replacement systems for new hires (operations which are often conducted remotely these days due to the pandemic, which has necessitated shipping equipment to offsite workers) can include this matrix and then separately text them the key to determine the passphrase.

This is admittedly a poor man’s two-factor-authentication solution, but far preferable to sending passphrases directly through email, text, or instant messaging apps, all of which can be compromised, especially since users have a tendency not to delete such notifications.

Passphrases don’t have to be mandated by your organization for you to take advantage of them; so long as there is no onerous maximum character limit for passwords you can start using passphrases today. The passphrase I specified above is 33 characters including spaces, so even if there were a character limit of 20, you could still use “BatBasket 1n my [email protected]” for instance.

Finally, you can also store passphrases in a password manager such as Password Safe or KeePass. I wrote an article a while back on how to properly use KeePass, and the same principles apply.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Cybersecurity Insider Newsletter

Strengthen your organization’s IT security defenses by keeping abreast of the latest cybersecurity news, solutions, and best practices.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Want to log into Windows 10 without using a password? Want to skip the login screen altogether? Prefer to boot straight into the desktop rather than have to log in every time you start your computer? This tutorial will show you how.

As Microsoft gradually woke up to the security requirements of businesses and home users, they built password login into Windows. That’s great for enterprise, schools, colleges and families who share a computer but not so much for individual users. Yes it’s a simple step but it stops you booting your computer without having to be there and is something that gets in the way or work, surfing, play or whatever you use your computer for.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Log into Windows 10 without a password

Microsoft doesn’t officially condone automatic login but doesn’t act against it either. It’s your computer, you should be able to use it your way. You can configure Windows 10 to skip the login screen altogether if you’re confident nobody can access your computer who you don’t trust.

Here’s how to do it. You will need to be logged in with an Administrator account to make this work.

  1. Press the Windows key + R to bring up the Run dialog.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  2. Type ‘control userpasswords2’ and hit Enter.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  3. Select your account from the center box.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  4. Uncheck the box above that says ‘Users must enter a user name and password to use this computer’.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  5. Select OK.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  6. Enter your username and password to verify.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  7. Select OK.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

There’s another way to achieve the same goal.

  1. Type ‘netplwiz’ into the Windows Search box and hit Enter.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  2. Select Netplwiz Run Command from the menu.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  3. Select your username and uncheck the box as above.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  4. Confirm your identity and hit OK.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Now when you reboot your computer, it will skip the login screen and load straight into the Windows desktop.

How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

How to reset a forgotten password in Windows 10

The problem with skipping the login screen in Windows 10 is that you can quickly forget your password. As it is tied to your Microsoft account, that can prevent you accessing Outlook Live and other Microsoft entities. If that happens to you, a reset is what you need.

The same process applies whether it’s your Windows 10 password or Microsoft online password. Unless you’re using a Local User Account on your computer, you’re going to need to reset your password at some point.

    .
  1. Select I forgot my password option and follow the wizard.

Once complete and Microsoft has verified your account, you can use your new password to log into Microsoft websites and your computer. You will need to change it on your computer as well as the two are tied together. You will be prompted to do this though.

When skipping the Windows 10 login screen is not a good idea

If you live alone or trust those who live with you, it should be safe to skip the login screen when you boot into Windows 10. If you share a house, room in a dorm or live with people you’re not sure about, it’s a good idea to eschew convenience for a little more security.

If you use your computer for work, it should always be locked. Even if you’re a freelancer and work from home, if you have business insurance that protects against data theft or loss, disabling the login screen to your computer can be against the terms and conditions of that insurance. Plus, it’s good practice to protect customer data.

The above process enables anyone to load your computer, access all your files and folders, access your Outlook email and any other email accounts you tie to the Mail app and access any apps you have installed on your computer. If you’re at all unsure of how secure your computer will be, it makes sense to leave the login screen in place.

If you don’t want to use a password, you can use a PIN instead. Microsoft recently introduced a PIN feature that can replace a password. If you’re better with numbers than with words or letters, this might work better for you.

  1. Right click the Windows Start button and select Settings.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  2. Select Accounts and Sign-in Options.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  3. Select Add under PIN to set a PIN.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  4. Enter your existing Microsoft password to confirm.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8
  5. Select Finish.
    How to use a pin instead of a password in windows 8

Now you can use a PIN number instead of a password to access your computer. It will appear at the login screen but could be easier to remember than a password and is definitely better than nothing!

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Spotify is such a useful way to instantly access your music library wherever you are. But what if the albums you want to listen to aren’t on there? PLUS, wouldn’t it be useful if any backing tracks you wanted to play along with could be accessed instantly from your mobile device? Then you could play them through your amp, or jam along with them at a friend’s house … the possibilities are endless.

I have a number of music tuition books with backing track CD’s included. None of these are available in the Spotify library. But I have discovered that you can upload music tracks to Spotify easily. And then you have access to them on all your devices – Android and iOS. If you have the following then you can do it too.

  • Premium Spotify Account (cannot be done with free version)
  • Media files (eg MP3’s already available on your desktop computer – import from CD’s into your music library)
  • All devices logged into the same WiFi network
  • All set? Here is a complete step-by-step guide to how to add any song or music track to your Spotify library

Step-by-Step Video Tutorial

Time needed: 10 minutes.

How To Add Music Tracks To Spotify – Step by Step

    Sign into your Spotify Premium Account

This process is only available to Premium Spotify account holders

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Make sure you have imported CD tracks or any other MP3 files you want to add to your Spotify library – they need to be available locally on your desktop computer

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

For this to work, your computer and mobile devices need to be signed in to the same WiFi network

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Open up the Spotify desktop app on your Mac or PC. You can access the Settings menu on either by clicking the arrow next to your name in the top right hand corner of the screen

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Within the Spotify settings, navigate to Local Files and toggle the switch to show local files

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Click the button to Add a Source, and then navigate to the folder where you have media files on your Mac or PC that you want to upload to your Spotify library

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

When you have located the folder of files, simply click Open to add the new files to Spotify

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Now you have added the desired folders, navigate back to your Spotify library

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Click to ‘Create Playlist’ or navigate to the playlists in your Spotify library and click Add new

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Name the Playlist, and maybe upload a square image too so that it is easily identifiable

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Go to your Spotify library, and then click the local files square (on Mac)

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

On a Windows PC, the link to local files appears in the list on the left hand side of your screen

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Now you have navigated to the local files folder in Spotify, use a search term to display the files you wish to add to your playlist

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Click the first file at the top of the list, then shift-click the file at the bottom of the list to highlight the specific files you want to include in your Spotify playlist. Now right-click and choose ‘Add to Playlist’

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

The playlist is now available to play locally on your Mac or PC

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Open up the Spotify app on your Android mobile device. The playlist will show up in your library. To access the files on your Android device you need to toggle the switch in the playlist to download all the tracks

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

The process is almost identical on your iOS device. You need to navigate to the playlist in your library, then download the files. The button looks different on iOS, but the process is the same

All done! You can now access the files you have added to your Spotify library wherever you are. Either on your desktop mac or PC, or on the go via your mobile device. Enjoy.

I already loved Spotify, this just made me like it a little bit more. It’s a very useful facility. And one I use a lot …

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Do you have a large music library of MP3s on your computer?

Connect via WiFi to your Computer or media Drive and play your music files from your iPhone or iPad using MusicStreamer, rediscover your music today.

Create or import your Playlists, and cast your Music collection to Chromecast, AirPlay and Alexa Devices.

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Easy setup

Use our in-app setup wizard to connect to Windows, Mac, network or WiFi drive and browse to your music collection.
Music Streamer will do the rest.

Scan your WiFi network for your home computers or network drives.

Connect and log in. Select your music folder. No third party software is needed.

Start streaming your music and import your playlists. Cast to speakers around the house.

You can also connect to multiple music libraries such as your home collection or a WiFi drive in the car.

Browse by Artist, Album or Song

Browse by artists and their albums or select album view and use pinch to zoom to show your album art.

Import Playlists

Import your existing playlists into MusicStreamer from iTunes.

Create Playlists

Create unlimted new playlists in MusicStreamer.

Export Playlists

You can even export your new playlists back to iTunes.

Powerful Search

Search everything or limit your search to Albums, Songs, Artists or even File names.

Filter by Genre

Picking by Genre is a great way to start playing your music whether you are in the mood for Blues, Jazz, Heavy Metal or Classical especially if you have a large music library.

Offline Mode

Download any Song, Album or Playlist

Take your music with you, download any song, album or even entire playlists to listen to while you are offline.

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Cast Music to your Speakers

Don’t want to buy an expensive Sonos system?
Use AirPlay, Bluetooth or Chromecast to stream to your existing speakers.

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

AirPlay

Cast your Music to your AirPlay enabled devices or speakers.

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Alexa

Stream your Music to your Alexa device via bluetooth.

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Chromecast

Cast your Music to Chromecast devices including multi-room.

Multi-room support

If you have more than one Airplay2* or Chromecast device, you can stream your music to multiple devices around the house. Use Chromecast Multi-room to setup speaker groups within your home, or simply select multiple Airplay2 enabled speakers and cast to the living room and the kitchen.

The Echo Dot is Amazon’s inexpensive yet highly functional home automation device. Echo Dot is compatible with nearly every Alexa product and most other automation services, such as your security system, thermostat, and lighting. The device is versatile and compact, and it makes the perfect virtual assistant for anyone.

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

One of the most popular uses for the Echo Dot is a music control system. It’s truly empowering to be able to sit in any room of your house, have the urge to hear a particular top 40 song, and just say, “Hey Alexa! Play
Save Your Tears by The Weeknd.”

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

However, while Amazon would like it very much if you would get all your music through its premium services, the fact of the matter is that you can configure your Echo Dot to work with pretty much any music service out there, including Apple Music, Spotify, Google Play Music, and more.

There are a few different ways to get free music from your Echo Dot:

  • Link a free music service to your Dot through the Alexa app.
  • Play music from a linked device through your Dot.
  • Play music in your own personal library through the Dot.

This article shows you how to play free music on your Echo Dot using the three different options above, so you can kick back and enjoy your Top 40 hits or bask in some favorites from the past! Let’s get it started in here!

Use Free Trials & Free Subscriptions in Echo Dot

When you purchase your Echo Dot, you can sign up for Amazon Music Unlimited. While this service offers over 60 million songs for $9.99 per month after a three-month free trial, you can take advantage of the free option with limited listening capabilities. If you’re looking to use the Amazon Unlimited Free Trial, you won’t pay anything until the 90-day trial expires. You can cancel the service before the trial ends, of course.

Most music subscription services offer a free trial for new users. As long as your email account is not already associated with the service, a free trial awaits you!

Link a Third-Party Music Service to Your Echo Dot

As you might expect, your Echo Dot starts with Amazon Music as the default music player. So, if you have a Prime membership, you can leave it there because the music isn’t costing you anything aside from your Prime subscription costs.

However, if you don’t have Prime Music or prefer to use a different streaming service, hook your Dot up to the desired music provider and its source of free music. There are several free services with built-in Alexa integration, including iHeartRadio, Pandora, and TuneIn. You can also link to the free tiers of Spotify and Apple Music as well.

  1. Open the Alexa app on your phone or computer.
    How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)
  2. Select “Settings,” then “Music & Podcasts” under the “ALEXA PREFERENCES” section.
    How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)
  3. Choose “Link New Service” under the “SERVICES” section. The items listed underneath are already usable.
    How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)
  4. Select your music provider from the list of remaining services.
    How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)
  5. Follow the wizard to add logins or set as default.
    How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

The ‘Link New Service’ feature includes many of the more popular music services, but it does not include all of them. Regardless, setting up your Echo Dot to use a third-party music service is as easy as following the simple steps listed above.

Use a Linked Device to Play Free Music on Your Echo Dot

The other way to play free music on your Echo Dot is through a linked device such as a smartphone. You pair your phone (or another Bluetooth-enabled device) to your Echo Dot via Bluetooth and use your Echo as the speaker for the music you’re streaming from your phone.

Pairing is very straightforward, but it requires the Alexa app installed on the device. Just follow these steps to get started:

  1. Make sure Bluetooth is enabled on your phone.
    How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)
  2. Open the Alexa app on your phone.
    How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)
  3. Using your phone, say the words, “Alexa, pair” aloud where Alexa on the Echo Dot hears it.How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)
  4. Select the “Echo Dot” on the Bluetooth screen of your phone.
  5. Say “Alexa, connect” to link your phone and the Echo Dot.
  6. Play music from any source on your phone to hear it on your newly connected Alexa Dot.

These six simple steps are all it takes to pair your Echo Dot to another Bluetooth-enabled device. For a better audio experience, here’s how to pair your Echo Dot with a Bluetooth speaker.

Play Your Own Music Through Your Echo Dot

If you have an extensive media library on your device, you can use Plex Media Server to organize it and to stream it anywhere in your home, including your Echo Dot. We have a complete walkthrough of setting up Plex with the Amazon Echo if you need more details on the process.

How to upload your music collection to amazon music (so you can play it from the echo)

Final Thoughts

The Echo Dot is one of the more useful household tech items. Depending on the devices you already have, you can play music, link to other speakers, set your thermostat, and even start your car.

Free music isn’t as challenging to come by as it once was. There’s no more waiting for hours and risking malware to download your favorite hits from Napster. Instead, most music services give you the option to play free music with ads and limited skips. So if you’re in it to saving money, these free music streaming options are an excellent solution for you!

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

If you are working on a specialised keyboard, adding accents to your letters in Microsoft Word will be as simple as clicking a key.

For many of us, working on standard, English keyboards inserting an accent over a letter is a bit of a manual process, but worth it in the end.

Why adding an accent over an English word is not always necessary, we do borrow words such as résumé from other languages so its nice to add the accent to formalise your document or just to make you feel a little bit fancy.

Before you jump in and starting adding accents to all of your letters, make sure you check which way the accent is going and use the grave and acute accents in the right way.

Here’s a accent cheat sheet:

In this post, we will show you how to insert an accent over a letter in Microsoft Word leaving you to correctly accent your words like a pro.

Inserting an accent mark over a letter in Microsoft Word

  1. Open Word
  2. Place your cursor where you would like to insert the letter with an accent

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

  1. Click the Insert Tab
  1. Click Symbol
  2. Within the Symbol box, find and click the letter and accent you want to insert

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

  1. Click Insert
  2. Click Close

You have now successfully inserted a letter with an accent mark into your Word document. Repeat these steps for each letter as required.

Looking for a better way to Collaborate in Microsoft Word?

You’re not the only one!

If you are facing the frustrations that seem to come hand in hand with collaborating in Microsoft Word. Frustrations such as version control, tracking changes, merging documents, saving over old versions, missing edits…this list could go on forever but you know as well as we do that there has to be a better solution.

With technology making our lives so much easier, why hasn’t Microsoft clocked onto this yet and updated Word to never save over an existing file without asking, or to automatically track changes and keep a backup version of your old file – just in case you want to revert back to it later.

Well while we wait for Microsoft, i’d like to introduce you to a a new software that solves ALL of our collaboration issues…

Meet Simul Docs.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

Simul Docs was built with collaboration in mind, they personally faced the same frustrations as you and I and decided to create a nifty, easy to use solution that integrates directly into your existing Microsoft Office.

Firstly, Simul Docs will automatically track every change you make to any document.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

Simul knows you need them tracked and doesn’t expect you to remember to turn tracked changes, it’s automatic. You can focus on making the changes, while Simul Docs focuses on tracking them without you having to think about it.

Open the document, Simul will track all changes. Close the document and Simul will save it as a new version for you.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

Simul also has your version control covered.

When a document is created Simul will automatically give this document a version number of 0.0.1. From there, every time the document is opened, edited and closed a new version will be created, named 0.0.2 followed by 0.0.3 and so on.

A versions list will appear on the left hand side of your document, making it easy for you to refer back to older versions at any time or track who in your team made edits where.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

Once you are a Simul user, there are two ways you can use the Simul solutions with your existing or new Word Document.

Either edit your document directly in Simul’s user-friendly web page or download the document and edit in Word as you would if Simul wasn’t in the background making your life a whole lot easier.

All of Simul’s features will be working no matter where you decide to edit.

So Simul Docs is the solution you have been searching for, now it’s over to you to give it a try!

Insert Accented Letters with Word’s Insert Function

If you only need to insert accented characters occasionally, it’s easy enough to pop open Word’s Symbol window and hunt for the letter you need.

Switch over to the “Insert” tab, and then click the “Symbol” button.
The dropdown menu shows your most recently-used symbols. If the symbol you’re after is there, just click it. If not, click the “More Symbols” command, instead.
The Symbol window that opens displays a huge number of characters to choose from—3,633 to be exact. Word does help by letting you filter by font and subset, though.

Use the “Font” dropdown menu to choose the font you’re using (or, you can just select the “Normal Text” entry). The “Subset” dropdown lets you jump to particular subsets of characters. In fact, if you scroll through the available characters, you can watch the Subset value change. For now, though, go ahead and choose “Latin-1 Supplement” from the “Subset” dropdown. That’s where you’ll likely find the accented letter you’re after.

Insert Accented Letters with Keyboard Shortcuts

For example, to get the á character, you’d press Ctrl+’ (apostrophe), release those keys, and then quickly press the A key. Note that if you want Á instead of á, you’d have to enable caps lock before using the shortcut key, since using the Shift key would change the shortcut.

There are too many to list in this article, but here are a few shortcut keys provided by Office Support to get you started.

Insert Accented Characters with ASCII Codes

And what use would we be if we didn’t show you the geekiest way of all? If you’re going to be using a lot of accented characters—especially the same characters over and over—it might be worth your time to learn a few ASCII codes.

The American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII), is an encoding system that provides a way to represent certain characters using the respective code. We won’t be going over the full list of ASCII codes, as there are hundreds of characters and it’s impossible to learn them all. Instead, we’ll go through the basics and give you a few short codes to quickly take care of those foreign words with diacritics.

To use this trick, you’ll need a number pad (either as part of your main keyboard or as an add-on). You’ll also need to make sure you’ve enabled NumLock by pressing the NumLock key at the top-left corner of your number pad. Most keyboards have an indicator light to let you know when NumLock is enabled.

To enter an ASCII code, all you have to do is hold down your Alt key while typing out a numeric code on your number pad. For example, the code for a lowercase letter “a” with a grave accent is 133. So, you’d hold down Alt, type 133, and then let go of the Alt key. As soon as you do, the character appears—voilà!

Obviously, it would be difficult to remember a ton of ASCII codes for different accented letters, but if you regularly use a few, it really simplifies the whole process. Here are a few to get you started:

Code Symbol Description
129 ü letter u with umlaut
130 é letter e with acute accent
131 â letter a with circumflex accent
132 ä letter a with umlaut
133 à letter a with grave accent
134 å letter a with a ring
136 ê letter e with circumflex accent
137 ë letter e with umlaut
138 è letter e with grave accent
139 ï letter i with umlaut
140 î letter i with circumflex accent
141 ì letter i with grave accent
142 Ä letter A with umlaut
143 Å letter A with a ring
144 É letter E with acute accent
147 ô letter o with circumflex accent
148 ö letter o with umlaut
149 ò letter o with grave accent
150 û letter u with circumflex accent
151 ù letter u with grave accent
152 ÿ letter y with diaeresis
153 Ö letter O with umlaut
154 Ü letter U with umlaut
160 á letter a with acute accent
161 í letter i with acute accent
162 ó letter o with acute accent
163 ú letter u with acute accent
164 ñ letter n with tilde

AutoCorrect Keyboard Characters to Special Characters

You can also use Word’s autocorrect feature to automatically insert accented characters when you type certain letter combinations. And, although this sounds like it would be the easiest method, it’s quirky and in practice, not as useful as it might sound.

Back at the Symbols window, select the character for which you want to set up an autocorrect function for. Click the “AutoCorrect” button at the bottom left.

In the “Replace” box, type the characters that you want to trigger the autocorrect replacement. When you’re done, click the “Add” button, and then the “OK” button.

In this case, we’re telling Word that when we type the letter “a” followed by the accent grave (`) and then a space, Word should automatically replace that with an “a” that has the accent grave above it.

When you type a word, you have to type the accented character first. In other words, if you want to type “Voilà,” you’d first need to type a+’ then go back and type the “Viol” behind it. Otherwise, you’ll end up with Viola’—because Word won’t trigger the autocorrect when the trigger letters are part of a larger word. And, as you can imagine, this makes it really annoying if you have multiple accented characters in a single word.

You’ll use the Ctrl or Shift key along with the accent key on your keyboard, followed by a quick press of the letter. For example, to get the á character, you’d press Ctrl+’ (apostrophe), release those keys, and then quickly press the A key.

What is accent in Microsoft Word?

Accent marks, formally called diacritical marks, are extra marks that appear above and below individual letters. Their usual purpose is to influence pronunciation. Merriam-Webster lists ten common diacritical marks, including the acute accent (ˊ), grave accent (ˋ), and cedilla (¸).

How do you type a rose in Word?

Windows Computers – Type the letters R, O, S, and then hold down the ALT key as you type the numbers 0233.

How do I make Spanish accents?

Typing Spanish Accents

  1. á (lower case a, acute accent) = Press Ctrl + ‘ (apostrophe), then the letter a. é (lower case e, acute accent) = Press Ctrl + ‘ (apostrophe), then the letter e.
  2. Á (upper case A, acute accent) = Press Ctrl + ‘ (apostrophe), then Shift + a.
  3. ¿ (inverted question mark) = Press Alt + Ctrl + Shift +? (

How do you get an é on word?

Using a word processor such as Microsoft Word Microsoft Word will allow you to insert characters with accents by clicking Insert-Symbol. Even better, however, are the keyboard shortcuts available since Word 97: é: Press Ctrl and type “‘” (apostrophe). Release both keys and type “e”.

How do you say accents in Spanish?

  1. ( written) acento m. put an accent on the “o” pon un acento sobre la “o” acute accent acento m agudo.
  2. (= pronunciation) acento m. he has a French accent tiene acento francés. with a strong Andalusian accent con (un) fuerte acento andaluz.
  3. (= emphasis) (figurative)
  4. ( literary) (= tone)

How to type Spanish accents in Microsoft Word?

These are the default shortcuts for typing Spanish accents in the following Microsoft programs: Microsoft Word: Word for Office 365, Word 2019, Word 2016, Word 2013, Word 2010, Word 2007 Outlook 2007 Microsoft Outlook: Outlook for Office 365, Outlook 2019, Outlook 2016, Outlook 2013, Outlook 2010, Outlook 2007

Can you use shortcuts to insert accented characters in a Word document?

You can use shortcuts to insert accented characters and common symbols into your Word documents. For example, you can type deja vu or get fancy and type déjà vu or café or résumé. Diacritical symbols appear over certain letters in foreign languages and in foreign words borrowed into English.

Are there Alt code shortcuts for Spanish letters?

Spanish language also many accented letters. Here is the list of alt code shortcuts for Spanish letters with accents. You can use these shortcuts in Windows, Mac and specifically on Word documents as classified on the last column of the below table.

What’s the best way to write Spanish letters on a keyboard?

However, you should use the numeric keypad on your keyboard. Unfortunately most of the Windows laptops will not have a separate numeric pad. In that case, use code + alt + x method in Microsoft Word documents. You can also use Character Map app or Symbols utility to insert Spanish letters.

When you quote from texts in foreign languages, you will frequently need to type accent marks. Some common accent marks are the acute accent (e.g., on the e in the French word éclair), the umlaut (on the a in the German Fräulein), and the tilde (on the n in the Spanish piñata). Accent marks appear in some English words too, usually those that have been adopted from other languages, such as déjà vu.

This post explains how to generate accent marks in Microsoft Word. It also addresses the differences between generating accent marks in versions of Word for PC and Mac.

There are two basic ways of generating accent marks in Microsoft Word.

Using the Insert Tab

The most straightforward way of typing accent marks in Word is to use the Insert tab to call up a list of special symbols. This approach will work with any kind of keyboard, whether you are using a Mac or a PC.

First, click on the Insert tab in the menu at the top of the screen. You will then see a tab labeled Symbol on the right end of the menu. Clicking on this tab will bring up a drop-down list of your most recently used special characters. If the accent mark you need isn’t on this list, click on the More Symbols tab. This will bring up a large grid of special characters. When you find the one you need, you can insert it into your text in one of two ways—either by double-clicking on the square containing the accent mark or by clicking on the square once, to highlight it, and then clicking on the Insert icon in the bottom right of the window.

First, click on the Insert tab in the menu at the top of the screen. In the drop-down menu, hover your cursor over the word Symbol. You will then have a choice between clicking on Symbol Browser and Advanced Symbol. Both options will lead you to the same list of special characters, but Advanced Symbol contains more options of how to style the text, such as a choice of fonts. In the list that appears when you choose Symbol Browser, find the accent mark you need and click once on it to insert it into your text. In the Advanced Symbol list, you can insert an accent mark into your text in one of two ways—either by double-clicking on the square containing the desired accent mark or by clicking on the square once, to highlight it, and then clicking on the Insert icon in the bottom right of the window.

Using Keyboard Shortcuts

A quicker way of generating accent marks is to use keyboard shortcuts. Below, I lay out the basic approaches to using these shortcuts in Word on a PC and on a Mac.

If your keyboard has a number pad (a rectangular grid containing the numerals 0 to 9), you can generate accent marks and other special characters by typing a capital U followed by a combination of numerals on the number pad, or by a combination of letters and numerals. These unique combinations of numbers, or numbers and letters, are known as unicodes. While Word itself does not provide a list of unicodes, you can find many such lists online. One that contains a limited, but useful, list can be found here.

If your keyboard does not have a number pad, you can use various other combinations of keys to generate accent marks. Most of these combinations begin with the control key or the alt key. Microsoft provides a list of shortcuts here. For instance, to generate an e with an acute accent (é), hold down the control key and then, simultaneously, press the apostrophe key. Then, release those two keys and quickly press the e key. To generate a capital E with an acute accent, hold down the shift key at the same time you hold down the control and apostrophe keys, then release the three keys and press the e key.

On a Mac, you can use a nifty feature to quickly generate accent marks. Simply hold down the key of the letter you need to add an accent mark to, and a little window will pop up with a list of accents to choose from. Each choice is given a number, and by typing the number after releasing the letter key, the letter with the chosen accent will appear. You can also click on the chosen accent mark to get it to appear. To create an e with an acute accent, for instance, hold down the e key until the window pops up above it, and then press the number 2 key, which corresponds to the acute accent mark; or, just click directly on the é in the window.

You can also use key combinations to generate accent marks, the same way you would on a PC. The steps are exactly the same, except that the alt key is called the option key on Mac keyboards.

Beyond Accent Marks

As senior editor of MLA publications, Barney Latimer has copyedited PMLA articles for more than ten years. He holds an MA in English from New York University. He has taught high school and college classes in writing and literary analysis, as well as seminars in poetry writing at several nonprofit organizations that serve New Yorkers with mental illness.

Published 29 June 2020

3 Comments

David Carter 12 January 2021 AT 03:01 PM

The hold-down Mac shortcut to open a choice of accent marks doesn’t work in OS 11.1 Big Sur, or at least not with Word for Mac v16.44. Slowing down Key Repeat in Keyboard on Systems Preferences doesn’t help, and neither does turning off Key Repeat.

C. Barney Latimer 13 January 2021 AT 12:01 PM

Thank you for your message; I’m sorry the shortcut I described doesn’t work for you. I’m afraid the post couldn’t cover all versions of Word and all operating systems. Users may have to seek out other solutions depending on their version of Word or their operating system.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

While the English language does not use accent marks, it does borrow a number of words from languages which do, most notably from French, Spanish, and German. Sometimes it is ok to just type them without the accents, but there are times when it is more desirable to include them.

Typing accented words might come naturally to people who often write in a language which uses them. For the rest of the folks though, it might be quite a challenge. If you’re wondering what’s the best ways to add accents to a Microsoft Word document, read on.

Insert Symbol

Insert Symbol is perhaps the most common way to insert an accented letter into a Microsoft Word document. It is also the slowest one and is only recommended if you need to insert one or two accented letters. How to do it?

Open a document in Word. Then, click the “Insert” tab above the document. On the far right side of the menu, you’ll see the “Symbol” button. When you click on it, it will display a small selection of special symbols. Click on the “More Symbols” option. Scroll through the table of symbols and find the accented letter that you want to insert. Click on it and then click the “Insert” button. Voilà!

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

Keyboard Shortcuts

If you need to insert more than one accented letter or don’t want to scroll through a sea of special symbols and strange letters, keyboard shortcuts might be your best bet. The downside of this method is that you’ll either have to memorize a combination for every different letter or depend on a chart. How does it work?

For the most common letters, you will be using a combination of “Ctrl”, “Shift”, “Apostrophe” (second key to the right of the letter “L”), and “Grave Accent” (key to the left of the “number 1” and below “Esc”). To type the letter “à”, you will need to press “Ctrl” and “Grave Accent” simultaneously, and add “a”.

To get the letter “á”, for example, you will have to press “Ctrl” and “Apostrophe” keys together and add letter “a”. You can find the entire list with explanations on Microsoft’s official support page. Here are some of the most common shortcuts:

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

ASCII Codes

ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) is a standard set of codes used in electronic communication. It was developed from telegraph code and is unofficially known as “Alt Codes”, as it needs the “Alt” button to work. How to add an accented letter via ASCII code?

In a Word document, find the location where you want to insert the letter, press down the “Alt” button and type in the corresponding numerical combination. For example, in order to get the letter “à”, you will need to type in “133” while holding down the “Alt” button. Below is a list of some common codes for accented letters.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

Conclusion

With the power of accented words, you can now add more style and personality to your Word documents in a quick and easy way. Hopefully, this article was helpful to you.

How to enter accented characters, grave, circumflex, umlaut etc when they aren’t on the keyboard.

Typing accented letters can be a chore and a mystery, especially for those of us unaccustomed to languages with the ‘extra’ letters. The keyboards don’t show accented letters and it’s not obvious how to type them.

It’s good to get a name or word exactly right, if only as a courtesy to the reader.

Office and Windows let you enter almost any character.

Copying

The real easy way, especially with names, is to copy the word (with accented characters) from some source document or incoming email.

This ensures you get it right and saves having to work out the keyboard shortcuts to make an accent letter.

Autocorrect

Sometimes you don’t have to do anything! Office may add some accented characters for you automatically using the in-built AutoCorrect list.

In English language versions of Office you’ll probably see some of these:

Type cafe and Office will change it to café

same with fiance becoming fiancé

Shortcuts

Common accents have shortcuts in Office generally (Word and Outlook which uses Word as its email editor).

The shortcuts have been there for a long time and the main four are quite logical. An easy way to remember them is … you hold the Ctrl and Shift keys down while pressing the character that represents the type of accent you want. For example pressing Ctrl and Shift plus ^ (caret, usually above the 6 key) then the letter ‘a’ will produce an a with caret above it eg â .

Similarly, press Ctrl + Shift + : (colon) then either a, e ,I, o, u will produce that letter with a umlaut above it (which looks like a colon on its side) eg â, ê ,î , ô, û .

The same shortcut works for the accent and grave using the apostrophe and grave (usually on top left of the keyboard, below the

Pedantic shortcut:

Is it Ctrl + ^ or Ctrl + Shift + ^ ? You’ll see the same shortcut written both ways.

Strictly speaking the shortcut is Ctrl + ^ but in practice you have to press the Shift key to enter the grave character above the 6 key … so the shortcut is Ctrl + Shift + ^ for most keyboards.

Here’s a simplified list of the main accent shortcuts in large type on the right

Add the Ctrl + Shift + the accent shortcut key. As you can see, the shortcut key (roughly) matches how the accent looks – which makes them easy to remember:

Insert Symbol

Another option for inserting accent or other characters is on the Insert | Symbols | Symbol. Choose More Symbols then scroll down to find the character you want.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

If there is a shortcut for the symbol it will be displayed and even a full name.

Fonts

Most fonts will include accented characters but some might not, especially the free fonts you can download from websites.

If you try to insert a character that doesn’t exist in that font you’ll see a small black rectangle instead.

To see the range of letters available in a font, go to Insert | Symbols | Symbol, choose the font and scroll through the list.

Beyond Office

For non-Office programs you have other choices for entering accented characters.

Windows Character Map – is a Windows system accessory usually found on the Start Menu, if you search for Character Map. It is a lot like the Insert Symbol feature except you can choose characters then copy them to the clipboard for pasting in any Windows program.

On-Screen or Virtual Keyboard – we have a special article about the Windows on-screen keyboard which lets you see keyboards for different languages. If you regularly type words from another language the on-screen keyboard might be helpful.

Another option is to write the words you want, with accents, in Word then copy/paste them into the other program.

67.5K There are several ways to configure your keyboard to type in the Spanish accented letters and upside-down punctuation (á, é, í, ó, ú, ü, ñ, ¿, ¡) and which one you use depends on the frequency with which you need these letters.

  1. Inserting Accented Characters with an English Keyboard Layout

If you only need an accented character every now and then, there is no need to change your full keyboard layout.

There are several key combinations you can use to insert single characters into your text on a PC. The first is for newer computers using the Control key and may only work in Microsoft Office.

In Office for Windows: For accented vowles: Press Ctrl + ‘, then the vowel (ctrl + ‘ + a = á)

For Ñ: Press Ctrl +

, then the letter n (ctrl +

The second way is using the ASCII code. Each character in your computer has a code made up of pressing the ALT key then a three-digit number, all of which are listed below.

To type the numbers, you must use the numeric keypad on the right side of your keyboard, not the number keys on the top row.

To get accented vowels on a Mac, hold down the Option key, and while holding it down, type the letter e; then release those keys and type the letter that you want the accent to appear on:

For the ñ, hold down the Option key while you type the n, then type n again.

To type an umlaut over the u, hold down the Option key while pressing the u key then type u again.

*To type the upside-down punctuation marks press the following keys all at once.

  1. Full Keyboard Configuration

For those using Spanish letters and punctuation on a regular basis, I recommend going into your Control Panel/System Preferences and add the Spanish keyboard configuration. This will mean you need to learn the new key placements, but it is very easy once you get used to it.

For Windows Vista

Go to your Control Panel Click on “Clock, Language, Region Click on “Change Keyboards” Click “Add” and Select “Spanish-International Sort” For Windows XP:

Go to your Control Panel Click on “Date, Time, Language, and Regional Options” Click on “Regional and Language Options” Select the “Languages” tab at the top Click on “Details” near the bottom Click “Add” and choose “Spanish-Traditional Sort” Go back to the “Languages” tab and choose the option to “switch languages” by pressing “left alt-shift” at the same time. This way, you can switch to and from the Spanish and regular keyboard whenever you want. For Macs

Go to your System Preferences Click on “International” Select the “Input Menu” tab Scroll down to select “Spanish – ISO” Note the keystrokes necessary to switch between languages OR Select “Show input menu in menu bar” to be able to click-select which keyboard you want to use. Spanish-International Sort Keyboard Layout

Spanish-International Sort Keyboard Key Strokes

Once you have installed your Spanish keyboard, it will react slightly differently than you are used to. First, you will notice that when you type an apostrophe ( ‘ ), nothing happens. This is because if you type a vowel immediately after, you will get an accented vowel (á, é, í, ó, ú). To get an apostrophe, push the key for the hyphen, next to the number 0. You can see several other changes in the picture below.

The quotes ( ” ) key behaves the same way as the apostrophe key in that it gives you the umlaut ( ¨ ) rather than quotes for the letter (ü) in words like “lingüística”. To type in regular quotes, simply press shift then the number 2.

The semicolon ( ; ) key has also been replaced by the ñ. To type a regular semicolon, simply press shift then the comma key.

Need to know how to add accents in Word? It’s actually pretty simple, no matter what version of Word you’re using. These tips will show you how to create accents in Word so you can begin whipping up sentences with flair and élan in no time.

How to Add Accents in Word Using the Menu Bar

It’s easy to add accents in Word using the menu bar. Here’s how to do it in Word 2016, which comes with a Microsoft 365 subscription. If you have an older version of Word, that’s fine too; the process is similar for Word 2013, Word 2010, and Word 2007.

If you are using an unusual font in Word, you may not be able to add an accent using that particular font. In that case, your best bet is to switch to one of the standard fonts.

Open Microsoft Word.

Select the Insert tab on the menu bar.

Select the Symbol option, which you’ll find on the right-hand side of your screen next to the Omega symbol (Ω).

A drop-down menu will appear. Select More Symbols.

The Symbols dialog box will open. If you need one of the more common accents, you should see it as you scroll down the list of letters.

If you don’t immediately see the accent you want, make sure you’re viewing the Symbols tab and the Font drop-down menu is set to Normal Text.

Choose the accent you want, select the Insert button, then select Close.

To access an even larger library of accents, select Latin Extended-A in the Subset drop-down menu at the right-hand side of your screen.

How to Add Accents in Word Using Keyboard Shortcuts

Of course, using the menu isn’t the only way to add accents in Word. Some people prefer the convenience of a handy keyboard shortcut. Here’s how to put an accent over a letter using a keyboard shortcut.

Microsoft Word allows you to use keyboard shortcuts you create accents as you’re typing, which is often a lot faster than digging into the menu.

  • If you need to call up the “á” character featuring an acute accent, for example, all you need to do is press Ctrl+’(apostrophe), lift your fingers from the keys, then quickly press the A key. You can do the same thing to create an “ù,” too; press Ctrl+’ (apostrophe), release your fingers, then quickly press the U key.
  • To flip it around and create an accent grave on a character, say for the letter “é,” all you have to do is press Ctrl+`(accent grave). The same process is repeatable for any letter you need. To add an accent to an uppercase letter, just enable caps lock on your keyboard before using the shortcut.

Once you’ve gotten the knack for this, you’ll realize these shortcuts follow a pattern and you can easily adapt them on the fly to create the accent you want. Microsoft has a handy table showing some of the most commonly used keyboard shortcuts.

These keyboard shortcuts are best for Windows users. If you’re on a Mac, there’s an even simpler way to get it done.

How to Add Accents in Word on a Mac

If you’re using a Mac, you have a very straightforward option for creating accents using the keyboard.

Hold down the key for the letter you want to have an accent. For example, press and hold down the letter e if you want to put an acute accent on it, as in the word “café.”

A small window will appear above the text you’re typing. You’ll notice each accent has a number.

Choose the number corresponding to the accent you want and it will be inserted into your text.

Now that you know how to add accents in Word, you’ll be über talented at including them anytime you like.

In today’s article you’ll learn several methods you can use to type or insert the letter s with accent marks in MS Word using either the keyboard or mouse navigation.

Please, the method discussed here can be used to type most of the s accented characters anywhere on your Windows PC. Some of the alt codes, however, works only in MS Word. Thus, If you need this character somewhere else other than Microsoft Word, then I recommend you to, first of all, type it in Word and then copy and paste it to wherever you need it.

With that being said, let’s get started.

Table of Contents

Quick Quid to get the Letter S with Accent

To type the letter s with an accent mark, first get to know the alt code of the character you want to type (for example, the s with acute “ś” alt code is 347), then press down the alt key and type the alt code (e.g. 347) using the numeric keypad. Now release the Alt key.

As soon as you release the alt key, the s with accent mark will appear exactly where your insertion point is.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

Note: the above quick guide works only in MS Word. If you try it on a different software you may get a different symbol instead of the letter s with an accent.

Explore below to learn how to type all the various s with accent marks using their respective alt codes and shortcuts.

How to type the letter s with Accent marks using Alt Codes

Using the “Alt Codes for letter s with accent Marks”, you can type any of the “s” accented characters or symbols using your keyboard.

Alt codes are designed for typing symbols that do not have a dedicated key on the keyboard. You do this by pressing down the Alt key whilst you type the symbol’s alt code using the numeric keypad.

Use the button below to copy the letter s with the caron accent symbol.

However, you should keep reading below if you want to learn how to type this and any other a letter with an accent mark over it.

Alt Codes for Letter s with Accent

The table below shows all the alt codes for each of the “s” letters with an accent mark – In lowercases and uppercases.

Note that you must use the numeric keypad to type the alt code. You must also turn on your NumLock key to be able to use the numeric keypad. If you are using a Laptop that does not have the numeric keypad, you can press Fn+NmLk keys simultaneously to turn on the hidden numeric keypad for a laptop with smaller keyboards.

This is how you may use the Alt Code method to type the various “s” letters with the accent mark using the keyboard.

NOTE: You can use these alt codes to type some of the “letter s with accent marks” anywhere on your Windows PC including Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and even on your browser like Google Docs. However, some of the Alt Codes can only be used in MS Word.

Copy and Paste Letter s with Accent Mark

Use the following buttons to copy and paste the various s accented letters. After copying, switch over to your document and press Ctrl+V to paste the copied symbol.

letter s with an acute accent

The “letter s with acute” alt code is 347 for lowercase (ś) and 346 for uppercase (Ś). To type this, open your Word document, press and hold the Alt key whilst you press the letter s with acute alt code, then release the alt key.

letter s with caron accent

The “letter s with caron accent” alt code is 0154 for lowercase (š) and 0138 for uppercase (Š). To type this, press and hold the Alt key whilst you press the letter s with caron accent alt code, then release the alt key.

letter s with a dot above

The “letter s with a dot” alt code is 7777 for lowercase () and 7776 for uppercase (). To type this, press and hold the Alt key whilst you press the letter s with a dot alt code, then release the alt key.

letter s with circumflex

The “letter s with tilde” alt code is 349 for lowercase (ŝ) and 348 for uppercase (Ŝ). To type this, press and hold the Alt key whilst you press the letter s with tilde alt code, then release the alt key.

letter s with caret mark

The “letter s with caret” alt code is 350 for uppercase (Ş) and 351 for lowercase (ş). To type this, press and hold the Alt key whilst you press the letter s with caret alt code, then release the alt key.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

For a quick solution, just copy paste them from here:

А́ Е́ И́ О́ У́ Ы́ Э́ Ю́ Я́

á é и́ ó у́ ы́ э́ я́ ю́

If you type a lot in Russian and absolutely need to put accent marks over Russian letters, you may want to seek a long-term solution. The issue is not easy, though. There are many ways but not each of them fits your IT skills, computer settings and personal preferences.

Why put accents in Russian words?

First and foremost, you won’t normally see accents typed over Russian text. In printed and handwritten Russian texts the accents are omitted.

The main reason you might see an accent placed is for educational purposes, that is, you will only see accents in dictionaries or textbooks for learning Russian either as a second language or as a native language.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

There is another reason for placing an accent over a letter in Russian: this is when the accented word has a spell-alike (read more about Homonyms in Russian in this post) and the difference in meaning is expressed through the accent. For example:

замо́к [za-mók] – lock
за́мок [zá-mak] – castle

It’s worth mentioning that accents are fundamental in Russian, wrongly placed accents sound weird, to say the least. And sometimes accents can even change the whole meaning of a word.

How to pronounce and read Russian words

  • one accent per word
  • always falls on a vowel
  • accented vowels are pronounced more intensely and do not change their sound in pronunciation
  • letter Ё, if present in the word, is always accented (Unfortunately, Russians prefer to replace the written Ё by E for the sake of speed. Tip: if you doubt whether you should read Ё or E, it’s safer to assume it’s E, as Ё is the least used letter in the Cyrillic alphabet)
  • Unlike languages with fixed accent, e.g. Slovak or French, Russian language has no rules as to where the accent should fall, that is why you need to check it in the dictionaries and learn by heart

How to type Russian letters with accents while typing on PC or Mac?

There are several tools online that can help you with the Russian accent marks.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

    Copy paste your text, enter it in the field, hit the button <расставить ударения>, the website will put all the accents in the text you entered. Attention though: if a word can have different accents (remember, different meanings for every accent!), this tool will offer you all of them. (allows to enter characters usually unavailable on a keyboard, downloadable for MacOS and Windows).
  1. In Android, use Gboard keyboard, holding a letter reveals it’s accented version. Example: а́ е́ и́ о́ у́ ы́ я́.
  2. Use Unicode Character ‘COMBINING ACUTE ACCENT’ (U+0301) after the letter you need to accent. If you have Windows and a full-size keyboard, you may also hit Alt and type it’s code 0301 on the keyboard that looks like a calculator or 769 (depending on the coding you use).
  3. Copy this ́ sign and add it after whatever vowel is stressed.
  4. You may also find already accented letters in the “Symbols” table in Microsoft Word (Attention, not all versions have it!)
  5. For MacOS: Press and hold a key until its alternate characters appear, then click or type the number under the character that you want to use. – If no additional characters are available for the key that you’re holding, the accent menu doesn’t appear. Source: Apple Support. Attention: only valid for Latin characters, so you could use this solution for á ó é
  6. Another solution is using a dropbox file. Download and p ut the .keylayout file in Library/Keyboard Layouts, logout/login, go to system prefs/keyboard/input sources and use the plus and add buttons to add the keyboard, then select it in the flag menu at the top right of the screen. (If the downloaded file ends in .keylayout.txt, delete the .txt part from the name). Also, you could make shortcuts in system prefs/keyboard/text/symbol and text substitution for the accented versions of the letters.
  7. And finally, my preferred solution for adding stress marks to Russian letters within a text is RussianGram.com RussianGram helps you read and understand Russian by automatically adding stress marks and dots above the letter Ё. Just copy and paste your Russian text into the field and click Annotate. There is even a browser extension from the Google Chrome store to put stress marks to all web pages.
  8. No time to use any external resources? Just copy paste Russian letter with accents from here:
    á é и́ ó у́ ы́ э́ я́ ю́ А́ Е́ И́ О́ У́ Ы́ Э́ Ю́ Я́

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

Did you find this article useful? Share it with your friends or leave a comment below to help us become more visible.

Related topics:

Russian alphabet

Russian For Beginners On-Demand Course

The grave accent ˈ ɡ r eɪ v or ˈ ɡ r ɑː v is a diacritical mark used to varying degrees in English French Dutch Portuguese Italian and many other western European languages. Make sure you switch on the NumLock press and hold down the Alt key.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Put A Character Over A Letter In Microsoft Word Microsoft Word Help Youtube

How to type special French letters by using their Alt Codes.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

How to get accents above letters in word. In the rest of this post well look at how to do each of these in your writing. It is also used in other languages using the Latin alphabet such as Mohawk and Yoruba and with non-Latin writing systems such as the Greek and Cyrillic alphabets and the Bopomofo or Zhuyin. Above mentioned procedure is not aplicable for MacOS.

Use Microsoft Words special character shortcuts. How to use accent in a sentence. Type the Alt Code value of the special French letter for example for lowercase accent grave e type 0232 on the numeric pad.

You must type preceding 0. Accent definition is – an effort in speech to stress one syllable over adjacent syllables. Release the Alt key and you got è.

To see the Symbol menu in Microsoft Word go to Insert Symbols on the ribbon and click the Symbol button or Insert Advanced Symbol Symbols in the menu system in Word for Mac. The stress thus given a syllable. Using the Symbol Menu.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Pin By Kaivador Perez On Spanish Learning Spanish Learn Spanish Online Spanish Language

Three Ways To Insert Accent Marks In Microsoft Word

Three Ways To Insert Accent Marks In Microsoft Word

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Three Ways To Insert Accent Marks In Microsoft Word

Three Ways To Insert Accent Marks In Microsoft Word

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Get Special Characters Using Alt Key Codes Or The Word Symbols Library Pcworld Word Symbols Keyboard Symbols Computer Shortcut Keys

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Keyboard Shortcut For Accents In Word Type Any Accents In Word With Ease Youtube

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Type Spanish Letters And Accents On Your Keyboard Woodward Spanish Spanish Teaching Resources Learning Spanish Spanish Classroom

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
6 Ways To Put Accents On Letters Wikihow

Three Ways To Insert Accent Marks In Microsoft Word

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Three Ways To Insert Accent Marks In Microsoft Word Words Microsoft Word Microsoft

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Put In Accent Marks Using Microsoft Word Techwalla Words Spanish Words Microsoft Word

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Big Part Of French Are Its Diacritical Accent Marks 4 For Vowels 1 For Constants Basic French Words French Alphabet Learn French

How To Add Accent Marks Over Letters In Microsoft Word Simul Docs

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Many Languages Use Accents And Diacritic Marks To Change How A Letter Or Vowel Sounds Accordingly You May Find It Useful To K Accented Lettering Vowel Sounds

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Type Spanish Letters And Accents Cheat Sheet Spanish Teacher Resources Spanish Teaching Resources Teaching Spanish

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Add Accents Over Letters Or Special Characters In Word Youtube

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Type Accent Marks Over Letters In Microsoft Word Word Symbols Microsoft Word Keyboard Shortcuts Symbols

Suppose you’re writing to an Italian friend, and you want to say something like Di dov’è la tua famiglia? (Where is your family from?), but you don’t know how to type the accent over the “e.” Many words in Italian need accent marks, and while you could just ignore all those symbols, it’s actually quite easy to type them on a computer keyboard.

You only need to make a few simple adjustments to your computer’s keyboard program—whether you have a Mac or a PC—and you’ll be able to insert accented Italian characters (è, é, ò, à, ù) for any electronic message.

If You Have a Mac

If you an Apple Macintosh computer, the steps for creating accent marks in Italian are quite simple.

Method 1:

To place an accent over:

  • à = option + tilde (

Method 2:

  1. Click on the Apple icon on the top left of the screen.
  2. Click System Preferences.
  3. Choose “Keyboard.”
  4. Choose “Input Sources.”
  5. Click the add button on the bottom left of the screen.
  6. Choose “Italian.”
  7. Click “Add.”
  8. In the top right-hand corner of your desktop, click on the symbol of the American flag.
  9. Choose the Italian flag.

Your keyboard is now in Italian, but that means you have a whole new set of keys to learn.

  • Semicolon key (;) = ò
  • Apostrophe key (‘) = à
  • Left bracket key ([) = è
  • Shift + left bracket key ([) = é
  • Backslash key (\) = ù

You can also choose “Show Keyboard Viewer” from the flag icon drop-down to see all of the keys.

If you have a PC

Using Windows 10, you can actually turn your keyboard into a device that will type Italian letters, accent marks and all.

Method 1:

From the desktop:

  1. Choose “Control Panels”
  2. Go to the Clock, Language, Region option.
  3. Select (click on) “Add a Language”
  4. A screen with dozens of language options will appear. Choose “Italian.”

Method 2:

  1. With the NumLock key on, hold down the ALT key and strike the three- or four-digit code sequence on the keypad for the desired characters. For example, to type à, the code would be “ALT + 0224.” There will be different codes for capitalized and lowercase letters.
  2. Release the ALT key and the accented letter will appear.

Consult the Italian Language Character Chart for the correct numbers.

Tips and Hints

An upper-pointing accent, as in the character á, is called l’accento acuto, while a downward-pointing accent, as in the character à, is called l’accento grave.

You may also see Italians using an apostrophe after the letter e instead of typing the accent above it. While this isn’t technically correct, it’s widely accepted, such as in the sentence: Lui e’ un uomo simpatico, which means, “He’s a nice guy.”

Place Accented Letters with Words Insert Function If you just need to place accented characters periodically its easy enough to pop open Words Symbol window and hunt for the letter you need. One way you can add an accent mark to a letter in Word is by using the accent grave mark on the keyboard.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Ms Word Cheat Sheet Shortcut Typing Tips Microsoft Studypk Computer Shortcut Keys Computer Shortcuts Word Shortcut Keys

If youre working on a laptop without a separate numeric keyboard you can add most accented characters using the Insert Symbol More Symbols command in Word.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

Accent marks in word. Click the Insert Tab. Place your cursor where you would like to insert the letter with an accent. Accent marks appear in some English words too usually those that have been adopted from other languages such as déjà vu.

But it looks sloppy a bit like forgetting capital letter. Accents sometimes known as tildes appear at the top of certain letters in Spanish and are written as a short diagonal line from the top right to the bottom left. Within the Symbol box find and click the letter and accent you want to insert.

This method requires you to press three keys at the same time. Following table shows equation editor shortcut for getting accent like tilde hat. The table below contains all of the alt codes for each of the c with accent letters both lowercase and uppercase ie.

To Type Accent Grave. Then release both keys and quickly press the A key. Switch over to the Insert tab and then click the Symbol button.

Codes for typing Spanish characters. Their usual purpose is to influence pronunciation. You can find the apostrophe next to the enter key.

Microsoft Word users can also utilize the following combinations of keys to add accent marks to their letters. The dropdown menu shows your most recently-used symbols. Put the cursor at the place you want to insert an accent mark and click Insert Symbol More Symbols to open the Symbol dialog.

Diacritics are marks placed above or below or sometimes next to a letter in a word to indicate a particular pronunciationin regard to accent tone or stressas well as meaning especially when a homograph exists without the marked letter or letters. Press Control then the letter to add an acute accent. Accent marks – are they really that importantWell readers might know what you mean without them.

Add accent marks with Symbol in Word In Word you can add the accent marks with the Symbols function. Small and capital C with Accents marks. For example to get the à character youd press and hold the Ctrl key and press the key the tilde key.

To use KeyCaps to type French accent marks click on the little Apple logo on the top left side of your screen. You have now successfully inserted a letter with an accent mark into your Word. Apart from the C with cedilla Alt Code which works anywhere on Windows the rest of the Alt Codes works only in Microsoft Word.

The dropdown menu shows your most recently-used signs. Hold Control then tap the apostrophe key. If you plan to type in other languages often you should consider switching your keyboard layout to that language.

They can only ever appear over the five vowel letters á é í ó ú meaning you will never see. Ms word While writing an equation in Ms Word many times you need to type accent above letters or word like arrow symbol for denoting vectors or dot above text for denoting derivative. The accent mark is located over the Tab key and beneath the Escape key on the keyboard.

Accent marks formally called diacritical marks are extra marks that appear above and below individual letters. Switch over to the Insert tab and after that click the Symbol button. Some common accent marks are the acute accent eg on the e in the French word éclair the umlaut on the a in the German Fräulein and the tilde on the n in the Spanish piñata.

Insert Accented Letters with Words Insert Function If you only need to insert accented characters occasionally its easy enough to pop open Words Symbol window and hunt for the letter you need. In Windows combinations of the ALT key plus a numeric code can be used to type a Spanish character accented letter or punctuation symbol in any Windows application. More detailed instructions about typing accents with ALT keys are available.

For more info see Insert a symbol in Word.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Type Accent Marks Characters In Spanish Freeness Us How To Type Spanish Writing Spanish Accents

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Type Accent Marks Over Letters In Microsoft Word How To Type Word Symbols Microsoft Word

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Pin On Learn Spanish With Spanish School El Zonte

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Put In Accent Marks Using Microsoft Word Techwalla Words Accent Words Word Document

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Http Symbolcodes Tlt Psu Edu Accents Codealt Html Math Symbols How To Type Education Websites

Alt Codes When You Must Use An Umlaut Whether Or Not Anyone Else Cares Keyboard Symbols Computer Basics Coding

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Alt Key Codes Or The Word Symbol Word Symbols Computer Shortcut Keys Computer Shortcuts

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
French Accents Keyboard French Language Lessons Language Lessons Coding

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Get Special Characters Using Alt Key Codes Or The Word Symbols Library Pcworld Word Symbols Words Coding

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Three Ways To Insert Currency Symbols In Microsoft Word Microsoft Word Document Currency Symbols Word Documents

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
List Of Alt Codes For Spanish Accent Marks Spanish Accents Learning Spanish Homeschool Spanish

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Get Special Characters Using Alt Key Codes Or The Word Symbols Library Pcworld Word Symbols Coding Computer Keyboard Shortcuts

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
02 Most Common Ascii Characters1 Word Symbols Keyboard Symbols Keyboard Shortcuts Symbols

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Pin On Home With French

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Get Special Characters Using Alt Key Codes Or The Word Symbols Library Pcworld Keyboard Symbols Word Symbols Coding

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Three Ways To Insert Accent Marks In Microsoft Word Words Microsoft Word Microsoft

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Basic Resume Template For High School Students Http Www Jobresume Websi Resume Template Australia Student Resume Template Free Professional Resume Template

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
01 Insert Symbols From The Symbols Library Word Symbols Words Coding

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Get Special Characters Using Alt Key Codes Or The Word Symbols Library Pcworld Word Symbols Coding Computer Keyboard Shortcuts

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Wingdings Webdings Font Icon Character Map Printable Cheat Sheet Cheat Sheets Character Map Sheet

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Ascii Codes 0 65 Ascii Coding Hacking Computer

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
A Salary Certificate Template Can Be Considered As A Formally Composed Archive Issued To An Employee By Certificate Templates Certificate Format Word Template

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Starfish Themed Editable Bookmarks Sb10044 Sparklebox Bookmarks Family Literacy Night Starfish

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Type Accent Marks Over Letters In Microsoft Word Word Symbols Microsoft Word Keyboard Shortcuts Symbols

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Alt Codes When You Must Use An Umlaut Whether Or Not Anyone Else Cares Keyboard Symbols Computer Basics Coding

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
2020 Calendar Calendar Printables Calendar Template Excel Calendar

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Letter Of Intent For Colleges Luxury Letter Of Intent Graduate School 9 Download D Job Application Cover Letter Application Cover Letter Business Letter Format

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Use These Handy Alphabet Charts For Knitting Words Or Monograms Crochet Alphabet Knitting Charts Crochet Alphabet Letters

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Put In Accent Marks Using Microsoft Word Techwalla Words Spanish Words Microsoft Word

Steps On How To Get Letters With Accent Marks In Microsoft Word Microsoft Word Words Microsoft

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Book Receipt Template Receipt Template Doc For Word Documents In Different Types You Can Use Free Receipt Template Receipt Template Templates Printable Free

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Ms Vineyard S Grapevine Calendar Math 2nd Grade Math Math

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
How To Apply An Accent To The Letter E In Microsoft Publisher Microsoft Graphic Design Programs Microsoft Publisher Graphic Design Programs Letter E

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Sight Word Practice Pages Picture Supported Fry 101 200 Sight Word Practice Word Practice Sight Word Worksheets

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Type Ipa Phonetic Symbols Online Keyboard All Languages Online Keyboard Ipa Grammar And Vocabulary

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word
Free Printable Fax Cover Template Free Printable Fax Cover Sheet Template Notebook Fax Cover Shee Fax Cover Sheet Cover Sheet For Resume Cover Sheet Template

To type in Polytonic Greek, you must first enable it. The following instructions are for XP, but are similar to the steps in Vista and Windows 7:

  1. From the Start Menu, select “Control Panel.”
  2. Select “Regional and Language Options”
  3. Click the “Languages” tab
  4. Click “Details. “
  5. Click “Add. “
  6. From the “Input Language” dropdown menu, select “Greek”
  7. Select “Keyboard layout/IME”
  8. From the dropdown menu, select “Greek Polytonic”and click “OK”
  9. You are back at the “Text Services and Input Language” box again. Click “Language Bar. “
  10. Make sure “Show the language bar on the desktop” and “show additional language bar icons in the taskbar” are selected
  11. Save the settings

You have now enabled Polytonic Greek, and probably have the language bar on the taskbar at the bottom of your screen, towards the right. To begin typing in Greek, open up a typing program, email, or webpage, where you can begin typing. Click on “EN” (assuming you are using an English-based machine), and select “EL Greek.” You may toggle back to English in the same way.

Select a font that supports Polytonic Greek. “Palatino Linotype” is one possible choice [or also “Tahoma”, “Gentium”, “Cardo” etc.]. Now you are ready to type Greek.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word[archived version of http://nathanbauman.com/nathanbaumanhowtotypeingreek.html]
[cf. http://www.gettysburgseminary.org/mhoffman/greek/fonts.htm]
cf. http://www.ellopos.net/elpenor/greek-texts/greek-fonts.asp?pg=3

For keyboard shortcuts in which you press two or more keys simultaneously, the keys to press are separated by a plus sign (+) in Word Help. For keyboard shortcuts in which you press one key immediately followed by another key, the keys to press are separated by a comma (,).

To type a lowercase character by using a key combination that includes the SHIFT key, hold down the CTRL+SHIFT+symbol keys simultaneously, and then release them before you type the letter.

To insert this

à, è, ì, ò, ù,
À, È, Ì, Ò, Ù

CTRL+` (ACCENT GRAVE), the letter

á, é, í, ó, ú, ý
Á, É, Í, Ó, Ú, Ý

CTRL+’ (APOSTROPHE), the letter

â, ê, î, ô, û
Â, Ê, Î, Ô, Û

CTRL+SHIFT+^ (CARET), the letter

(TILDE), the letter

ä, ë, ï, ö, ü, ÿ,
Ä, Ë, Ï, Ö, Ü, Ÿ

CTRL+SHIFT+: (COLON), the letter

[email protected], a or A

CTRL+SHIFT+&, a or A

CTRL+SHIFT+&, o or O

CTRL+, (COMMA), c or C

CTRL+’ (APOSTROPHE), d or D

The Unicode character for the specified Unicode (hexadecimal) character code

The character code, ALT+X

For example, to insert the euro currency symbol , press 20AC, and then hold down the ALT key and press X.

The ANSI character for the specified ANSI (decimal) character code

ALT+the character code (on the numeric keypad)

Note: Make sure that NUM LOCK is on before you type the character code.

For example, to insert the euro currency symbol, hold down the ALT key and press 0128 on the numeric keypad.

Note: If you type extensively in another language, you may prefer to switch to a different keyboard instead.

This article explains how to type characters with acute accent marks on Macs and Windows PCs. Instructions in this article apply broadly to all Mac and Windows computers, but some steps may vary depending on the keyboard.

What Are Acute Accent Marks?

Acute accent marks, also called diacritical marks, slant to the right over the tops of certain vowels and consonants. Latin, Cyrillic, and Greek languages use them.

English has incorporated countless Spanish, Italian, French, and Portuguese words, and many of their vowels take the accent mark. For example, the French and Spanish word café often appears in English with the accent mark.

Acute accent marks are on both uppercase and lowercase vowels:

Á É Í Ó Ú Ý
á é í ó ú ý

Several keyboard shortcuts can render acute accents on your keyboard, depending on your platform. Keep in mind that some programs and computer platforms might have special keystrokes for creating acute accent marks.

How to Accent Letters on Mac Computers

Enter characters with accent marks on a Mac using the Accent menu or the Emoji & Symbols menu.

Use the Accent Menu

On a Mac computer keyboard, access the Accent menu via keyboard inputs.

Hold down the letter you want to add an accent to for several seconds. A small menu pops up with different accent options for that letter. Each option for a particular letter appears with a number underneath it.

Press the number key for the version you want to use on the keyboard. Or, use your mouse to click the mark or its number in the accent menu.

For example, to produce an accented a, press and hold the a key. Simultaneously, select the number 2 on the keyboard or click the number 2 in the accent menu with your mouse.

For the uppercase version of the character, press the Shift key before you type and hold the letter you want to accent. The symbol you select appears in your document.

Use the Emoji & Symbols Menu

To use the Emoji & Symbols menu (called Special Characters in older versions of the software), position your cursor in a place where you can enter text.

Click the Edit menu at the top of the screen and select Emoji & Symbols.

Expand the menu by clicking the icon in the upper-right corner.

Select a symbol category from the left panel or enter a symbol name in the search field and locate the symbol you want in the central window.

Additional variations of that symbol appear in the right panel. For example, if you type accent in the search field, you’ll see characters and variations of all types of accents. Double-click any symbol to place it in your document.

Add Accented Letters on Windows PCs

On Windows PCs, enable Num Lock. Hold down the Alt key while typing the appropriate number code on the numeric keypad to create characters with acute accent marks.

Uppercase Lowercase
Alt+0193 = Á Alt+0225 = á
Alt+0201 = É Alt+0233 = é
Alt+0205 = Í Alt+0237 = í
Alt+0211 = Ó Alt+0243 = ó
Alt+0218 = Ú Alt+0250 = ú
Alt+0221 = Ý Alt+0253 = ý

The row of numbers at the top of the keyboard, above the alphabet, will not work for numeric codes. If you do not have a numeric keypad on the right side of your keyboard, copy and paste the accented letter.

Make Accent Marks Without a Number Pad on a PC

If you don’t have a numeric keypad on your PC keyboard’s right side, you can copy and paste accented characters from the character map.

For Windows, locate the character map by clicking Start > Windows Accessories > Character Map. You can also click Windows and type character map in the search box. Select the letter you need, copy it, and paste it into the document.

HTML and Accents

Computer programmers use HTML (HyperText Markup Language) as the basic computer language to build web pages. It describes and defines the content of a web page.

In HTML, you render characters with acute accent marks by typing the & (ampersand symbol), then the letter (A, e, U, and so on), the word acute, and then ; (a semicolon) without any spaces between them. For example, following this sequence with the letter e should result in an e with an accent mark.

In HTML, the characters with acute accent marks may appear smaller than the surrounding text. Enlarge the font for just those characters if this is an important issue.

Adding Accents on Mobile Devices

If you are typing on an iOS or Android mobile device, hold your finger on the letter that you want to accent. You’ll see a pop-up of the available diacritical marks for that letter. Slide your finger up to the accented letter and release it to place it in a document or text message.

Other Diacritical Marks

The acute accent isn’t the only diacritical mark you may occasionally need. Locate other diacritical marks in the same way as the acute accent. Commonly used options include:

  • The grave accent (`).
  • The cedilla is attached to the bottom of a letter, such as in the word façade.
  • The circumflex accent (ˆ). is two dots above a letter, such as in coöperate, among others.

The tilde usually has a dedicated key on the keyboard. On virtual keyboards, the tilde is accessible on the same pop-up as the acute accent.

To add accents in Google Docs, use Windows or Mac keyboard shortcuts. For example, to create the accented symbol å on a Windows PC, hold down Alt+0225, and on a Mac, press the Option+e, a keyboard shortcut. Keep a cheat sheet nearby if you don’t want to memorize these keyboard shortcuts.

To type accents on the iPhone keyboard, you’ll use the iPhone’s built-in keyboard to create accent marks and other symbols. Tap and hold the letter that requires an accent. A row of accented versions of the letter appears. Drag your finger to select the correct accent or symbol, and then remove your finger. Your selected accented letter will appear.

To add accent marks on a Chromebook, you’ll bring up a different keyboard language or input method. On your Chromebook, select the time from the bottom right and then select Settings > Advanced > Language and Inputs. Select Inputs and enable Show input options in the shelf. Select the keyboard language code and the language you want to switch to.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

Many students who need to write French assignments have asked me how to type French accents on Word. I have already written an article about How to Type French accents on an Apple iPhone / iPad, which you can read here.

I’ve asked my husband to write a post about it as he is the one who helps me out with all the tech parts! (For myself, I use a French keyboard.)

Here’s the easiest way to type French accents on Word

With the following method, you won’t need to memorise a heap of random numbers to use ALT key “shortcuts”, and you won’t need to change your keyboard to a French AZERTY keyboard and then have to learn where all the keys are again. (Yay!)

The only catch is that it only works in Microsoft Word, but you can then copy and paste your text and use it in the application you want. We have only used it in Windows, and have not tested it on a Apple Mac, but the process might be similar (leave a comment below if you’ve tested in on an Mac!)

Basic Recipe

The basic recipe for each accent is as follows:

  • Hold down the “CTRL” key and keep it held down.
  • Tap and release the punctuation mark which looks the most like the accent you need.
  • Tap and release the letter which will have the accent.
  • Let go of the “CTRL” key.

Each of the punctuation marks looks very similar to the accent that it represents so that should make it very easy to remember off the top of your head! 😉

Examples

If you want an “é” with a accent aigu , in Word:

  • Hold down the “CTRL” key and keep it held down
  • tap on
  • tap on e
  • let go of the “CTRL” key

If you want an “è” with a accent grave , in Word

  • Hold down the “CTRL” key and keep it held down
  • tap on ` (It’s next to the number 1 key on your keyboard)
  • tap on e
  • let go of the “CTRL” key

If you want a “ç” with the cédille , in Word

  • Hold down the “CTRL” key and keep it held down
  • tap on ,
  • tap on c
  • let go of the “CTRL” key

If you want a “â” with the accent circonflexe , in Word

  • Hold down the “CTRL” key and keep it held down
  • tap on ^ (You need to hold down “SHIFT” while tapping on the number “6“)
  • tap on a
  • let go of the “CTRL” key

If you want a “ë” with the tréma , in Word

  • Hold down the “CTRL” key and keep it held down
  • tap on : (to do this one you need hold down “SHIFT” while tapping on the semi-colon 😉
  • tap on e
  • let go of the “CTRL” key

How to type French accents on Word AND double-check your spelling!

The other thing that you can do is to set your language in Word to French so that you get the additional benefit of spell check!

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

Hope this helps you with your typing in French! Leave a comment in section below to let us know if you tried ! 🙂

Stay In Touch

Subscribe to not miss out on the French resources I’m making for you. and with you!

Windows provides a few different ways to create accented letters. Its Character Map allows you to copy letters to your system’s clipboard so you can paste them into programs. In Microsoft Office programs, such as Word 2013, you can insert letters directly through the Symbols menu without copying them. You can also type accented letters into your work by using keyboard commands and shortcuts.

Explore this article

1 Use Character Map or Symbols

From a Windows 8 Start screen, type character map; in Windows 7, click Start and type character map into the search bar. In either OS, select the tool from the results to open it. Set a font in the Font bar and scroll through the characters to find the one you want to use. Double-click to insert it into Characters to Copy and select Copy. You can now paste the letter in your work.

To insert accented letters in Office programs, go to the Insert tab, select Symbol and then More Symbols. Keep the default of Normal Text to use your current font, select your character and then Insert to place it in your document.

2 Use Keyboard Shortcuts

Windows has a couple of types of keyboard commands that create accented letters. To use numeric shortcut codes, hold down the Alt key and key in the number that matches the letter. For example, if you type Alt-0224, you create the letter à; type Alt-0241 to make an ñ.

You can also use punctuation shortcuts to create select accented letters with Ctrl, Alt or Shift key combinations. For example, Windows assigns acute accents to the apostrophe key, allowing you to type letters such as á, é or í by holding down Ctrl-‘ and then typing the letter.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

Windows XP and Vista both have the ability to map other languages to the computer keyboard, giving you the opportunity to form letters with diacritical marks or while using non-Latin alphabets. See this article for Changing Keyboards in Windows XP. Windows Vista can also change keyboards, but you access it differently. This will require you to know the keyboard for the language you want to use.

Select the font you want to use in your word processing program. You may have to toggle between the keyboards you have installed with Alt/Shift until the letters you type use the correct symbols. After installing the Hebrew keyboard into the available keyboards on my computer, I selected the font Rod to type in. I found the correct keyboard by toggling through Alt/Shift on my computer, and typing a key each time. After my third toggle, I was using the Hebrew keyboard. Different ע י ן ם Hebrew letters were now typed with each keystroke. As Hebrew is written right to left, the letters I typed also moved across the screen from right to left. I then had to toggle Alt/Shift again to return to the familiar US keyboard.

Using the United States International Keyboard

Another method Microsoft provides in Windows Vista to create accent or diacritical marks on individual letters is to install the United States International Keyboard as an option on your computer. You will also see a small icon, which I keep in my task bar. When I hover over it, it tells me whether I have the US keyboard or the United States International keyboard enabled.

When the United States International keyboard is enabled, I can use different punctuation marks on the keyboard to form letters with diacritical marks. To form ñ, used in Spanish, I use shift to hit the tilde key. At that point nothing appears. When I then type n, the ñ is formed. To create ç, I type the apostrophe, and then the c key. That is one of the less intuitive letters. My daughter’s name, Zoë, is formed by typing the first two letters normally, and using shift to type a double quote, and then typing e, to form ë.

When you want to use a punctuation mark normally, you do have to either toggle the icon at the bottom of the screen back to the US keyboard or type the punctuation mark you want to use twice. After a moment you will see both marks. Backspace and the second one will be deleted, and you can now type the letter you want to follow the punctuation mark.

Use the double quotation mark “ to create ä, ë, ï, ö, ü, and ÿ.

The comma , will create ç.

Use the caret or circumflex ^ above the 6 key to create â, ê, î, ô, and û.

Use the single quotation ` under the tilde key to create à, è, ì, ò, and ù.

The single quotation ` at the bottom of the double quotes key creates á, é, í, ó, ú, and ý.

The tilde makes ã and ñ.

Hitting the space bar immediately after creating a letter with a diacritical mark will capitalize it. Ñ

While there are a number of other diacritical marks, these comprise the most common accent marks used in the Latin alphabet.

Character Map

If you need a few letters that use other diacritical marks, you can also use the Character Map. This is found in all Programs → Accessories → System tools → Character Map. I need to use diacritical marks often while editing articles in the

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

Language Learning Channel at Bright Hub, so I pinned the Character Map to my Start menu, for easy access. You do this by navigating to the Character Map and right clicking on it. One of the options will be “pin to Start Menu.”

In the Character map, you can look at each font installed on your system and see which different letters with diacritical marks are included. You may need to scroll down to see all the letters available in the font. Double click on the letter you want, and it will appear in a field under the characters. You can use ctrl/c to select the letter, or if you have clicked on a number of different letters to go to the field, copy all of them. You can also use the alt code shown at the bottom of the Character Map after you selected a letter to create a diacritical mark.

I have found it handy to make a document with the alphabet of the unusual letters I do use on a regular basis and save it under the font name. I open that up and copy the individual letter I want and paste it into the document I am working on where it is needed, such as the ß, the German sharp s.

Trick Your Spell Checker

A trick you can use if you have a personal name or other proper noun which includes a letter with a diacritical mark is to fool your spell checker. I type my daughter’s name, zoe, in small letters, When I spell check the document or email, the spell checker stops on it. I have added the correct spelling Zoë to the dictionary, and so it offers me Zoë as one of the choices when it gets to that word. In my email, it is the top choice, but in the word processing program it offers me Zoe as the first choice, and I have to scroll to the bottom of the choices to get Zoë. This is less cumbersome than changing keyboards or fishing out the Character Map, but if I were using a lot of words with diacritical marks on a regular basis, I would probably better use the alternative keyboards or the United States International keyboard icon option.

Unicode and HTML

There are also Unicode for practically every symbol known to man, but using those is beyond the scope of this article. You can find further information on Unicode and using it in HTML at Wikipedia.

Esperanto Diacritical Marks

Esperanto has some characters with diacritical marks that are not easily typed.

You have a couple of options. A download is available where you can get a doc file of the diacritical marks in a number of common fonts. These can be copied into your document so you have the correct character when you need it. Your other option is alt codes. You can read about these in this post on Esperanto diacritical marks.

Welcome to Useful Shortcuts, THE Alt Code resource!

If you are already familiar with using alt codes, simply select the alt code category you need from the table below.

If you need help using alt codes find and note down the alt code you need then visit our instructions for using alt codes page.

List of Alt Codes for entering characters with accents

ALT Codes for letters with accents

Uppercase Lowercase
Alt Codes Symbol Description Alt Codes Symbol Description
Alt 0192 À A grave Alt 0224 à a grave
Alt 0193 Á A acute Alt 0225 á a acute
Alt 0194 Â A circumflex Alt 0226 â a circumflex
Alt 0195 Ã A tilde Alt 0227 ã a tilde
Alt 0196 Ä A umlaut Alt 0228 ä a umlaut
Alt 0199 Ç C cedilla Alt 0231 ç c cedilla
Alt 0200 È E grave Alt 0232 è e grave
Alt 0201 É E acute Alt 0233 é e acute
Alt 0202 Ê E circumflex Alt 0234 ê e circumflex
Alt 0203 Ë E umlaut Alt 0235 ë e umlaut
Alt 0204 Ì I grave Alt 0236 ì i grave
Alt 0205 Í I acute Alt 0237 í i acute
Alt 0206 Î I circumflex Alt 0238 î i circumflex
Alt 0207 Ï I umlaut Alt 0239 ï i umlaut
Alt 165 Ñ N tilde Alt 164 ñ n tilde
Alt 0210 Ò O grave Alt 0242 ò o grave
Alt 0211 Ó O acute Alt 0243 ó o acute
Alt 0212 Ô O circumflex Alt 0244 ô o circumflex
Alt 0213 Õ O tilde Alt 0245 õ o tilde
Alt 0214 Ö O umlaut Alt 0246 ö o umlaut
Alt 0138 Š S caron Alt 0154 š s caron
Alt 0218 Ú U acute Alt 0249 ù u grave
Alt 0219 Û U circumflex Alt 0250 ú u acute
Alt 0220 Ü U umlaut Alt 0251 û u circumflex
Alt 0217 Ù U grave Alt 0252 ü u umlaut
Alt 0221 Ý Y acute Alt 0253 ý y acute
Alt 0159 Ÿ Y umlaut Alt 0255 ÿ y umlaut
Alt 0142 Ž Z caron Alt 0158 ž z caron

Comments

Post new comment

Why does this free alt code resource exist?

We searched online for a really comprehensive list of ALT Codes.
We couldn’t find a good alt code resource anywhere, so we made this one.
Hopefully you found this page of alt codes helpful. Why not add it to your favourites so you can come back next time you need an alt code?

Thank You

Thank you to all of you who have linked to this page from your web sites, blogs and forum posts.
Thank you to those who have recommded this page to your friends.
Special thanks to those who have contributed, spotted mistakes and made suggestions.

On my Word training course today, I had someone who had to write letters to someone called Noémie. She wondered how to get the accent into the name and then how to be able to do that easily each time she typed the name.

To put the accent over the e, we first selected the letter to include the symbol, we went to the Insert tab, then in the Symbols group, went to the Symbol dropdown and clicked More Symbols.

We scrolled down to the required symbol, then clicked Insert, then clicked Close. Noemie then became Noémie.

To save doing the same thing each time, we then copied the word Noémie and went to File – Options. We clicked the Proofing tab, then clicked AutoCorrect Options.

In the With box, I used Ctrl + V to paste the name as I wanted to see it. In the Replace box, I typed the name as I would normally type it. Click OK twice. Now typing in Noémie will put the accent on straightaway.

Find out more about our Word training Sydney, Australia, or our Word training London, Middlesex and Surrey or our Microsoft Word training Dorset, Hampshire, Wiltshire, UK.

I’m a lifestyle journalist and I’ve been writing about office productivity software for a long time. Here you’ll find handy hints, tips, tricks, techniques and tutorials on using software as diverse as Excel, Word, PowerPoint, Outlook, Access and Publisher from Microsoft and other applications that I love. My publishing credits include PC Magazine, Windows XP mag, CNet, PC User mag, SmallbusinessComputing.com, Winplanet and Sydney Morning Herald.

Author

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

Links

Previous Post

  • Let there be light! Testing out the amazing Benq ScreenBar
  • Excel Templates To Make Marketing Easier
  • SAVE yourself daily FRUSTRATION – Start Task Manager with one click!
  • Clean Up Time! How to find and remove big files
  • Move a Paragraph Up or Down in Microsoft Word (Mac)
  • Copy Excel Formulas Without Updating References
  • Left Arrow to Get to the Bottom of a Word Document – Mac Only Stupidity
  • Print a List of Files in a Windows Folder
  • Add Mac Keyboard Icons to Word documents (and other things)
  • How to Open Winmail.dat files

Archives

Subscribe to Posts [Atom]

Search Blog

Thursday, May 30th, 2013

Word 2010 and 2013 Tip – Quick Accented Characters

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

Word allows you to create accented letters quickly using its inbuilt accent shortcuts. To do this, press the accent shortcut key combination, then release, and follow it up with the letter to accent.

Some of the more commonly used shortcuts are:

Circumflex – Ctrl+Shift+^ (caret/6) followed by (a, e, i, o, u)

Grave – Ctrl+` (accent/grave) followed by (a, e, i, o, u)

Acute – Ctrl+’ (apostrophe/quotation mark) followed by (a, e, i, o, u, y)

Cedilla – Ctrl+, (comma/less than) followed by (c)

Umlaut – Ctrl+Shift+: (colon/semi colon) followed by (a, e, i, o, u, y)

posted by Helen Bradley @ Thursday, May 30th, 2013 6 Comments

Helen, you are a LIFE-SAVER! Trying to get the program done for our Crystal Music Festival happening in just a week! I frantically searched the ribbon of Word 2010 (which I’m still learning!) trying to find that accent over the ‘e’ for the word, résumé… it was driving me crazy, and I hate changing software versions anyway to have to relearn them, but YOU saved the day for me on the accent issue! I can’t thank you enough and I know as a regular Word user, now I can count on your when I’m in a bind! Blessings! Cheryl

Thank you for commenting Cheryl, you made my day. I was so glad to be able to have been of help.
Helen

But is there a way to add the long mark? What about the dot under certain consonants to make it palatal?

Thanks, but what about s cedilla please? It’s in ASCII extended codes but Microsoft does not recognise it.

Wow, finally a straight-to-the-point Word help site – this is awesome. Thank you! (Why was I not surprised to discover it was created by a woman. ) 😉

Please feel free to add your comment here. Thank you!

The accents on the e letter are used to change the sound-values of the letter.

Below has more stuff about these characters including shortcuts to type them on the keyboard, ALT codes, and very useful instructions to get any e with accent mark on MS Word, Google Docs, and more.

Alt Codes for E with Accent Marks Table

The table below contains some useful information about the E with Accent Mark.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

  • At the far-right section, you’ll see the Symbols group. Select Symbol > More Symbols.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

The Symbol window will appear as below.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

  • From this window, you can find the symbols (Èè Éé Êê Ëë Ēē).
  • To find it easily, type 00C8 in the Character code: box.

As soon as you type the character code, on of the E With Accent marks will appear selected plus the rest of the accented e letters.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

  • Click the Insert button to insert it into your Word document.
  • Close the Symbol dialog.

These are the steps you may use to insert this (Èè Éé Êê Ëë Ēē) and any other symbol in Microsoft Word or other Office apps in both Windows and Mac OS.

E with Accent Mark in Google Docs

Google Docs is yet another text editor that people struggle with when it comes to typing or inserting these letters.

Meanwhile, Google Docs has the easiest way to insert symbols that are not found on the keyboard. Without further ado, let’s see how this is done.

To get the E with Accent Mark in Google Docs:

  • Open Google Docs and place your cursor where you need the symbol.
  • Go to Insert > Special Characters.

Go to Insert alt= Special Characters in Google Docs” width=”640″ height=”440″ />

The Insert special characters window will appear with a search bar and a drawing pad.

  • Using the Search bar, search for ‘E With’. Then double click on the particular symbol in the search results to insert it into Google Docs.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

  • You can also use the drawing pad below the search bar to draw the Symbol you want to insert. If Google Docs recognize the drawing, it’ll display the symbol and similar signs in the results box. Then double click the symbol to insert it.

These are the steps you may use to insert this and any other symbol in Google Docs.

E With Accent on the Character Map (Windows)

The Character Map in Windows is a tool that is used to view characters in any installed font, to check what keyboard input (or Alt code) is used to type those characters, and to copy characters to the clipboard instead of typing them.

This section will show you how to use the Character Map tools to copy and paste anu E with an Accent Mark.

Without further ado, let’s get started.

  • Go to the Windows Start menu and search for Character Map.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

  • The Character Map app will appear in the search result. Click on it to Launch.
  • When it is open, look at the bottom left of the window and click to expand the Advance view options.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

  • To easily locate these symbols on the Character Map, type ‘E With’ in the ‘search for‘ box and hit enter.

How to type accent marks over letters in microsoft word

The symbols will appear for you to copy.

  • To copy this symbol, simply double click on it and it’ll be selected in the Characters to copy box. Then click on the Copy button to finally copy it to your clipboard.
  • Place your cursor wherever you need the symbol and press Ctrl and V to paste the copied symbol.

And there you have it.

These are the steps you may also use to copy and paste the E with Accent Mark or any other symbol on your Windows PC.

Conclusion

As much as possible, we’ve tried to cover a lot of information about the E with Accent Mark characters.

Most people find it difficult to type or insert this symbol. So, we’ve broken down the several methods and steps needed to be able to type or insert it in Microsoft Word and Google Docs.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Matt Klein
How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)Matt Klein
Writer

Matt Klein has nearly two decades of technical writing experience. He’s covered Windows, Android, macOS, Microsoft Office, and everything in between. He’s even written a book, The How-To Geek Guide to Windows 8. Read more.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

It seems like everyone is tracking our location now. Not surprisingly, Facebook Messenger can also transmit a significant amount of information on your location activity. If you use Messenger, here’s how to make sure it’s not reporting your location to others.

We know Google does it, and if you use an Apple device, you have to enable location tracking for certain features and apps to work correctly. Basically, any portable device or modern operating system has location-oriented features baked into it. Even your web browser utilizes your location to deliver results specific to where you’re residing.

Facebook Messenger has always had location reporting built into it, but as it turns out, this could be (and probably is) a boon for stalkers and creeps because they can build a very detailed accounting of everywhere you go (as long as you chat on Messenger throughout the day).

To prove this point, one enterprising Facebook intern created a Marauder’s Map, which lets anyone generate an actual map pinpointing everywhere a Messenger user goes.

While the Marauder’s Map is now gone, the lesson is not, and Facebook was quick to issue an update that turns the location feature off by default. That said, if you do have it enabled, either by accident or you simply don’t know better, here are detailed instructions on exactly how to disable it.

Checking Whether Messenger’s Location Reporting is Enabled

Like we said, from now on Messenger’s location feature should be disabled by default when you install it. This is less of a concern with the iOS version of the app simply because of the way iOS handles permissions. With the Android version, however, you have to be a little more attentive. Still, we’ll cover both versions so you know what it is involved.

On Android, you can tell when the location service is on because there will be an icon in your chat windows. If the icon is blue, it means that the location option is enabled and active.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

If you see the icon but it is grayed out, it means that location is enabled but inactive, but only for that particular chat.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Tapping the icon lets you toggle location on and off manually, but it will always be active for each new Messenger conversation.

If location is enabled for Messenger on your iPhone or iPad, when you tap the pin icon along the bottom, it will paste a map of your current location into your chat. Thus, instead of reporting your location every time you send a message to your conversation partner, they can see where you are but only if you choose to reveal that information.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)Trust us, Messenger’s ability to pinpoint our location is frighteningly accurate.

If location is disabled in the iOS Messenger app, you’ll see the following message, which will whisk you to the settings to turn it on if you wish.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

As we inferred earlier, it is more difficult to turn on location tracking on your iPhone or iPad because of this warning dialog.

Turning Location Off

To turn off the location feature in the Android app, you need to tap the settings gear at the top of the app’s screen, then scroll down and tap off “Location”.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

iOS handles location permissions on the OS level, meaning you have to allow Messenger to use your location in the system settings. When you access these settings on your iPhone or iPad, the choices will be to turn it off completely or allow it while using the app.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

If you use Messenger, then we recommend you check out how it is set up before starting any new chats. It’s still very much possible that you’re using an older version that doesn’t automatically disable the location feature if you use Android.

This is hardly the first Facebook-related annoyance we’ve talked about. We’ve always disliked all those game requests and birthday notifications, but this is actually something that could prove harmful to an unaware user.

While it’s certainly encouraging that Facebook actually took steps to protect user privacy from potentially invasive or even dangerous tracking activity, that it took them so long is still unfortunate. Hopefully current Messenger users will pay attention to and keep up on their app updates. At the very least, if you’re reading this, you now know what to do.

Please let us know if you have any questions or comments by sharing your feedback with us in our discussion forum.

  • › Why iPhone Location Services Can Be More Helpful Than You Think
  • › How to Find Public Wi-Fi Using the Facebook App on Your Phone
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Available Now
  • › Roborock Q5+ Review: A Solid Self-Emptying Robot Vacuum
  • › Samsung T7 Shield Review: The Best Portable SSD, Now Rugged
  • › The 5 Most Ridiculously Expensive Phones of All Time
  • › What Does “Touch Grass” Mean?
  • › Every Microsoft Windows Logo From 1985 to 2022

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on) Matt Klein
Matt Klein has nearly two decades of technical writing experience. He’s covered Windows, Android, macOS, Microsoft Office, and everything in between. He’s even written a book, The How-To Geek Guide to Windows 8.
Read Full Bio »

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

One of Facebook’s many features is that you can “check in” from your current location, letting your friends and family know where you are or where you’ve been. You can also use Facebook to let your friends know where you are right now using the Nearby Friends feature.

If you take a moment to consider what this means, you’ll understand that it means Facebook is keeping tabs on your every movement. As The Wall Street Journal recently uncovered, this data is being used for more than just helping you get in touch with your friends.

If you don’t feel comfortable sharing your every move with a bunch of advertisers, you can protect your privacy and disable location tracking.

How to disable location tracking in Facebook on iPhone and iPad

If you want to burn the entire Facebook location tracking ability to the ground. The easiest way to stop it is to disable location tracking for the Facebook app.

  1. Launch the Settings app on your iPhone or iPad.
  2. Tap on Privacy.

Tap on Location Services.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Tap on Never.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Facebook will not have any location tracking access, not for storing your location history while you use the app, not to let friends nearby know where you are. It’s total darkness as far as location tracking is concerned.

How to stop Facebook from saving your location history

Maybe you like the check-in and Friends Nearby features of Facebook and don’t mind sharing some of your location data with the company in exchange for those features. You can leave location tracking on (or set it to Only While Using the App) and turn off the history saving part. This is where data miners tend to get the most useful information from you.

  1. Open the Facebook app on your iPhone or iPad.
  2. Tap the More tab in the bottom right corner of the screen.

Scroll down and tap Settings.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Turn off the Location History switch.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

How to delete your location history from Facebook on iPhone and iPad

If Location History has ever been enabled on your iPhone, that history is stored with Facebook. You can delete your location history so that it’s no longer stored with Facebook.

  1. Open the Facebook app on your iPhone or iPad.
  2. Tap the More tab in the bottom right corner of the screen.
  3. Scroll down and tap Settings.
  4. Tap Activity Log.
  5. Tap Filter.
  6. Tap Location History.
  7. Tap Clear Location History.
  8. Tap Confirm.

This deletes all of your stored location histories. If you choose to keep location tracking on in any capacity, you’ll probably want to do this purge every once in a while.

How to stop sharing your location with nearby friends in Facebook on iPhone and iPad

If you like the check-in feature of Facebook’s location tracking, but don’t really want your friends to know that you’re nearby, you can turn off just this feature, while still allowing Facebook to track your location (and store it if you don’t want to disable Location History).

  1. Open the Facebook app on your iPhone or iPad.
  2. Tap the More tab in the bottom right corner of the screen.

Scroll down and tap Settings.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Tap Location.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Turn off the Nearby Friends switch.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Any location tracking questions?

Do you have any questions about Facebook’s location tracking features and how to disable them? Let me know and I’ll do some research.

Facebook is one of my most used apps on my iPhone. And ever since they forced me to download their separate Messenger application, both apps are part of my daily routine. Facebook, a company very familiar with privacy issues and missteps, cloaks its motives in “providing the best experience” for its users.

This usually means default settings that help the company track your location for ads or store information about what links you click on. The Messenger application has a default setting that tracks your every location and I’ll show you how to disable it.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Aran Khanna, a Harvard Computer Science and Mathematics major wrote a recent post explaining how accurate Facebook Messenger is at pinpointing your location.

Moreover, it just as easy for one of your friends to use that information themselves for some serious stalking. Khanna created a Chrome Extension called Marauders Map which will allow you to track your friends whereabouts. Facebook is most likely working on a patch to prevent such easy access to user locations, but if it has got you worried, then follow the instructions below to disable Facebook Messenger’s Location tracking.

Disable Facebook Messenger’s Location Tracking

On your iOS device head over to Settings -> Privacy -> Location Services and switch Messenger to Never. You can also disable the location tracking by going to Settings -> Messenger and switch location to Never.How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Social applications like Messenger have become a huge part of our daily lives. While these applications only exist because of our massive usage rates, it is up to us to make sure that we keep them in check. Facebook isn’t the only company that tracks your location, so make sure to check your privacy settings from time to time.

Is this a big deal, or should folks be used to disabling features like this on their own? Let us know your thoughts in the comments section.

Even with the location marker – in the text filed – toggled off in Facebook’s Messenger app for iOS or Android, the app still logs your location data on a map which is constantly uploaded to Facebook’s servers, leaving it open for prying eyes. What if you want to turn off location sharing completely? You can, and we’ll show you how to do just that.

There was a time when location tracking, courtesy of our smartphones, was something to be excited about, but as it stands today this feature has become increasingly intrusive and a major privacy concern – sometimes through fault of our own, but often because key information is kept from us by some app makers, and Facebook Messenger happens to be just one of those.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

We recently covered news regarding a Chrome extension called Marauders Map which pretty much proves how Facebook keeps a log of all your location history that it has stored from your messages, even if you think that your location is not being shared at all – recall the location marker bit we mentioned earlier. As I said, most of us have already left a huge footprint of our location history out there, but you have to begin from somewhere and put an end to these evil designs – or schemes, depending what you would like to call them.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

The best and most effective way to remove any chances of you ever stumbling into revealing your location through the Messenger app is to simply disable it on the system level for good, well, until you decide to revert back to sharing your travels.

Android

Step 1: To begin, simply launch the Messenger app on your phone or tablet.

Step 2: Hit the ‘Settings’ tab and simply disable the Location settings by tapping on it.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Step 1: To begin, launch the Settings app on your iPhone or iPad from your home screen.

Step 2: Navigate to Privacy > Location Services.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Step 3: Scroll below to look for the ‘Messenger’ app and tap it.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Step 4: Now, select ‘Never’ as the option and exit the Settings app.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

With the location option disabled on both Android and iOS, the Messenger app will not log your location henceforth. This also means that you won’t be able to show off to your friends from where you’re actually sending messages from. But you already knew that didn’t you?

You can follow us on Twitter, add us to your circle on Google+ or like our Facebook page to keep yourself updated on all the latest from Microsoft, Google, Apple and the web.

If this feature creeps you out a little bit, you're not alone

  • Auburn University
  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email

Maria Teijeiro / Getty Images

  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email
  • Facebook
  • Pinterest
  • Twitter
  • Snapchat
  • Instagram
  • YouTube
  • Online Dating

Facebook Places is a geolocational tool that lets users share their favorite local hotspots. People can use it to find new restaurants, businesses, and more. If you don’t like Facebook sharing your location information with others though, you can turn this feature off (sort of). Here are a few things you can do to remove your location data from the Facebook Places map.

Remove Geotags From Your Pictures Before You Upload Them to Facebook

To ensure future pictures posted to Facebook and other social media sites don’t reveal your location information, you should make sure the geotag information is never recorded in the first place. Most of the time this is done by turning off the location services setting on your smartphone’s camera application so the geotag information doesn’t get recorded in the picture’s ​EXIF metadata. There are also apps that help strip our the geolocation information of pictures you’ve already taken. You might want to try deGeo (iPhone) or Photo Privacy Editor (Android) to remove the geotag info from your photos before uploading them to social media sites.

Disable Location Services for Facebook on Your Mobile Phone/Device

When you first installed Facebook on your mobile phone, it probably asked for permission to use the device's location services so it could let you "check-in" at different locations and tag photos with location information. If you don't want Facebook knowing where you're posting something from, you should revoke this permission in your phone's location services settings area.

Enable the Facebook Tag Review Feature

Facebook recently made an attempt to go from a super-granular privacy settings structure to an ultra-simple one. You cannot selectively prevent people from tagging you at a location, but you can turn on the tag review feature, which allows you to review anything you've been tagged in, whether it's a picture or a location check-in. You can decide whether tags get posted before the photo or check-in is posted, but only if you have the tag review feature enabled.

How To Enable the Facebook Tag Review Feature

After this setting is enabled, any post that you are tagged in, whether it's a photo, location check-in, etc, will have to gain your digital stamp of approval before it's posted to your timeline. This will effectively prevent anyone from posting your location without your express permission.

Log into Facebook and go into the settings.

Select Timeline and Tagging.

Under the section Review posts you're tagged in before the post appears on your timeline? select the arrow on the drop-down menu and choose Enabled instead of Disabled.

This only controls what's allowed on your timeline. Posts you're tagged in still appear in search, News Feed, and other places on Facebook.

Select Close.

Limit Who Can See Your Posts on Facebook

Facebook's privacy settings let you limit the visibility of future posts (such as ones with geotags in them). You can choose "Friends," "Specific Friends," "Only Me," "Custom," or "Everyone." We advise against choosing "Everyone" unless you want the whole world knowing where you are and where you've been.

This option applies to all future posts. Individual posts can be changed as they're created or after they're made, in case you want to make something more public or private later on. You can also use the "Limit Past Posts" option to change all of your old posts that might've been set to "Everyone" or "Friends of Friends" to "Friends Only."

It’s a good idea to check your Facebook privacy settings about once a month as the company seems to make sweeping changes on a regular basis that could affect the settings you have in place.

Facebook Messenger sends your current location to message recipients by default. Here’s how to turn it off.

Contributing Writer, ZDNet

Jason Cipriani is based out of beautiful Colorado and has been covering mobile technology news and reviewing the latest gadgets for the last six years. His work can also be found on sister site CNET in the How To section, as well as across several more online publications.

Facebook Messenger on your iPhone or Android will send message recipients your location by default. This can be a huge privacy concern for some users. Luckily, you’re only a few taps away from preventing Facebook Messenger from sharing your location.

As you saw in the video, for iOS users you will need to open Settings > Location Services and turn location off for Facebook Messenger.

For Android users, you can disable location in the Facebook Messenger app itself. Tap on the menu icon > Settings > Location Services and uncheck the box that enables location services for the app.

By disabling location sharing for the entire app, you don’t have to remember to turn off location sharing each time you enter a conversation. If you want to block Facebook from using your location altogether, make sure you check out Sharon Vaknin’s post . Of course, if you change your mind down the road and want to start sharing your location with your contacts, you can follow the same process to enable sharing.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Facebook Messenger no longer automatically sends your location with every message.

Facebook no longer automatically tracks and shares your location data within its Messenger app.

You now have to go through a series of steps in order to send your location to someone.

“Sending a location is completely optional,” Stan Chudnovsky, Facebook’s head of product for Messenger, said in a blog post published Thursday.

To share where you are, tap on the “More” button on the bottom right of a chat window, then select “Location.” You can choose to share a map of where you are, or an exact location (restaurant, theater, etc.) by tapping “Send.”

Facebook ( FB ) uses Apple ( AAPL ) Maps for iOS devices, and Nokia HERE for Android devices.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

In the new location sharing tool, you can select a place on the map to share.

Chudnovsky added that Messenger does not receive location information about you at all, unless you enable location services on your phone for the app.

In addition, Messenger only receives data about where you are if you choose to select and share a location on the map. The app does not gather location data in the background, and does not ask for new permissions for your information.

If you want to be safe, open the Settings tab within the Android app and disable location completely. Though the default is “off” on an iPhone, you can also disable location tracking in the iOS Messenger app by going into Settings>Privacy>Location>Services, and set the option to “Never.”

You should also look through your chat threads to see if location tracking is on for each conversation.

Facebook started rolling out the update Thursday.

Previously, the app tracked and attached geographic information for all messages within a conversation by default. The new change makes it possible for you to send your location only when you want to, on a message by message basis.

Many people were not aware of the default location tracking setting until last week, when a Harvard computer science student launched a Chrome extension that can plot Messenger location data on a map.

The app made it possible to pinpoint the sender’s location to less than a meter, according to Aran Khanna’s Medium blog post.

The other problem, he adds, is the subtle placement of the feature within the app, which made it easy for people to forget they’re sharing where they’re located.

“It seems so harmless to attach a location with a single message, but the problem is over time the information from these messages adds up,” Khanna writes.

There are some benefits to sharing location. If you’re trying to find your way to a friend’s birthday party, this feature eliminates the hassle of switching between apps to see where you are as you’re chatting.

Thursday’s change also allows you to find and share places even if you’re not there, which is a nice benefit of the tool.

It also allows Facebook to build more location-based features into Messenger, such as business reviews.

FACEBOOK has been tracking your location and you probably didn't even realise it.

You may notice that after going to that new burger joint down the road , you start getting bombarded with Facebook notices about the restaurant you've just visited.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Or you realise that all of your suggested friends on Facebook are people who you have only just met and you don’t share any mutual friends with them.

To find out, we spoke to the Open Rights Group, which campaigns to protect the rights to privacy and free speech online.

MOST READ IN TECH AND SCIENCE

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Humans may be ALIENS as we may have come from planet trillions of miles away

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Urgent WhatsApp warning as all 2BILLION users told to delete text immediately

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Netflix to be CHEAPER with Virgin Media's new streaming TV box

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Your iPhone photos app has THREE big secrets – & you're hiding photos wrong

Ed Johnson-Williams, who specialises in digital security, told The Sun Online that Facebook tracks your location to help advertisers connect to people who are in a specific area.

Smartphone phones can discover your whereabouts by working out your position in relation to mobile masts.

He said: “They also have GPS inside the phone and that makes data available to apps. It is sensitive data a lot of the time and people should be aware of the tracking.”

How to stop Facebook from tracking you for iPhone users

  • Open the Facebook app on your iPhone
  • Tap on “More” in the bottom-right corner of your navigation
  • Select “Account Settings
  • Select “Location
  • Finally, tap on the “Off” option for “Location History

For example, it's claimed that Facebook could know your location even when you are not using the app.

Johnson-Williams added: “I would not be surprised if they were doing that. You can easily check into a place and when Facebook asks for your permission to use your location you end up giving it other permissions as well.”

The Facebook Messenger app already asks you if you want to use your location in the background.

To prevent your location from being tracked any longer you can makes changes in your phone's settings, the app settings or by going through specific prompts within the Facebook app itself.

But in order to just stop Facebook from tracking your location you should make changes within the app itself.

How to stop Facebook from tracking you for Android users

  • Open the Facebook app on your Android
  • Tap on the Menu icon (☰) on the top right-hand corner
  • Select “Account Settings
  • Select “Location
  • Disable “Location History
  • Select “Location Services
  • Finally, tap on the “Off” option

Johnson-Williams said: “I don’t think people should be forced to dive deep into their settings to turn off their location.”

We pay for your stories! Do you have a story for The Sun Online news team? Email us at [email protected] or call 0207 782 4368

More from The Sun

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

SCRAP-CHAT

Urgent WhatsApp warning as all 2BILLION users told to delete text immediately

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

MISS OUT

Spain holiday warning as thousands of passengers miss their flights

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

I work at a soft play – parents all say the same annoying things

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

HELEN'S HEARTBREAK

Countryfile's Helen Skelton announces split from husband Richie Myler

Follow The Sun

Services

©News Group Newspapers Limited in England No. 679215 Registered office: 1 London Bridge Street, London, SE1 9GF. “The Sun”, “Sun”, “Sun Online” are registered trademarks or trade names of News Group Newspapers Limited. This service is provided on News Group Newspapers’ Limited’s Standard Terms and Conditions in accordance with our Privacy & Cookie Policy. To inquire about a licence to reproduce material, visit our Syndication site. View our online Press Pack. For other inquiries, Contact Us. To see all content on The Sun, please use the Site Map. The Sun website is regulated by the Independent Press Standards Organisation (IPSO)

Your location matters a lot in the internet world and it’s not advisable to turn it on On when surfing the net even when what you are doing is legal.

As I said in my previous article that facebook is becoming annoying by interfering in its users’ privacy, you people think that I was joking.

Imagine Facebook tracking my location? what did they want to know about my location or are they paying me a visit? Seriously it’s not fair.

If it is that whenever the track my location, they pay me hmmm, it would have been better. But this one that is not giving out any joy at all, I would say its annoying.

So if you are facing challenges of turning off your location from facebook, I will show you how to do that without stress. Follow this post

How to Turn Off Facebook Location

Irrespective of the fact that Facebook is accessible on two main platforms that are either on the Web or the APP, I will like to start by firstly showing you the general steps. Let’s started

  • Login to your Facebook Account Using the Facebook AppOpen the Facebook app and then click the menu button in the upper right corner.
  • Click Settings & Privacy and then tap Settings.
  • Scroll down and tap Location.
  • Click on Location Access and then Location Services.
  • Click Deny in the window that will show up.

Yes, that’s just that. I hope it’s really simple?

Immediately after you’ve clicked on DENY, you can move out from the setting page and start using your Facebook application without location tracking.

How to Off Location When Using Facebook Application

  1. Open your Facebook App (make sure your account is login)
  2. Click on the menu button at the top right hand of the page
  3. Scroll down and click on “Account settings”
  4. Scroll down and click on “Location”
  5. On the pop-up page, at the bottom of the page, you will see that “Location services” is on.
  6. Tap on it and you will be re-routed to where you can turn off your phone location, TURN IT OFF.

How to Off Location When Using Facebook on Web

  1. Log in to Facebook with your own details
  2. Go to the post that shows your location
  3. On the top upper right hand of the page, click on the drop-down.
  4. On the drop-down menu, select “Change Location”
  5. On the pop-up, click on “X” in the top right corner
  6. Click on “OK”

Have any questions on this? Then drop it to us on the comment section and we’ll reply you ASAP, Do well to share this post to your FAFS by using any of the button below – Facebook, Twitter, WhatsApp, Google+

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Did you know Facebook Messenger’s default setting shows precisely where you are when you send a message?

Aran Khanna, an incoming Facebook intern, discovered he’d been unintentionally sending his exact locations — as in, down to the meter — to his friends every time he messaged them. In most cases, they were sending their locations back.

The application, if GPS is turned on, records your latitude and longitude coordinates down to the fifth decimal place, meaning practically arm’s length from wherever the message was sent.

Khanna, using a piece of code he developed, was able to use the GPS data from messages to build a map of recent location history. He was able to figure out where people lived, worked and spent their free time by the frequency with which each location showed up on the map.

What’s more, Khanna discovered he didn’t even need to be friends with the people who sent him messages to see where they were located, as long as they had the messenger GPS function turned on.

This might just sound like a weird way for Facebook to connect people. But location tracking makes users vulnerable to anyone with malicious intent. Leaving an extremely accurate, real-time location on a popular social network can be a safety concern, especially if you don’t realize you’re being tracked.

How to turn it off: You can disable the function on your iPhone following this path: Settings ? Location Services ? "Turn location off for Facebook Messenger."

For Android, it’s the same thing; just uncheck the location-services box. You’ll know if your location is still on if the GPS arrow on your Facebook Messenger box is a bright, Facebook blue.

Khanna said Facebook is "fixing this issue," which is a vague thing to say about a clearly deliberate function built into the No. 1 free app in the iTunes store: Facebook Messenger is downloaded more than YouTube, Instagram and even the Facebook app itself. There’s a big difference between a flub that causes iPhones to crash and a feature made to keep close track of people who might not want to be tracked.

Justin Pot
How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)Justin Pot
Writer

Justin Pot has been writing about technology for over a decade, with work appearing in Digital Trends, The Next Web, Lifehacker, MakeUseOf, and the Zapier Blog. He also runs the Hillsboro Signal, a volunteer-driven local news outlet he founded. Read more.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Facebook’s mobile apps track your location constantly, unless you disable that feature. You can see this tracking for yourself, too.

Just head to facebook.com/location_history/view and you’ll see a list of all the places you’ve been, complete with a map, as seen above. There’s a good chance you don’t realize how much you share your location history, because hardly anyone does. Reviewing maps like these are a good reminder of how closely you’re being watched.

It also might be good motivation to turn off location sharing entirely. You can do that on your mobile device by heading to Settings > Account Settings > Location in the Facebook app. Even better: uninstall the Facebook app and just use the mobile site instead. It’s basically the same experience, but without giving Facebook access to things like your phone’s location services. It also cuts back on notifications, which is a huge plus.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Just don’t think that Facebook is the only company being creepy here. Google Maps is also tracking your every move, and you can view your entire history here.

  • › Samsung T7 Shield Review: The Best Portable SSD, Now Rugged
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Available Now
  • › Every Microsoft Windows Logo From 1985 to 2022
  • › What Does “Touch Grass” Mean?
  • › The 5 Most Ridiculously Expensive Phones of All Time
  • › Roborock Q5+ Review: A Solid Self-Emptying Robot Vacuum

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on) Justin Pot
Justin Pot has been writing about technology for over a decade, with work appearing in Digital Trends, The Next Web, Lifehacker, MakeUseOf, and the Zapier Blog. He also runs the Hillsboro Signal, a volunteer-driven local news outlet he founded.
Read Full Bio »

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Nearby Friends on Facebook shows you who is close to your location at any time. Of course, it only shows those on your list who has enabled this feature. You can turn off or on Facebook’s Nearby Friends according to your needs. Sometimes, it can be pretty handy, such as at an event when you want to find friends. But it is also a privacy concern and drains your iPhone battery faster. So let’s see how to control it.

How to Turn Facebook Nearby Friends ON or OFF on iPhone

  1. Open the Facebook app on your iPhone
  2. Tap on the menu from the bottom right
  3. Tap on Nearby Friends or You may need to tap on See More and then tap on Nearby Friends.How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)
  4. Tap on the three-dots icon and then tap on Settings.How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)
  5. Turn OFF or ON the toggle for Nearby Friends.How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

For more privacy, you can disable location tracking for Facebook.

How to Stop Facebook from Tracking your Location

  1. Open the Facebook app on your iPhone → Tap on the menu
  2. Tap on Nearby Friends.How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)
  3. Tap on the three-dots icon. Then, tap on Settings.How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)
  4. Tap on Location Settings.
  5. Turn off the toggle for Location history.How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

You can also disable the Facebook app from accessing your location from iPhone settings.

How to Turn Off Facebook Location Tracking on iPhone

  1. Open the Settings app on your iPhone → PrivacyLocation Services.How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)
  2. Tap on Facebook From here, choose Never.How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Signing off…

This is how you can control Facebook Nearby Friends settings. Facebook has been in the news regularly due to privacy and user data breaches. The fact is most social media companies function almost the same way. But still, for a change, you may like to check out our list of best social media apps.

Read More:

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

iGeeksBlog has affiliate and sponsored partnerships. We may earn commissions on purchases made using our links. However, this doesn’t affect the recommendations our writers make. You can read more about our review and editorial process here.

Originally published on CNN Money on June 4, 2015 By Hope King

Facebook no longer automatically tracks and shares your location data within its Messenger app.
You now have to go through a series of steps in order to send your location to someone.
“Sending a location is completely optional,” Stan Chudnovsky, Facebook’s head of product for Messenger, said in a blog post published Thursday.
To share where you are, tap on the “More” button on the bottom right of a chat window, then select “Location.” You can choose to share a map of where you are, or an exact location (restaurant, theater, etc.) by tapping “Send.”
Facebook (FB, Tech30) uses Apple (AAPL, Tech30) Maps for iOS devices, and Nokia HERE for Android devices.
Chudnovsky added that Messenger does not receive location information about you at all, unless you enable location services on your phone for the app.
In addition, Messenger only receives data about where you are if you choose to select and share a location on the map. The app does not gather location data in the background, and does not ask for new permissions for your information.
If you want to be safe, open the Settings tab within the Android app and disable location completely. Though the default is “off” on an iPhone, you can also disable location tracking in the iOS Messenger app by going into Settings>Privacy>Location>Services, and set the option to “Never.”
You should also look through your chat threads to see if location tracking is on for each conversation.
Facebook started rolling out the update Thursday.
Previously, the app tracked and attached geographic information for all messages within a conversation by default. The new change makes it possible for you to send your location only when you want to, on a message by message basis.
Many people were not aware of the default location tracking setting until last week, when a Harvard computer science student launched a Chrome extension that can plot Messenger location data on a map.
The app made it possible to pinpoint the sender’s location to less than a meter, according to Aran Khanna’s Medium blog post.
The other problem, he adds, is the subtle placement of the feature within the app, which made it easy for people to forget they’re sharing where they’re located.
“It seems so harmless to attach a location with a single message, but the problem is over time the information from these messages adds up,” Khanna writes.
There are some benefits to sharing location. If you’re trying to find your way to a friend’s birthday party, this feature eliminates the hassle of switching between apps to see where you are as you’re chatting.
Thursday’s change also allows you to find and share places even if you’re not there, which is a nice benefit of the tool.
It also allows Facebook to build more location-based features into Messenger, such as business reviews.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

If you’ve ever felt like Facebook always knows where you’ve been in spite of adjusting settings in its mobile apps to stop the app from accessing your location, then you’re not the only one. Facebook does indeed track your location when you’re using its apps, and it’s all done to serve targeted ads to users. Even without access to your accurate location data from the smartphone, Facebook uses information from your browsing habits, including IP address, Wi-Fi network, and Bluetooth to pinpoint your whereabouts and place relevant ads inside its apps. And all of this happens as Facebook continues to give users the impression they can control whether or not they share location data with Facebook.

University of Southern California computer science professor Aleksandra Korolova explained how Facebook does it in great detail on Medium. Even though the Location Services setting was turned to “Never” in the iPhone Facebook app, and Location History was cleared and turned off, Facebook still showed Korolova ads that matched her location.

Moreover, I have noticed that whenever I travel for work or pleasure, Facebook continues to keep track of my location and use it for advertising: a trip to Glacier National Park resulted in an ad for activities in Whitefish, Montana, a trip to Cambridge, MA — in an ad for a business there, and a visit to Herzeliya, Israel — in an ad for a business there.

She says Facebook can’t glean information about her from her other interactions with Facebook or its other apps, such as WhatsApp, Instagram, or Facebook Messenger. Location tracking is turned off for all ads and she doesn’t share photos with location data on Facebook. But the location-related ads keep popping up.

The report explains that Facebook isn’t really forthcoming about its location tracking, nor is it willing to offer users controls that would prevent the social network from using IP addresses or Wi-Fi data to locate users.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)Image source: Medium

Some people may argue that it’s all standard operating procedure for companies that offer online services for “free,” with ads showing in the background of everything you do. And Facebook does need to make money to keep providing its services. Also, many Internet users have no problem with Facebook swiping their location data for ads. But there may be cases where people could abuse this feature, since Facebook allows ad targeting down to a very small geographic area, like a house (as seen in the screenshot above). The professor also offers the following example:

This means anyone in the world can create an ad campaign to reach people who have recently visited a particular location, such as a place of worship or an abortion clinic. And since individuals cannot meaningfully stop Facebook from inferring or using their location for advertising, they also cannot avoid such ads. Imagine opening Facebook during a visit to an abortion clinic to communicate with friends for support in a difficult decision, and instead, seeing an ad campaign for cute baby clothes created by anyone who wants to target women making this difficult decision.

Facebook could change its location-tracking policies to actually give users control over the data they choose to share in the future if it wanted to. Or lawmakers in certain markets may force it to address these issues. But if you’re concerned about Facebook tracking your location, the only thing you can do right now is to remove all Facebook apps from your phone and stop using it altogether. Of course, that’s not necessarily a viable option for specific apps, especially chat apps like WhatsApp and Instagram. The latter already displays ads, while the former is going to deliver advertising to users next year.

Facebook confirmed to Gizmodo that it’s tracking users by collecting IP addresses as well as data from check-ins and other content. And users can’t turn the feature off:

Facebook does not use WiFi data to determine your location for ads if you have Location Services turned off. We do use IP and other information such as check-ins and current city from your profile. We explain this to people, including in our Privacy Basics site and on the About Facebook Ads site.

There is no way for people to opt out of using location for ads entirely. We use city and zip level location which we collect from IP addresses and other information such as check-ins and current city from your profile to ensure we are providing people with a good service—from ensuring they see Facebook in the right language, to making sure that they are shown nearby events and ads for businesses that are local to them.

No, the Off-Facebook Activity tracking rumor is not a hoax. We’ll show you how to keep the social media platform from tracking your web browsing.

Katie is a Writer at CNET, covering all things how-to. When she’s not writing, she enjoys playing in golf scrambles, practicing yoga and spending time on the lake.

If you haven’t been using the Off-Facebook Activity privacy feature, now’s the time to start. The tool, introduced by Facebook in 2019, lets you see and control data that apps and websites share with the platform — and monitor the kind of information third-party apps can access.

With the privacy feature, you can clear the history of apps and websites that have shared your data. You can also toggle off Future Off-Facebook Activity, which tells Facebook to disconnect any information the company has shared from your account. Or you can selectively choose which companies you want to stop sharing your activity, and it’ll stop showing those targeted ads.

Here’s how to get a better grip on your Facebook privacy.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Enlarge Image

The Facebook tool allows you to control which sites share your information.

How to manage what sites share with Facebook using the Off-Facebook Activity tool

Using Facebook’s business tools, you can see what information apps and websites have sent to the company. From there, you can clear the information from your account and turn off future “off-Facebook activity” tracking from your account. You’ll be able to control this for all apps and websites so they’ll no longer be able to share your search activity with Facebook.

To get started, go to Settings & Privacy > Settings > Your Facebook Information > Off-Facebook Activity. From there, you can manage your Off-Facebook Activity, clear all history and turn off Future Off-Facebook Activity for your account.

What happens when you turn off Off-Facebook Activity

Once you clear the activity managed by the tool, Facebook will remove your identifying information that the apps and websites share. That means Facebook won’t know which websites you visited or what you looked at, so you won’t see targeted ads from those sites.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Turn off your activity.

What else you can do to improve your privacy on Facebook

If you’d like to control which ads you see (or don’t) on Facebook, go to your Settings on your phone or desktop and select Ad Preferences.

Under Advertisers and Businesses, you can see which advertisers have run ads using a list uploaded to Facebook containing your information. If you select a company and choose Don’t Allow, you won’t see ads from advertisers when they use a list from that company.

You can also go to Ad Settings and turn off ads based on data from partners, ads based on your activity on Facebook Company Products that you see elsewhere and ads that include your social media actions. However, doing this won’t delete any data and you’ll still see the same number of ads as before. The Off-Facebook Activity feature is the best way to remove your data.

If you’re an iPhone user, a feature introduced in iOS 14.5 called App Tracking Transparency requires you to give permission to apps including Facebook before they can use your data for targeted ads. (Here’s how to use App Tracking Transparency in iOS 14.5 .)

NEW YORK, New York — If you use Facebook Messenger on an Android phone you might want to check your settings. The app tracks and sends your location to everyone you chat with — by default.

You can turn off location tracking and sharing by clicking the compass icon above the Like button in your chat threads. If the icon is blue, the feature is on.

A Facebook spokesman told CNNMoney the app only tracks you if the app is open, and if you’re in a specific conversation thread.

He said the app does not track location if Messenger is running in the background.

If you want to be safe, open the Settings tab within the Android app and disable location completely. Though the default is “off” on an iPhone, you can also disable location tracking in iOS by going into Settings>Privacy>Location>Services, and set the option to “Never.”

Many people were not aware of the default setting until this week, when a Harvard computer science student launched a Chrome extension that can plot Messenger location data on a map.

“The latitude and longitude coordinates of the message locations have more than 5 decimal places of precision, making it possible to pinpoint the sender’s location to less than a meter,” Aran Khanna wrote on his Medium blog.

The other problem, he adds, is the subtle placement of the feature within the app, making it easy for people to forget they’re sharing where they are.

“It seems so harmless to attach a location with a single message, but the problem is over time the information from these messages adds up,” Khanna writes.

The Facebook spokesman told CNNMoney the company has been aware of this concern and a fix is coming.

“We’ve been listening to people’s feedback and for the last few months have been working hard to improve this experience,” he said. “We will be rolling out improvements very soon.”

Facebook is taking lessons from its debacle over WhatsApp privacy changes in a bid to prevent millions of its users opting out of allowing the company to track their interests across the internet.

WhatsApp, which is owned by Facebook, was forced to delay an update to its privacy policy last month when an in-app notification informed users that some data from the communications app would be shared with Facebook. It raised concerns about the privacy of chat messages and profile data, and led users to shift in droves to other encrypted messaging apps such as Signal.

Now a looming showdown with Apple over data tracking has prompted Facebook onto the front foot.

What will users see?

Some time in the next few months, iPhone users will be greeted by a message – not from Facebook, but from Apple – asking them if they will allow the Facebook app to collect their data. If users refuse, Apple will prevent Facebook from doing so.

A similar message from Apple will pop up, related to any app that collects data on users for advertising purposes.

Facebook says it will preempt the change by rolling out a pop-up screen over the coming weeks and months, making a plea to users to stay opted in.

“Agreeing to these prompts doesn’t result in Facebook collecting new types of data; it just means that Facebook can continue to give people better experiences,” a Facebook spokeswoman said.

What sort of data are we talking about?

It’s almost a given that when you shop online for shoes, you’ll suddenly find yourself served with ads for shoes across a bunch of other websites, or in your Facebook feed. If you’ve been in a physical store, you might see a related ad pop up in one of your apps later on.

The ability of websites to track you across the internet might creep you out, but companies know exactly where to pitch their advertising through data collected about everything from places you’ve visited to health information.

What is Apple doing?

Apple has been slowly pushing back on how much data apps can collect by giving users the option to turn off location tracking, and letting people know if an app is tracking their location while running in the background.

“Right now, users may not know whether the apps they use to pass the time, to check in with their friends, or to find a place to eat, may in fact be passing on information about the photos they’ve taken, the people in their contact list, or location data that reflects where they eat, sleep or pray,” Apple CEO, Tim Cook, said late last month at the Computers, Privacy and Data Protection conference.

Late last year, it forced app providers in iOS to spell out what data they collect through “nutrition labels” in the App Store.

The label showing exactly how much Facebook Messenger collects, along with Facebook’s announcement that it was planning to use data from WhatsApp to advertise products to users, led to the exodus of users to encrypted apps such as Signal.

The next step for Apple is to allow users to opt out of data collection entirely. In an update to iOS14 to be rolled out in the next few months, Apple will allow users to control what data each app collects and switch it on and off at will.

What is Facebook’s response?

The move has been broadly welcomed by privacy groups, but Facebook sees Apple’s new privacy controls as a direct assault on its business.

Here’s a look at three ways social media apps can be used to track your every move.

Facebook tracks the location of all of your messages.

While it’s pretty well known that Facebook’s Messenger app uses location data, it’s not so well known just how that location data can be used.

But thanks to a new Google Chrome extension called Marauder’s Map we now know that you can get some pretty creepy location data from the messaging app.

The extension, which is named after the magical map from “Harry Potter,” basically reveals a person’s exact location on a map. The extension is able to work because Facebook Messenger ties a user’s location data to a message if their location settings are enabled. The extension then maps out the person’s location based on where they send each messages.

However, it this only works if the person you are messaging has location data for the app turned on.

If that wasn’t creepy enough, the extension even allows you to view a user’s location even if you are not friends with them, but are using the app to communicate. For example, if you are in a group chat with someone, but aren’t their friend on Facebook, you can still view their whereabouts if they have location data turned on for the app.

It should also be noted that if someone you are messaging has their location data turned on, you can also see almost exactly where they are located by simply clicking on the icon next to the time you sent the message.

If you want to turn location sharing for Facebook Messenger off so that data isn’t being shared, go to “Settings” on your smartphone, select “Privacy”, then select “Location Services.” Once you are in “Location Services”, select Facebook Messenger and turn off location sharing.

Instagram tracks your photos even if you don’t geotag

While the picture sharing app does give users the option to name the location of where they are uploading an image, it also geotags an uploaded pic regardless if the user has selected the “Add to Photo Map” function.

This means that anybody can view the almost exact location of where an image was posted on a map even if the user doesn’t select the “Name This Location” feature.

This is scary because people tend to upload the most images from their home or other places they frequent a lot, like work. So if a user’s profile is public and their photo map is turned on, anybody can see the exact location of where they are posting. And even if a person’s profile is private, but the photo map is enabled, their friends can see all of the location data for each image.

To check or change your Instagram location settings, you will have to again change them under the privacy settings in your smartphone. But if you still want to geotag locations sometimes, you will need to keep the location setting turned on, but disable the “Add to Photo Map” feature in Instagram.

If you want to remove geotags for images that have already been saved to your map, you will need to tap the geotag icon on your instagram profile and select the set of images on the map that you wish to delete.

Swarm broadcasts your location even if you don’t check in

Even people who opt to share their location on social media may be surprised by just how tricky it is to disappear.

For example, Foursquare’s check-in app Swarm broadcasts users’ almost exact location even if they have not selected a specific location for check-in.

If a user has the ‘Neighborhood Sharing’ feature is turned on in the app, their location down to the cross streets can be viewed by simply tapping the teardrop icon under their profile image.

While a Swarm user might think they are being discreet by just sharing the neighborhood they are in, they are actually sharing a pinpoint of their location.

To stop sharing your exact location on Swarm without checking in, users must disable the ‘Neighborhood Sharing’ function.

The ability to track and locate an individual is no longer as difficult as it appears in the movies. Wiretaps and bugs can be replaced with something as simple as a smartphone – to a certain extent. We live in such a digital age that it has become easier to pinpoint someone’s location using nothing more than a chat app.

Do you need to relay information that can’t be shared over the phone? Just hop on Facebook Messenger to pinpoint their location so you can make the trip in person.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

So long as you and the “target” both use Facebook Messenger, location tracking is possible. This means that any parent who thinks their child may be sneaking off to a party instead of a study group, can use Facebook Messenger to “check in” and determine their whereabouts.

Now just imagine that you’re on the other end of this scenario. Someone could be tracking your location right now and you wouldn’t know it. Creepy, huh?

The Facebook Messenger app actually poses more of a risk than you might imagine. This is especially true for those who have hundreds of friends, not all of which are people you may have ever actually met. We probably put way too much of ourselves on social media, providing more information than we think. Understanding how you can track others may enlighten you on how easy it can be for someone to do the same to you.

Tracking Location Using Facebook Messenger

You don’t even need to be tech-savvy in order to track someone using Messenger. It doesn’t take an elite-level hacker to get on Facebook and see someone has shared their location.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Location Sharing

This particular feature is a more consensual approach to tracking. Facebook Messenger makes it easier for people who want to meet up by allowing friends to share their location.

  • You or someone on your friends list can open up a chat dialog through Facebook Messenger, by tapping on the four dots found at the bottom left portion of your screen.
  • Click Location.
  • From there, just select Share Live Location and your friend will get to see your current location. They in turn can share their location with you.

Location Tags and #Hashtags

Search for a location tag of someone on your friends list and their location is all but a few clicks away. The most common way in which to discover a location tag is by checking Facebook Stories.

  • If a location tag has been left on one of the images, you can just tap on it, select show location and have it pulled up on your smartphone screen.
  • Tap on the tag text and you will be redirected to Google Maps, which will display the target’s location.

It’s not the most reliable method of discovery seeing as the location is not necessarily current, but when the image was originally published. There is also the problem of the location tag providing an incorrect location as the publisher can post any location they choose. But it’s still worth a shot.

Third-Party Apps

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Here’s where location tracking starts to become less consensual and more privacy invasive. Although there are applications of location tracking that could be beneficial in a positive way, more often than not, this method has ‘cybercriminal’ written all over it.

Using a free online service like IPLogger can help you to find the exact location of a friend as of the time a post was made.

  • All you’d need to do is go to the website and choose a tracking option from the list.
  • Enter the URL of the site you’re tracking the location from and copy the provided IPLogger code.
  • From here, it’s all about getting your friend to click the generated URL, which you can send through Facebook Messenger. Once this happens, you’ll be able to use a second generated URL that enables you to view the location statistics directly from your browser.

The Nearby Friends Feature

This feature requires that you have the actual Facebook app installed. You can then enable it by going into the More Options menu and selecting Nearby Friends. Then just tap the option to turn it on.

You will now be able to see all of your other friends who are currently using the feature. Each will be listed by location, showing their physical distance between you. The closest friends will be shown first and will be accompanied by a Facebook Messenger button which you can use to open up a chat with them.

By simply using the feature, you’ve given consent to anyone who is also using the feature, and happens to be on your friends list, an open invitation to your location. This particular feature is primarily used for real-life meetups between friends and colleagues, but can also be used by non-friends you’ve mistakenly put on your friends list.

Conclusion

As you can tell, it doesn’t take much to locate anyone you want to, as long as they’re on your friends list. With a little bit of sharing on both ends, you can pinpoint any of your friend’s whereabouts, and they can do the same.

Be smart about who you share things with, especially online, as not everyone is as friendly as they may seem.

Former US Army IT communications specialist who began his online blogging career in 2016. Joseph has over 10 years experience in the IT industry as both an analyst and communications expert. He’s a night owl and an avid Red Bull consumer who spends most of his downtime enthralled by online gaming and website building. Read Joseph’s Full Bio

Nowadays, mobile tracking has become a child’s play. But tracking a switched off phone is a little difficult because when a phone is turned off it will stop communicating with nearby mobile towers. It can only be traced through its last location when it was switched on by calling the service provider or through Google services.

Moreover, there are various solutions such as the Find My Device app , IMEI tracking app, and more to track your phone that is switched off. However, all these solutions work only when your phone is switched on.

  1. Can I track a phone without a data connection?
    Yes, both iOS and Android phones can be tracked without a data connection. There are various mapping apps that have the ability to track the location of your phone even without the Internet connection. The GPS system in your smartphone works in two different ways. When your phone has a data connection or is connected to WiFi, it uses Assisted GPS or A-GPS. This uses the location of nearby cell phone towers and known Wi-Fi networks to roughly figure out where your device is.
  2. Can I track my iPhone if it is switched off?
    You can find your iPhone even if its battery is dead or if it is not connected to the Internet. The ‘Bluetooth location’ feature by Apple enables you to locate an offline iPhone, as long as it is switched on. Moreover, you can find a switched off iPhone by tracking its last known location using the ‘Find my’ app and iCloud.
  3. How can I track a cell phone using Google Maps ?
    You can trace your lost phone using the ‘Find My Device’ app and Google Maps. However, you must have installed the app before it is lost. While the phone is lost, you need to log in to your Google account that is linked to your lost phone using a computer or some other device. Pull up the Google Maps and click on the menu and further tap on the ‘Your Timeline’ option. Now, put in the date to check the location history of your lost device of that particular day.
  4. How do the police find stolen phones?
    Police can track a stolen phone using its IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) number or through GPS tracking.

You’re probably aware that Facebook collects a ton of information about you, but if you’re using the mobile Messenger app, that also means your location data as well. A new Chrome extension called Marauders Map lets anyone you’ve sent a message see that location information all at once.

By default, the mobile Messenger app logs your location in every message (you can tell if it’s on if the GPS icon next to the text box is blue). Even if you’re not actively choosing to send your location, it’s embedded in the message itself. Open up the Messenger app right now and tap on a message from someone else. There’s a good chance you’ll get a map with the location they send that message from. As the creator of the Marauders Map extension points out , the extension allows you to see all that collected information at once to make it easy to track everywhere they’ve been. Thankfully, it’s easy to turn off this creepy feature:

On Android:

  1. Tap the menu icon > Settings > Location Services
  2. Uncheck the box that enables location services

On iOS:

  1. Head into Settings > Privacy > Location Services
  2. Fine Facebook Messenger on the list and set the location option to off

That should prevent Messenger from sending your location with future messages, but won’t delete old location info, so keep that in mind. If someone used the extension mentioned above, they’d still be able to track your previous locations pretty easily.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Facial recognition is central to Facebook’s photo algorithm. It’s the reason you’re automatically tagged in photos that others post.

You can disable facial recognition on the desktop version of Facebook. Follow these steps:

  • Click the downward-pointing arrow in the top right of the screen.
  • Select Settings & Privacy, followed by Settings.
  • In the left column, click Face Recognition.
  • Tap “Do you want Facebook to be able to recognize you in photos and videos?” Select No in the drop-down menu to disable the setting.

4. Get rid of apps that track you off Facebook

Logging into other platforms or websites with your Facebook username gives those companies access to your data and may permit them to share your activity with Facebook.

This was one of the most significant issues behind the Cambridge Analytica scandal, leading to millions of people’s profiles being harvested. Tap or click here for more details on Cambridge Analytica.

Thankfully, Facebook has changed its stance on third-party applications and lets users disable all that tracking.

Disable third-party app tracking from your desktop:

  • Click the downward-pointing arrow in the top right of the screen.
  • Select Settings & Privacy, followed by Settings.
  • Tap Apps and Websites on the left menu.
  • Select Active.
  • Click on the box next to the app’s name to stop tracking you and click Remove. This will disable it from tracking you.

5. Enable two-factor authentication to lock out hackers

Two-factor authentication is one of the most robust ways to secure your profile from unwanted logins. When someone tries to break into an account with 2FA enabled, they can’t get in without a text-message code. Since the code goes to your phone, only you will be able to log in.

Activate 2FA from your desktop

  • Click the downward-pointing arrow in the top right of the screen.
  • Tap Settings & Privacy, followed by Settings.
  • Select Security and Login.
  • Scroll down to Two-Factor Authentication and tap Use two-factor authentication.
  • Enter your phone number and confirm the code in the text to complete the setup.

6. Stop Google from showing your Facebook account

Did you know your Facebook profile is indexed on Google? That means anyone looking up your name will be able to find your social media account, along with all the publicly visible data.

If you’re not comfortable with this, we don’t blame you. Google and people-search engines have a nasty way of making your private life public. Tap or click here to find out how to delete yourself from people-search sites.

With Facebook, at least, you can keep your profile out of searches. Follow these steps:

  • On your computer, open Facebook and click the downward-pointing arrow in the top right of the screen.
  • Tap Settings & Privacy, then Settings followed by Privacy.
  • Under “Do You Want Search Engines Outside of Facebook to Link to Your Profile?” click Edit.
  • Click the checkbox on the bottom to turn off the setting.

7. Limit the audience for your personal posts

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Not every friend on your list needs to know the intimate details of your life. This is even riskier when you factor in how many fake profiles are floating around. Tap or click to see how to spot the fakes. Limit the audience of your posts so only specific people can see them.

From your computer, follow these steps:

  • Open Settings & Privacy again, then Settings and click on Privacy.
  • Scroll down to Who can see your future posts? and click Edit. You can adjust the settings for specific audiences here.
  • Scroll down to Limit Past Posts to change who can access your previous content.

People accidentally share all kinds of personal facts and information without realizing it. Changing this setting can protect you from getting phished or stop a hacker from correctly guessing one of your security questions.

8. Stop your activity from being advertised (literally)

Ever seen an advertisement that tells you which of your friends Liked it? That’s because Facebook automatically uses these endorsements to target ads to you and your friends. And if you Like something, your friends will see the same kinds of ads.

Of course, they’re not asking your permission. But you can disable the setting to keep your interests and Likes more private. Follow these steps on your desktop:

  • Under Settings & Privacy, select Settings, then click Ads, followed by Ad Settings.
  • Click Social Interactions and select Only Me.

9. Avoid those Like and Share buttons on other parts of the web

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Whenever you use a Facebook button on another website, you’re feeding the beast that is Facebook’s ad machine. Every Share, Like and recommendation, becomes part of the data feed that Facebook uses to tailor its algorithm.

Even if you’ve disabled tracking outside of Facebook, using these buttons is like permitting it to know what you’re doing. You don’t need to change any settings to avoid the pitfalls of these buttons. Just don’t use them.

If you must share something, do it the old-fashioned way by copying and pasting it into a post.

10. Clean up your Friends List

Having a lot of Facebook friends means a larger audience witnessing your personal and private life. You probably don’t need thousands of people to see the private ins and outs of your social life.

Plus, studies have shown that people who frequently accept new friend requests actually run a higher risk of being targeted by fake accounts. Tap or click here to see why that is.

For the sake of privacy, you’re better off cleaning up your Friends list. To do this, open Facebook on your phone or computer and visit any one of your friends’ profiles. Locate the button labeled Friends and click or tap it.

On the dropdown that appears, you’ll be able to select Unfriend. Do this for anyone you’re not 100% sure about or don’t know closely. Facebook isn’t a contest, and having more friends doesn’t make your account more complete.

Even with the area marker – – in the text submitted – – toggled off in Facebook’s Messenger app for iOS or Android, the app still logs your place information on a map which is regularly uploaded to Facebook’s servers, leaving it open for prying eyes. What if you wish to turn off area sharing completely? You can, and we’ll show you how to do just that.

There was a time when area monitoring, thanks to our smartphones, was something to be thrilled about, however as it stands today this function has ended up being increasingly intrusive and a major privacy issue – – often through fault of our own, however typically since key information is kept from us by some app makers, and Facebook Messenger happens to be just among those.

We recently covered news regarding a Chrome extension called Marauders Map which basically shows how Facebook keeps a log of all your area history that it has stored from your messages, even if you believe that your location is not being shared at all – – remember the location marker bit we mentioned earlier. As I stated, the majority of us have actually currently left a big footprint of our area history out there, however you have to begin from somewhere and put an end to these wicked designs – – or plans, depending what you wish to call them.

The best and most reliable method to remove any possibilities of you ever stumbling into exposing your place through the Messenger app is to just disable it on the system level for good, well, up until you decide to revert back to sharing your journeys.

Android

Step 1: To begin, simply launch the Messenger app on your phone or tablet.

Step 2: Hit the ‘Settings’ tab and simply disable the Location settings by tapping on it.

Step 1: To begin, launch the Settings app on your iPhone or iPad from your home screen .

Step 2: Navigate to Privacy > Location Services.

Step 3: Scroll below to look for the ‘Messenger’ app and tap it.

Step 4: Now, select ‘Never’ as the option and exit the Settings app.

With the place choice disabled on both Android and iOS, the Messenger app will not log your location henceforth. This also indicates that you will not have the ability to show off to your buddies from where you’re really sending out messages from. However you already understood that didn’t you?

You can share your location via Facebook Messenger. In the digital era, the world is getting smaller. Hence, as emerging technologies keep evolving, it becomes easier to track someone else's location. And the best thing is that you can do all of this with your smartphone on hand.

We keep all the information on our phones and share it in the social media. We also provide this information, subscribing to certain services on the Internet. Therefore, our smartphones are a sweet spot for the cybercriminals. This problem represents a major drawback of advanced technologies and the widespread use of social networks. We become vulnerable and leave our digital footprints without knowing.

Finding someone's personal information is simple and easy. For example, Facebook Messenger can be used to track someone's location with an app. Here we will show you how to do it.

Tracking Someone Else's Location on Facebook Messenger

How can an average and not computer savvy user track and locate someone using Facebook Messenger? Check the next section to find it out.

Of course, first you need to install Facebook Messenger on your smartphone.

Please do it if you don't have the one yet.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Checking Hashtags and Tags

You can track your friend's Facebook location in a few taps or clicks with Facebook location tags and using common hashtags.

All you have to do is find the location tags. If you are using Facebook Messenger only, try to find the location tags by viewing the Facebook stories that are available with the latest updates of this app.

How to turn off facebook messenger’s location tracking (if it is on)

Presumably, those who share their location in tags are doing so because they don't mind sharing their location with their Facebook friends.

This is not fully efficient approach since people can post messages wherever they are. But if they don't care about others learning their current location, you can easily find out where your friend is posting from on Facebook. Please note that you can only use this approach if your Facebook friend has enabled their location tag.

Friends Nearby

Facebook has a feature that lets you see which of your friends are nearby. Nearby friends allow you and your friends to share current locations in between. To enable this feature, you should enable your location history.

To do this, you need to install the Facebook app. Once you have installed the Facebook app, follow these steps:

  • Log in to your Facebook account and click on the menu item located in the upper right corner of the screen.
  • Select Friends Nearby.
  • Select Start.
  • You will be redirected to a screen where you can manage your privacy settings. You can share the location with all or just some of your friends. Choose the most suitable option.
  • Once you have chosen this option, click the back arrow in the upper left corner of the screen. You will be redirected to the previous page. Then click Next.
  • Select Enable.

Once you have done this, you will be able to see a list of friends who also use this feature. They will be listed by location and you can see how far away they are currently from you.

Friends nearby your location will be listed first. There is also a Facebook Messenger button. You can press this button to start chatting with a certain friend. You can also share your location.

Do you have any tips or tricks on how to track someone's location using Facebook Messenger or the Facebook app? If so, please do let us know.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watchAmber Neely | Jun 18, 2020

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

AppleInsider is supported by its audience and may earn commission as an Amazon Associate and affiliate partner on qualifying purchases. These affiliate partnerships do not influence our editorial content.

If you are tired of your Apple Watch responding to “Hey Siri” voice commands, or if you simply don’t want a voice assistant on your wrist, our helpful guide shows you how to turn off Siri on your Apple Watch.

Apple’s “Hey Siri” function may be handy for most users, but there are times when you don’t want it to activate and cause an interruption. Here’s how you can turn off Siri on your Apple Watch to prevent these interruptions.

How to turn off Hey Siri on Apple Watch

  • On your Apple Watch, open Settings
  • Tap Siri
  • Toggle off Listen for “Hey Siri”

You can also do the same steps on your iPhone if you don’t currently have access to your watch, or if it is charging.

How to turn off Hey Siri on Apple Watch on your iPhone

  • On your iPhone, open the Watch App
  • Scroll down and tap Siri
  • Toggle off Listen for “Hey Siri”

Turning off this feature will eliminate any accidental Siri queries that happen when your Apple Watch mishears you or overhears someone else’s “Hey Siri” command.

Of course, you may not want Siri on your Apple Watch in any capacity. Again, it only takes a couple of steps to disable Siri and can easily be reversed if you change your mind later.

How to turn off Siri on Apple Watch

  • On your Apple Watch, open Settings
  • Tap Siri
  • Toggle off Listen for “Hey Siri”
  • Toggle off Raise to Speak
  • Toggle off Press Digital Crown
  • Tap “Turn Off Siri” when prompted

You can also disable Siri on your Apple Watch via your iPhone by following the steps below.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

How to turn off Siri on Apple Watch from your iPhone

  • On your iPhone, open the Watch App
  • Scroll down and tap Siri
  • Toggle off Listen for “Hey Siri”
  • Toggle off Raise to Speak
  • Toggle off Press Digital Crown
  • Tap “Turn Off Siri” when prompted

Important: When you disable Siri on the Apple Watch, it does not disable dictation, which uses Siri-based services to interpret your speech-to-text for text messages. If you wish to disable all Siri services, you will also need to turn off dictation.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

How to turn off Dictation on Apple Watch

  • On your Apple Watch, open Settings
  • Tap General
  • Tap Dictation
  • Toggle off Dictation
  • Tap “Turn Off Dictation” when prompted

Keep up with all the Apple news with your iPhone, iPad, or Mac. Say, “Hey, Siri, play AppleInsider Daily,” — or bookmark this link — and you’ll get a fast update direct from the AppleInsider team.

The “Hey Siri” feature on the iPhone allows you to use the voice search and control features of Siri without even holding the device. This can be very useful in a lot of situations, and it something that will only continue to improve as time goes by. Your Apple Watch can also use the Hey Siri feature, which can be helpful if your iPhone isn’t nearby.

However, you might find that the Hey Siri feature on the Apple Watch is a little too sensitive, and that it activates itself when you don’t want it to. If you ultimately decide that it is causing more issues than it is resolving,t hen you may be looking for a way to disable it. Our guide below will show you how to turn off Hey Siri on your Apple Watch by changing a setting directly from the Apple Watch.

How to Disable the “Hey Siri” Feature on the Apple Watch

The steps in this article were performed on an Apple Watch 2 using the Watch OS 3.1.3 operating system.

Step 1: Open the Settings app on the Apple Watch. You can get to the app screen by pressing the crown button on the side of the Watch.

Step 2: Select the General option.

Step 3: Scroll down and tap the Siri option.

Step 4: Touch the button to the right of Hey Siri to turn it off.

Note that this will not affect the Hey Siri setting on the iPhone. Those two options are controlled separately.

Do you have reminders or notifications on your Apple Watch that you are always dismissing, or you would prefer not to see? Learn how to turn off the Breather Reminders on your Apple Watch if that is one of the reminders that you find you aren’t using very much.

Matthew Burleigh has been writing tech tutorials since 2008. His writing has appeared on dozens of different websites and been read over 50 million times.

After receiving his Bachelor’s and Master’s degrees in Computer Science he spent several years working in IT management for small businesses. However, he now works full time writing content online and creating websites.

His main writing topics include iPhones, Microsoft Office, Google Apps, Android, and Photoshop, but he has also written about many other tech topics as well.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Don’t want Apple Watch to always be listening for the “Hey Siri” command? You can turn off Siri on Apple Watch if you want to stop it from listening to you, ready to take your commands.

We’ll show you how to turn off the Siri listening feature Apple Watch, which still allows you to use Siri if manually activated, and also how to turn off Siri completely so that the entire feature is not available on Apple Watch. Finally, we’ll also show you how to delete your Siri history and voice commands from Apple servers.

Note that by disabling Siri listening on Apple Watch for Hey Siri commands, you’ll have to manually engage Siri to issue a command, or use touch input. If you disable Siri entirely, the Apple Watch functionality is reduced to touch input only as no voice commands will be available.

How to Stop “Hey Siri” Listening on Apple Watch

You can turn off the Hey Siri command, which will prevent Apple Watch from listening to you.

  1. Open the “Settings” app on Apple Watch
  2. Tap “Siri”
  3. Toggle off “Listen for ‘Hey Siri’”

This does not disable Siri completely, however, as it only disables the Hey Siri command that listens to you from Apple Watch. This means you can still use Siri by holding down the side button on the Apple Watch, then issuing your command.

Turn off Hey Siri listening on Apple Watch:
To turn off “Hey Siri,” open the Settings app on your Apple Watch, tap Siri, then turn off Listen for “Hey Siri.”

How to Turn Off Siri Completely on Apple Watch

Don’t want to use Siri at all on Apple Watch, whether as Hey Siri listening mode or with the side button manual activation?

  1. Open Settings on Apple Watch
  2. Go to “Siri”
  3. Turn off “Listen for Hey Siri”
  4. Turn off “Raise to Speak”
  5. Turn off “Press Digital Crown”
  6. Confirm that you want to turn off Siri on Apple Watch

Now Siri won’t be active on the Apple Watch at all, under any circumstance. This limits the Apple Watch functionality for most users, and is therefore not really recommended.

Of course you can always go back and reverse the settings to enable the Siri feature on Apple Watch again, and set it to however you’re comfortable with using it.

How to Delete Siri History on Apple Watch

Siri keeps track of your usage and may store data on Apple servers for six months. You can delete this Siri history data from the Apple Watch by doing the following:

  1. Open Settings on Apple Watch
  2. Go to Siri
  3. Tap on Siri History
  4. Tap on Delete Siri History

This puts in a request to delete your Siri history from Apple servers.

This is all obviously covering Apple Watch, but you can also turn off Siri from listening on iPhone, Mac, iPad, and even HomePod, if it suits your desires, privacy concerns, or security needs.

Whether you use Siri or not is entirely up to you, and whether you want Siri always listening for that Hey Siri prompt is also up to you.

The Apple Watch comes with Hey Siri turned on by default, but you may have accidentally disabled it or you may really want to disable Hey Siri. Whatever maybe the case, you will find below the steps to both Enable or Disable Hey Siri on your Apple Watch.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Enable or Disable Hey Siri on Apple Watch

As mentioned above, Apple Watch comes with “Hey Siri” turned on by default. However, some users accidentally end up disabling Hey Siri, while there are others who want to disable “Hey Siri” because they hardly use it.

With Hey Siri enabled, you no longer have to press the digital crown on your Apple Watch to activate Siri, you can simply lift the watch towards your mouth and say “Hey Siri.”

Compared to an iPhone or iPad, you should find Siri more helpful on the Apple Watch, as it can help you text people, make calls, Check the time and Weather, without having to navigate the small screen of the Apple Watch.

Enable Hey Siri on Apple Watch

Follow the steps below to Enable Hey Siri on your Apple Watch. As mentioned above, enabling Hey Siri will allow you to activate Siri on your Apple Watch without touching the digital crown.

1. Tap on Settings and then tap on General.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

2. On the General screen, tap on Siri

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

3. On the next screen, turn ON Hey Siri option by moving the slider to ON position (See image below)

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Activate Hey Siri on Apple Watch

Activating Hey Siri on Apple Watch is a bit different then activating the feature on your iPhone. In general, you can use the following two ways to Activate Hey Siri on your Apple Watch.

1. Raise Your Wrist – To activate Siri, simply raise your wrist close to your mouth and say Hey Siri, followed by whatever you want Siri to do.

2. Tap on Watch – Another way of activating Siri is to tap on the screen of your Apple Watch and then say Hey Siri, followed by your command.

Disable Hey Siri on Apple Watch

If you do not like the Hey Siri feature on your Apple Watch then you can easily disable the feature by following the steps below.

1. Tap on Settings and then tap on General.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

2. On the General Screen, tap on Siri.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

3. On the next screen, turn off Hey Siri by moving the Slider to OFF position (From Green to White)

Learn how to use Siri, the intelligent personal assistant that helps you get things done. Siri can send your messages, place calls, get directions, and more.

Set up Siri

  1. On your paired iPhone, tap Settings > Siri & Search. Make sure that Listen for "Hey Siri" is on. On iPhone X or later, make sure that Press Side Button for Siri is on. On iPhone 8 or earlier, make sure that Press Home for Siri is on.
  2. On your Apple Watch, tap Settings > Siri. Choose whether you want to turn Hey Siri and Raise To Speak on or off.
  3. On Apple Watch Series 3 or later, scroll down to Voice Feedback, then choose when Siri speaks: Always On, Control With Silent Mode, or Headphones Only.
  4. Make sure that your Apple Watch or paired iPhone can connect to the Internet.*

Ask Siri a question

You can ask Siri to start a specific workout, open an app, send a message, and much more. There are several ways to talk to Siri. On Apple Watch Series 3 or later, Siri speaks responses to you, and you can activate and use Siri from a paired Bluetooth headset. On earlier models, Siri responds visually on your watch face.

With watchOS 6, you can ask Siri to identify a song and get an instant Shazam result. You can also ask Siri a general question and Apple Watch displays the first few search results along with a brief excerpt from each page. Just tap Open Page to view the page on Apple Watch.

Raise your wrist

With watchOS 5 and later and Apple Watch Series 3 or later, you don’t need to say "Hey Siri" to get Siri’s attention.

  1. Raise your wrist to wake your Apple Watch.
  2. Hold your watch near your mouth.
  3. Say what you need.

Here’s how to turn the Raise To Speak feature off or on:

  1. Open the Settings app on your Apple Watch.
  2. Tap Siri.
  3. Turn Raise To Speak off or on.

Press the Digital Crown

  1. Hold down the Digital Crown.
  2. When the listening indicator appears, say what you need.
  3. Release the Digital Crown.

Say “Hey Siri”

  1. Raise your wrist or tap the screen of your Apple Watch.
  2. When it wakes, say "Hey Siri" and what you need.

Add Siri to your watch face

If you use the Siri watch face, you can add the Siri complication, then tap it to talk to Siri: .

Use the Siri watch face and Siri Shortcuts

The Siri watch face updates throughout the day and shows you relevant content and information that you might need based on your location, time of day, and routines. For example, you might see Calendar events, boarding passes, or your favorites from the Home app. And the Siri watch face supports Siri Shortcuts.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Don’t want Apple Watch to always be listening for the “Hey Siri” command? You can turn off Siri on Apple Watch if you want to stop it from listening to you, ready to take your commands.

We’ll show you how to turn off the Siri listening feature Apple Watch, which still allows you to use Siri if manually activated, and also how to turn off Siri completely so that the entire feature is not available on Apple Watch. Finally, we’ll also show you how to delete your Siri history and voice commands from Apple servers.

Note that by disabling Siri listening on Apple Watch for Hey Siri commands, you’ll have to manually engage Siri to issue a command, or use touch input. If you disable Siri entirely, the Apple Watch functionality is reduced to touch input only as no voice commands will be available.

How to Stop “Hey Siri” Listening on Apple Watch

You can turn off the Hey Siri command, which will prevent Apple Watch from listening to you.

  1. Open the “Settings” app on Apple Watch
  2. Tap “Siri”
  3. Toggle off “Listen for ‘Hey Siri’”

This does not disable Siri completely, however, as it only disables the Hey Siri command that listens to you from Apple Watch. This means you can still use Siri by holding down the side button on the Apple Watch, then issuing your command.

Turn off Hey Siri listening on Apple Watch:
To turn off “Hey Siri,” open the Settings app on your Apple Watch, tap Siri, then turn off Listen for “Hey Siri.”

How to Turn Off Siri Completely on Apple Watch

Don’t want to use Siri at all on Apple Watch, whether as Hey Siri listening mode or with the side button manual activation?

  1. Open Settings on Apple Watch
  2. Go to “Siri”
  3. Turn off “Listen for Hey Siri”
  4. Turn off “Raise to Speak”
  5. Turn off “Press Digital Crown”
  6. Confirm that you want to turn off Siri on Apple Watch

Now Siri won’t be active on the Apple Watch at all, under any circumstance. This limits the Apple Watch functionality for most users, and is therefore not really recommended.

Of course you can always go back and reverse the settings to enable the Siri feature on Apple Watch again, and set it to however you’re comfortable with using it.

How to Delete Siri History on Apple Watch

Siri keeps track of your usage and may store data on Apple servers for six months. You can delete this Siri history data from the Apple Watch by doing the following:

  1. Open Settings on Apple Watch
  2. Go to Siri
  3. Tap on Siri History
  4. Tap on Delete Siri History

This puts in a request to delete your Siri history from Apple servers.

This is all obviously covering Apple Watch, but you can also turn off Siri from listening on iPhone, Mac, iPad, and even HomePod, if it suits your desires, privacy concerns, or security needs.

Whether you use Siri or not is entirely up to you, and whether you want Siri always listening for that Hey Siri prompt is also up to you.

How to disable “Hey Siri” on your iPhone, iPad and Apple Watch

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

We are going to explain to you how to turn off “Hey Siri”, the voice command with which you can invoke Apple’s assistant. If it bothers you that sometimes you can say something that looks like this command and the wizard is activated automatically, today we will tell you step by step how to enter the configuration and deactivate it.

We will explain how to do it both on an iPhone and Apple Watch, being the indications for the iPhone the same as for an iPad. Once we are done, to activate the assistant’s listening you will have to physically interact with your device, pressing and holding the power button on the iPhone or the side crown of the watch. If you want to be able to use it again with your voice, you will only have to reverse the process that we are going to teach you.

Turn off Hey Siri on your iPhone or iPad

The first thing you have to do is enter the Settings application of your iPhone or iPad, which is the one with the cogwheel icon. When you enter it, you will be able to access the configuration of your device and its services. Although we are going to take these steps from an iPhone, from the iPad they are exactly the same.

Once you are within the iPhone or iPad settings, you have to download and click on the Siri and Search option. It is not at the top, but in the third block of options, the one that begins with the general configuration.

You will enter a screen where you can configure everything related to the Siri assistant and the search options of your iPhone. On this screen, you have to deactivate the option Activate when hearing “Hey Siri”, which will be in the Consult Siri section. Deactivating this option will be enough, and the wizard will stop listening to the command to invoke it. If you later want to use the Hey Siri command again, you will have to return here to reactivate the option.

Turn off Hey Siri on your Apple Watch

If you want to disable the command to call Siri on the Apple Watch, the process is similar. To get started, click on the side crown of the watch to go to the applications section, and enter the Settings app what you will see with the cogwheel icon.

Once you are in the Settings, scroll down to see all the options that will appear in a list. In this list, click on the option * Siri that you will see between the options of * Accessibility * and * Sounds and vibrations *.

report this ad

Once you are in Siri settings, you can change the way you use the assistant on your Apple Watch. In these settings, you have to disable the option When you hear “Hey Siri” that will appear just above everything. Just by doing this, you will have already deactivated the voice command. If you later want to use the Hey Siri command again, you will have to return here to reactivate the option.

I don’t like the dueling “Hey siri’s” between my Apple Watch S1 and my iPhone 7plus. “Siri” doesn’t show up on the General setting on the watch and I really do NOT want that feature on the watch. Frankly, I do not want any phone or messages on the watch. How do I shut off “hey siri” on JUST the watch.

Posted on Oct 6, 2016 1:51 PM

Follow these steps to turn off Hey Siri on your Apple Watch (but not also on your iPhone):

  • On your watch, open Settings (cog icon) from the Home screen (which is accessed by a single press of the Digital Crown when viewing the time on your watch).
  • In Settings, go to: General > Siri (scroll down to see this menu option) > turn off Hey Siri.

Posted on Oct 6, 2016 4:22 PM

All replies

Loading page content

Page content loaded

Follow these steps to turn off Hey Siri on your Apple Watch (but not also on your iPhone):

  • On your watch, open Settings (cog icon) from the Home screen (which is accessed by a single press of the Digital Crown when viewing the time on your watch).
  • In Settings, go to: General > Siri (scroll down to see this menu option) > turn off Hey Siri.

Oct 6, 2016 4:22 PM

Thank you! I kept looking for the selection in the iPhone watch app. Strange that it isn’t included but such are the mysteries of life. Going to look on the watch before I write into the forum .

The Apple Watch is one of the more feature-complete smartwatches on the market these days and with the inclusion of Siri, can perform tasks many other smartwatches cannot. That said, if you want to turn off the “Hey Siri” function, here is how.

The Apple Watch comes complete with a whole host of Siri functionality. You can use it to navigate, text people, make calls, check the time in other locales, and much more. You can access Siri by pressing and holding the digital crown down until Siri appears to ask you what it can help you with.

You can achieve the same result by turning the wrist toward your mouth, speaking into the Watch, and saying “Hey Siri.” The latter method is obviously very convenient but you may not want to activate SIri in such a fashion. In fact, you may not use Siri on your Watch at all, or you may simply wish to activate it solely by pressing on the digital crown.

In any event, you can deactivate the “Hey Siri” feature if you desire. The first thing you will need to do is open the Settings on your Watch.

In the Settings, tap open the “General” category.

In the General settings, scroll to and tap open “Siri”.

With the Siri settings open, you will only have one option to attend to, which is the “Hey Siri” one. If you no longer want to be able to access Siri when you wake the watch, then simply tap off “Hey Siri”.

As we mentioned, the only way now to access Siri is by pressing and holding the digital crown until Siri appears.

Being able to queue up Siri with a flick of your wrist is actually a pretty useful feature but if you don’t use Siri, or want to avoid interacting with it as much as possible, then turning off “Hey Siri” integration is probably something you will want to do.

That said, if you ever want to reinstate Siri to its hands-free status, simply turn “Hey Siri” back on in that same way you turned it off. We hope you found this article helpful. If you would like to add anything, such as a comment or question, we welcome your feedback in our discussion forum.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Apple Watch – одна из наиболее полнофункциональных смартвэтов на рынке в наши дни и с включением Siri, может выполнять задачи, которые многие другие смарт-карты не могут. Тем не менее, если вы хотите отключить функцию «Hey Siri», вот как это сделать.

Apple Watch поставляется с множеством функций Siri. Вы можете использовать его для навигации, отправки текстовых сообщений, совершения вызовов, проверки времени в других местах и ​​многое другое. Вы можете получить доступ к Сири, нажав и удерживая цифровую корону, пока Сири не спросит вас, чем она может вам помочь.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Вы можете добиться такого же результата, поворачивая запястье к своему рту, выступая в «Часах» и говоря «Hey Siri». Последний метод, очевидно, очень удобен, но вы можете не захотеть активировать SIri таким образом. Фактически, вы не можете использовать Siri на вашем Watch вообще, или вы можете просто просто активировать его, только нажав на цифровую корону.

В любом случае вы можете деактивировать функцию «Hey Siri», если хотите. Первое, что вам нужно сделать, это открыть настройки на вашем часовом.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

В разделе «Настройки» откройте категорию «Общие».

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

В разделе «Общие настройки» выделите и нажмите «Сири».

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Если настройки Siri открыты, у вас будет только один вариант для просмотра, который является «Hey Siri». Если вы больше не хотите иметь доступ к Siri, когда вы разбудите часы, просто нажмите «Hey Siri».

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Как мы уже упоминали, единственный способ получить доступ к Siri – это нажать и удерживать цифровую корону до тех пор, пока Сири не появится.

Возможность стоять в очереди на Сири с щелчком вашего запястья – на самом деле довольно полезная функция, но если вы не используете Siri или хотите избежать взаимодействия с ней как можно больше, то отключить интеграцию «Hey Siri», вероятно, вы захотите сделать.

Тем не менее, если вы когда-либо захотите восстановить Сири в своем режиме громкой связи, просто включите «Hey Siri» так же, как вы отключили его. Надеемся, что эта статья вам поможет. Если вы хотите добавить что-либо, например, комментарий или вопрос, мы приветствуем ваши отзывы на нашем форуме.

I want to disable siri on my apple watch so it never comes on. Is there a way to do this?

Posted on Apr 14, 2017 10:19 AM

It is not possible to completely disable Siri on Apple Watch other than by also disabling Siri on your iPhone.

To turn off Hey Siri only on your Apple Watch:

When viewing the time on your Apple Watch, press the Digital Crown to open the Home screen > tap on Settings > General > Siri > turn off “Hey Siri”.

Posted on Apr 14, 2017 11:00 AM

All replies

Loading page content

Page content loaded

It is not possible to completely disable Siri on Apple Watch other than by also disabling Siri on your iPhone.

To turn off Hey Siri only on your Apple Watch:

When viewing the time on your Apple Watch, press the Digital Crown to open the Home screen > tap on Settings > General > Siri > turn off “Hey Siri”.

Apr 14, 2017 11:00 AM

NO! This does NOT do whats ASKED FOR! It doesn’t remove siri from ANNOYINGLY popping up when pressing Digital Crown – rocket science. Should be a setting like ‘enable siri digital crown’! Maybe next watchOS? I Tweeted @applesupport ‘ aWatch3 #handicappedHateSiri How FULLY TURN OFF #Siri incl. when pressing Digital Crown (yep its off on my iPhone)? ‘

Dec 30, 2017 11:24 PM

As I explained in my previous reply, it is not possible to completely turn Siri off only on Apple Watch.

To turn Siri off completely on both devices, under the latest software versions (which have different settings than when this thread was started), follow these steps:

  • On your iPhone, go to: Settings > Siri & Search.
  • Turn off Listen for “Hey Siri”.
  • Turn off Press Home for Siri / Press Side Button for Siri (the setting depends on your iPhone model).

Dec 31, 2017 3:34 AM

You can turn off Siri for the Apple watch through Settings on your watch (not the watch app on your phone). I’m on build 4.2 by the way. Once you open Settings on your watch, go to General>Siri. Then you can toggle off Siri for your watch. Hope that helps!

Jan 10, 2018 6:36 PM

I’m afraid that you are mistaken.

When changing settings directly on Apple Watch, it is currently only possible to turn off “Hey Siri”. Doing so does not also turn off operation of Siri via the Digital Crown.

My previous replies refer.

Jan 11, 2018 2:41 AM

Question: Q: I want to disable Siri on my apple watch so it never comes on. Is there a way to do this? More Less

Вы можете использовать Siri для выполнения задач и получения ответов на разные вопросы прямо на Apple Watch. Например, можно попросить Siri перевести Вашу речь на другой язык, определить название и исполнителя песни с помощью Shazam или задать помощнику общий вопрос, после чего он покажет несколько результатов поиска с кратким содержанием информации с каждой страницы. Просто коснитесь «Открыть страницу», чтобы просмотреть страницу на Apple Watch. Дайте Siri задание, которое обычно выполняете в несколько шагов.

Функция Siri доступна не во всех регионах и не на всех языках. См. статью службы поддержки Apple Доступность функций watchOS.

Siri. Произнесите команду, например:

«Как сказать “Как дела” на китайском?»

«Начни тренировку бег на 30 минут»

«Скажи Егорке, что я почти готов»

«Открой приложение “Сон”»

«Что это за песня?»

«Почему появляется радуга?»

«Какие у меня обновления?»

«Что я могу у тебя спросить?»

Как использовать Siri

Чтобы обратиться к Siri с просьбой, выполните любое из перечисленных ниже действий:

Поднимите запястье и произнесите запрос в Apple Watch.

Чтобы выключить функцию «Поднести и говорить», откройте приложение «Настройки» на Apple Watch, коснитесь «Siri» и выключите параметр «Поднести и говорить».

Произнесите «Привет, Siri» и свой запрос.

Чтобы выключить функцию «Привет, Siri», откройте приложение «Настройки» на Apple Watch, коснитесь «Siri» и выключите параметр «Слушать “Привет, Siri”».

Коснитесь кнопки Siri на циферблате Siri.

Нажмите и удерживайте колесико Digital Crown, пока не появится индикатор, означающий, что Siri Вас слушает. Затем произнесите свой запрос.

Чтобы выключить функцию «Нажатие колесика Digital Crown», откройте приложение «Настройки» на Apple Watch, коснитесь «Siri» и выключите параметр «Нажатие колесика Digital Crown».

Совет. После вызова Siri Вы можете опустить запястье. Когда ответ будет найден, Вы ощутите прикосновение.

Чтобы ответить на вопрос Siri или сделать следующий запрос, нажмите колесико Digital Crown и говорите.

Siri может произносить свои ответы, как в iOS, iPadOS и macOS. Вы также можете слышать ответы Siri через Bluetooth-гарнитуру или аудиоустройства, подключенные к Apple Watch.

Примечание. Чтобы использовать Siri, Apple Watch должны быть подключены к интернету. Может взиматься плата за сотовую связь.

Изменение настроек аудиоотзыва

Siri может произносить свои ответы на Apple Watch. Откройте Настройки на Apple Watch, коснитесь «Siri», затем выберите один из следующих вариантов.

Всегда включено. Siri произносит ответы, даже если Apple Watch находятся в бесшумном режиме.

Зависит от Бесшумного режима. Ответы Siri не воспроизводятся, если Apple Watch находятся в бесшумном режиме.

Только наушники. Siri произносит ответы, только если Apple Watch подключены к наушникам Bluetooth.

Чтобы изменить язык и голос Siri, откройте Настройки на Apple Watch, коснитесь «Siri», затем коснитесь «Язык» или «Голос Siri». В разделе «Голос Siri» можно изменить вариант и пол Siri.

Примечание. Возможность изменения голоса Siri доступна не для всех языков.

Удаление истории использования Siri

Когда Вы используете Siri или диктовку, Ваши запросы сохраняются на серверах Apple и остаются там в течение шести месяцев. Это помогает улучшить ответы Siri. Ваши запросы связываются со случайным идентификатором, а не с Вашим Apple ID или адресом электронной почты. Вы в любой момент можете удалить записи этих взаимодействий с сервера.

Откройте приложение «Настройки» на Apple Watch.

Коснитесь «Siri», коснитесь «История Siri».

Подробнее см. в статье службы поддержки Apple Спросите Siri, Диктовка и конфиденциальность.

By adding Siri to the Apple Watch, Apple allowed owners of smart watches to seek the help of a personal assistant right on the wrist. No doubt, this is a very useful and convenient function for performing daily tasks. The smart assistant can start a timer or find information on the network. However, some users prefer to temporarily disable Siri on the Apple Watch. If you also want to do this, we recommend you to familiarize yourself with this post.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

How do I turn off Siri in my Apple Watch

How I Can turn off Siri in my Apple Watch?

To disable Siri on the Apple Watch, just follow a few simple steps.

Open Preferences on the Apple Watch. To do this, press the Digital Crown and select the gear icon.

Click Siri

On the Siri page, swipe to the left all three control methods using Siri: Listen for ” Hey Siri. “,”Raise to speak.”and “Click Digital Crown.”

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

How do I turn off Siri in my Apple Watch

Now Siri will no longer work on your Apple Watch. You can also disable individual options for calling the voice assistant. This is how each of them works.

Listen for ” Hey Siri. “

Lift the smart watch to activate the screen. Then say “Hi Siri.” No need to bring the gadget too high. The main thing is that the screen wakes up from sleep mode.

“Raise to speak.”

On Apple Watch Series 3 and later, you don’t have to say “Hi Siri.” It is enough to bring the device to your face and make a request. This function can be used both at the same time as “Listen for” Hey, Siri “, and turning it off.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

How do I turn off Siri in my Apple Watch

“Click Digital Crown.”

Press the Digital Crown to turn Siri on. Many users complain that this function most often causes an accidental call of a voice assistant. Perhaps you should turn it off, leaving the previous options active.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

HomePod is a great way to use Siri, but sometimes, you want to employ the trigger phrase, “Hey Siri,” with your Apple Watch, only to find that the HomePod responds to your command instead of your watch. Instead of giving different devices priority depending on context, it might seem like your HomePod is trying to muscle out your Apple Watch.

Here’s what’s going on, and what you can do about it to get Siri working the way you want it to without any HomePod interference.

How “Hey Siri” works with multiple devices

Because multiple devices now respond to the “Hey Siri” activation phrase, your iPhone, iPad, Apple Watch, and now HomePod need to be able to determine which device should handle the request. Your devices quickly communicate with each other over Bluetooth and choose which of them will respond based on a number of factors.

One of those factors is supposed to be “raise to wake,” which lets your iPhone or Apple Watch’s screen wake up when you raise that device. If a device has just been woken up by the raising it, the “Hey Siri” command should be carried out on that device.

However, some people have reported issues with using “Hey Siri” in this manner on their Apple Watch, saying that the HomePod is fielding requests meant for their watch. If you’re affected by this bug, the best thing to do is turn on “Hey Siri” on your HomePod.

How to turn off “Hey Siri” on your HomePod with the Home app

  1. Open Home on your iPhone or iPad.
  2. Press firmly or press and hold on your HomePod in your list of devices.

Tap Details.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Tap Done.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Alternatively, you can say, “Hey Siri, turn off Hey Siri” to your HomePod and wake word will be shut off.

If you want to keep “Hey Siri” on for both your Apple Watch and HomePod, one thing to keep in mind is that in order for your Apple Watch to be given priority in the “Hey Siri” lottery, you will have to issue your command immediately after waking its display. If that still doesn’t work, then use the steps above to turn off “Hey Siri” on your HomePod until a software fix arrives.

Questions

If you’ve got any other questions about using “Hey Siri” on your Apple devices, let us know in the comments.

Siri is how you control and interface with HomePod to play your music, turn off your lights, answer your questions, and otherwise do whatever you want it to do. That includes turning off ‘Hey, Siri’ when you want it to stop listening, and even change voice styles and accents. And you can configure it all in the Home app for iOS.

How do you turn off always-listening ‘Hey Siri’ on HomePod?

Apple makes sure ‘Hey, Siri’, the voice activated part of its personal assistant interface, stays local to the device until you say those magic words. Then, Apple assigns an anonymous ID token and sends everything you say to Siri using end-to-end encryption.

If that’s not enough for you, or if you just want a few moments where you’re absolutely certain Siri isn’t listening, you can disable the feature for as long as you want.

Using your voice:

  1. Say “Hey Siri, stop listening.””
  2. When Siri asks you to confirm, say “”Yes.”.

Using the Home app:

  1. Launch the Home app on your iPhone or iPad Home screen.
  2. Tap on the Rooms tab, bottom middle.
  3. Swipe to the Room that contains your HomePod.
  4. Long press (or firmly press) on your HomePod.
  5. Tap Details.

Toggle Listen for “Hey Siri” off.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

How do you turn ‘Hey Siri’ on for HomePod?

Apple makes sure ‘Hey, Siri’, the voice activated part of its personal assistant interface, stays local to the device until you say those magic words. Then, Apple assigns an anonymous ID token and sends everything you say to Siri using end-to-end encryption.

If that’s not enough for you, or if you just want a few moments where you’re absolutely certain Siri isn’t listening, you can disable the feature for as long as you want.

Using your voice:

  1. Tap the center of the HomePod display.
  2. Say “Hey Siri, start listening.””

Using the Home app:

  1. Launch the Home app on your iPhone or iPad Home screen.
  2. Tap on the Rooms tab, bottom middle.
  3. Swipe to the Room that contains your HomePod.
  4. Long press (or firmly press) on your HomePod.
  5. Tap Details.

Toggle Listen for “Hey Siri” on.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

How do you turn off touch-and-hold for Siri on HomePod?

By default, whether or not you have Hey Siri enabled, you can invoke Siri by touching and holding the screen on top of HomePod. If you don’t like that idea and want to turn it off, or you previously turned it off and want to turn it back on, you can.

  1. Launch the Home app on your iPhone or iPad Home screen.
  2. Tap on the Rooms tab, bottom middle.
  3. Swipe to the Room that contains your HomePod.
  4. Long press (or firmly press) on your HomePod.
  5. Tap Details.

Toggle Touch and Hold for Siri on.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

How do you turn off the light or sound when using Siri?

The Siri waveform animation is a visual indicator that Siri is listening to you and working to answer your questions or commands. The sound tone is an audio indicator that Siri has heard you. If you don’t want one or both of them on, you can turn them off. If you change your mind, you can turn one or both on.

  1. Launch the Home app on your iPhone or iPad Home screen.
  2. Tap on the Rooms tab, bottom middle.
  3. Swipe to the Room that contains your HomePod.
  4. Long press (or firmly press) on your HomePod.
  5. Tap Details.

Toggle Touch and Hold for Siri on.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

How do you change Siri’s language or accent?

You can easily switch between any and all of HomePod’s supported languages for Siri.

  1. Launch the Home app on your iPhone or iPad Home screen.
  2. Tap on the Rooms tab, bottom middle.
  3. Swipe to the Room that contains your HomePod.
  4. Long press (or firmly press) on your HomePod.
  5. Tap Details.
  6. Tap Language in the Siri section.

Tap on your Preferred Language.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

How do you switch between male and female Siri?

Siri defaults to female in some regions like the U.S., male in other regions like the U.K. HomePod will copy over your iPhone or iPad settings, and update when you update those settings, but you can also change it specifically on HomePod at any time.

Note: Don’t see Siri Voice options on HomePod? First, make sure you’ve downloaded the additional voices on your iPhone or iPad or they may not show up as options on HomePod.

  1. Launch Settings on your iPhone or iPad.
  2. Tap on Siri & Search.
  3. Tap on Siri Voice.

Tap on Male or Female to download the appropriate voice data.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Next, set it up on HomePod:

  1. Launch the Home app on your iPhone or iPad Home screen.
  2. Tap on the Rooms tab, bottom middle.
  3. Swipe to the Room that contains your HomePod.
  4. Long press (or firmly press) on your HomePod.
  5. Tap Details.
  6. Tap on Siri Voice.

Tap on Male or Female.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Any ‘Hey Siri’ for HomePod questions?

If you have any questions about Siri on HomePod, drop them in the comments below.

Harry Guinness
How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watchHarry Guinness
Writer

Harry Guinness is a photography expert and writer with nearly a decade of experience. His work has been published in newspapers like The New York Times and on a variety of other websites, from Lifehacker to Popular Science and Medium’s OneZero. Read more.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Siri can be useful but, if you have an Apple Watch, the virtual assistant can accidentally pop up all the time—especially when you’re working out. Here’s how to stop Siri from appearing on your watch.

Why Your Apple Watch Activates Siri

On the Apple Watch, by default you can activate Siri in three ways:

  • Press and hold down the Digital Crown.
  • Tap the screen, or turn your wrist to wake your Apple Watch and then say, “Hey Siri.”
  • Raise your watch to near your mouth and just start speaking (with an Apple Watch Series 3 or newer.)

Unfortunately, between the three different ways (four if you add the Siri complication to your watch face), I trigger Siri far more often than I mean to. I accidentally hold the Digital Crown down pretty much every time I do a push up, bench press, or burpee, and Siri regularly starts talking to me when I’m eating, drinking, or just resting my head on my hand. If you’ve got the same kind of problems, here’s how to change when Siri activates—or turn it off entirely.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

How to Disable Siri on Your Apple Watch

On your watch go to Settings > Siri. Under “Ask Siri,” there are three toggles:

  • “Listen for ‘Hey Siri’”
  • “Raise to Speak”
  • “Press Digital Crown”

If you want to completely turn Siri off, toggle all three off and then tap “Turn Off Siri.” Otherwise, just turn off the triggers you don’t want. I left on “Listen for ‘Hey Siri’” but turned off the other two that I kept triggering by mistake.

  • › What Do the Status Icons Mean on Apple Watch?
  • › 20 Apple Watch Tips and Tricks You Need to Know
  • › Roborock Q5+ Review: A Solid Self-Emptying Robot Vacuum
  • › Every Microsoft Windows Logo From 1985 to 2022
  • › What’s New in Chrome 101, Available Now
  • › Samsung T7 Shield Review: The Best Portable SSD, Now Rugged
  • › What Does “Touch Grass” Mean?
  • › The 5 Most Ridiculously Expensive Phones of All Time

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch Harry Guinness
Harry Guinness is a photography expert and writer with nearly a decade of experience. His work has been published in newspapers like The New York Times and on a variety of other websites, from Lifehacker to Popular Science and Medium’s OneZero.
Read Full Bio »

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

We will explain how to turn off “Hey Siri”, the voice command with which you can invoke Apple’s assistant. If it bothers you that sometimes you can say something that looks like this command and the wizard is activated automatically, today we will tell you step by step how to enter the configuration and deactivate it.

We will explain how to do it both on an iPhone and Apple Watch, being the indications for the iPhone the same as for an iPad. Once we are done, to activate the assistant listening you will have to physically interact with your device, pressing and holding the power button on the iPhone or the side crown of the watch. If you want to be able to use it again with your voice, you will only have to reverse the process that we are going to teach you.

Deactivate Hey siri on your iPhone or iPad

The first thing you have to do is enter the application of Settings from your iPhone or iPad, which is the one with the sprocket icon. When you enter it, you will be able to access the configuration of your device and its services. Although we are going to take these steps from an iPhone, they are exactly the same from the iPad.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Once you are in the iPhone or iPad settings, you have to download and click on the option Siri and Finder. It is not at the top, but in the third block of options, the one that begins with the general configuration.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

You will enter a screen where you can configure everything related to the Siri assistant and the search options of your iPhone. On this screen, you have to disable option Activate when hearing “Hey Siri”, which will be in the section Consult Siri. Deactivating this option will be enough, and the wizard will stop listening to the command to invoke it. If you later want to use the command again Hey siri, you will have to come back here to reactivate the option.

Deactivate Hey siri in you Apple Watch

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

If you want to disable the command to call Siri on the Apple Watch, the process is similar. To get started, click on the side crown of the watch to go to the applications section, and enter the app Settings what you will see with the cogwheel icon.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Once you are inside the Settings, scroll down to see all the options that will appear in a list. In this list, click on the option * Siri that you will see between the options of * Accessibility * and * Sounds and vibrations *.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Once you are in the settings of Siri, you can change the way you use the assistant on your Apple Watch. In these settings, you have to disable option Hearing “Hey Siri” that will appear just above everything. Just by doing this, you will have already deactivated the voice command. If you later want to use the command again Hey siri, you will have to come back here to reactivate the option.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Don’t want Apple Watch to always be listening for the “Hey Siri” command? You can turn off Siri on Apple Watch if you want to stop it from listening to you, ready to take your commands.

We’ll show you how to turn off the Siri listening feature Apple Watch, which still allows you to use Siri if manually activated, and also how to turn off Siri completely so that the entire feature is not available on Apple Watch. Finally, we’ll also show you how to delete your Siri history and voice commands from Apple servers.

Note that by disabling Siri listening on Apple Watch for Hey Siri commands, you’ll have to manually engage Siri to issue a command, or use touch input. If you disable Siri entirely, the Apple Watch functionality is reduced to touch input only as no voice commands will be available.

How to Stop “Hey Siri” Listening on Apple Watch

You can turn off the Hey Siri command, which will prevent Apple Watch from listening to you.

  1. Open the “Settings” app on Apple Watch
  2. Tap “Siri”
  3. Toggle off “Listen for ‘Hey Siri’”

This does not disable Siri completely, however, as it only disables the Hey Siri command that listens to you from Apple Watch. This means you can still use Siri by holding down the side button on the Apple Watch, then issuing your command.

Turn off Hey Siri listening on Apple Watch:
To turn off “Hey Siri,” open the Settings app on your Apple Watch, tap Siri, then turn off Listen for “Hey Siri.”

How to Turn Off Siri Completely on Apple Watch

Don’t want to use Siri at all on Apple Watch, whether as Hey Siri listening mode or with the side button manual activation?

  1. Open Settings on Apple Watch
  2. Go to “Siri”
  3. Turn off “Listen for Hey Siri”
  4. Turn off “Raise to Speak”
  5. Turn off “Press Digital Crown”
  6. Confirm that you want to turn off Siri on Apple Watch

Now Siri won’t be active on the Apple Watch at all, under any circumstance. This limits the Apple Watch functionality for most users, and is therefore not really recommended.

Of course you can always go back and reverse the settings to enable the Siri feature on Apple Watch again, and set it to however you’re comfortable with using it.

How to Delete Siri History on Apple Watch

Siri keeps track of your usage and may store data on Apple servers for six months. You can delete this Siri history data from the Apple Watch by doing the following:

  1. Open Settings on Apple Watch
  2. Go to Siri
  3. Tap on Siri History
  4. Tap on Delete Siri History

This puts in a request to delete your Siri history from Apple servers.

This is all obviously covering Apple Watch, but you can also turn off Siri from listening on iPhone, Mac, iPad, and even HomePod, if it suits your desires, privacy concerns, or security needs.

Whether you use Siri or not is entirely up to you, and whether you want Siri always listening for that Hey Siri prompt is also up to you.

By Killian Bell • 11:00 am, September 4, 2020

Are you sick of Siri on Apple Watch butting into your conversations? Prevent it by customizing the way Siri works, or by disabling it altogether. It’s easy to do and it fixes one of Apple Watch’s biggest annoyances.

We’ll show you how.

One of the things that can make Siri on Apple Watch a real pain in the butt is its “Raise to Speak” feature. It means that if you happen to lift your arm during a conversation, Siri will listen to what you’re saying.

It then declares it has no idea what you’re saying, and you have to shut it up. But with a few simple changes, you can make Siri on Apple Watch a lot less annoying — or disable it completely.

How to customize Siri on Apple Watch

If you want to use Siri on Apple Watch sometimes, you won’t want to kill it. Instead, disable its listening features and use the Digital Crown to activate Siri manually, so it only works when you actually want it to.

Follow these steps:

  1. Open the Apple Watch app on iPhone, or the Settings app on Apple Watch.
  2. Tap Siri.
  3. Disable Listen for “Hey Siri” and Raise to Speak.

Now tap and hold the Digital Crown on the side of your Apple Watch whenever you want the digital assistant to listen to you.

Don’t want to use Siri at all? Deactivate it by following the steps above, but also disable Press Digital Crown. You will be prompted to Turn Off Siri — tap the button to confirm.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Turn off Siri if you never want to use it at all.
Screenshot: Cult of Mac

We suggest disabling Siri only if you’re adamant you’ll never want to use it. It can be helpful at times, so retaining the ability to activate it manually is a good idea, even if you only use it sometimes.

Don’t worry about Dictation

It should be noted that disabling Siri will not disable Dictation on Apple Watch, so you’ll still be able to use that feature to reply to text messages even if you kill the digital assistant entirely.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

The Apple Watch is not only a practical smartwatch for measuring fitness and health data. By coupling with the iPhone, iPad and Mac, it also offers the option of operating across devices. With GPS, cellular network, WLAN, a comparatively large memory and other great features, it is also a practical companion as a stand-alone solution. And you don’t even have to use your hands to use many functions. over Hey Siri voice commands can be given. Like you on the Apple Watch Hey Siri (de) activate, I have summarized that for you in this guide.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Do you want to activate or deactivate Siri on the Apple Watch? With the following instructions you turn the “Hey Siri” command under watchOS on or off.

Use Siri on the Apple Watch: Here’s how!

If you want to use the Siri voice assistant on your iPhone or iPad, just say “Hey Siri” and the digital helper will listen to you. This only works on the Apple Watch when the display is on. Therefore, the first way you can use Siri with the Apple Watch is to raise your arm so that the Apple Watch display wakes up. Then you can pronounce the Hey Siri command and then give your command. If the command can be implemented in watchOS, you will get a result directly.

If you want to call someone, start an app, play music or have a message read to you, there are other ways too. To wake up the display, you can tap it, for example. This procedure is useful when you cannot or do not want to move your arm to activate the watch – for example when driving a car, in bed or when the Apple Watch is lying down somewhere to be charged. Tap the display, say “Hey Siri” and then your command. Siri will already try to implement it.

As an alternative, and this is the last option, you can use the Digital Crown. If you briefly press the Digital Crown on the Apple Watch, the voice assistant is activated. This is useful if you do not want to or cannot use the Hey command as a voice input. But maybe Siri is not for you either – besides Mac, iPhone and iPad also not on the Apple Watch. That’s why I’ve summarized the steps to deactivate Siri on the Apple Watch.

Apple Watch: Deactivate Hey Siri

If you don’t want the Apple Watch to listen to you, to start an app after a voice command, to read news articles or to carry out other functions, then this can of course be set. This is especially important when you buy a new Apple Watch, because “Hey Siri” is activated by default. To turn off Siri on the Apple Watch you do the following:

  1. Calls the watchOS on the Apple WatchSettings on
  2. Tap in it General
  3. Then select the point Crab from
  4. Now you can drag the slider (highlighted in green) to the left (now highlighted in gray)
  5. Activate Siri now only works by long pressing the Digital Crown

Of course you can Settings -> General -> Crab move the slider to the right again to activate Hey Siri on the Apple Watch. It works in a similar way under iOS on the iPhone and under iPadOS on the iPad. If you have any questions, please leave a comment or use this Sir Applerot Forum 😉

Did you like the article and did the instructions on the blog help you? Then I would be happy if you the blog via a Steady Membership or at Patreon would support.

If you don’t use Siri, here’s how to turn off the virtual assistant on all your Apple devices.

If you don’t use Siri on your iPhone, iPad, Mac, or Apple Watch, why not turn it off? There’s a quick and easy way to do that. While Siri is a great virtual assistant and can find and retrieve many types of information, it isn’t for everyone.

You can disable Siri on your Apple devices so that you or someone else can’t accidentally open it. Also, you can delete all your voice data that Apple has stored from your Siri command requests.

You won’t be able to use Siri once it’s disabled. However, you can always re-enable it to use it again. We’ll show you how.

How to Turn Off Siri on an iPhone or iPad

You can both disable Siri and delete all your Siri voice recordings from Apple servers using the Settings app on your iPhone or iPad.

1. Disable Siri on an iPhone or iPad

If you want to stop Siri from working altogether, here’s how you can do that:

  1. Open the Settings app on your device.
  2. Scroll down and tap Siri & Search.
  3. Turn the toggle for Press Side button for Siri off. If you have an iPhone with a Home button, this will be called Press Home for Siri instead.
  4. Next, also disable Listen for “Hey Siri”.
  5. You’ll see a prompt on your screen. Tap the Turn Off Siri option in this prompt and Siri will be disabled completely.
  6. Also disable Allow Siri When Locked if you want.

You’ll now no longer be able to trigger Apple’s virtual assistant on your iOS device. If you want to disable just one of these options, you can do so without totally disabling Siri, however. Have a look on this page for other options that you can disable without totally turning off Siri.

2. Remove Your Voice Data From Apple Servers

Apple records what you say to Siri while and stores it on company servers. Since you’re turning off Siri completely, you might want to remove your Siri recordings from Apple’s possession as well.

Starting with iOS and iPadOS 13.2, you can delete Siri recordings by heading to Settings > Siri & Search > Siri & Dictionary History and tapping Delete Siri & Dictation History.

However, if you’re running an older version of iOS or iPadOS, you’ll need to turn off the Dictation feature on your device to destroy your Siri recordings. You can do that as follows:

  1. Launch the Settings app on your iPhone or iPad and head to General > Keyboard.
  2. Scroll all the way down and you’ll find an option that says Enable Dictation. Turn this option off by tapping on it.
  3. Tap Turn Off Dictation in the prompt on your screen.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watchMalcolm Owen | Jul 04, 2018

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

AppleInsider is supported by its audience and may earn commission as an Amazon Associate and affiliate partner on qualifying purchases. These affiliate partnerships do not influence our editorial content.

Apple’s “Hey Siri” function may be handy for most users, but there are times when you don’t want it to activate and cause an interruption. AppleInsider explains how to prevent the hands-free voice prompt from activating, and how to turn it back on again.

The ability to ask a question to Apple’s virtual assistant by saying “Hey Siri” beforehand is a great feature, especially in cases where manually triggering Siri isn’t really an option. People holding items or with dirty hands can easily use the verbal prompt to find something out, without making a mess of their iOS device or pausing their existing task.

It has even been used in emergency situations, saving lives in the process.

There are downsides to having the function active all the time, such as mis-detected utterances of the “wakeword” causing Siri to respond by itself. Most iOS users are likely to have encountered situations where this happens, and while it can be annoying for some, the last thing anyone wants is for it to interrupt an important event or meeting.

On Tuesday, the UK Parliament encountered just that scenario, after Siri “heckled” Defense Secretary Gavin Williamson during a House of Commons Speech. It seems that his own iPhone had misheard the MP’s mentions of “Syria” and “Syrian” as the verbal prompt, causing Siri to perform a search and start advising of results in public.

Despite Apple’s work to counter misheard prompts, the issue is likely to grow in the future. Advertisers are abusing the ability of virtual assistants constantly listening for prompts, by triggering a TV viewer’s devices to bring up specific results.

For example, an April NBA on TNT ad used the phrase “Hey Siri show me the NBA schedule,” causing iPhones and HomePods to respond. This is not limited to just Apple hardware, as a 2017 Burger King commercial commanded Google Home speakers and Android smartphones to start reading aloud the definition of a Whopper burger.

If you don’t generally use the “Hey Siri” trigger phrase, it may be worth turning it off entirely, preventing such false positives from taking place.

To Disable “Hey Siri”

Open the Settings app on your iOS device. Scroll down the list and select Siri & Search.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Disable the option Listen for “Hey Siri” by tapping the toggle next to it from green to white.

Re-enabling “Hey Siri”

Go to the same section in the Settings app to disable the function, and tap the same toggle.

This will take you through a brief setup process for “Hey Siri,” where you will be asked to say a few commands, like “Hey Siri, what’s the weather like today?”

This process can be stopped at any time by tapping Cancel in the top-left corner, or Set Up “Hey Siri” Later at the bottom.

Once completed, the “Hey Siri” function will be enabled on the device.

Keep up with all the Apple news with your iPhone, iPad, or Mac. Say, “Hey, Siri, play AppleInsider Daily,” — or bookmark this link — and you’ll get a fast update direct from the AppleInsider team.

Comments (10)

knowitall

It should be disabled easily with toggling ‘do not disturb’ using the swipe up shortcut menu.
Is it?

backstab

The objective here is for you to not (inadvertently) disturb Siri. Not the other way around.

backstab

I’ve pretty much just given up on Siri. An easy 50% of the time she just can’t understand what I’m saying.

yoyo2222

Turning on Do Not Disturb doesn’t turn off Hey Siri or, more importantly, turn off her voice. Pressing the Home button results in a silent Siri response but only if the ring switch is turned to mute (if set up that way in settings). In this state she still talks to you if you use Hey Siri.

Turning off internet connection makes Siri unable to do anything but she will vocalize that fact if you activate Hey Siri.

The statement about an NBA add turning on Siri on iPhones doesn’t match the linked article which states it only turned on Siri on Home Pods. Activating Siri on an iOS device requires training the device to recognize your voice. It’s unlikely (but probably not impossible) that anyone else can activate Siri on another person’s device.

DAalseth

I did this the first time Siri was on my system, several iOS’s ago. I have never wanted to activate her by just calling out. As the Defense Secretary discovered it’s too easy to activate accidentally. It also means that Siri is listening all the time. Nope. I will turn Siri on by hitting the switch when I WANT her on. One fix to this thought would be if we could set our own trigger word. Instead of “siri” if I could set it to something unlikely to be said like “Balmer is a Genius” then we wouldn’t have this problem.

Whenever you say “Hey Siri”, your iPhone or iPad suddenly turns the screen on with Siri listening to you, right? Sometimes Siri even wakes up when you say anything that sounds similar to “Hey Siri.” Also, anyone could wake the Siri on your iPhone and do anything on your phone. To avoid this, you can turn off Hey Siri wake-ups.

Let us see how to turn off Hey Siri wake up on your iPhone or iPad.

Turn Off Hey Siri on iPhone or iPad

If the “Hey Siri” trigger on iPhone is bothersome to you, turn it off from the iPhone or iPad settings. Here is how.

  1. Open Settings on your iPhone or iPad.
  2. Go to Siri & Search menu.
  3. From the next screen, toggle off Listen for “Hey Siri” option.

From now on, your iPhone or iPad will not listen to the “Hey Siri” wake command. You need to enable the option manually to let Siri listen for Hey Siri always.

Turn Off Hey Siri from iPhone Lock Screen Only

When the Siri trigger with “Hey Siri” is enabled on your iPhone, it will work even in the lock screen. When your iPhone is locked, you can call “Hey Siri” and see the iPhone screen popping up with Siri to listen for your commands. To avoid listening for Hey Siri from lock screen only, do as follows.

  1. Launch Settings on your iPhone.
  2. Navigate to Siri & Search.
  3. Toggle off or disable the “Allow Siri When Locked” option.

This disables Siri completely when your iPhone is in a locked state. Not even the side button can trigger Siri from your iPhone lock screen. By disabling Siri on the lock screen, you are completely free of the fear of others accessing your phone and calling anyone using Siri from the iPhone lock screen.

Set Up Your Voice Recognition on Siri Again

Sometimes Siri on your iPhone can mess up the whole voice recognition thing. When you set up Siri on your iPhone, it asks for voice identification. However, if you see the Siri is still waking up when others speak, you need to reset and set up the Siri voice recognition again.

  1. Go to Settings > Siri & Search on your iPhone.
  2. Toggle off Listen for “Hey Siri” option.
  3. Now, toggle on Listen for “Hey Siri”.
  4. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up Siri voice recognition again.

Are you done setting u the Siri voice recognition? Now the Siri on your iPhone knows you and your voice well. It will wake up when you call, not others.

You can do many things with Siri, and summoning Siri isn’t a big deal when you can simply say “Hey Siri.” But there are instances you no longer need “Hey Siri” and we hope this guide helps you turn off “Hey Siri” on your iPhone or iPad.

Disclosure: Mashtips is supported by its audience. As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

If you’re using a Mac with Hey Siri voice activation enabled but you’d like to turn the voice listening feature off, you’ll find that it’s easy to selectively turn off Hey Siri while still leaving the usual Siri invocation methods enabled in MacOS.

How to Disable “Hey Siri” on Mac

  1. Go to the  Apple menu and choose “System Preferences”
  2. Select the “Siri” preference panel
  3. Uncheck the box next to “Listen for Hey Siri” to turn off Hey Siri on Mac

How to turn off “hey siri” on the apple watch

Remember this is only turning off the “Hey Siri” voice activation method which is actively listening for the ‘Hey Siri’ voice command, it does not Disable Siri on the Mac completely.

Now you can say “Hey Siri” all you want near the Mac and it won’t activate the voice assistant. But you can continue to access Siri through keyboard shortcut, the menu bar item, Dock icon, Touch Bar, or any other Siri access method on the Mac. Another advantage to this is that you can use Type to Siri on the Mac for typing Siri commands and requests.

This is aimed for the official Mac Hey Siri method, which is limited generally to newer machines, but if you’re on an older Mac model which is using the alternative method for allowing Hey Siri in MacOS then you would have to turn off those specific settings instead.

As with all settings, you can reverse this at any time by choosing to enable Hey Siri again through the same preference panel in MacOS. If you do disable Hey Siri then turn it back on again later, you’ll have to go through the voice recognition setup process again, which is fairly quick and requires you to speak a few phrases to the computer.

Obviously this is aimed at Hey Siri for Mac, but anyone can turn off Hey Siri on iPhone or iPad too if they don’t want the voice activation feature on their iOS device either.